60
RP 12-3 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS POWER SYSTEM DESIGN October 1994 Copyright © The British Petroleum Company p.l.c.

RP12-3

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 160

RP 12-3

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND

INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

October 1994

Copyright copy The British Petroleum Company plc

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 260

Copyright copy The British Petroleum Company plc

All rights reserved The information contained in this document is subject to the terms

and conditions of the agreement or contract under which the document was supplied to

the recipients organisation None of the information contained in this document shall

be disclosed outside the recipients own organisation without the prior written

permission of Manager Standards BP International Limited unless the terms of such

agreement or contract expressly allow

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 360

BP GROUP RECOMMENDED PRACTICES AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR ENGINEERING

Issue Date October 1994

Doc No RP 12-3 Latest Amendment Date

Document Title

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND

INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

(Replaces BP Engineering CP 17 Pt 3)

APPLICABILITY

Regional Applicability International

SCOPE AND PURPOSE

This document describes the basic approach to electrical power system design which is

recommended for all BP operated sites It provides guidance only and actual practices

may vary to meet requirements of national or local regulations However in deviating

from the approaches detailed in this document security of supply factors may be created

which will need to be assessed in order to ensure fit for purpose power system design

AMENDMENTS

Amd Date Page(s) Description

___________________________________________________________________

CUSTODIAN (See Quarterly Status List for Contact)

ElectricalIssued by-

Engineering Practices Group BP International Limited Research amp Engineering Centre

Chertsey Road Sunbury-on-Thames Middlesex TW16 7LN UNITED KINGDOM

Tel +44 1932 76 4067 Fax +44 1932 76 4077 Telex 296041

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE i

CONTENTS

Section Page

FOREWORDiii

1 INTRODUCTION1

11 Scope 1

2 SYSTEM PARAMETERS1

21 Voltage1

22 Frequency 2

23 Rating 2

3 LOADS3

31 Rating and Diversity Factors 3

32 Types of Load4

4 POWER SUPPLY SOURCES5

41 General 542 Emergency Power Supply Equipment8

43 Reliability10

44 Primary Substation10

45 Frequency and Voltage Regulation13

46 Synchronising 15

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems 16

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS17

51 General 17

52 Single Radial18

53 Double Radial 1854 Triple Radial 19

55 Ring Fed Systems20

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems21

57 Power System Control 22

58 Electrical Distribution Substations25

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS 26

61 Fault Calculations 26

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings 28

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents29

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems 317 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING32

71 General 32

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral33

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)33

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V and above) 34

75 Generator Earthing 35

76 Earthing Resistors37

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS 37

81 Motor Starting37

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE ii

82 Overvoltages38

83 Harmonics 40

84 Power Factor 42

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES44

91 General 44

92 Conventional Studies 45

93 Special Studies48

FIGURE 1 (A)49

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION 49

FIGURE 1 (B) 50

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION 50

FIGURE 1 (C)51

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION 51

APPENDIX A52DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS52

APPENDIX B53

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS53

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE iii

FOREWORD

Introduction to BP Group Recommended Practices and Specifications for Engineering

The Introductory Volume contains a series of documents that provide an introduction to theBP Group Recommended Practices and Specifications for Engineering (RPSEs) In particular

the General Foreword sets out the philosophy of the RPSEs Other documents in the

Introductory Volume provide general guidance on using the RPSEs and background

information to Engineering Standards in BP There are also recommendations for specific

definitions and requirements

Value of this Recommended Practice

This document represents the accumulated practices of the BP Group for ensuring a high

degree of plant availability and electrical system integrity within the constraints for cost

effective engineering

Application

Text in italics is Commentary Commentary provides background information which supports

the requirements of the Recommended Practice and may discuss alternative optionsIt also

gives guidance on the implementation of any Specification or Approval actions specific

actions are indicated by an asterisk () preceding a paragraph number

This document may refer to certain local national or international regulations but the

responsibility to ensure compliance with legislation and any other statutory requirements lieswith the user The user should adapt or supplement this document to ensure compliance for

the specific application

Principal Changes from Previous Edition

This Recommended Practice is a major revision of BP CP 17 Pt 3 Power Systems Design

which was last issued in April 1986 It has been updated in the Way Forward Style to reflect

significant advances in power system design

Feedback and Further Information

Users are invited to feed back any comments and to detail experiences in the application of

BP RPSEs to assist in the process of their continuous improvement

For feedback and further information please contact Standards Group BP International or the

Custodian See Quarterly Status List for contacts

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 1

1 INTRODUCTION

11 Scope

The BP Group RP 12 series of Recommended Practices specify generalrequirements for electrical systems equipment materials andinstallations This document specifies those items which apply generallyto power system design for systems with a highest nominal voltage of 36 kV

It is considered that most of the installations within the sphere of BP operations

would be 345kV or below However it has been found that even for voltages of

132 kV the same principles would tend to apply for industrial systems

12 Although the following items may form part of power systems in certain

activities of the BP Group their designs are not covered by this

document Where necessary the relevant international or national

standard must be applied to these elements of electrical systems

(i) Design of overhead line

(ii) Design of large power rectifier plant

(iii) Design aspects of electrical systems which are special to mine

winding plant earth-moving equipment conveying crushing

and associated metalliferous treatment plants

(iv) Electrical systems in ships

(v) Electrical systems for subsea installations

(vi) Electrical design of installations in commercial administrative

or domestic premises

The above exclusions are considered special in nature andor can be undertaken

more efficiently by directly adopting practice which is common in the area where

the installation is to be employed

2 SYSTEM PARAMETERS

21 Voltage

The most economical voltages shall be selected for a Power System

In general the voltages selected should accord with the economical voltage levels

for machines which are included in BP Group RP 12-11

In any existing installation the selection of voltage levels will be subject also to site

conditions The requirement for having the most economic system voltage is

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 2

intended to ensure that an economic appraisal of alternative courses of action is

undertaken or has been considered

The nominal phase to phase voltage for systems where voltages exceed1000 V should be selected from those detailed in IEC 38 When the

phase to phase voltage is below 1000 V the appropriate nominal

voltage to meet the national standards of the site location should beused For greenfield sites or offshore locations where the possibilityof interconnection with an outside authority is low the use of non-standard voltages below 1000 V (eg 660 V) shall be based oneconomic considerations

In the UK the nominal LV voltage would be either 415 V or 440 V phase to phase

with a tolerance of plusmn 5 (Notwithstanding current legislation which may suggest

that nominal voltages will in future be 380 V plusmn 10 or the provisions of the

Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 which require voltage tolerances to be within plusmn

6 for voltages less than 132 kV) See also 451

Any deployment of non standard voltage systems should be based upon specificeconomic studies which take full account of the need to hold spares which may be

beyond normal stock levels

22 Frequency

The frequency selected for power systems will be either 50 or 60 Hzdepending on the national standards of the site location Where a site isto be remotely located and powered only from on-site generation thefrequency selected should be compatible with the frequency of supplyof the nearest local electrical supply source or public utility if it isenvisaged that future inter-connection is desirable Where future inter-

connection with other sources of electricity supply is not envisaged as being possible or where economic advantages outweigh the benefits infuture possible interconnections the frequency of supply shall beselected on economic considerations and on ease of obtaining suitableequipment

North Sea experience indicates that selecting 60 Hz frequency tends to offer

possible economic advantages and as European equipment (ie widely available

equipment) suppliers can gear their product range to this frequency and the

standard voltages within Europe such selection becomes more likely

23 Rating

(i) Power systems with a voltage in excess of 1000 V should be so

designed that the rms value of the ac component of the short-

circuit breaking current of circuit breakers designed to IEC 56

andor BP Group GS 112-9 should be selected from values

readily available from equipment manufacturers

The selection of 25 kA as a symmetrical short circuit breaking capacity

could be found to represent a general economic ceiling to the available

fault levels for equipment Where there will be economic advantage in

providing switchgear of higher ratings eg 40 kA then this would be

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 3

encouraged In any case in a green field situation the Short Circuit

capability of the installation should be based upon economic grounds The

capability of switchgear should always be proven by test before being

accepted into full duty service Testing would be particularly important

where enhanced make fault levels or enhanced dc content at break levels

are required The requirements for testing is contained within BP Group

GS 112-9 however at the design stage account should be taken for anyneed for Type Testing See also 631

(ii) For power systems with a voltage less than 1000V the rms

value of the ac component of the short-circuit breaking current

of circuit breakers designed to IEC 947 andor BP Group GS

112-8 should not exceed 50 kA

See the commentary for (i) above Where economically viable the selection

of 80 kA or above rated switchgear is encouraged BP Group GS 112-8

includes testing requirements for LV circuit breakers

3 LOADS

31 Rating and Diversity Factors

311 Electrical equipment shall be rated to carry continuously the maximum

load associated with peak design production with an additional 10

contingency The ambient conditions at which this rating applies shall

be defined in equipment specifications and shall not be less than 40degC

maximum air temperature at an altitude not exceeding 1000 m

A load list would normally identify all process loads and would further identify the

power to be absorbed by the mechanical drive This would be adjusted for

efficiency of the electrical drive to arrive at a value of power to be drawn from the

electrical system Aggregated plant loading should be carried out in accordance

with 312 Beyond this estimate only one allowance of contingency should be taken

on the thus identified after diversity plant load Where a total system load is to be

estimated which includes a number of individual switchgear loads estimated in this

manner care should be taken to be assured of only one overall estimate for

contingency

The specification of maximum temperature and elevation are chosen in order to be

assured that equipment has sufficient capacity for the most arduous of likely

conditions albeit at a standard elevation However where the location is such that

it is clear that there is no possibility of reaching the standard 40degC level and there

is economic advantage in relaxing the temperature the actual maximum and

minimum temperatures should be specified Similarly if the elevation is above

1000m the actual elevation should be specified

312 Assessment of maximum load requirements of an installation shall allow

for diversity between various loads drives or plants Appropriate

factors shall consider the likelihood of loads drives production or

process trains coincidentally requiring peak demands and shall be based

on similar installations wherever possible

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 4

It is considered important that power system loading estimates be based upon

absorbed demands for machine loads with appropriate allowances for efficiency

and power factor In addition the effect of diversity should be assessed preferably

by using a concept of intermittence or alternatively by the application of well

proven diversity factors In the absence of either of these methods an average

maximum loading expectation may be assessed by adding 50 of the intermittent

load (that controlled by level switches or by thermocouples or other control

devices) to the continuously running loads In addition to this aggregated load an

assessment of likely standby load operating should be made A maximum of

standby operation may be obtained by considering boiler outage (insufficient steam

for steam turbine drivers) or by a maximum product throughput condition

32 Types of Load

All loads shall be presented with clear definition of their types inaccordance with the following-

321 Basic Information

For each identified electrical load a description of the service should begiven together with an indication of whether the device is a machine or a static load

(i) Dynamic

These are electric motors driving rotating equipment

(ii) Static

These are non-moving types of electrical equipment such as lighting heating

supplies to rectifiers etc

The bulk of the loads on the majority of BP installations comprise dynamic loads

and the proportions of dynamic to static loads are generally in the ratio of 101

Where there are machines supplied by Variable Speed Drives these may exhibit

properties similar to those of some static loads viz constant power demand despite

voltage variations Their contribution to system fault level is limited by the power

electronic system in some cases to zero contribution

322 Essential Loads

These are loads which are important to the safety of the installation or the operational staff and which require power to permit a reasonablycontrolled shutdown in emergency They shall have a secondindependent power source and be generally associated with no break supplies In certain cases a short supply break may be acceptable if thisdoes not represent a hazard to safety

BP Group RP 12-5 contains advice concerning the categorisation of power supplies

suitable for control systems The concept of essential loads used here is fairly close

to the concept of Class A contained in that RP however the loads would not

require the level of duplication required for Class A systems Included in the

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 5

concept of essential power system loads are such devices as Lub oil pumps for Gas

Turbines ventilation systems helipad lighting some floodlighting systems

navigational aids radio systems etc The term Essential used here was chosen to

align with the term Essential as defined in the IEE Recommendations for the

Electrical and Electronic Equipment of Mobile and Fixed Offshore Installations

It is noted that some loads which are essential by this definition may require the provision of Emergency Power Supply Facilities in order to meet Legislative

Requirements This is not inconsistent with the definition of Essential Loads used

here which is aimed at providing a convenient process for being assured that all

such critical loads are covered by the appropriate level of power supply (See

further Section 421)

323 Process Sensitive Loads

These are loads whose loss would affect continuity of plant operationresulting in loss of revenue but would not result in an unsafe situationarising Any decision to provide an alternative source of supply for these types of load shall be based on economic considerations

Included in this category are general lighting systems and process demands

It is sometimes possible particularly where process loadings are relatively low to

include sufficient into an emergency generator capacity to allow some processes to

continue on reduced capacity when main power generators are not available

There are no general rules for this type of provision except to emphasise that

application of such loads should not compromise any emergency services Each

case would be project specific

324 Non-sensitive Loads

Non-sensitive loads are those which do not form an importantcomponent of a production or process plant and their disconnectioncould be borne for relatively long periods with minimal or nuisancevalue They usually form a small proportion of the total connected loadand may have a single power source

Typical examples of these loads are the domestic part of accommodation offices

Workshops some water injection some potable water systems etc

4 POWER SUPPLY SOURCES

41 General

The power supply system shall be designed to provide safe andeconomical operation The safety aspects should cover both plant and

personnel Economic considerations shall cover capital maintenanceand running costs and include an assessment of the reliability andconsequent availability of the system The cost of improved power systems reliability should be weighed against the progressive potentialsavings due to decreased loss of production

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 6

It is expected that for any significant power system design there will have been an

economic comparison of alternative arrangements Larger projects would be

expected to initiate a formal safety review and this process would ensure that the

basic safety needs of the project would be satisfied For smaller projects or plant

extensions where such a formal review may not be arranged the designer should

nonetheless consider safety aspects relating to the electrical system and produce an

outline document which presents these issues for the record

All negotiations with public utilities shall be the sole responsibility of BP

In as much as the arrangements with Public Authorities will form part of the long

term operational environment for the installation it is considered necessary that

the operator (assumed to be BP in the context of this document) is fully aware and

has the sole responsibility for the longer term compliance with the requirements

arising from any negotiations Such responsibility should not be delegated to a third

party unless the third party has an ongoing operational responsibility

It is considered that Contractors may request information from Public Utilities onbehalf of BP in pursuit of the determination of options relating to possible

installations or changes to existing installations but that in doing so it is made clear

that any formal agreement which arises from the information or investigation will

be with the operating company (BP)

The principal source of electrical supply for any location subject to therequirements of 411 to 413 shall be defined

The power supply arrangements are fundamental to any operating site and need to

feature strongly in the overall project concept A power supply philosophy

document which records the arrangements for power supply and the reasoning

associated with any selection is considered highly desirable A contractor mayhave part of his workscope associated with an evaluation and selection of power

supply arrangements in which case such a presentation is assured The selection of

the power supply arrangements may have formed part of a feasibility (or Statement

of Requirements) study which may have been produced by BP in which case the

definition of the power supply arrangements would form part of a contractors

specification

411 Electrical Import from a Public Utility

Where the principal source of electrical power is selected to be from a public utility the supply should be via duplicate feeders An exception

to this may be permitted for economic reasons where low power loadsare to be supplied and where a single feeder may be employed

It would be expected that there could be a costbenefit statement to justify the use of

single feeds Where the supply is low power and not essential for operations (eg

Cathodic Protection supplies) the justification is trivial however single supplies

with on site standby generation which will operate to supply full load in the event of

a main power supply failure may be an economic alternative to a duel supply

arrangement

Essential loads should always be provided for by on-site power supplyequipment

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 7

See 322 (commentary)

Where economically viable power generation on site may be arrangedto peak-lop or otherwise supplement the external power supply

412 On-site Generation with no Public Utility Connection

Where a site is offshore or remote from a public utility network or hasa surplus of fuel or process energy on-site generation will normally beexpected as the principal source of power The on-site power generation arrangements shall be defined taking into account thefollowing factors-

(i) The fuel source

(ii) The nature of the process energy

(iii) The process steam or other heat requirements if any

(iv) The relationship between electric power requirements and the

energy sources on any given site

The number and arrangement of power generating sets should reflectthe particular needs of the installation in terms of Availability andReliability Where an availability of above 80 is required a minimumof 2 generating sets will be required on sites where there is noalternative electricity supply Under these circumstances the following

criteria should be satisfied-

(i) There should be sufficient generation to meet the Maximum

Demand when the largest single source of electrical supply is

out of service at peak demand times due to maintenance or any

other reason

(ii) Where more than 2 generators are installed those loads

considered as Process Sensitive (ie those loads which must

operate to maintain either full or a reduced production) shall be

supplied when the largest capacity generator is out of service

and the second largest generator is coincidentally shut down due

to unforeseen circumstances

All power generation facilities which cannot derive alternative power from another source shall be arranged with Black Start facilities TheBlack Start arrangements may involve use of Emergency or In-Housediesel generators

For systems requiring high reliability the probability of having sufficient power

generation for 100 of the load (provided by the main power supply system) in a 12

month period should be 99 This would normally require an installation of at

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 8

least 3 generators Under some circumstances this (high) reliability requirement

can be relaxed particularly where the consequences of power supply failure are not

severe In such circumstances only two (or even one) main power generators could

be considered

Where multiple power generators are provided there needs to be a philosophy of

supply related to normal operation maintenance shutdown and to failure Where 3 generators are installed it is reasonable to expect that substantial production could

be achieved by a single set remaining available following failure of the second set

with the third unavailable

413 On-site Generation Run in Parallel with a Public Utility

Where on-site generation is selected to be the principal source of power and where a connection to a public utility is available considerationshall be given to the following options related to connection to thePublic Utility-

(i) As a standby source of electric power

(ii) A means of export of surplus electrical power

(iii) A combination of both

(iv) As a Black Start Facility

It is expected that the power generation philosophy would consider these options

which would be contained within a formal design record See also 411 where

there may be economic benefit in peak lopping of the Public Utility supply taking advantage of tariff opportunities

42 Emergency Power Supply Equipment

421 Power supplies to Essential loads should be achieved by one or more of

the following-

(i) Providing an alternative source of energy such as batteries

(ii) Increasing the amount (or being assured of sufficient sheer

numbers) of normal supply generation equipment with anarrangement for duplicate fuel supply which effectively avoids

single contingency power outage

(iii) Ensuring a number of alternative supply feeds are available to

the loads and that the alternatives effectively provide duplication

to avoid single contingency power loss

(iv) Local Diesel Generation

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 9

In general it is expected that Essential loads would receive battery supplies or

would be associated with an emergency generator However where this is

impractical leads to low reliability or is prohibitively expensive the least cost of

the remaining alternatives should normally be adopted

The concept of increased power generation in (ii) above is meant to allow for

emergency power supplies to be designed as part of a normal power generation and distribution system The criteria for design would be that the power source and the

distribution system for the Essential loads would maintain sufficiently high security

for these safety critical systems A similar concept is considered appropriate for

the concept of having a suitable number of alternative supply feeds detailed in (iii)

above

422 In the application of 421 (ii) the power supply to Essential loads shall

be designed to remain available in the event of at least two of the

installed main power generators being unavailable The probability of

zero interruptions to the Essential load feed busbar over a 12 month

period shall be 99 or better Where necessary a loadshedding schemeshall be installed to secure the supply to the Essential loads Essential

loads shall not form part of the loadshedding arrangements

The concept of additional power generation being suitable for emergency supply

duty will clearly not be possible without there being at least 3 power generation sets

available Where one power generator thus installed is of lower capacity than the

system maximum demand andor the nature of the load can lead to instability it is

expected that a load shedding scheme would be employed to ensure that the

Essential loads would be maintained for any fault condition which could leave a

single machine on the busbar

423 Where increased main generating plant or local standby plant is selectedto provide power to Essential loads it shall be either diesel engine or

gas turbine driven generator set(s) Local standby or emergency

generator prime movers shall have their own dedicated fuel supply All

prime movers for main generators (where these are deemed to provide

Essential supplies) shall be arranged for two fuel sources with

automatic transfer Power generation for Essential loads shall be rated

to have a spare capacity of at least 10

These provisions are designed to ensure that a single contingency fault (eg fuel

supply failure) will not cause power supply loss

424 Emergency generator sets shall be capable of starting and running when

no alternative source of electrical ac power is available ie a black

start capability This may be achieved by compressed air starting with

air receivers being capable of six engine starts from one air charge or

by battery starting with a similar capability or by both methods

The requirements for emergency generators are contained in BP Group GS 160-1

In general two starting methods are required It should be noted that the location

of emergency generators should normally be in a non-classified area with supply

air derived from a clean source For offshore installations the location of the

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 10

emergency generator should be on an outside wall which can have louvers open to

supply combustion air Care should be taken to ensure that the exhaust and air

intakes are located to avoid problems associated with other adjacent plant or

systems

425 Emergency generators shall be provided with automatic starting and

loading facilities A simple and reliable method of ensuring that

emergency generators can be immediately switched to their pre-defined

load shall be arranged Manual facilities shall also be provided for

regular testing purposes Testing facilities should permit the loading of

standby generator sets

It is preferred that the emergency generator should be capable of running in

parallel with the mains supply for testing purposes and for the purposes of

transferring load without the need for supply break

43 Reliability

For each power supply arrangement a reliability assessment shall becarried out to determine the probability of failure of supply

In the early stages of design a reliability study may be undertaken as part of the

comparison of alternative methods of providing power supplies Such studies would

also be useful in determining the cost of material failures The undertaking of

these studies may form part of the Contractors workscope Where the Project Team

is required to carry out such a study the terms of reference related to objectives

data gathering and evaluation shall be clearly specified

44 Primary Substation

441 Generator circuits (other than local emergency generators) and public

utility power intakes should be connected together at a common

primary substation the busbars of which are used as the main load

distribution centre Where generators and public utility power intakes

may be located at different points throughout the site these shall be

interconnected

Thus there will be at least one and for larger sites more primary substations

442 The switchgear for primary substations shall comply with BP Group GS112-9 (or BP Group GS 112-8 where only LV supplies are involved)

Detailed guid ance for H V and LV switchgear is contained in BP Group RP 12-6

and BP Group RP 12-7

443 Busbar arrangements shall be selected to be cost effective operationally

flexible and safe The following technical points shall be taken into

account

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 11

(i) Operational flexibility to permit loads and power supplies to be effectively

connected under scheduled and unscheduled outages of circuits and

busbar sections

(ii) Minimal switchgear per circuit and simple control and protection

(iii) Unscheduled loss of busbar sections shall not shut down the system beyond the level designed and provided for

(iv) Scheduled maintenance of busbars shall be possible without system

shutdowns beyond those designed and provided for

It may often be found necessary to locate the incoming circuit breakers of a busbar

to a location half way along one side of a busbar in order to be more assured that

100 of the load is unlikely to flow in one section of the busbars

The possibility of bus section circuit breaker fault conditions in metal enclosed

switchgear which may cause a full switchboard shutdown for remedial repairs

should be considered However unless there are overriding reasons for thecontrary BP do not design switchboards to cater for this eventuality

444 Single busbar arrangements for primary supply substations should be

provided subject to the following criteria-

(i) The switchgear shall be indoor metalclad type

(ii) The single busbar shall be split into a number of sections by

using suitable switchgear The number of sections of busbars

shall be consistent with the acceptable loss of incoming or

outgoing circuits under both scheduled and unscheduled lossconditions

(iii) Routine busbar maintenance shall not be considered to be

necessary or shall be an infrequent occurrence

Where there would be 3 incoming transformer feeders the busbar would normally

be expected to be in 3 parts with feeder circuit breakers arranged on each of the

sections of busbar

445 Double busbar arrangements shall be provided in installations where

outdoor air insulated busbars are installed or where regular busbar maintenance is considered necessary for environmental or pollution

reasons They may also be supplied where the operational flexibility

available from being able to connect incoming power circuits and

outgoing load circuits in a variety of ways is considered to be

particularly advantageous

The perceived need for double busbar arrangements for indoor metalclad HV

switchgear was strong in early Refinery designs but has virtually disappeared from

modern Refinery and other industrial installations Therefore the use of double

busbar arrangements needs to be carefully considered and advantages balanced

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 12

against the considerable additional costs of Building Switchgear and Protective

arrangements One generally clear case for double busbar arrangements lies in

outdoor installations where maintenance work on busbars would be greater

446 Ringbars or mesh busbars arrangements shall not be used

Ring or mesh arrangements are generally difficult to extend and therefore are

considered to have limited application However this type of arrangement has

switchgear saving advantages where the system is unlikely to require modification

447 Where the power supply is obtained from a public utility via equipment

such as transformers or feeders the busbars shall be sectionalised to

prevent total power system shutdown in the event of unscheduled

outage of any busbar section Coincidental maintenance of a public

utility intake transformer shall not be considered

It is considered that maintenance of incoming transformers and feeds would be lowand would be quickly completed Therefore high expense in order to reduce an

already unlikely event is not considered worthwhile

448 The maximum number of busbar sections should not exceed the number

of individual power sources

This requirement sets out to avoid over flexibility in a power system which although

useful in contemplation is of little economic benefit in practice

449 The outgoing load circuits shall be connected to busbar sections in such

a way as to optimise power flow across busbar section switches

commensurate with reliability and operating considerations and shall

also permit unscheduled and scheduled busbar section outages with the

minimum disturbance to the loads being supplied

See also the commentary to section 443

4410 Generators may be connected either directly to the primary power

supply busbar or via generator transformers The type of connection

shall be selected depending upon the economics associated with both

the generation voltage and the primary supply busbar voltage

Typical arrangements for primary substations for a variety of types of power supply are shown in Figure 1

Primary substations should be located in areas which are not classifiedas hazardous The selected location within the site shall-

(a) Take account of the ability to distribute power to the onsite

loads without unnecessarily high distribution equipment costs

(b) Be adjacent to the generation or public utility intake

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 13

(c) Be suitable for future expansion

Where it is impossible to locate the primary substation outside of the hazardous

areas arrangements for forced ventilation of the substation shall be made Air for

the ventilation shall be taken from a remote and safe area the substation shall beequipped with air lock doors gas detectors (which shall cause immediate de-

energisation of all electrical equipment in the substation which is not suitable for a

zone 1 environment) and loss of sufficient ventilation and pressurisation shall

initiate an alarm condition which although not causing a trip of the switchgear

shall be used as an operator based time dependent system for the effect of repair

Shutdown shall be initiated should repairs not be possible within an operator

defined time scale

45 Frequency and Voltage Regulation

451 The power system design shall be arranged to ensure that the voltage

variation (between full load and lightly loaded conditions) experiencedat any piece of equipment designated as a load (ie not including

distribution equipment) shall not exceed plusmn 5 of the declared system

nominal voltage Further the power system shall be arranged to be able

to withstand without undue stress a transient voltage variation to 80

of nominal for a 10 second period or such longer duration at specific

points if necessary Special consideration shall be given to power

frequency overvoltage effects and the need for Power System

equipment to withstand higher overvoltages under some circumstances

This requirement ensures that standard equipment parameters would not be

compromised Where the system voltage deviates beyond the 5 limit apart fromequipment life expectation being eroded there is a danger of exceeding the

hazardous area certification limits for that equipment installed in a hazardous area

This may not actually yield failures or temperatures likely to cause ignition of a

vapour which may be present but will increase the likelihood of such occurrences

and will infringe the basic safety intention

The Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 r equires voltage variations to be within plusmn

6 However standards for equipment state a plusmn 5 tolerance for voltage Hence

the lower limit is specified here

Where power systems which have automatic voltage control can experience

significant load rejection (eg as may be the case of a Power System supplied by generators must direct-on-line start large machines which subsequently exhibit

rapid VAr decrease leaving machines in an overexcited state) significant

overvoltage levels may be predicted (120 to 125 of nominal voltage can be

predicted) This may require special specification of transformers to avoid

problems caused by overfluxing or increased current due to magnetic excitation

Special attention should be paid to voltage and frequency tolerance specifications

for generator transformers which may need to match the run up characteristic of the

generator This can require the transformer to be capable of withstanding full rated

voltage at 80 of rated frequency

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 14

See 811 for motor starting requirements This can give rise to a voltage

depression at motor terminals of 20 which therefore requires that the power

system should be able to successfully accept this condition for the starting period

Typical starting periods can range from 1 to 10 seconds depending upon machine

and system ratings and machine inertia Starting times beyond 10 seconds are

possible where particularly high inertia loads need to be accelerated (eg fans)

however these would constitute a special application and should be treated byexception

452 Where the public utility intake of a site is via transformers these

transformers and their voltage regulation equipment shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance on transformer construction and specification is given in BP

Group RP 12-9

Where necessary for voltage regulation purposes the incoming transformers shall

be equipped with on load and automatic tap change equipment

453 Where there is on-site generation the generators and their governor

and voltage regulation equipment shall comply with BP Group GS 112-

6 or BP Group GS 160-1

Detailed guidance on generator application is not featured as a separate part of the

BP Group RP 12 series of documents

454 Automatic voltage regulation equipment of power systems which have

both on-site generation and public utility intakes via transformers shall

be designed so that there is no detrimental inter-action

There are a number of options which can be considered for voltage control In

general the excitation of the power generators can be arranged for zero VAr

importexport for the whole site and at the same time the intake transformer

controller can be arranged to maintain voltage at a pre set level

455 The excitation systems of synchronous motors shall be arranged to

ensure no detrimental interactive effects with transformer automatic tap

change equipment

In the case of synchronous motors where it is probable that the synchronous motor would be small in relation to the supply intake capacity it is probable that the

excitation can be arranged to maintain a constant power factor to the machine and

the transformer tap change control would be arranged to maintain voltage within

pre set levels

456 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation where

the site has no public utility connection shall be designed such that

generator loading may be automatically shared between the operating

sets and that the nominal supply frequency is maintained within the

approved tolerance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 15

Where governor droop control is employed there should be an operator in

attendance who could take action from time to time to ensure that the system

frequency remained within reasonable limits Such limits should be plusmn 1 and the

output system frequency time should be within 30 seconds of standard time

Statement of these limits for design purposes does not indicate a need to supply an

appropriate standard clock arrangement although power plants supplying

townships or camp areas are encouraged to have this facility The limit for frequency time may be relaxed for small power plants and those where frequency

time is considered unimportant (eg Where there are no time signals reliant upon

mains frequency)

For unmanned power plants or for those where constant operator intervention

would be undesirable the system frequency may be controlled by an isochronous

controller designed to provide overall frequency and generator loadings within

prescribed limits

457 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation at a

site with a public utility connection shall be designed for parallel

operation with the public utility and shall incorporate the protection

arrangements which shall ensure that under public utility collapse ( or

unacceptable major disturbance) the site will retain a defined loading

condition The arrangement shall also incorporate the means for

independent operation

Where a facility is interconnected with a Public Utility the control of the power

system frequency must be under the control of the Public Utility Therefore only

defined load governor settings or droop load sharing control systems are possible

However such interconnection is always subject to disconnection under automatic

protection system operation which will leave the power generators supplying the

site load Under these conditions whatever the original generator control arrangements the generators must revert to independent load sharing control

46 Synchronising

461 Synchronising andor check synchronising equipment shall be provided

wherever more than one source of power may be operated in parallel

with another A synchronising philosophy shall be prepared

See also sections 463 and 464 Because there can be many alternative ways of

achieving a reasonable synchronising arrangement it is expected that there would

be prepared a synchronisingcheck synchronising philosophy (or design document) for every installation which will define the particular arrangements

462 Manual synchronising arrangements shall always be provided for the

incoming power generator circuit breakers This shall comprise

voltmeters and a synchroscope to show the voltage and frequency

differences between the two systems that need to be paralleled A

check synchronising relay should be utilised to prevent operator

maloperation but in order to allow closing a power source on to a dead

system as is required under black start conditions the check

synchronising relay shall have a means of manual or automatic override

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 16

Wherever possible and economically feasible the manual synchronising system

supplied shall also include automatic synchronising applied to the generator

controls

Manual synchronising facilities should also be applied to any primary switchgear

bus section circuit breaker and to circuit breakers incoming to the primary switchboard which can make a parallel connection with other sources

463 Synchronising or check synchronising facilities shall be fitted to busbar

section and bus coupler circuit breakers where it is possible to run the

two systems feeding either section of a busbar completely segregated

from the other The number of circuit breakers provided with

synchronising or check synchronising facilities should be kept to a

minimum A similar logic shall be applied to public utility intake

circuits Alternatively circuit breaker interlocking schemes shall be

installed to preclude the possibility of paralleling two sources of power

where synchronising facilities are excluded

Notwithstanding the provisions of 464 it is not expected that there would be a

need to include synchronising or check synchronising facilities on system voltage

levels more than two levels removed from the power generation busbar where the

power system is operated with bus sections normally closed However this is a

general rule and should the system be commonly operated with open bus sections

for significant periods and there is little central system control or information

dissemination the arrangement should be reviewed

464 Synchronising facilities shall be provided at the primary power supply

voltage and should be avoided at other voltages by use of appropriatecircuit breaker interlocking

The form of interlocking should avoid the need for break-before-make action unless

absolutely necessary This may need to be associated with upstream bus section

circuit breakers and incoming circuit breakers to the upstream switchboard See

463 (commentary) for provisions should distances be too great for the economic

use of interlocking

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems

Detailed guidance on this subject is given in BP Group RP 12-5 dc

power supplies for control systems shall comply with BP Group GS112-11 and ac power supplies shall comply with BP Group GS 112-10

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 17

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

51 General

511 The distribution network shall be designed to carry continuously at least

110 of the Maximum Demand associated with peak design production at the maximum ambient conditions

The requirement for 110 capacity is considered to be applicable to all

components within the distribution system including transformer capacity It does

not include capacity of equipment considered to constitute a load to the power

system eg Induction Machines which should be rated as close as possible to

actual process demands

Refer also to the commentary to Section 311

Switchboards should be supplied with a de gree of s pares and room for expansion

Further details may be found in BP Group RP 12-6 and 7

512 Where required the reliability associated with any part of the system

shall be assessed and presented in qualitative and quantitative terms

In general the design of the power system distribution should be based upon

qualitative requirements which include assessments for meeting power supply

continuity in the event of maintenance and in the event of failure Since electrical

distribution systems are inherently reliable the design requirements are commonly

based upon the need to disconnect distribution electrical equipment to carry out

routine maintenance and at the same time keep power supplies available for

operating plant However under some circumstances the need to assess the

electrical reliability may arise (perhaps as part of an overall assessment of plant failure but possibly as part of a comparison of alternative supplies for new plant)

Under these circumstances the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and the Mean

Time To Repair (MTTR) concerning power system failure at any particular

switchboard would be required In addition it is recommended that the quantitative

statement indicate the probability of failure occurring over a particular timeframe

(eg Provide a value and definition of the probability of zero failures over a 12

month period)

See also sections 412 (commentary) 422 and 43

513 The distribution system shall be designed using one of the basic

arrangements further outlined in 52 through 56 and incorporating thecontrol features of 57 The system designed shall be described in a

design philosophy document

It is considered that the design features contained in sections 52 through 56 would

be suitable for all of the industrial power systems likely to be required by BP

However should an alternative philosophy be available it should be compared with

a standard double radial system in terms of operation reliability maintainability

and cost

The depictions in the drawings which illustrate the texts of 52 and 55 are fairly

conventional in that Contactors are employed only for motor feeders Under some

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 18

circumstances Contactors can prove an economic choice for transformer or

Switchboard feeders The depictions are for an extensive installation typical of

Refinery or other large system Offshore systems may be considered as similar but

without the higher voltage level and interconnections to Public Utility

52 Single Radial

521 These should be used to provide power to non essential electrical loads

those where alternative sources of energy are available such as standby

generating plant or those process loads for which a lower availability

can be accepted

Where minimum facilities engineering is required and the process plant can be (or

will regularly be) switched off then single radial systems may be contemplated to

satisfy process demands It is considered that maintenance of electrical systems

could be scheduled for normal process plant shutdown times and the reliability of

electrical distribution systems is generally much better than required by the process

system

522 Each component of the single radial circuit shall be capable of supplying

110 of the required electrical load Transformers or other plant

which includes forced cooling equipment shall not rely entirely on the

forced cooling arrangements to obtain the necessary rating

Refer to the commentary to Section 311 for more detail on load estimation

Where the loading is of a cyclical nature and the forced cooling would not be

expected to operate for more than 2 hours in any 12 hour period then capacities

based upon forced cooling can be considered However where this is the case acooling system failure alarm shall be provided

53 Double Radial

531 Essential and Process Sensitive loads should be supplied by two or

more identically rated radial systems

Figure 1(a) details a double radial system of feed

532 In double radial systems each circuit shall be capable of carrying a

110 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall include bussection switchgear They shall be arranged to ensure that unscheduled

outage of any component of the circuit would not result in loss of

power supply after the faulty equipment has been disconnected from the

system

See section 311 for detail on load estimation

Exceptions to the requirement for all supplies to be maintained may be made in the

following cases-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 19

(a) For bus section circuit breaker faults These may sometimes cause damage

which may require complete switchboard shutdown However the

occurrence of such faults is sufficiently rare as to be neglected

(b) Where there may be some non-essential loads supplied from a double

radial system These may receive a single radial supply from a double

radial system and therefore would not receive a supply in the event of some forms of double radial system outage

533 Double radially fed systems should generally be operated in parallel

with all bus-section switches closed

It is considered that the advantage of continuity of supply in the event of relatively

light fault conditions which is offered by closed bus section systems outweighs the

disadvantages of increased fault disturbance for heavy fault conditions It is also

more inherently safe since the switchgear fault conditions are based upon the worst

possible supply condition However see also section 534

534 Where switchgear fault levels are found to be above the values outlined

in 23 attention shall be given to operating with bus-section breakers

open as opposed to purchasing higher fault level switchgear Where an

open bus-section breaker philosophy is being given attention the need

to restore rapidly the supplies to drives shall determine whether

automatic closure of bus section circuit breaker(s) is to be employed

Switchgear fault levels could be readily reduced by increasing the impedance of

incoming transformers (Where new transformers will be purchased) However

increasing the impedance of transformers increases the voltage regulation between

light and full load There is therefore a trade-off between fault duty and normal voltage regulation

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

54 Triple Radial

541 Critical and essential loads may be alternatively supplied by triple

identically rated radial systems These systems are preferred to double

radial systems wherever there is an overall total cost advantage

A triple radial system comprises three feeders and three feeder transformers to

provide supply to a distribution switchboard

542 Each circuit of triple fed radial systems shall be capable of providing at

least 55 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall be split into at

least three sections with two bus-section switches

This will allow for the loss of any one of the three circuits leaving the two healthy

circuits still capable of providing 110 of the Maximum Demand

543 Triple radial systems shall be provided where the power flow is

relatively large They shall generally be operated with only two circuits

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 260

Copyright copy The British Petroleum Company plc

All rights reserved The information contained in this document is subject to the terms

and conditions of the agreement or contract under which the document was supplied to

the recipients organisation None of the information contained in this document shall

be disclosed outside the recipients own organisation without the prior written

permission of Manager Standards BP International Limited unless the terms of such

agreement or contract expressly allow

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 360

BP GROUP RECOMMENDED PRACTICES AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR ENGINEERING

Issue Date October 1994

Doc No RP 12-3 Latest Amendment Date

Document Title

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND

INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

(Replaces BP Engineering CP 17 Pt 3)

APPLICABILITY

Regional Applicability International

SCOPE AND PURPOSE

This document describes the basic approach to electrical power system design which is

recommended for all BP operated sites It provides guidance only and actual practices

may vary to meet requirements of national or local regulations However in deviating

from the approaches detailed in this document security of supply factors may be created

which will need to be assessed in order to ensure fit for purpose power system design

AMENDMENTS

Amd Date Page(s) Description

___________________________________________________________________

CUSTODIAN (See Quarterly Status List for Contact)

ElectricalIssued by-

Engineering Practices Group BP International Limited Research amp Engineering Centre

Chertsey Road Sunbury-on-Thames Middlesex TW16 7LN UNITED KINGDOM

Tel +44 1932 76 4067 Fax +44 1932 76 4077 Telex 296041

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE i

CONTENTS

Section Page

FOREWORDiii

1 INTRODUCTION1

11 Scope 1

2 SYSTEM PARAMETERS1

21 Voltage1

22 Frequency 2

23 Rating 2

3 LOADS3

31 Rating and Diversity Factors 3

32 Types of Load4

4 POWER SUPPLY SOURCES5

41 General 542 Emergency Power Supply Equipment8

43 Reliability10

44 Primary Substation10

45 Frequency and Voltage Regulation13

46 Synchronising 15

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems 16

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS17

51 General 17

52 Single Radial18

53 Double Radial 1854 Triple Radial 19

55 Ring Fed Systems20

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems21

57 Power System Control 22

58 Electrical Distribution Substations25

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS 26

61 Fault Calculations 26

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings 28

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents29

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems 317 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING32

71 General 32

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral33

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)33

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V and above) 34

75 Generator Earthing 35

76 Earthing Resistors37

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS 37

81 Motor Starting37

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE ii

82 Overvoltages38

83 Harmonics 40

84 Power Factor 42

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES44

91 General 44

92 Conventional Studies 45

93 Special Studies48

FIGURE 1 (A)49

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION 49

FIGURE 1 (B) 50

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION 50

FIGURE 1 (C)51

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION 51

APPENDIX A52DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS52

APPENDIX B53

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS53

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE iii

FOREWORD

Introduction to BP Group Recommended Practices and Specifications for Engineering

The Introductory Volume contains a series of documents that provide an introduction to theBP Group Recommended Practices and Specifications for Engineering (RPSEs) In particular

the General Foreword sets out the philosophy of the RPSEs Other documents in the

Introductory Volume provide general guidance on using the RPSEs and background

information to Engineering Standards in BP There are also recommendations for specific

definitions and requirements

Value of this Recommended Practice

This document represents the accumulated practices of the BP Group for ensuring a high

degree of plant availability and electrical system integrity within the constraints for cost

effective engineering

Application

Text in italics is Commentary Commentary provides background information which supports

the requirements of the Recommended Practice and may discuss alternative optionsIt also

gives guidance on the implementation of any Specification or Approval actions specific

actions are indicated by an asterisk () preceding a paragraph number

This document may refer to certain local national or international regulations but the

responsibility to ensure compliance with legislation and any other statutory requirements lieswith the user The user should adapt or supplement this document to ensure compliance for

the specific application

Principal Changes from Previous Edition

This Recommended Practice is a major revision of BP CP 17 Pt 3 Power Systems Design

which was last issued in April 1986 It has been updated in the Way Forward Style to reflect

significant advances in power system design

Feedback and Further Information

Users are invited to feed back any comments and to detail experiences in the application of

BP RPSEs to assist in the process of their continuous improvement

For feedback and further information please contact Standards Group BP International or the

Custodian See Quarterly Status List for contacts

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 1

1 INTRODUCTION

11 Scope

The BP Group RP 12 series of Recommended Practices specify generalrequirements for electrical systems equipment materials andinstallations This document specifies those items which apply generallyto power system design for systems with a highest nominal voltage of 36 kV

It is considered that most of the installations within the sphere of BP operations

would be 345kV or below However it has been found that even for voltages of

132 kV the same principles would tend to apply for industrial systems

12 Although the following items may form part of power systems in certain

activities of the BP Group their designs are not covered by this

document Where necessary the relevant international or national

standard must be applied to these elements of electrical systems

(i) Design of overhead line

(ii) Design of large power rectifier plant

(iii) Design aspects of electrical systems which are special to mine

winding plant earth-moving equipment conveying crushing

and associated metalliferous treatment plants

(iv) Electrical systems in ships

(v) Electrical systems for subsea installations

(vi) Electrical design of installations in commercial administrative

or domestic premises

The above exclusions are considered special in nature andor can be undertaken

more efficiently by directly adopting practice which is common in the area where

the installation is to be employed

2 SYSTEM PARAMETERS

21 Voltage

The most economical voltages shall be selected for a Power System

In general the voltages selected should accord with the economical voltage levels

for machines which are included in BP Group RP 12-11

In any existing installation the selection of voltage levels will be subject also to site

conditions The requirement for having the most economic system voltage is

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 2

intended to ensure that an economic appraisal of alternative courses of action is

undertaken or has been considered

The nominal phase to phase voltage for systems where voltages exceed1000 V should be selected from those detailed in IEC 38 When the

phase to phase voltage is below 1000 V the appropriate nominal

voltage to meet the national standards of the site location should beused For greenfield sites or offshore locations where the possibilityof interconnection with an outside authority is low the use of non-standard voltages below 1000 V (eg 660 V) shall be based oneconomic considerations

In the UK the nominal LV voltage would be either 415 V or 440 V phase to phase

with a tolerance of plusmn 5 (Notwithstanding current legislation which may suggest

that nominal voltages will in future be 380 V plusmn 10 or the provisions of the

Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 which require voltage tolerances to be within plusmn

6 for voltages less than 132 kV) See also 451

Any deployment of non standard voltage systems should be based upon specificeconomic studies which take full account of the need to hold spares which may be

beyond normal stock levels

22 Frequency

The frequency selected for power systems will be either 50 or 60 Hzdepending on the national standards of the site location Where a site isto be remotely located and powered only from on-site generation thefrequency selected should be compatible with the frequency of supplyof the nearest local electrical supply source or public utility if it isenvisaged that future inter-connection is desirable Where future inter-

connection with other sources of electricity supply is not envisaged as being possible or where economic advantages outweigh the benefits infuture possible interconnections the frequency of supply shall beselected on economic considerations and on ease of obtaining suitableequipment

North Sea experience indicates that selecting 60 Hz frequency tends to offer

possible economic advantages and as European equipment (ie widely available

equipment) suppliers can gear their product range to this frequency and the

standard voltages within Europe such selection becomes more likely

23 Rating

(i) Power systems with a voltage in excess of 1000 V should be so

designed that the rms value of the ac component of the short-

circuit breaking current of circuit breakers designed to IEC 56

andor BP Group GS 112-9 should be selected from values

readily available from equipment manufacturers

The selection of 25 kA as a symmetrical short circuit breaking capacity

could be found to represent a general economic ceiling to the available

fault levels for equipment Where there will be economic advantage in

providing switchgear of higher ratings eg 40 kA then this would be

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 3

encouraged In any case in a green field situation the Short Circuit

capability of the installation should be based upon economic grounds The

capability of switchgear should always be proven by test before being

accepted into full duty service Testing would be particularly important

where enhanced make fault levels or enhanced dc content at break levels

are required The requirements for testing is contained within BP Group

GS 112-9 however at the design stage account should be taken for anyneed for Type Testing See also 631

(ii) For power systems with a voltage less than 1000V the rms

value of the ac component of the short-circuit breaking current

of circuit breakers designed to IEC 947 andor BP Group GS

112-8 should not exceed 50 kA

See the commentary for (i) above Where economically viable the selection

of 80 kA or above rated switchgear is encouraged BP Group GS 112-8

includes testing requirements for LV circuit breakers

3 LOADS

31 Rating and Diversity Factors

311 Electrical equipment shall be rated to carry continuously the maximum

load associated with peak design production with an additional 10

contingency The ambient conditions at which this rating applies shall

be defined in equipment specifications and shall not be less than 40degC

maximum air temperature at an altitude not exceeding 1000 m

A load list would normally identify all process loads and would further identify the

power to be absorbed by the mechanical drive This would be adjusted for

efficiency of the electrical drive to arrive at a value of power to be drawn from the

electrical system Aggregated plant loading should be carried out in accordance

with 312 Beyond this estimate only one allowance of contingency should be taken

on the thus identified after diversity plant load Where a total system load is to be

estimated which includes a number of individual switchgear loads estimated in this

manner care should be taken to be assured of only one overall estimate for

contingency

The specification of maximum temperature and elevation are chosen in order to be

assured that equipment has sufficient capacity for the most arduous of likely

conditions albeit at a standard elevation However where the location is such that

it is clear that there is no possibility of reaching the standard 40degC level and there

is economic advantage in relaxing the temperature the actual maximum and

minimum temperatures should be specified Similarly if the elevation is above

1000m the actual elevation should be specified

312 Assessment of maximum load requirements of an installation shall allow

for diversity between various loads drives or plants Appropriate

factors shall consider the likelihood of loads drives production or

process trains coincidentally requiring peak demands and shall be based

on similar installations wherever possible

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 4

It is considered important that power system loading estimates be based upon

absorbed demands for machine loads with appropriate allowances for efficiency

and power factor In addition the effect of diversity should be assessed preferably

by using a concept of intermittence or alternatively by the application of well

proven diversity factors In the absence of either of these methods an average

maximum loading expectation may be assessed by adding 50 of the intermittent

load (that controlled by level switches or by thermocouples or other control

devices) to the continuously running loads In addition to this aggregated load an

assessment of likely standby load operating should be made A maximum of

standby operation may be obtained by considering boiler outage (insufficient steam

for steam turbine drivers) or by a maximum product throughput condition

32 Types of Load

All loads shall be presented with clear definition of their types inaccordance with the following-

321 Basic Information

For each identified electrical load a description of the service should begiven together with an indication of whether the device is a machine or a static load

(i) Dynamic

These are electric motors driving rotating equipment

(ii) Static

These are non-moving types of electrical equipment such as lighting heating

supplies to rectifiers etc

The bulk of the loads on the majority of BP installations comprise dynamic loads

and the proportions of dynamic to static loads are generally in the ratio of 101

Where there are machines supplied by Variable Speed Drives these may exhibit

properties similar to those of some static loads viz constant power demand despite

voltage variations Their contribution to system fault level is limited by the power

electronic system in some cases to zero contribution

322 Essential Loads

These are loads which are important to the safety of the installation or the operational staff and which require power to permit a reasonablycontrolled shutdown in emergency They shall have a secondindependent power source and be generally associated with no break supplies In certain cases a short supply break may be acceptable if thisdoes not represent a hazard to safety

BP Group RP 12-5 contains advice concerning the categorisation of power supplies

suitable for control systems The concept of essential loads used here is fairly close

to the concept of Class A contained in that RP however the loads would not

require the level of duplication required for Class A systems Included in the

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 5

concept of essential power system loads are such devices as Lub oil pumps for Gas

Turbines ventilation systems helipad lighting some floodlighting systems

navigational aids radio systems etc The term Essential used here was chosen to

align with the term Essential as defined in the IEE Recommendations for the

Electrical and Electronic Equipment of Mobile and Fixed Offshore Installations

It is noted that some loads which are essential by this definition may require the provision of Emergency Power Supply Facilities in order to meet Legislative

Requirements This is not inconsistent with the definition of Essential Loads used

here which is aimed at providing a convenient process for being assured that all

such critical loads are covered by the appropriate level of power supply (See

further Section 421)

323 Process Sensitive Loads

These are loads whose loss would affect continuity of plant operationresulting in loss of revenue but would not result in an unsafe situationarising Any decision to provide an alternative source of supply for these types of load shall be based on economic considerations

Included in this category are general lighting systems and process demands

It is sometimes possible particularly where process loadings are relatively low to

include sufficient into an emergency generator capacity to allow some processes to

continue on reduced capacity when main power generators are not available

There are no general rules for this type of provision except to emphasise that

application of such loads should not compromise any emergency services Each

case would be project specific

324 Non-sensitive Loads

Non-sensitive loads are those which do not form an importantcomponent of a production or process plant and their disconnectioncould be borne for relatively long periods with minimal or nuisancevalue They usually form a small proportion of the total connected loadand may have a single power source

Typical examples of these loads are the domestic part of accommodation offices

Workshops some water injection some potable water systems etc

4 POWER SUPPLY SOURCES

41 General

The power supply system shall be designed to provide safe andeconomical operation The safety aspects should cover both plant and

personnel Economic considerations shall cover capital maintenanceand running costs and include an assessment of the reliability andconsequent availability of the system The cost of improved power systems reliability should be weighed against the progressive potentialsavings due to decreased loss of production

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 6

It is expected that for any significant power system design there will have been an

economic comparison of alternative arrangements Larger projects would be

expected to initiate a formal safety review and this process would ensure that the

basic safety needs of the project would be satisfied For smaller projects or plant

extensions where such a formal review may not be arranged the designer should

nonetheless consider safety aspects relating to the electrical system and produce an

outline document which presents these issues for the record

All negotiations with public utilities shall be the sole responsibility of BP

In as much as the arrangements with Public Authorities will form part of the long

term operational environment for the installation it is considered necessary that

the operator (assumed to be BP in the context of this document) is fully aware and

has the sole responsibility for the longer term compliance with the requirements

arising from any negotiations Such responsibility should not be delegated to a third

party unless the third party has an ongoing operational responsibility

It is considered that Contractors may request information from Public Utilities onbehalf of BP in pursuit of the determination of options relating to possible

installations or changes to existing installations but that in doing so it is made clear

that any formal agreement which arises from the information or investigation will

be with the operating company (BP)

The principal source of electrical supply for any location subject to therequirements of 411 to 413 shall be defined

The power supply arrangements are fundamental to any operating site and need to

feature strongly in the overall project concept A power supply philosophy

document which records the arrangements for power supply and the reasoning

associated with any selection is considered highly desirable A contractor mayhave part of his workscope associated with an evaluation and selection of power

supply arrangements in which case such a presentation is assured The selection of

the power supply arrangements may have formed part of a feasibility (or Statement

of Requirements) study which may have been produced by BP in which case the

definition of the power supply arrangements would form part of a contractors

specification

411 Electrical Import from a Public Utility

Where the principal source of electrical power is selected to be from a public utility the supply should be via duplicate feeders An exception

to this may be permitted for economic reasons where low power loadsare to be supplied and where a single feeder may be employed

It would be expected that there could be a costbenefit statement to justify the use of

single feeds Where the supply is low power and not essential for operations (eg

Cathodic Protection supplies) the justification is trivial however single supplies

with on site standby generation which will operate to supply full load in the event of

a main power supply failure may be an economic alternative to a duel supply

arrangement

Essential loads should always be provided for by on-site power supplyequipment

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 7

See 322 (commentary)

Where economically viable power generation on site may be arrangedto peak-lop or otherwise supplement the external power supply

412 On-site Generation with no Public Utility Connection

Where a site is offshore or remote from a public utility network or hasa surplus of fuel or process energy on-site generation will normally beexpected as the principal source of power The on-site power generation arrangements shall be defined taking into account thefollowing factors-

(i) The fuel source

(ii) The nature of the process energy

(iii) The process steam or other heat requirements if any

(iv) The relationship between electric power requirements and the

energy sources on any given site

The number and arrangement of power generating sets should reflectthe particular needs of the installation in terms of Availability andReliability Where an availability of above 80 is required a minimumof 2 generating sets will be required on sites where there is noalternative electricity supply Under these circumstances the following

criteria should be satisfied-

(i) There should be sufficient generation to meet the Maximum

Demand when the largest single source of electrical supply is

out of service at peak demand times due to maintenance or any

other reason

(ii) Where more than 2 generators are installed those loads

considered as Process Sensitive (ie those loads which must

operate to maintain either full or a reduced production) shall be

supplied when the largest capacity generator is out of service

and the second largest generator is coincidentally shut down due

to unforeseen circumstances

All power generation facilities which cannot derive alternative power from another source shall be arranged with Black Start facilities TheBlack Start arrangements may involve use of Emergency or In-Housediesel generators

For systems requiring high reliability the probability of having sufficient power

generation for 100 of the load (provided by the main power supply system) in a 12

month period should be 99 This would normally require an installation of at

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 8

least 3 generators Under some circumstances this (high) reliability requirement

can be relaxed particularly where the consequences of power supply failure are not

severe In such circumstances only two (or even one) main power generators could

be considered

Where multiple power generators are provided there needs to be a philosophy of

supply related to normal operation maintenance shutdown and to failure Where 3 generators are installed it is reasonable to expect that substantial production could

be achieved by a single set remaining available following failure of the second set

with the third unavailable

413 On-site Generation Run in Parallel with a Public Utility

Where on-site generation is selected to be the principal source of power and where a connection to a public utility is available considerationshall be given to the following options related to connection to thePublic Utility-

(i) As a standby source of electric power

(ii) A means of export of surplus electrical power

(iii) A combination of both

(iv) As a Black Start Facility

It is expected that the power generation philosophy would consider these options

which would be contained within a formal design record See also 411 where

there may be economic benefit in peak lopping of the Public Utility supply taking advantage of tariff opportunities

42 Emergency Power Supply Equipment

421 Power supplies to Essential loads should be achieved by one or more of

the following-

(i) Providing an alternative source of energy such as batteries

(ii) Increasing the amount (or being assured of sufficient sheer

numbers) of normal supply generation equipment with anarrangement for duplicate fuel supply which effectively avoids

single contingency power outage

(iii) Ensuring a number of alternative supply feeds are available to

the loads and that the alternatives effectively provide duplication

to avoid single contingency power loss

(iv) Local Diesel Generation

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 9

In general it is expected that Essential loads would receive battery supplies or

would be associated with an emergency generator However where this is

impractical leads to low reliability or is prohibitively expensive the least cost of

the remaining alternatives should normally be adopted

The concept of increased power generation in (ii) above is meant to allow for

emergency power supplies to be designed as part of a normal power generation and distribution system The criteria for design would be that the power source and the

distribution system for the Essential loads would maintain sufficiently high security

for these safety critical systems A similar concept is considered appropriate for

the concept of having a suitable number of alternative supply feeds detailed in (iii)

above

422 In the application of 421 (ii) the power supply to Essential loads shall

be designed to remain available in the event of at least two of the

installed main power generators being unavailable The probability of

zero interruptions to the Essential load feed busbar over a 12 month

period shall be 99 or better Where necessary a loadshedding schemeshall be installed to secure the supply to the Essential loads Essential

loads shall not form part of the loadshedding arrangements

The concept of additional power generation being suitable for emergency supply

duty will clearly not be possible without there being at least 3 power generation sets

available Where one power generator thus installed is of lower capacity than the

system maximum demand andor the nature of the load can lead to instability it is

expected that a load shedding scheme would be employed to ensure that the

Essential loads would be maintained for any fault condition which could leave a

single machine on the busbar

423 Where increased main generating plant or local standby plant is selectedto provide power to Essential loads it shall be either diesel engine or

gas turbine driven generator set(s) Local standby or emergency

generator prime movers shall have their own dedicated fuel supply All

prime movers for main generators (where these are deemed to provide

Essential supplies) shall be arranged for two fuel sources with

automatic transfer Power generation for Essential loads shall be rated

to have a spare capacity of at least 10

These provisions are designed to ensure that a single contingency fault (eg fuel

supply failure) will not cause power supply loss

424 Emergency generator sets shall be capable of starting and running when

no alternative source of electrical ac power is available ie a black

start capability This may be achieved by compressed air starting with

air receivers being capable of six engine starts from one air charge or

by battery starting with a similar capability or by both methods

The requirements for emergency generators are contained in BP Group GS 160-1

In general two starting methods are required It should be noted that the location

of emergency generators should normally be in a non-classified area with supply

air derived from a clean source For offshore installations the location of the

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 10

emergency generator should be on an outside wall which can have louvers open to

supply combustion air Care should be taken to ensure that the exhaust and air

intakes are located to avoid problems associated with other adjacent plant or

systems

425 Emergency generators shall be provided with automatic starting and

loading facilities A simple and reliable method of ensuring that

emergency generators can be immediately switched to their pre-defined

load shall be arranged Manual facilities shall also be provided for

regular testing purposes Testing facilities should permit the loading of

standby generator sets

It is preferred that the emergency generator should be capable of running in

parallel with the mains supply for testing purposes and for the purposes of

transferring load without the need for supply break

43 Reliability

For each power supply arrangement a reliability assessment shall becarried out to determine the probability of failure of supply

In the early stages of design a reliability study may be undertaken as part of the

comparison of alternative methods of providing power supplies Such studies would

also be useful in determining the cost of material failures The undertaking of

these studies may form part of the Contractors workscope Where the Project Team

is required to carry out such a study the terms of reference related to objectives

data gathering and evaluation shall be clearly specified

44 Primary Substation

441 Generator circuits (other than local emergency generators) and public

utility power intakes should be connected together at a common

primary substation the busbars of which are used as the main load

distribution centre Where generators and public utility power intakes

may be located at different points throughout the site these shall be

interconnected

Thus there will be at least one and for larger sites more primary substations

442 The switchgear for primary substations shall comply with BP Group GS112-9 (or BP Group GS 112-8 where only LV supplies are involved)

Detailed guid ance for H V and LV switchgear is contained in BP Group RP 12-6

and BP Group RP 12-7

443 Busbar arrangements shall be selected to be cost effective operationally

flexible and safe The following technical points shall be taken into

account

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 11

(i) Operational flexibility to permit loads and power supplies to be effectively

connected under scheduled and unscheduled outages of circuits and

busbar sections

(ii) Minimal switchgear per circuit and simple control and protection

(iii) Unscheduled loss of busbar sections shall not shut down the system beyond the level designed and provided for

(iv) Scheduled maintenance of busbars shall be possible without system

shutdowns beyond those designed and provided for

It may often be found necessary to locate the incoming circuit breakers of a busbar

to a location half way along one side of a busbar in order to be more assured that

100 of the load is unlikely to flow in one section of the busbars

The possibility of bus section circuit breaker fault conditions in metal enclosed

switchgear which may cause a full switchboard shutdown for remedial repairs

should be considered However unless there are overriding reasons for thecontrary BP do not design switchboards to cater for this eventuality

444 Single busbar arrangements for primary supply substations should be

provided subject to the following criteria-

(i) The switchgear shall be indoor metalclad type

(ii) The single busbar shall be split into a number of sections by

using suitable switchgear The number of sections of busbars

shall be consistent with the acceptable loss of incoming or

outgoing circuits under both scheduled and unscheduled lossconditions

(iii) Routine busbar maintenance shall not be considered to be

necessary or shall be an infrequent occurrence

Where there would be 3 incoming transformer feeders the busbar would normally

be expected to be in 3 parts with feeder circuit breakers arranged on each of the

sections of busbar

445 Double busbar arrangements shall be provided in installations where

outdoor air insulated busbars are installed or where regular busbar maintenance is considered necessary for environmental or pollution

reasons They may also be supplied where the operational flexibility

available from being able to connect incoming power circuits and

outgoing load circuits in a variety of ways is considered to be

particularly advantageous

The perceived need for double busbar arrangements for indoor metalclad HV

switchgear was strong in early Refinery designs but has virtually disappeared from

modern Refinery and other industrial installations Therefore the use of double

busbar arrangements needs to be carefully considered and advantages balanced

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 12

against the considerable additional costs of Building Switchgear and Protective

arrangements One generally clear case for double busbar arrangements lies in

outdoor installations where maintenance work on busbars would be greater

446 Ringbars or mesh busbars arrangements shall not be used

Ring or mesh arrangements are generally difficult to extend and therefore are

considered to have limited application However this type of arrangement has

switchgear saving advantages where the system is unlikely to require modification

447 Where the power supply is obtained from a public utility via equipment

such as transformers or feeders the busbars shall be sectionalised to

prevent total power system shutdown in the event of unscheduled

outage of any busbar section Coincidental maintenance of a public

utility intake transformer shall not be considered

It is considered that maintenance of incoming transformers and feeds would be lowand would be quickly completed Therefore high expense in order to reduce an

already unlikely event is not considered worthwhile

448 The maximum number of busbar sections should not exceed the number

of individual power sources

This requirement sets out to avoid over flexibility in a power system which although

useful in contemplation is of little economic benefit in practice

449 The outgoing load circuits shall be connected to busbar sections in such

a way as to optimise power flow across busbar section switches

commensurate with reliability and operating considerations and shall

also permit unscheduled and scheduled busbar section outages with the

minimum disturbance to the loads being supplied

See also the commentary to section 443

4410 Generators may be connected either directly to the primary power

supply busbar or via generator transformers The type of connection

shall be selected depending upon the economics associated with both

the generation voltage and the primary supply busbar voltage

Typical arrangements for primary substations for a variety of types of power supply are shown in Figure 1

Primary substations should be located in areas which are not classifiedas hazardous The selected location within the site shall-

(a) Take account of the ability to distribute power to the onsite

loads without unnecessarily high distribution equipment costs

(b) Be adjacent to the generation or public utility intake

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 13

(c) Be suitable for future expansion

Where it is impossible to locate the primary substation outside of the hazardous

areas arrangements for forced ventilation of the substation shall be made Air for

the ventilation shall be taken from a remote and safe area the substation shall beequipped with air lock doors gas detectors (which shall cause immediate de-

energisation of all electrical equipment in the substation which is not suitable for a

zone 1 environment) and loss of sufficient ventilation and pressurisation shall

initiate an alarm condition which although not causing a trip of the switchgear

shall be used as an operator based time dependent system for the effect of repair

Shutdown shall be initiated should repairs not be possible within an operator

defined time scale

45 Frequency and Voltage Regulation

451 The power system design shall be arranged to ensure that the voltage

variation (between full load and lightly loaded conditions) experiencedat any piece of equipment designated as a load (ie not including

distribution equipment) shall not exceed plusmn 5 of the declared system

nominal voltage Further the power system shall be arranged to be able

to withstand without undue stress a transient voltage variation to 80

of nominal for a 10 second period or such longer duration at specific

points if necessary Special consideration shall be given to power

frequency overvoltage effects and the need for Power System

equipment to withstand higher overvoltages under some circumstances

This requirement ensures that standard equipment parameters would not be

compromised Where the system voltage deviates beyond the 5 limit apart fromequipment life expectation being eroded there is a danger of exceeding the

hazardous area certification limits for that equipment installed in a hazardous area

This may not actually yield failures or temperatures likely to cause ignition of a

vapour which may be present but will increase the likelihood of such occurrences

and will infringe the basic safety intention

The Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 r equires voltage variations to be within plusmn

6 However standards for equipment state a plusmn 5 tolerance for voltage Hence

the lower limit is specified here

Where power systems which have automatic voltage control can experience

significant load rejection (eg as may be the case of a Power System supplied by generators must direct-on-line start large machines which subsequently exhibit

rapid VAr decrease leaving machines in an overexcited state) significant

overvoltage levels may be predicted (120 to 125 of nominal voltage can be

predicted) This may require special specification of transformers to avoid

problems caused by overfluxing or increased current due to magnetic excitation

Special attention should be paid to voltage and frequency tolerance specifications

for generator transformers which may need to match the run up characteristic of the

generator This can require the transformer to be capable of withstanding full rated

voltage at 80 of rated frequency

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 14

See 811 for motor starting requirements This can give rise to a voltage

depression at motor terminals of 20 which therefore requires that the power

system should be able to successfully accept this condition for the starting period

Typical starting periods can range from 1 to 10 seconds depending upon machine

and system ratings and machine inertia Starting times beyond 10 seconds are

possible where particularly high inertia loads need to be accelerated (eg fans)

however these would constitute a special application and should be treated byexception

452 Where the public utility intake of a site is via transformers these

transformers and their voltage regulation equipment shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance on transformer construction and specification is given in BP

Group RP 12-9

Where necessary for voltage regulation purposes the incoming transformers shall

be equipped with on load and automatic tap change equipment

453 Where there is on-site generation the generators and their governor

and voltage regulation equipment shall comply with BP Group GS 112-

6 or BP Group GS 160-1

Detailed guidance on generator application is not featured as a separate part of the

BP Group RP 12 series of documents

454 Automatic voltage regulation equipment of power systems which have

both on-site generation and public utility intakes via transformers shall

be designed so that there is no detrimental inter-action

There are a number of options which can be considered for voltage control In

general the excitation of the power generators can be arranged for zero VAr

importexport for the whole site and at the same time the intake transformer

controller can be arranged to maintain voltage at a pre set level

455 The excitation systems of synchronous motors shall be arranged to

ensure no detrimental interactive effects with transformer automatic tap

change equipment

In the case of synchronous motors where it is probable that the synchronous motor would be small in relation to the supply intake capacity it is probable that the

excitation can be arranged to maintain a constant power factor to the machine and

the transformer tap change control would be arranged to maintain voltage within

pre set levels

456 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation where

the site has no public utility connection shall be designed such that

generator loading may be automatically shared between the operating

sets and that the nominal supply frequency is maintained within the

approved tolerance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 15

Where governor droop control is employed there should be an operator in

attendance who could take action from time to time to ensure that the system

frequency remained within reasonable limits Such limits should be plusmn 1 and the

output system frequency time should be within 30 seconds of standard time

Statement of these limits for design purposes does not indicate a need to supply an

appropriate standard clock arrangement although power plants supplying

townships or camp areas are encouraged to have this facility The limit for frequency time may be relaxed for small power plants and those where frequency

time is considered unimportant (eg Where there are no time signals reliant upon

mains frequency)

For unmanned power plants or for those where constant operator intervention

would be undesirable the system frequency may be controlled by an isochronous

controller designed to provide overall frequency and generator loadings within

prescribed limits

457 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation at a

site with a public utility connection shall be designed for parallel

operation with the public utility and shall incorporate the protection

arrangements which shall ensure that under public utility collapse ( or

unacceptable major disturbance) the site will retain a defined loading

condition The arrangement shall also incorporate the means for

independent operation

Where a facility is interconnected with a Public Utility the control of the power

system frequency must be under the control of the Public Utility Therefore only

defined load governor settings or droop load sharing control systems are possible

However such interconnection is always subject to disconnection under automatic

protection system operation which will leave the power generators supplying the

site load Under these conditions whatever the original generator control arrangements the generators must revert to independent load sharing control

46 Synchronising

461 Synchronising andor check synchronising equipment shall be provided

wherever more than one source of power may be operated in parallel

with another A synchronising philosophy shall be prepared

See also sections 463 and 464 Because there can be many alternative ways of

achieving a reasonable synchronising arrangement it is expected that there would

be prepared a synchronisingcheck synchronising philosophy (or design document) for every installation which will define the particular arrangements

462 Manual synchronising arrangements shall always be provided for the

incoming power generator circuit breakers This shall comprise

voltmeters and a synchroscope to show the voltage and frequency

differences between the two systems that need to be paralleled A

check synchronising relay should be utilised to prevent operator

maloperation but in order to allow closing a power source on to a dead

system as is required under black start conditions the check

synchronising relay shall have a means of manual or automatic override

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 16

Wherever possible and economically feasible the manual synchronising system

supplied shall also include automatic synchronising applied to the generator

controls

Manual synchronising facilities should also be applied to any primary switchgear

bus section circuit breaker and to circuit breakers incoming to the primary switchboard which can make a parallel connection with other sources

463 Synchronising or check synchronising facilities shall be fitted to busbar

section and bus coupler circuit breakers where it is possible to run the

two systems feeding either section of a busbar completely segregated

from the other The number of circuit breakers provided with

synchronising or check synchronising facilities should be kept to a

minimum A similar logic shall be applied to public utility intake

circuits Alternatively circuit breaker interlocking schemes shall be

installed to preclude the possibility of paralleling two sources of power

where synchronising facilities are excluded

Notwithstanding the provisions of 464 it is not expected that there would be a

need to include synchronising or check synchronising facilities on system voltage

levels more than two levels removed from the power generation busbar where the

power system is operated with bus sections normally closed However this is a

general rule and should the system be commonly operated with open bus sections

for significant periods and there is little central system control or information

dissemination the arrangement should be reviewed

464 Synchronising facilities shall be provided at the primary power supply

voltage and should be avoided at other voltages by use of appropriatecircuit breaker interlocking

The form of interlocking should avoid the need for break-before-make action unless

absolutely necessary This may need to be associated with upstream bus section

circuit breakers and incoming circuit breakers to the upstream switchboard See

463 (commentary) for provisions should distances be too great for the economic

use of interlocking

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems

Detailed guidance on this subject is given in BP Group RP 12-5 dc

power supplies for control systems shall comply with BP Group GS112-11 and ac power supplies shall comply with BP Group GS 112-10

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 17

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

51 General

511 The distribution network shall be designed to carry continuously at least

110 of the Maximum Demand associated with peak design production at the maximum ambient conditions

The requirement for 110 capacity is considered to be applicable to all

components within the distribution system including transformer capacity It does

not include capacity of equipment considered to constitute a load to the power

system eg Induction Machines which should be rated as close as possible to

actual process demands

Refer also to the commentary to Section 311

Switchboards should be supplied with a de gree of s pares and room for expansion

Further details may be found in BP Group RP 12-6 and 7

512 Where required the reliability associated with any part of the system

shall be assessed and presented in qualitative and quantitative terms

In general the design of the power system distribution should be based upon

qualitative requirements which include assessments for meeting power supply

continuity in the event of maintenance and in the event of failure Since electrical

distribution systems are inherently reliable the design requirements are commonly

based upon the need to disconnect distribution electrical equipment to carry out

routine maintenance and at the same time keep power supplies available for

operating plant However under some circumstances the need to assess the

electrical reliability may arise (perhaps as part of an overall assessment of plant failure but possibly as part of a comparison of alternative supplies for new plant)

Under these circumstances the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and the Mean

Time To Repair (MTTR) concerning power system failure at any particular

switchboard would be required In addition it is recommended that the quantitative

statement indicate the probability of failure occurring over a particular timeframe

(eg Provide a value and definition of the probability of zero failures over a 12

month period)

See also sections 412 (commentary) 422 and 43

513 The distribution system shall be designed using one of the basic

arrangements further outlined in 52 through 56 and incorporating thecontrol features of 57 The system designed shall be described in a

design philosophy document

It is considered that the design features contained in sections 52 through 56 would

be suitable for all of the industrial power systems likely to be required by BP

However should an alternative philosophy be available it should be compared with

a standard double radial system in terms of operation reliability maintainability

and cost

The depictions in the drawings which illustrate the texts of 52 and 55 are fairly

conventional in that Contactors are employed only for motor feeders Under some

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 18

circumstances Contactors can prove an economic choice for transformer or

Switchboard feeders The depictions are for an extensive installation typical of

Refinery or other large system Offshore systems may be considered as similar but

without the higher voltage level and interconnections to Public Utility

52 Single Radial

521 These should be used to provide power to non essential electrical loads

those where alternative sources of energy are available such as standby

generating plant or those process loads for which a lower availability

can be accepted

Where minimum facilities engineering is required and the process plant can be (or

will regularly be) switched off then single radial systems may be contemplated to

satisfy process demands It is considered that maintenance of electrical systems

could be scheduled for normal process plant shutdown times and the reliability of

electrical distribution systems is generally much better than required by the process

system

522 Each component of the single radial circuit shall be capable of supplying

110 of the required electrical load Transformers or other plant

which includes forced cooling equipment shall not rely entirely on the

forced cooling arrangements to obtain the necessary rating

Refer to the commentary to Section 311 for more detail on load estimation

Where the loading is of a cyclical nature and the forced cooling would not be

expected to operate for more than 2 hours in any 12 hour period then capacities

based upon forced cooling can be considered However where this is the case acooling system failure alarm shall be provided

53 Double Radial

531 Essential and Process Sensitive loads should be supplied by two or

more identically rated radial systems

Figure 1(a) details a double radial system of feed

532 In double radial systems each circuit shall be capable of carrying a

110 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall include bussection switchgear They shall be arranged to ensure that unscheduled

outage of any component of the circuit would not result in loss of

power supply after the faulty equipment has been disconnected from the

system

See section 311 for detail on load estimation

Exceptions to the requirement for all supplies to be maintained may be made in the

following cases-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 19

(a) For bus section circuit breaker faults These may sometimes cause damage

which may require complete switchboard shutdown However the

occurrence of such faults is sufficiently rare as to be neglected

(b) Where there may be some non-essential loads supplied from a double

radial system These may receive a single radial supply from a double

radial system and therefore would not receive a supply in the event of some forms of double radial system outage

533 Double radially fed systems should generally be operated in parallel

with all bus-section switches closed

It is considered that the advantage of continuity of supply in the event of relatively

light fault conditions which is offered by closed bus section systems outweighs the

disadvantages of increased fault disturbance for heavy fault conditions It is also

more inherently safe since the switchgear fault conditions are based upon the worst

possible supply condition However see also section 534

534 Where switchgear fault levels are found to be above the values outlined

in 23 attention shall be given to operating with bus-section breakers

open as opposed to purchasing higher fault level switchgear Where an

open bus-section breaker philosophy is being given attention the need

to restore rapidly the supplies to drives shall determine whether

automatic closure of bus section circuit breaker(s) is to be employed

Switchgear fault levels could be readily reduced by increasing the impedance of

incoming transformers (Where new transformers will be purchased) However

increasing the impedance of transformers increases the voltage regulation between

light and full load There is therefore a trade-off between fault duty and normal voltage regulation

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

54 Triple Radial

541 Critical and essential loads may be alternatively supplied by triple

identically rated radial systems These systems are preferred to double

radial systems wherever there is an overall total cost advantage

A triple radial system comprises three feeders and three feeder transformers to

provide supply to a distribution switchboard

542 Each circuit of triple fed radial systems shall be capable of providing at

least 55 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall be split into at

least three sections with two bus-section switches

This will allow for the loss of any one of the three circuits leaving the two healthy

circuits still capable of providing 110 of the Maximum Demand

543 Triple radial systems shall be provided where the power flow is

relatively large They shall generally be operated with only two circuits

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 360

BP GROUP RECOMMENDED PRACTICES AND SPECIFICATIONS FOR ENGINEERING

Issue Date October 1994

Doc No RP 12-3 Latest Amendment Date

Document Title

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND

INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

(Replaces BP Engineering CP 17 Pt 3)

APPLICABILITY

Regional Applicability International

SCOPE AND PURPOSE

This document describes the basic approach to electrical power system design which is

recommended for all BP operated sites It provides guidance only and actual practices

may vary to meet requirements of national or local regulations However in deviating

from the approaches detailed in this document security of supply factors may be created

which will need to be assessed in order to ensure fit for purpose power system design

AMENDMENTS

Amd Date Page(s) Description

___________________________________________________________________

CUSTODIAN (See Quarterly Status List for Contact)

ElectricalIssued by-

Engineering Practices Group BP International Limited Research amp Engineering Centre

Chertsey Road Sunbury-on-Thames Middlesex TW16 7LN UNITED KINGDOM

Tel +44 1932 76 4067 Fax +44 1932 76 4077 Telex 296041

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE i

CONTENTS

Section Page

FOREWORDiii

1 INTRODUCTION1

11 Scope 1

2 SYSTEM PARAMETERS1

21 Voltage1

22 Frequency 2

23 Rating 2

3 LOADS3

31 Rating and Diversity Factors 3

32 Types of Load4

4 POWER SUPPLY SOURCES5

41 General 542 Emergency Power Supply Equipment8

43 Reliability10

44 Primary Substation10

45 Frequency and Voltage Regulation13

46 Synchronising 15

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems 16

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS17

51 General 17

52 Single Radial18

53 Double Radial 1854 Triple Radial 19

55 Ring Fed Systems20

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems21

57 Power System Control 22

58 Electrical Distribution Substations25

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS 26

61 Fault Calculations 26

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings 28

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents29

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems 317 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING32

71 General 32

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral33

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)33

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V and above) 34

75 Generator Earthing 35

76 Earthing Resistors37

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS 37

81 Motor Starting37

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE ii

82 Overvoltages38

83 Harmonics 40

84 Power Factor 42

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES44

91 General 44

92 Conventional Studies 45

93 Special Studies48

FIGURE 1 (A)49

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION 49

FIGURE 1 (B) 50

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION 50

FIGURE 1 (C)51

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION 51

APPENDIX A52DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS52

APPENDIX B53

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS53

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE iii

FOREWORD

Introduction to BP Group Recommended Practices and Specifications for Engineering

The Introductory Volume contains a series of documents that provide an introduction to theBP Group Recommended Practices and Specifications for Engineering (RPSEs) In particular

the General Foreword sets out the philosophy of the RPSEs Other documents in the

Introductory Volume provide general guidance on using the RPSEs and background

information to Engineering Standards in BP There are also recommendations for specific

definitions and requirements

Value of this Recommended Practice

This document represents the accumulated practices of the BP Group for ensuring a high

degree of plant availability and electrical system integrity within the constraints for cost

effective engineering

Application

Text in italics is Commentary Commentary provides background information which supports

the requirements of the Recommended Practice and may discuss alternative optionsIt also

gives guidance on the implementation of any Specification or Approval actions specific

actions are indicated by an asterisk () preceding a paragraph number

This document may refer to certain local national or international regulations but the

responsibility to ensure compliance with legislation and any other statutory requirements lieswith the user The user should adapt or supplement this document to ensure compliance for

the specific application

Principal Changes from Previous Edition

This Recommended Practice is a major revision of BP CP 17 Pt 3 Power Systems Design

which was last issued in April 1986 It has been updated in the Way Forward Style to reflect

significant advances in power system design

Feedback and Further Information

Users are invited to feed back any comments and to detail experiences in the application of

BP RPSEs to assist in the process of their continuous improvement

For feedback and further information please contact Standards Group BP International or the

Custodian See Quarterly Status List for contacts

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 1

1 INTRODUCTION

11 Scope

The BP Group RP 12 series of Recommended Practices specify generalrequirements for electrical systems equipment materials andinstallations This document specifies those items which apply generallyto power system design for systems with a highest nominal voltage of 36 kV

It is considered that most of the installations within the sphere of BP operations

would be 345kV or below However it has been found that even for voltages of

132 kV the same principles would tend to apply for industrial systems

12 Although the following items may form part of power systems in certain

activities of the BP Group their designs are not covered by this

document Where necessary the relevant international or national

standard must be applied to these elements of electrical systems

(i) Design of overhead line

(ii) Design of large power rectifier plant

(iii) Design aspects of electrical systems which are special to mine

winding plant earth-moving equipment conveying crushing

and associated metalliferous treatment plants

(iv) Electrical systems in ships

(v) Electrical systems for subsea installations

(vi) Electrical design of installations in commercial administrative

or domestic premises

The above exclusions are considered special in nature andor can be undertaken

more efficiently by directly adopting practice which is common in the area where

the installation is to be employed

2 SYSTEM PARAMETERS

21 Voltage

The most economical voltages shall be selected for a Power System

In general the voltages selected should accord with the economical voltage levels

for machines which are included in BP Group RP 12-11

In any existing installation the selection of voltage levels will be subject also to site

conditions The requirement for having the most economic system voltage is

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 2

intended to ensure that an economic appraisal of alternative courses of action is

undertaken or has been considered

The nominal phase to phase voltage for systems where voltages exceed1000 V should be selected from those detailed in IEC 38 When the

phase to phase voltage is below 1000 V the appropriate nominal

voltage to meet the national standards of the site location should beused For greenfield sites or offshore locations where the possibilityof interconnection with an outside authority is low the use of non-standard voltages below 1000 V (eg 660 V) shall be based oneconomic considerations

In the UK the nominal LV voltage would be either 415 V or 440 V phase to phase

with a tolerance of plusmn 5 (Notwithstanding current legislation which may suggest

that nominal voltages will in future be 380 V plusmn 10 or the provisions of the

Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 which require voltage tolerances to be within plusmn

6 for voltages less than 132 kV) See also 451

Any deployment of non standard voltage systems should be based upon specificeconomic studies which take full account of the need to hold spares which may be

beyond normal stock levels

22 Frequency

The frequency selected for power systems will be either 50 or 60 Hzdepending on the national standards of the site location Where a site isto be remotely located and powered only from on-site generation thefrequency selected should be compatible with the frequency of supplyof the nearest local electrical supply source or public utility if it isenvisaged that future inter-connection is desirable Where future inter-

connection with other sources of electricity supply is not envisaged as being possible or where economic advantages outweigh the benefits infuture possible interconnections the frequency of supply shall beselected on economic considerations and on ease of obtaining suitableequipment

North Sea experience indicates that selecting 60 Hz frequency tends to offer

possible economic advantages and as European equipment (ie widely available

equipment) suppliers can gear their product range to this frequency and the

standard voltages within Europe such selection becomes more likely

23 Rating

(i) Power systems with a voltage in excess of 1000 V should be so

designed that the rms value of the ac component of the short-

circuit breaking current of circuit breakers designed to IEC 56

andor BP Group GS 112-9 should be selected from values

readily available from equipment manufacturers

The selection of 25 kA as a symmetrical short circuit breaking capacity

could be found to represent a general economic ceiling to the available

fault levels for equipment Where there will be economic advantage in

providing switchgear of higher ratings eg 40 kA then this would be

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 3

encouraged In any case in a green field situation the Short Circuit

capability of the installation should be based upon economic grounds The

capability of switchgear should always be proven by test before being

accepted into full duty service Testing would be particularly important

where enhanced make fault levels or enhanced dc content at break levels

are required The requirements for testing is contained within BP Group

GS 112-9 however at the design stage account should be taken for anyneed for Type Testing See also 631

(ii) For power systems with a voltage less than 1000V the rms

value of the ac component of the short-circuit breaking current

of circuit breakers designed to IEC 947 andor BP Group GS

112-8 should not exceed 50 kA

See the commentary for (i) above Where economically viable the selection

of 80 kA or above rated switchgear is encouraged BP Group GS 112-8

includes testing requirements for LV circuit breakers

3 LOADS

31 Rating and Diversity Factors

311 Electrical equipment shall be rated to carry continuously the maximum

load associated with peak design production with an additional 10

contingency The ambient conditions at which this rating applies shall

be defined in equipment specifications and shall not be less than 40degC

maximum air temperature at an altitude not exceeding 1000 m

A load list would normally identify all process loads and would further identify the

power to be absorbed by the mechanical drive This would be adjusted for

efficiency of the electrical drive to arrive at a value of power to be drawn from the

electrical system Aggregated plant loading should be carried out in accordance

with 312 Beyond this estimate only one allowance of contingency should be taken

on the thus identified after diversity plant load Where a total system load is to be

estimated which includes a number of individual switchgear loads estimated in this

manner care should be taken to be assured of only one overall estimate for

contingency

The specification of maximum temperature and elevation are chosen in order to be

assured that equipment has sufficient capacity for the most arduous of likely

conditions albeit at a standard elevation However where the location is such that

it is clear that there is no possibility of reaching the standard 40degC level and there

is economic advantage in relaxing the temperature the actual maximum and

minimum temperatures should be specified Similarly if the elevation is above

1000m the actual elevation should be specified

312 Assessment of maximum load requirements of an installation shall allow

for diversity between various loads drives or plants Appropriate

factors shall consider the likelihood of loads drives production or

process trains coincidentally requiring peak demands and shall be based

on similar installations wherever possible

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 4

It is considered important that power system loading estimates be based upon

absorbed demands for machine loads with appropriate allowances for efficiency

and power factor In addition the effect of diversity should be assessed preferably

by using a concept of intermittence or alternatively by the application of well

proven diversity factors In the absence of either of these methods an average

maximum loading expectation may be assessed by adding 50 of the intermittent

load (that controlled by level switches or by thermocouples or other control

devices) to the continuously running loads In addition to this aggregated load an

assessment of likely standby load operating should be made A maximum of

standby operation may be obtained by considering boiler outage (insufficient steam

for steam turbine drivers) or by a maximum product throughput condition

32 Types of Load

All loads shall be presented with clear definition of their types inaccordance with the following-

321 Basic Information

For each identified electrical load a description of the service should begiven together with an indication of whether the device is a machine or a static load

(i) Dynamic

These are electric motors driving rotating equipment

(ii) Static

These are non-moving types of electrical equipment such as lighting heating

supplies to rectifiers etc

The bulk of the loads on the majority of BP installations comprise dynamic loads

and the proportions of dynamic to static loads are generally in the ratio of 101

Where there are machines supplied by Variable Speed Drives these may exhibit

properties similar to those of some static loads viz constant power demand despite

voltage variations Their contribution to system fault level is limited by the power

electronic system in some cases to zero contribution

322 Essential Loads

These are loads which are important to the safety of the installation or the operational staff and which require power to permit a reasonablycontrolled shutdown in emergency They shall have a secondindependent power source and be generally associated with no break supplies In certain cases a short supply break may be acceptable if thisdoes not represent a hazard to safety

BP Group RP 12-5 contains advice concerning the categorisation of power supplies

suitable for control systems The concept of essential loads used here is fairly close

to the concept of Class A contained in that RP however the loads would not

require the level of duplication required for Class A systems Included in the

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 5

concept of essential power system loads are such devices as Lub oil pumps for Gas

Turbines ventilation systems helipad lighting some floodlighting systems

navigational aids radio systems etc The term Essential used here was chosen to

align with the term Essential as defined in the IEE Recommendations for the

Electrical and Electronic Equipment of Mobile and Fixed Offshore Installations

It is noted that some loads which are essential by this definition may require the provision of Emergency Power Supply Facilities in order to meet Legislative

Requirements This is not inconsistent with the definition of Essential Loads used

here which is aimed at providing a convenient process for being assured that all

such critical loads are covered by the appropriate level of power supply (See

further Section 421)

323 Process Sensitive Loads

These are loads whose loss would affect continuity of plant operationresulting in loss of revenue but would not result in an unsafe situationarising Any decision to provide an alternative source of supply for these types of load shall be based on economic considerations

Included in this category are general lighting systems and process demands

It is sometimes possible particularly where process loadings are relatively low to

include sufficient into an emergency generator capacity to allow some processes to

continue on reduced capacity when main power generators are not available

There are no general rules for this type of provision except to emphasise that

application of such loads should not compromise any emergency services Each

case would be project specific

324 Non-sensitive Loads

Non-sensitive loads are those which do not form an importantcomponent of a production or process plant and their disconnectioncould be borne for relatively long periods with minimal or nuisancevalue They usually form a small proportion of the total connected loadand may have a single power source

Typical examples of these loads are the domestic part of accommodation offices

Workshops some water injection some potable water systems etc

4 POWER SUPPLY SOURCES

41 General

The power supply system shall be designed to provide safe andeconomical operation The safety aspects should cover both plant and

personnel Economic considerations shall cover capital maintenanceand running costs and include an assessment of the reliability andconsequent availability of the system The cost of improved power systems reliability should be weighed against the progressive potentialsavings due to decreased loss of production

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 6

It is expected that for any significant power system design there will have been an

economic comparison of alternative arrangements Larger projects would be

expected to initiate a formal safety review and this process would ensure that the

basic safety needs of the project would be satisfied For smaller projects or plant

extensions where such a formal review may not be arranged the designer should

nonetheless consider safety aspects relating to the electrical system and produce an

outline document which presents these issues for the record

All negotiations with public utilities shall be the sole responsibility of BP

In as much as the arrangements with Public Authorities will form part of the long

term operational environment for the installation it is considered necessary that

the operator (assumed to be BP in the context of this document) is fully aware and

has the sole responsibility for the longer term compliance with the requirements

arising from any negotiations Such responsibility should not be delegated to a third

party unless the third party has an ongoing operational responsibility

It is considered that Contractors may request information from Public Utilities onbehalf of BP in pursuit of the determination of options relating to possible

installations or changes to existing installations but that in doing so it is made clear

that any formal agreement which arises from the information or investigation will

be with the operating company (BP)

The principal source of electrical supply for any location subject to therequirements of 411 to 413 shall be defined

The power supply arrangements are fundamental to any operating site and need to

feature strongly in the overall project concept A power supply philosophy

document which records the arrangements for power supply and the reasoning

associated with any selection is considered highly desirable A contractor mayhave part of his workscope associated with an evaluation and selection of power

supply arrangements in which case such a presentation is assured The selection of

the power supply arrangements may have formed part of a feasibility (or Statement

of Requirements) study which may have been produced by BP in which case the

definition of the power supply arrangements would form part of a contractors

specification

411 Electrical Import from a Public Utility

Where the principal source of electrical power is selected to be from a public utility the supply should be via duplicate feeders An exception

to this may be permitted for economic reasons where low power loadsare to be supplied and where a single feeder may be employed

It would be expected that there could be a costbenefit statement to justify the use of

single feeds Where the supply is low power and not essential for operations (eg

Cathodic Protection supplies) the justification is trivial however single supplies

with on site standby generation which will operate to supply full load in the event of

a main power supply failure may be an economic alternative to a duel supply

arrangement

Essential loads should always be provided for by on-site power supplyequipment

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 7

See 322 (commentary)

Where economically viable power generation on site may be arrangedto peak-lop or otherwise supplement the external power supply

412 On-site Generation with no Public Utility Connection

Where a site is offshore or remote from a public utility network or hasa surplus of fuel or process energy on-site generation will normally beexpected as the principal source of power The on-site power generation arrangements shall be defined taking into account thefollowing factors-

(i) The fuel source

(ii) The nature of the process energy

(iii) The process steam or other heat requirements if any

(iv) The relationship between electric power requirements and the

energy sources on any given site

The number and arrangement of power generating sets should reflectthe particular needs of the installation in terms of Availability andReliability Where an availability of above 80 is required a minimumof 2 generating sets will be required on sites where there is noalternative electricity supply Under these circumstances the following

criteria should be satisfied-

(i) There should be sufficient generation to meet the Maximum

Demand when the largest single source of electrical supply is

out of service at peak demand times due to maintenance or any

other reason

(ii) Where more than 2 generators are installed those loads

considered as Process Sensitive (ie those loads which must

operate to maintain either full or a reduced production) shall be

supplied when the largest capacity generator is out of service

and the second largest generator is coincidentally shut down due

to unforeseen circumstances

All power generation facilities which cannot derive alternative power from another source shall be arranged with Black Start facilities TheBlack Start arrangements may involve use of Emergency or In-Housediesel generators

For systems requiring high reliability the probability of having sufficient power

generation for 100 of the load (provided by the main power supply system) in a 12

month period should be 99 This would normally require an installation of at

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 8

least 3 generators Under some circumstances this (high) reliability requirement

can be relaxed particularly where the consequences of power supply failure are not

severe In such circumstances only two (or even one) main power generators could

be considered

Where multiple power generators are provided there needs to be a philosophy of

supply related to normal operation maintenance shutdown and to failure Where 3 generators are installed it is reasonable to expect that substantial production could

be achieved by a single set remaining available following failure of the second set

with the third unavailable

413 On-site Generation Run in Parallel with a Public Utility

Where on-site generation is selected to be the principal source of power and where a connection to a public utility is available considerationshall be given to the following options related to connection to thePublic Utility-

(i) As a standby source of electric power

(ii) A means of export of surplus electrical power

(iii) A combination of both

(iv) As a Black Start Facility

It is expected that the power generation philosophy would consider these options

which would be contained within a formal design record See also 411 where

there may be economic benefit in peak lopping of the Public Utility supply taking advantage of tariff opportunities

42 Emergency Power Supply Equipment

421 Power supplies to Essential loads should be achieved by one or more of

the following-

(i) Providing an alternative source of energy such as batteries

(ii) Increasing the amount (or being assured of sufficient sheer

numbers) of normal supply generation equipment with anarrangement for duplicate fuel supply which effectively avoids

single contingency power outage

(iii) Ensuring a number of alternative supply feeds are available to

the loads and that the alternatives effectively provide duplication

to avoid single contingency power loss

(iv) Local Diesel Generation

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 9

In general it is expected that Essential loads would receive battery supplies or

would be associated with an emergency generator However where this is

impractical leads to low reliability or is prohibitively expensive the least cost of

the remaining alternatives should normally be adopted

The concept of increased power generation in (ii) above is meant to allow for

emergency power supplies to be designed as part of a normal power generation and distribution system The criteria for design would be that the power source and the

distribution system for the Essential loads would maintain sufficiently high security

for these safety critical systems A similar concept is considered appropriate for

the concept of having a suitable number of alternative supply feeds detailed in (iii)

above

422 In the application of 421 (ii) the power supply to Essential loads shall

be designed to remain available in the event of at least two of the

installed main power generators being unavailable The probability of

zero interruptions to the Essential load feed busbar over a 12 month

period shall be 99 or better Where necessary a loadshedding schemeshall be installed to secure the supply to the Essential loads Essential

loads shall not form part of the loadshedding arrangements

The concept of additional power generation being suitable for emergency supply

duty will clearly not be possible without there being at least 3 power generation sets

available Where one power generator thus installed is of lower capacity than the

system maximum demand andor the nature of the load can lead to instability it is

expected that a load shedding scheme would be employed to ensure that the

Essential loads would be maintained for any fault condition which could leave a

single machine on the busbar

423 Where increased main generating plant or local standby plant is selectedto provide power to Essential loads it shall be either diesel engine or

gas turbine driven generator set(s) Local standby or emergency

generator prime movers shall have their own dedicated fuel supply All

prime movers for main generators (where these are deemed to provide

Essential supplies) shall be arranged for two fuel sources with

automatic transfer Power generation for Essential loads shall be rated

to have a spare capacity of at least 10

These provisions are designed to ensure that a single contingency fault (eg fuel

supply failure) will not cause power supply loss

424 Emergency generator sets shall be capable of starting and running when

no alternative source of electrical ac power is available ie a black

start capability This may be achieved by compressed air starting with

air receivers being capable of six engine starts from one air charge or

by battery starting with a similar capability or by both methods

The requirements for emergency generators are contained in BP Group GS 160-1

In general two starting methods are required It should be noted that the location

of emergency generators should normally be in a non-classified area with supply

air derived from a clean source For offshore installations the location of the

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 10

emergency generator should be on an outside wall which can have louvers open to

supply combustion air Care should be taken to ensure that the exhaust and air

intakes are located to avoid problems associated with other adjacent plant or

systems

425 Emergency generators shall be provided with automatic starting and

loading facilities A simple and reliable method of ensuring that

emergency generators can be immediately switched to their pre-defined

load shall be arranged Manual facilities shall also be provided for

regular testing purposes Testing facilities should permit the loading of

standby generator sets

It is preferred that the emergency generator should be capable of running in

parallel with the mains supply for testing purposes and for the purposes of

transferring load without the need for supply break

43 Reliability

For each power supply arrangement a reliability assessment shall becarried out to determine the probability of failure of supply

In the early stages of design a reliability study may be undertaken as part of the

comparison of alternative methods of providing power supplies Such studies would

also be useful in determining the cost of material failures The undertaking of

these studies may form part of the Contractors workscope Where the Project Team

is required to carry out such a study the terms of reference related to objectives

data gathering and evaluation shall be clearly specified

44 Primary Substation

441 Generator circuits (other than local emergency generators) and public

utility power intakes should be connected together at a common

primary substation the busbars of which are used as the main load

distribution centre Where generators and public utility power intakes

may be located at different points throughout the site these shall be

interconnected

Thus there will be at least one and for larger sites more primary substations

442 The switchgear for primary substations shall comply with BP Group GS112-9 (or BP Group GS 112-8 where only LV supplies are involved)

Detailed guid ance for H V and LV switchgear is contained in BP Group RP 12-6

and BP Group RP 12-7

443 Busbar arrangements shall be selected to be cost effective operationally

flexible and safe The following technical points shall be taken into

account

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 11

(i) Operational flexibility to permit loads and power supplies to be effectively

connected under scheduled and unscheduled outages of circuits and

busbar sections

(ii) Minimal switchgear per circuit and simple control and protection

(iii) Unscheduled loss of busbar sections shall not shut down the system beyond the level designed and provided for

(iv) Scheduled maintenance of busbars shall be possible without system

shutdowns beyond those designed and provided for

It may often be found necessary to locate the incoming circuit breakers of a busbar

to a location half way along one side of a busbar in order to be more assured that

100 of the load is unlikely to flow in one section of the busbars

The possibility of bus section circuit breaker fault conditions in metal enclosed

switchgear which may cause a full switchboard shutdown for remedial repairs

should be considered However unless there are overriding reasons for thecontrary BP do not design switchboards to cater for this eventuality

444 Single busbar arrangements for primary supply substations should be

provided subject to the following criteria-

(i) The switchgear shall be indoor metalclad type

(ii) The single busbar shall be split into a number of sections by

using suitable switchgear The number of sections of busbars

shall be consistent with the acceptable loss of incoming or

outgoing circuits under both scheduled and unscheduled lossconditions

(iii) Routine busbar maintenance shall not be considered to be

necessary or shall be an infrequent occurrence

Where there would be 3 incoming transformer feeders the busbar would normally

be expected to be in 3 parts with feeder circuit breakers arranged on each of the

sections of busbar

445 Double busbar arrangements shall be provided in installations where

outdoor air insulated busbars are installed or where regular busbar maintenance is considered necessary for environmental or pollution

reasons They may also be supplied where the operational flexibility

available from being able to connect incoming power circuits and

outgoing load circuits in a variety of ways is considered to be

particularly advantageous

The perceived need for double busbar arrangements for indoor metalclad HV

switchgear was strong in early Refinery designs but has virtually disappeared from

modern Refinery and other industrial installations Therefore the use of double

busbar arrangements needs to be carefully considered and advantages balanced

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 12

against the considerable additional costs of Building Switchgear and Protective

arrangements One generally clear case for double busbar arrangements lies in

outdoor installations where maintenance work on busbars would be greater

446 Ringbars or mesh busbars arrangements shall not be used

Ring or mesh arrangements are generally difficult to extend and therefore are

considered to have limited application However this type of arrangement has

switchgear saving advantages where the system is unlikely to require modification

447 Where the power supply is obtained from a public utility via equipment

such as transformers or feeders the busbars shall be sectionalised to

prevent total power system shutdown in the event of unscheduled

outage of any busbar section Coincidental maintenance of a public

utility intake transformer shall not be considered

It is considered that maintenance of incoming transformers and feeds would be lowand would be quickly completed Therefore high expense in order to reduce an

already unlikely event is not considered worthwhile

448 The maximum number of busbar sections should not exceed the number

of individual power sources

This requirement sets out to avoid over flexibility in a power system which although

useful in contemplation is of little economic benefit in practice

449 The outgoing load circuits shall be connected to busbar sections in such

a way as to optimise power flow across busbar section switches

commensurate with reliability and operating considerations and shall

also permit unscheduled and scheduled busbar section outages with the

minimum disturbance to the loads being supplied

See also the commentary to section 443

4410 Generators may be connected either directly to the primary power

supply busbar or via generator transformers The type of connection

shall be selected depending upon the economics associated with both

the generation voltage and the primary supply busbar voltage

Typical arrangements for primary substations for a variety of types of power supply are shown in Figure 1

Primary substations should be located in areas which are not classifiedas hazardous The selected location within the site shall-

(a) Take account of the ability to distribute power to the onsite

loads without unnecessarily high distribution equipment costs

(b) Be adjacent to the generation or public utility intake

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 13

(c) Be suitable for future expansion

Where it is impossible to locate the primary substation outside of the hazardous

areas arrangements for forced ventilation of the substation shall be made Air for

the ventilation shall be taken from a remote and safe area the substation shall beequipped with air lock doors gas detectors (which shall cause immediate de-

energisation of all electrical equipment in the substation which is not suitable for a

zone 1 environment) and loss of sufficient ventilation and pressurisation shall

initiate an alarm condition which although not causing a trip of the switchgear

shall be used as an operator based time dependent system for the effect of repair

Shutdown shall be initiated should repairs not be possible within an operator

defined time scale

45 Frequency and Voltage Regulation

451 The power system design shall be arranged to ensure that the voltage

variation (between full load and lightly loaded conditions) experiencedat any piece of equipment designated as a load (ie not including

distribution equipment) shall not exceed plusmn 5 of the declared system

nominal voltage Further the power system shall be arranged to be able

to withstand without undue stress a transient voltage variation to 80

of nominal for a 10 second period or such longer duration at specific

points if necessary Special consideration shall be given to power

frequency overvoltage effects and the need for Power System

equipment to withstand higher overvoltages under some circumstances

This requirement ensures that standard equipment parameters would not be

compromised Where the system voltage deviates beyond the 5 limit apart fromequipment life expectation being eroded there is a danger of exceeding the

hazardous area certification limits for that equipment installed in a hazardous area

This may not actually yield failures or temperatures likely to cause ignition of a

vapour which may be present but will increase the likelihood of such occurrences

and will infringe the basic safety intention

The Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 r equires voltage variations to be within plusmn

6 However standards for equipment state a plusmn 5 tolerance for voltage Hence

the lower limit is specified here

Where power systems which have automatic voltage control can experience

significant load rejection (eg as may be the case of a Power System supplied by generators must direct-on-line start large machines which subsequently exhibit

rapid VAr decrease leaving machines in an overexcited state) significant

overvoltage levels may be predicted (120 to 125 of nominal voltage can be

predicted) This may require special specification of transformers to avoid

problems caused by overfluxing or increased current due to magnetic excitation

Special attention should be paid to voltage and frequency tolerance specifications

for generator transformers which may need to match the run up characteristic of the

generator This can require the transformer to be capable of withstanding full rated

voltage at 80 of rated frequency

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 14

See 811 for motor starting requirements This can give rise to a voltage

depression at motor terminals of 20 which therefore requires that the power

system should be able to successfully accept this condition for the starting period

Typical starting periods can range from 1 to 10 seconds depending upon machine

and system ratings and machine inertia Starting times beyond 10 seconds are

possible where particularly high inertia loads need to be accelerated (eg fans)

however these would constitute a special application and should be treated byexception

452 Where the public utility intake of a site is via transformers these

transformers and their voltage regulation equipment shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance on transformer construction and specification is given in BP

Group RP 12-9

Where necessary for voltage regulation purposes the incoming transformers shall

be equipped with on load and automatic tap change equipment

453 Where there is on-site generation the generators and their governor

and voltage regulation equipment shall comply with BP Group GS 112-

6 or BP Group GS 160-1

Detailed guidance on generator application is not featured as a separate part of the

BP Group RP 12 series of documents

454 Automatic voltage regulation equipment of power systems which have

both on-site generation and public utility intakes via transformers shall

be designed so that there is no detrimental inter-action

There are a number of options which can be considered for voltage control In

general the excitation of the power generators can be arranged for zero VAr

importexport for the whole site and at the same time the intake transformer

controller can be arranged to maintain voltage at a pre set level

455 The excitation systems of synchronous motors shall be arranged to

ensure no detrimental interactive effects with transformer automatic tap

change equipment

In the case of synchronous motors where it is probable that the synchronous motor would be small in relation to the supply intake capacity it is probable that the

excitation can be arranged to maintain a constant power factor to the machine and

the transformer tap change control would be arranged to maintain voltage within

pre set levels

456 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation where

the site has no public utility connection shall be designed such that

generator loading may be automatically shared between the operating

sets and that the nominal supply frequency is maintained within the

approved tolerance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 15

Where governor droop control is employed there should be an operator in

attendance who could take action from time to time to ensure that the system

frequency remained within reasonable limits Such limits should be plusmn 1 and the

output system frequency time should be within 30 seconds of standard time

Statement of these limits for design purposes does not indicate a need to supply an

appropriate standard clock arrangement although power plants supplying

townships or camp areas are encouraged to have this facility The limit for frequency time may be relaxed for small power plants and those where frequency

time is considered unimportant (eg Where there are no time signals reliant upon

mains frequency)

For unmanned power plants or for those where constant operator intervention

would be undesirable the system frequency may be controlled by an isochronous

controller designed to provide overall frequency and generator loadings within

prescribed limits

457 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation at a

site with a public utility connection shall be designed for parallel

operation with the public utility and shall incorporate the protection

arrangements which shall ensure that under public utility collapse ( or

unacceptable major disturbance) the site will retain a defined loading

condition The arrangement shall also incorporate the means for

independent operation

Where a facility is interconnected with a Public Utility the control of the power

system frequency must be under the control of the Public Utility Therefore only

defined load governor settings or droop load sharing control systems are possible

However such interconnection is always subject to disconnection under automatic

protection system operation which will leave the power generators supplying the

site load Under these conditions whatever the original generator control arrangements the generators must revert to independent load sharing control

46 Synchronising

461 Synchronising andor check synchronising equipment shall be provided

wherever more than one source of power may be operated in parallel

with another A synchronising philosophy shall be prepared

See also sections 463 and 464 Because there can be many alternative ways of

achieving a reasonable synchronising arrangement it is expected that there would

be prepared a synchronisingcheck synchronising philosophy (or design document) for every installation which will define the particular arrangements

462 Manual synchronising arrangements shall always be provided for the

incoming power generator circuit breakers This shall comprise

voltmeters and a synchroscope to show the voltage and frequency

differences between the two systems that need to be paralleled A

check synchronising relay should be utilised to prevent operator

maloperation but in order to allow closing a power source on to a dead

system as is required under black start conditions the check

synchronising relay shall have a means of manual or automatic override

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 16

Wherever possible and economically feasible the manual synchronising system

supplied shall also include automatic synchronising applied to the generator

controls

Manual synchronising facilities should also be applied to any primary switchgear

bus section circuit breaker and to circuit breakers incoming to the primary switchboard which can make a parallel connection with other sources

463 Synchronising or check synchronising facilities shall be fitted to busbar

section and bus coupler circuit breakers where it is possible to run the

two systems feeding either section of a busbar completely segregated

from the other The number of circuit breakers provided with

synchronising or check synchronising facilities should be kept to a

minimum A similar logic shall be applied to public utility intake

circuits Alternatively circuit breaker interlocking schemes shall be

installed to preclude the possibility of paralleling two sources of power

where synchronising facilities are excluded

Notwithstanding the provisions of 464 it is not expected that there would be a

need to include synchronising or check synchronising facilities on system voltage

levels more than two levels removed from the power generation busbar where the

power system is operated with bus sections normally closed However this is a

general rule and should the system be commonly operated with open bus sections

for significant periods and there is little central system control or information

dissemination the arrangement should be reviewed

464 Synchronising facilities shall be provided at the primary power supply

voltage and should be avoided at other voltages by use of appropriatecircuit breaker interlocking

The form of interlocking should avoid the need for break-before-make action unless

absolutely necessary This may need to be associated with upstream bus section

circuit breakers and incoming circuit breakers to the upstream switchboard See

463 (commentary) for provisions should distances be too great for the economic

use of interlocking

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems

Detailed guidance on this subject is given in BP Group RP 12-5 dc

power supplies for control systems shall comply with BP Group GS112-11 and ac power supplies shall comply with BP Group GS 112-10

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 17

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

51 General

511 The distribution network shall be designed to carry continuously at least

110 of the Maximum Demand associated with peak design production at the maximum ambient conditions

The requirement for 110 capacity is considered to be applicable to all

components within the distribution system including transformer capacity It does

not include capacity of equipment considered to constitute a load to the power

system eg Induction Machines which should be rated as close as possible to

actual process demands

Refer also to the commentary to Section 311

Switchboards should be supplied with a de gree of s pares and room for expansion

Further details may be found in BP Group RP 12-6 and 7

512 Where required the reliability associated with any part of the system

shall be assessed and presented in qualitative and quantitative terms

In general the design of the power system distribution should be based upon

qualitative requirements which include assessments for meeting power supply

continuity in the event of maintenance and in the event of failure Since electrical

distribution systems are inherently reliable the design requirements are commonly

based upon the need to disconnect distribution electrical equipment to carry out

routine maintenance and at the same time keep power supplies available for

operating plant However under some circumstances the need to assess the

electrical reliability may arise (perhaps as part of an overall assessment of plant failure but possibly as part of a comparison of alternative supplies for new plant)

Under these circumstances the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and the Mean

Time To Repair (MTTR) concerning power system failure at any particular

switchboard would be required In addition it is recommended that the quantitative

statement indicate the probability of failure occurring over a particular timeframe

(eg Provide a value and definition of the probability of zero failures over a 12

month period)

See also sections 412 (commentary) 422 and 43

513 The distribution system shall be designed using one of the basic

arrangements further outlined in 52 through 56 and incorporating thecontrol features of 57 The system designed shall be described in a

design philosophy document

It is considered that the design features contained in sections 52 through 56 would

be suitable for all of the industrial power systems likely to be required by BP

However should an alternative philosophy be available it should be compared with

a standard double radial system in terms of operation reliability maintainability

and cost

The depictions in the drawings which illustrate the texts of 52 and 55 are fairly

conventional in that Contactors are employed only for motor feeders Under some

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 18

circumstances Contactors can prove an economic choice for transformer or

Switchboard feeders The depictions are for an extensive installation typical of

Refinery or other large system Offshore systems may be considered as similar but

without the higher voltage level and interconnections to Public Utility

52 Single Radial

521 These should be used to provide power to non essential electrical loads

those where alternative sources of energy are available such as standby

generating plant or those process loads for which a lower availability

can be accepted

Where minimum facilities engineering is required and the process plant can be (or

will regularly be) switched off then single radial systems may be contemplated to

satisfy process demands It is considered that maintenance of electrical systems

could be scheduled for normal process plant shutdown times and the reliability of

electrical distribution systems is generally much better than required by the process

system

522 Each component of the single radial circuit shall be capable of supplying

110 of the required electrical load Transformers or other plant

which includes forced cooling equipment shall not rely entirely on the

forced cooling arrangements to obtain the necessary rating

Refer to the commentary to Section 311 for more detail on load estimation

Where the loading is of a cyclical nature and the forced cooling would not be

expected to operate for more than 2 hours in any 12 hour period then capacities

based upon forced cooling can be considered However where this is the case acooling system failure alarm shall be provided

53 Double Radial

531 Essential and Process Sensitive loads should be supplied by two or

more identically rated radial systems

Figure 1(a) details a double radial system of feed

532 In double radial systems each circuit shall be capable of carrying a

110 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall include bussection switchgear They shall be arranged to ensure that unscheduled

outage of any component of the circuit would not result in loss of

power supply after the faulty equipment has been disconnected from the

system

See section 311 for detail on load estimation

Exceptions to the requirement for all supplies to be maintained may be made in the

following cases-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 19

(a) For bus section circuit breaker faults These may sometimes cause damage

which may require complete switchboard shutdown However the

occurrence of such faults is sufficiently rare as to be neglected

(b) Where there may be some non-essential loads supplied from a double

radial system These may receive a single radial supply from a double

radial system and therefore would not receive a supply in the event of some forms of double radial system outage

533 Double radially fed systems should generally be operated in parallel

with all bus-section switches closed

It is considered that the advantage of continuity of supply in the event of relatively

light fault conditions which is offered by closed bus section systems outweighs the

disadvantages of increased fault disturbance for heavy fault conditions It is also

more inherently safe since the switchgear fault conditions are based upon the worst

possible supply condition However see also section 534

534 Where switchgear fault levels are found to be above the values outlined

in 23 attention shall be given to operating with bus-section breakers

open as opposed to purchasing higher fault level switchgear Where an

open bus-section breaker philosophy is being given attention the need

to restore rapidly the supplies to drives shall determine whether

automatic closure of bus section circuit breaker(s) is to be employed

Switchgear fault levels could be readily reduced by increasing the impedance of

incoming transformers (Where new transformers will be purchased) However

increasing the impedance of transformers increases the voltage regulation between

light and full load There is therefore a trade-off between fault duty and normal voltage regulation

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

54 Triple Radial

541 Critical and essential loads may be alternatively supplied by triple

identically rated radial systems These systems are preferred to double

radial systems wherever there is an overall total cost advantage

A triple radial system comprises three feeders and three feeder transformers to

provide supply to a distribution switchboard

542 Each circuit of triple fed radial systems shall be capable of providing at

least 55 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall be split into at

least three sections with two bus-section switches

This will allow for the loss of any one of the three circuits leaving the two healthy

circuits still capable of providing 110 of the Maximum Demand

543 Triple radial systems shall be provided where the power flow is

relatively large They shall generally be operated with only two circuits

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE i

CONTENTS

Section Page

FOREWORDiii

1 INTRODUCTION1

11 Scope 1

2 SYSTEM PARAMETERS1

21 Voltage1

22 Frequency 2

23 Rating 2

3 LOADS3

31 Rating and Diversity Factors 3

32 Types of Load4

4 POWER SUPPLY SOURCES5

41 General 542 Emergency Power Supply Equipment8

43 Reliability10

44 Primary Substation10

45 Frequency and Voltage Regulation13

46 Synchronising 15

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems 16

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS17

51 General 17

52 Single Radial18

53 Double Radial 1854 Triple Radial 19

55 Ring Fed Systems20

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems21

57 Power System Control 22

58 Electrical Distribution Substations25

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS 26

61 Fault Calculations 26

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings 28

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents29

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems 317 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING32

71 General 32

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral33

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)33

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V and above) 34

75 Generator Earthing 35

76 Earthing Resistors37

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS 37

81 Motor Starting37

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE ii

82 Overvoltages38

83 Harmonics 40

84 Power Factor 42

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES44

91 General 44

92 Conventional Studies 45

93 Special Studies48

FIGURE 1 (A)49

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION 49

FIGURE 1 (B) 50

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION 50

FIGURE 1 (C)51

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION 51

APPENDIX A52DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS52

APPENDIX B53

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS53

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE iii

FOREWORD

Introduction to BP Group Recommended Practices and Specifications for Engineering

The Introductory Volume contains a series of documents that provide an introduction to theBP Group Recommended Practices and Specifications for Engineering (RPSEs) In particular

the General Foreword sets out the philosophy of the RPSEs Other documents in the

Introductory Volume provide general guidance on using the RPSEs and background

information to Engineering Standards in BP There are also recommendations for specific

definitions and requirements

Value of this Recommended Practice

This document represents the accumulated practices of the BP Group for ensuring a high

degree of plant availability and electrical system integrity within the constraints for cost

effective engineering

Application

Text in italics is Commentary Commentary provides background information which supports

the requirements of the Recommended Practice and may discuss alternative optionsIt also

gives guidance on the implementation of any Specification or Approval actions specific

actions are indicated by an asterisk () preceding a paragraph number

This document may refer to certain local national or international regulations but the

responsibility to ensure compliance with legislation and any other statutory requirements lieswith the user The user should adapt or supplement this document to ensure compliance for

the specific application

Principal Changes from Previous Edition

This Recommended Practice is a major revision of BP CP 17 Pt 3 Power Systems Design

which was last issued in April 1986 It has been updated in the Way Forward Style to reflect

significant advances in power system design

Feedback and Further Information

Users are invited to feed back any comments and to detail experiences in the application of

BP RPSEs to assist in the process of their continuous improvement

For feedback and further information please contact Standards Group BP International or the

Custodian See Quarterly Status List for contacts

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 1

1 INTRODUCTION

11 Scope

The BP Group RP 12 series of Recommended Practices specify generalrequirements for electrical systems equipment materials andinstallations This document specifies those items which apply generallyto power system design for systems with a highest nominal voltage of 36 kV

It is considered that most of the installations within the sphere of BP operations

would be 345kV or below However it has been found that even for voltages of

132 kV the same principles would tend to apply for industrial systems

12 Although the following items may form part of power systems in certain

activities of the BP Group their designs are not covered by this

document Where necessary the relevant international or national

standard must be applied to these elements of electrical systems

(i) Design of overhead line

(ii) Design of large power rectifier plant

(iii) Design aspects of electrical systems which are special to mine

winding plant earth-moving equipment conveying crushing

and associated metalliferous treatment plants

(iv) Electrical systems in ships

(v) Electrical systems for subsea installations

(vi) Electrical design of installations in commercial administrative

or domestic premises

The above exclusions are considered special in nature andor can be undertaken

more efficiently by directly adopting practice which is common in the area where

the installation is to be employed

2 SYSTEM PARAMETERS

21 Voltage

The most economical voltages shall be selected for a Power System

In general the voltages selected should accord with the economical voltage levels

for machines which are included in BP Group RP 12-11

In any existing installation the selection of voltage levels will be subject also to site

conditions The requirement for having the most economic system voltage is

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 2

intended to ensure that an economic appraisal of alternative courses of action is

undertaken or has been considered

The nominal phase to phase voltage for systems where voltages exceed1000 V should be selected from those detailed in IEC 38 When the

phase to phase voltage is below 1000 V the appropriate nominal

voltage to meet the national standards of the site location should beused For greenfield sites or offshore locations where the possibilityof interconnection with an outside authority is low the use of non-standard voltages below 1000 V (eg 660 V) shall be based oneconomic considerations

In the UK the nominal LV voltage would be either 415 V or 440 V phase to phase

with a tolerance of plusmn 5 (Notwithstanding current legislation which may suggest

that nominal voltages will in future be 380 V plusmn 10 or the provisions of the

Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 which require voltage tolerances to be within plusmn

6 for voltages less than 132 kV) See also 451

Any deployment of non standard voltage systems should be based upon specificeconomic studies which take full account of the need to hold spares which may be

beyond normal stock levels

22 Frequency

The frequency selected for power systems will be either 50 or 60 Hzdepending on the national standards of the site location Where a site isto be remotely located and powered only from on-site generation thefrequency selected should be compatible with the frequency of supplyof the nearest local electrical supply source or public utility if it isenvisaged that future inter-connection is desirable Where future inter-

connection with other sources of electricity supply is not envisaged as being possible or where economic advantages outweigh the benefits infuture possible interconnections the frequency of supply shall beselected on economic considerations and on ease of obtaining suitableequipment

North Sea experience indicates that selecting 60 Hz frequency tends to offer

possible economic advantages and as European equipment (ie widely available

equipment) suppliers can gear their product range to this frequency and the

standard voltages within Europe such selection becomes more likely

23 Rating

(i) Power systems with a voltage in excess of 1000 V should be so

designed that the rms value of the ac component of the short-

circuit breaking current of circuit breakers designed to IEC 56

andor BP Group GS 112-9 should be selected from values

readily available from equipment manufacturers

The selection of 25 kA as a symmetrical short circuit breaking capacity

could be found to represent a general economic ceiling to the available

fault levels for equipment Where there will be economic advantage in

providing switchgear of higher ratings eg 40 kA then this would be

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 3

encouraged In any case in a green field situation the Short Circuit

capability of the installation should be based upon economic grounds The

capability of switchgear should always be proven by test before being

accepted into full duty service Testing would be particularly important

where enhanced make fault levels or enhanced dc content at break levels

are required The requirements for testing is contained within BP Group

GS 112-9 however at the design stage account should be taken for anyneed for Type Testing See also 631

(ii) For power systems with a voltage less than 1000V the rms

value of the ac component of the short-circuit breaking current

of circuit breakers designed to IEC 947 andor BP Group GS

112-8 should not exceed 50 kA

See the commentary for (i) above Where economically viable the selection

of 80 kA or above rated switchgear is encouraged BP Group GS 112-8

includes testing requirements for LV circuit breakers

3 LOADS

31 Rating and Diversity Factors

311 Electrical equipment shall be rated to carry continuously the maximum

load associated with peak design production with an additional 10

contingency The ambient conditions at which this rating applies shall

be defined in equipment specifications and shall not be less than 40degC

maximum air temperature at an altitude not exceeding 1000 m

A load list would normally identify all process loads and would further identify the

power to be absorbed by the mechanical drive This would be adjusted for

efficiency of the electrical drive to arrive at a value of power to be drawn from the

electrical system Aggregated plant loading should be carried out in accordance

with 312 Beyond this estimate only one allowance of contingency should be taken

on the thus identified after diversity plant load Where a total system load is to be

estimated which includes a number of individual switchgear loads estimated in this

manner care should be taken to be assured of only one overall estimate for

contingency

The specification of maximum temperature and elevation are chosen in order to be

assured that equipment has sufficient capacity for the most arduous of likely

conditions albeit at a standard elevation However where the location is such that

it is clear that there is no possibility of reaching the standard 40degC level and there

is economic advantage in relaxing the temperature the actual maximum and

minimum temperatures should be specified Similarly if the elevation is above

1000m the actual elevation should be specified

312 Assessment of maximum load requirements of an installation shall allow

for diversity between various loads drives or plants Appropriate

factors shall consider the likelihood of loads drives production or

process trains coincidentally requiring peak demands and shall be based

on similar installations wherever possible

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 4

It is considered important that power system loading estimates be based upon

absorbed demands for machine loads with appropriate allowances for efficiency

and power factor In addition the effect of diversity should be assessed preferably

by using a concept of intermittence or alternatively by the application of well

proven diversity factors In the absence of either of these methods an average

maximum loading expectation may be assessed by adding 50 of the intermittent

load (that controlled by level switches or by thermocouples or other control

devices) to the continuously running loads In addition to this aggregated load an

assessment of likely standby load operating should be made A maximum of

standby operation may be obtained by considering boiler outage (insufficient steam

for steam turbine drivers) or by a maximum product throughput condition

32 Types of Load

All loads shall be presented with clear definition of their types inaccordance with the following-

321 Basic Information

For each identified electrical load a description of the service should begiven together with an indication of whether the device is a machine or a static load

(i) Dynamic

These are electric motors driving rotating equipment

(ii) Static

These are non-moving types of electrical equipment such as lighting heating

supplies to rectifiers etc

The bulk of the loads on the majority of BP installations comprise dynamic loads

and the proportions of dynamic to static loads are generally in the ratio of 101

Where there are machines supplied by Variable Speed Drives these may exhibit

properties similar to those of some static loads viz constant power demand despite

voltage variations Their contribution to system fault level is limited by the power

electronic system in some cases to zero contribution

322 Essential Loads

These are loads which are important to the safety of the installation or the operational staff and which require power to permit a reasonablycontrolled shutdown in emergency They shall have a secondindependent power source and be generally associated with no break supplies In certain cases a short supply break may be acceptable if thisdoes not represent a hazard to safety

BP Group RP 12-5 contains advice concerning the categorisation of power supplies

suitable for control systems The concept of essential loads used here is fairly close

to the concept of Class A contained in that RP however the loads would not

require the level of duplication required for Class A systems Included in the

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 5

concept of essential power system loads are such devices as Lub oil pumps for Gas

Turbines ventilation systems helipad lighting some floodlighting systems

navigational aids radio systems etc The term Essential used here was chosen to

align with the term Essential as defined in the IEE Recommendations for the

Electrical and Electronic Equipment of Mobile and Fixed Offshore Installations

It is noted that some loads which are essential by this definition may require the provision of Emergency Power Supply Facilities in order to meet Legislative

Requirements This is not inconsistent with the definition of Essential Loads used

here which is aimed at providing a convenient process for being assured that all

such critical loads are covered by the appropriate level of power supply (See

further Section 421)

323 Process Sensitive Loads

These are loads whose loss would affect continuity of plant operationresulting in loss of revenue but would not result in an unsafe situationarising Any decision to provide an alternative source of supply for these types of load shall be based on economic considerations

Included in this category are general lighting systems and process demands

It is sometimes possible particularly where process loadings are relatively low to

include sufficient into an emergency generator capacity to allow some processes to

continue on reduced capacity when main power generators are not available

There are no general rules for this type of provision except to emphasise that

application of such loads should not compromise any emergency services Each

case would be project specific

324 Non-sensitive Loads

Non-sensitive loads are those which do not form an importantcomponent of a production or process plant and their disconnectioncould be borne for relatively long periods with minimal or nuisancevalue They usually form a small proportion of the total connected loadand may have a single power source

Typical examples of these loads are the domestic part of accommodation offices

Workshops some water injection some potable water systems etc

4 POWER SUPPLY SOURCES

41 General

The power supply system shall be designed to provide safe andeconomical operation The safety aspects should cover both plant and

personnel Economic considerations shall cover capital maintenanceand running costs and include an assessment of the reliability andconsequent availability of the system The cost of improved power systems reliability should be weighed against the progressive potentialsavings due to decreased loss of production

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 6

It is expected that for any significant power system design there will have been an

economic comparison of alternative arrangements Larger projects would be

expected to initiate a formal safety review and this process would ensure that the

basic safety needs of the project would be satisfied For smaller projects or plant

extensions where such a formal review may not be arranged the designer should

nonetheless consider safety aspects relating to the electrical system and produce an

outline document which presents these issues for the record

All negotiations with public utilities shall be the sole responsibility of BP

In as much as the arrangements with Public Authorities will form part of the long

term operational environment for the installation it is considered necessary that

the operator (assumed to be BP in the context of this document) is fully aware and

has the sole responsibility for the longer term compliance with the requirements

arising from any negotiations Such responsibility should not be delegated to a third

party unless the third party has an ongoing operational responsibility

It is considered that Contractors may request information from Public Utilities onbehalf of BP in pursuit of the determination of options relating to possible

installations or changes to existing installations but that in doing so it is made clear

that any formal agreement which arises from the information or investigation will

be with the operating company (BP)

The principal source of electrical supply for any location subject to therequirements of 411 to 413 shall be defined

The power supply arrangements are fundamental to any operating site and need to

feature strongly in the overall project concept A power supply philosophy

document which records the arrangements for power supply and the reasoning

associated with any selection is considered highly desirable A contractor mayhave part of his workscope associated with an evaluation and selection of power

supply arrangements in which case such a presentation is assured The selection of

the power supply arrangements may have formed part of a feasibility (or Statement

of Requirements) study which may have been produced by BP in which case the

definition of the power supply arrangements would form part of a contractors

specification

411 Electrical Import from a Public Utility

Where the principal source of electrical power is selected to be from a public utility the supply should be via duplicate feeders An exception

to this may be permitted for economic reasons where low power loadsare to be supplied and where a single feeder may be employed

It would be expected that there could be a costbenefit statement to justify the use of

single feeds Where the supply is low power and not essential for operations (eg

Cathodic Protection supplies) the justification is trivial however single supplies

with on site standby generation which will operate to supply full load in the event of

a main power supply failure may be an economic alternative to a duel supply

arrangement

Essential loads should always be provided for by on-site power supplyequipment

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 7

See 322 (commentary)

Where economically viable power generation on site may be arrangedto peak-lop or otherwise supplement the external power supply

412 On-site Generation with no Public Utility Connection

Where a site is offshore or remote from a public utility network or hasa surplus of fuel or process energy on-site generation will normally beexpected as the principal source of power The on-site power generation arrangements shall be defined taking into account thefollowing factors-

(i) The fuel source

(ii) The nature of the process energy

(iii) The process steam or other heat requirements if any

(iv) The relationship between electric power requirements and the

energy sources on any given site

The number and arrangement of power generating sets should reflectthe particular needs of the installation in terms of Availability andReliability Where an availability of above 80 is required a minimumof 2 generating sets will be required on sites where there is noalternative electricity supply Under these circumstances the following

criteria should be satisfied-

(i) There should be sufficient generation to meet the Maximum

Demand when the largest single source of electrical supply is

out of service at peak demand times due to maintenance or any

other reason

(ii) Where more than 2 generators are installed those loads

considered as Process Sensitive (ie those loads which must

operate to maintain either full or a reduced production) shall be

supplied when the largest capacity generator is out of service

and the second largest generator is coincidentally shut down due

to unforeseen circumstances

All power generation facilities which cannot derive alternative power from another source shall be arranged with Black Start facilities TheBlack Start arrangements may involve use of Emergency or In-Housediesel generators

For systems requiring high reliability the probability of having sufficient power

generation for 100 of the load (provided by the main power supply system) in a 12

month period should be 99 This would normally require an installation of at

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 8

least 3 generators Under some circumstances this (high) reliability requirement

can be relaxed particularly where the consequences of power supply failure are not

severe In such circumstances only two (or even one) main power generators could

be considered

Where multiple power generators are provided there needs to be a philosophy of

supply related to normal operation maintenance shutdown and to failure Where 3 generators are installed it is reasonable to expect that substantial production could

be achieved by a single set remaining available following failure of the second set

with the third unavailable

413 On-site Generation Run in Parallel with a Public Utility

Where on-site generation is selected to be the principal source of power and where a connection to a public utility is available considerationshall be given to the following options related to connection to thePublic Utility-

(i) As a standby source of electric power

(ii) A means of export of surplus electrical power

(iii) A combination of both

(iv) As a Black Start Facility

It is expected that the power generation philosophy would consider these options

which would be contained within a formal design record See also 411 where

there may be economic benefit in peak lopping of the Public Utility supply taking advantage of tariff opportunities

42 Emergency Power Supply Equipment

421 Power supplies to Essential loads should be achieved by one or more of

the following-

(i) Providing an alternative source of energy such as batteries

(ii) Increasing the amount (or being assured of sufficient sheer

numbers) of normal supply generation equipment with anarrangement for duplicate fuel supply which effectively avoids

single contingency power outage

(iii) Ensuring a number of alternative supply feeds are available to

the loads and that the alternatives effectively provide duplication

to avoid single contingency power loss

(iv) Local Diesel Generation

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 9

In general it is expected that Essential loads would receive battery supplies or

would be associated with an emergency generator However where this is

impractical leads to low reliability or is prohibitively expensive the least cost of

the remaining alternatives should normally be adopted

The concept of increased power generation in (ii) above is meant to allow for

emergency power supplies to be designed as part of a normal power generation and distribution system The criteria for design would be that the power source and the

distribution system for the Essential loads would maintain sufficiently high security

for these safety critical systems A similar concept is considered appropriate for

the concept of having a suitable number of alternative supply feeds detailed in (iii)

above

422 In the application of 421 (ii) the power supply to Essential loads shall

be designed to remain available in the event of at least two of the

installed main power generators being unavailable The probability of

zero interruptions to the Essential load feed busbar over a 12 month

period shall be 99 or better Where necessary a loadshedding schemeshall be installed to secure the supply to the Essential loads Essential

loads shall not form part of the loadshedding arrangements

The concept of additional power generation being suitable for emergency supply

duty will clearly not be possible without there being at least 3 power generation sets

available Where one power generator thus installed is of lower capacity than the

system maximum demand andor the nature of the load can lead to instability it is

expected that a load shedding scheme would be employed to ensure that the

Essential loads would be maintained for any fault condition which could leave a

single machine on the busbar

423 Where increased main generating plant or local standby plant is selectedto provide power to Essential loads it shall be either diesel engine or

gas turbine driven generator set(s) Local standby or emergency

generator prime movers shall have their own dedicated fuel supply All

prime movers for main generators (where these are deemed to provide

Essential supplies) shall be arranged for two fuel sources with

automatic transfer Power generation for Essential loads shall be rated

to have a spare capacity of at least 10

These provisions are designed to ensure that a single contingency fault (eg fuel

supply failure) will not cause power supply loss

424 Emergency generator sets shall be capable of starting and running when

no alternative source of electrical ac power is available ie a black

start capability This may be achieved by compressed air starting with

air receivers being capable of six engine starts from one air charge or

by battery starting with a similar capability or by both methods

The requirements for emergency generators are contained in BP Group GS 160-1

In general two starting methods are required It should be noted that the location

of emergency generators should normally be in a non-classified area with supply

air derived from a clean source For offshore installations the location of the

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 10

emergency generator should be on an outside wall which can have louvers open to

supply combustion air Care should be taken to ensure that the exhaust and air

intakes are located to avoid problems associated with other adjacent plant or

systems

425 Emergency generators shall be provided with automatic starting and

loading facilities A simple and reliable method of ensuring that

emergency generators can be immediately switched to their pre-defined

load shall be arranged Manual facilities shall also be provided for

regular testing purposes Testing facilities should permit the loading of

standby generator sets

It is preferred that the emergency generator should be capable of running in

parallel with the mains supply for testing purposes and for the purposes of

transferring load without the need for supply break

43 Reliability

For each power supply arrangement a reliability assessment shall becarried out to determine the probability of failure of supply

In the early stages of design a reliability study may be undertaken as part of the

comparison of alternative methods of providing power supplies Such studies would

also be useful in determining the cost of material failures The undertaking of

these studies may form part of the Contractors workscope Where the Project Team

is required to carry out such a study the terms of reference related to objectives

data gathering and evaluation shall be clearly specified

44 Primary Substation

441 Generator circuits (other than local emergency generators) and public

utility power intakes should be connected together at a common

primary substation the busbars of which are used as the main load

distribution centre Where generators and public utility power intakes

may be located at different points throughout the site these shall be

interconnected

Thus there will be at least one and for larger sites more primary substations

442 The switchgear for primary substations shall comply with BP Group GS112-9 (or BP Group GS 112-8 where only LV supplies are involved)

Detailed guid ance for H V and LV switchgear is contained in BP Group RP 12-6

and BP Group RP 12-7

443 Busbar arrangements shall be selected to be cost effective operationally

flexible and safe The following technical points shall be taken into

account

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 11

(i) Operational flexibility to permit loads and power supplies to be effectively

connected under scheduled and unscheduled outages of circuits and

busbar sections

(ii) Minimal switchgear per circuit and simple control and protection

(iii) Unscheduled loss of busbar sections shall not shut down the system beyond the level designed and provided for

(iv) Scheduled maintenance of busbars shall be possible without system

shutdowns beyond those designed and provided for

It may often be found necessary to locate the incoming circuit breakers of a busbar

to a location half way along one side of a busbar in order to be more assured that

100 of the load is unlikely to flow in one section of the busbars

The possibility of bus section circuit breaker fault conditions in metal enclosed

switchgear which may cause a full switchboard shutdown for remedial repairs

should be considered However unless there are overriding reasons for thecontrary BP do not design switchboards to cater for this eventuality

444 Single busbar arrangements for primary supply substations should be

provided subject to the following criteria-

(i) The switchgear shall be indoor metalclad type

(ii) The single busbar shall be split into a number of sections by

using suitable switchgear The number of sections of busbars

shall be consistent with the acceptable loss of incoming or

outgoing circuits under both scheduled and unscheduled lossconditions

(iii) Routine busbar maintenance shall not be considered to be

necessary or shall be an infrequent occurrence

Where there would be 3 incoming transformer feeders the busbar would normally

be expected to be in 3 parts with feeder circuit breakers arranged on each of the

sections of busbar

445 Double busbar arrangements shall be provided in installations where

outdoor air insulated busbars are installed or where regular busbar maintenance is considered necessary for environmental or pollution

reasons They may also be supplied where the operational flexibility

available from being able to connect incoming power circuits and

outgoing load circuits in a variety of ways is considered to be

particularly advantageous

The perceived need for double busbar arrangements for indoor metalclad HV

switchgear was strong in early Refinery designs but has virtually disappeared from

modern Refinery and other industrial installations Therefore the use of double

busbar arrangements needs to be carefully considered and advantages balanced

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 12

against the considerable additional costs of Building Switchgear and Protective

arrangements One generally clear case for double busbar arrangements lies in

outdoor installations where maintenance work on busbars would be greater

446 Ringbars or mesh busbars arrangements shall not be used

Ring or mesh arrangements are generally difficult to extend and therefore are

considered to have limited application However this type of arrangement has

switchgear saving advantages where the system is unlikely to require modification

447 Where the power supply is obtained from a public utility via equipment

such as transformers or feeders the busbars shall be sectionalised to

prevent total power system shutdown in the event of unscheduled

outage of any busbar section Coincidental maintenance of a public

utility intake transformer shall not be considered

It is considered that maintenance of incoming transformers and feeds would be lowand would be quickly completed Therefore high expense in order to reduce an

already unlikely event is not considered worthwhile

448 The maximum number of busbar sections should not exceed the number

of individual power sources

This requirement sets out to avoid over flexibility in a power system which although

useful in contemplation is of little economic benefit in practice

449 The outgoing load circuits shall be connected to busbar sections in such

a way as to optimise power flow across busbar section switches

commensurate with reliability and operating considerations and shall

also permit unscheduled and scheduled busbar section outages with the

minimum disturbance to the loads being supplied

See also the commentary to section 443

4410 Generators may be connected either directly to the primary power

supply busbar or via generator transformers The type of connection

shall be selected depending upon the economics associated with both

the generation voltage and the primary supply busbar voltage

Typical arrangements for primary substations for a variety of types of power supply are shown in Figure 1

Primary substations should be located in areas which are not classifiedas hazardous The selected location within the site shall-

(a) Take account of the ability to distribute power to the onsite

loads without unnecessarily high distribution equipment costs

(b) Be adjacent to the generation or public utility intake

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 13

(c) Be suitable for future expansion

Where it is impossible to locate the primary substation outside of the hazardous

areas arrangements for forced ventilation of the substation shall be made Air for

the ventilation shall be taken from a remote and safe area the substation shall beequipped with air lock doors gas detectors (which shall cause immediate de-

energisation of all electrical equipment in the substation which is not suitable for a

zone 1 environment) and loss of sufficient ventilation and pressurisation shall

initiate an alarm condition which although not causing a trip of the switchgear

shall be used as an operator based time dependent system for the effect of repair

Shutdown shall be initiated should repairs not be possible within an operator

defined time scale

45 Frequency and Voltage Regulation

451 The power system design shall be arranged to ensure that the voltage

variation (between full load and lightly loaded conditions) experiencedat any piece of equipment designated as a load (ie not including

distribution equipment) shall not exceed plusmn 5 of the declared system

nominal voltage Further the power system shall be arranged to be able

to withstand without undue stress a transient voltage variation to 80

of nominal for a 10 second period or such longer duration at specific

points if necessary Special consideration shall be given to power

frequency overvoltage effects and the need for Power System

equipment to withstand higher overvoltages under some circumstances

This requirement ensures that standard equipment parameters would not be

compromised Where the system voltage deviates beyond the 5 limit apart fromequipment life expectation being eroded there is a danger of exceeding the

hazardous area certification limits for that equipment installed in a hazardous area

This may not actually yield failures or temperatures likely to cause ignition of a

vapour which may be present but will increase the likelihood of such occurrences

and will infringe the basic safety intention

The Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 r equires voltage variations to be within plusmn

6 However standards for equipment state a plusmn 5 tolerance for voltage Hence

the lower limit is specified here

Where power systems which have automatic voltage control can experience

significant load rejection (eg as may be the case of a Power System supplied by generators must direct-on-line start large machines which subsequently exhibit

rapid VAr decrease leaving machines in an overexcited state) significant

overvoltage levels may be predicted (120 to 125 of nominal voltage can be

predicted) This may require special specification of transformers to avoid

problems caused by overfluxing or increased current due to magnetic excitation

Special attention should be paid to voltage and frequency tolerance specifications

for generator transformers which may need to match the run up characteristic of the

generator This can require the transformer to be capable of withstanding full rated

voltage at 80 of rated frequency

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 14

See 811 for motor starting requirements This can give rise to a voltage

depression at motor terminals of 20 which therefore requires that the power

system should be able to successfully accept this condition for the starting period

Typical starting periods can range from 1 to 10 seconds depending upon machine

and system ratings and machine inertia Starting times beyond 10 seconds are

possible where particularly high inertia loads need to be accelerated (eg fans)

however these would constitute a special application and should be treated byexception

452 Where the public utility intake of a site is via transformers these

transformers and their voltage regulation equipment shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance on transformer construction and specification is given in BP

Group RP 12-9

Where necessary for voltage regulation purposes the incoming transformers shall

be equipped with on load and automatic tap change equipment

453 Where there is on-site generation the generators and their governor

and voltage regulation equipment shall comply with BP Group GS 112-

6 or BP Group GS 160-1

Detailed guidance on generator application is not featured as a separate part of the

BP Group RP 12 series of documents

454 Automatic voltage regulation equipment of power systems which have

both on-site generation and public utility intakes via transformers shall

be designed so that there is no detrimental inter-action

There are a number of options which can be considered for voltage control In

general the excitation of the power generators can be arranged for zero VAr

importexport for the whole site and at the same time the intake transformer

controller can be arranged to maintain voltage at a pre set level

455 The excitation systems of synchronous motors shall be arranged to

ensure no detrimental interactive effects with transformer automatic tap

change equipment

In the case of synchronous motors where it is probable that the synchronous motor would be small in relation to the supply intake capacity it is probable that the

excitation can be arranged to maintain a constant power factor to the machine and

the transformer tap change control would be arranged to maintain voltage within

pre set levels

456 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation where

the site has no public utility connection shall be designed such that

generator loading may be automatically shared between the operating

sets and that the nominal supply frequency is maintained within the

approved tolerance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 15

Where governor droop control is employed there should be an operator in

attendance who could take action from time to time to ensure that the system

frequency remained within reasonable limits Such limits should be plusmn 1 and the

output system frequency time should be within 30 seconds of standard time

Statement of these limits for design purposes does not indicate a need to supply an

appropriate standard clock arrangement although power plants supplying

townships or camp areas are encouraged to have this facility The limit for frequency time may be relaxed for small power plants and those where frequency

time is considered unimportant (eg Where there are no time signals reliant upon

mains frequency)

For unmanned power plants or for those where constant operator intervention

would be undesirable the system frequency may be controlled by an isochronous

controller designed to provide overall frequency and generator loadings within

prescribed limits

457 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation at a

site with a public utility connection shall be designed for parallel

operation with the public utility and shall incorporate the protection

arrangements which shall ensure that under public utility collapse ( or

unacceptable major disturbance) the site will retain a defined loading

condition The arrangement shall also incorporate the means for

independent operation

Where a facility is interconnected with a Public Utility the control of the power

system frequency must be under the control of the Public Utility Therefore only

defined load governor settings or droop load sharing control systems are possible

However such interconnection is always subject to disconnection under automatic

protection system operation which will leave the power generators supplying the

site load Under these conditions whatever the original generator control arrangements the generators must revert to independent load sharing control

46 Synchronising

461 Synchronising andor check synchronising equipment shall be provided

wherever more than one source of power may be operated in parallel

with another A synchronising philosophy shall be prepared

See also sections 463 and 464 Because there can be many alternative ways of

achieving a reasonable synchronising arrangement it is expected that there would

be prepared a synchronisingcheck synchronising philosophy (or design document) for every installation which will define the particular arrangements

462 Manual synchronising arrangements shall always be provided for the

incoming power generator circuit breakers This shall comprise

voltmeters and a synchroscope to show the voltage and frequency

differences between the two systems that need to be paralleled A

check synchronising relay should be utilised to prevent operator

maloperation but in order to allow closing a power source on to a dead

system as is required under black start conditions the check

synchronising relay shall have a means of manual or automatic override

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 16

Wherever possible and economically feasible the manual synchronising system

supplied shall also include automatic synchronising applied to the generator

controls

Manual synchronising facilities should also be applied to any primary switchgear

bus section circuit breaker and to circuit breakers incoming to the primary switchboard which can make a parallel connection with other sources

463 Synchronising or check synchronising facilities shall be fitted to busbar

section and bus coupler circuit breakers where it is possible to run the

two systems feeding either section of a busbar completely segregated

from the other The number of circuit breakers provided with

synchronising or check synchronising facilities should be kept to a

minimum A similar logic shall be applied to public utility intake

circuits Alternatively circuit breaker interlocking schemes shall be

installed to preclude the possibility of paralleling two sources of power

where synchronising facilities are excluded

Notwithstanding the provisions of 464 it is not expected that there would be a

need to include synchronising or check synchronising facilities on system voltage

levels more than two levels removed from the power generation busbar where the

power system is operated with bus sections normally closed However this is a

general rule and should the system be commonly operated with open bus sections

for significant periods and there is little central system control or information

dissemination the arrangement should be reviewed

464 Synchronising facilities shall be provided at the primary power supply

voltage and should be avoided at other voltages by use of appropriatecircuit breaker interlocking

The form of interlocking should avoid the need for break-before-make action unless

absolutely necessary This may need to be associated with upstream bus section

circuit breakers and incoming circuit breakers to the upstream switchboard See

463 (commentary) for provisions should distances be too great for the economic

use of interlocking

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems

Detailed guidance on this subject is given in BP Group RP 12-5 dc

power supplies for control systems shall comply with BP Group GS112-11 and ac power supplies shall comply with BP Group GS 112-10

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 17

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

51 General

511 The distribution network shall be designed to carry continuously at least

110 of the Maximum Demand associated with peak design production at the maximum ambient conditions

The requirement for 110 capacity is considered to be applicable to all

components within the distribution system including transformer capacity It does

not include capacity of equipment considered to constitute a load to the power

system eg Induction Machines which should be rated as close as possible to

actual process demands

Refer also to the commentary to Section 311

Switchboards should be supplied with a de gree of s pares and room for expansion

Further details may be found in BP Group RP 12-6 and 7

512 Where required the reliability associated with any part of the system

shall be assessed and presented in qualitative and quantitative terms

In general the design of the power system distribution should be based upon

qualitative requirements which include assessments for meeting power supply

continuity in the event of maintenance and in the event of failure Since electrical

distribution systems are inherently reliable the design requirements are commonly

based upon the need to disconnect distribution electrical equipment to carry out

routine maintenance and at the same time keep power supplies available for

operating plant However under some circumstances the need to assess the

electrical reliability may arise (perhaps as part of an overall assessment of plant failure but possibly as part of a comparison of alternative supplies for new plant)

Under these circumstances the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and the Mean

Time To Repair (MTTR) concerning power system failure at any particular

switchboard would be required In addition it is recommended that the quantitative

statement indicate the probability of failure occurring over a particular timeframe

(eg Provide a value and definition of the probability of zero failures over a 12

month period)

See also sections 412 (commentary) 422 and 43

513 The distribution system shall be designed using one of the basic

arrangements further outlined in 52 through 56 and incorporating thecontrol features of 57 The system designed shall be described in a

design philosophy document

It is considered that the design features contained in sections 52 through 56 would

be suitable for all of the industrial power systems likely to be required by BP

However should an alternative philosophy be available it should be compared with

a standard double radial system in terms of operation reliability maintainability

and cost

The depictions in the drawings which illustrate the texts of 52 and 55 are fairly

conventional in that Contactors are employed only for motor feeders Under some

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 18

circumstances Contactors can prove an economic choice for transformer or

Switchboard feeders The depictions are for an extensive installation typical of

Refinery or other large system Offshore systems may be considered as similar but

without the higher voltage level and interconnections to Public Utility

52 Single Radial

521 These should be used to provide power to non essential electrical loads

those where alternative sources of energy are available such as standby

generating plant or those process loads for which a lower availability

can be accepted

Where minimum facilities engineering is required and the process plant can be (or

will regularly be) switched off then single radial systems may be contemplated to

satisfy process demands It is considered that maintenance of electrical systems

could be scheduled for normal process plant shutdown times and the reliability of

electrical distribution systems is generally much better than required by the process

system

522 Each component of the single radial circuit shall be capable of supplying

110 of the required electrical load Transformers or other plant

which includes forced cooling equipment shall not rely entirely on the

forced cooling arrangements to obtain the necessary rating

Refer to the commentary to Section 311 for more detail on load estimation

Where the loading is of a cyclical nature and the forced cooling would not be

expected to operate for more than 2 hours in any 12 hour period then capacities

based upon forced cooling can be considered However where this is the case acooling system failure alarm shall be provided

53 Double Radial

531 Essential and Process Sensitive loads should be supplied by two or

more identically rated radial systems

Figure 1(a) details a double radial system of feed

532 In double radial systems each circuit shall be capable of carrying a

110 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall include bussection switchgear They shall be arranged to ensure that unscheduled

outage of any component of the circuit would not result in loss of

power supply after the faulty equipment has been disconnected from the

system

See section 311 for detail on load estimation

Exceptions to the requirement for all supplies to be maintained may be made in the

following cases-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 19

(a) For bus section circuit breaker faults These may sometimes cause damage

which may require complete switchboard shutdown However the

occurrence of such faults is sufficiently rare as to be neglected

(b) Where there may be some non-essential loads supplied from a double

radial system These may receive a single radial supply from a double

radial system and therefore would not receive a supply in the event of some forms of double radial system outage

533 Double radially fed systems should generally be operated in parallel

with all bus-section switches closed

It is considered that the advantage of continuity of supply in the event of relatively

light fault conditions which is offered by closed bus section systems outweighs the

disadvantages of increased fault disturbance for heavy fault conditions It is also

more inherently safe since the switchgear fault conditions are based upon the worst

possible supply condition However see also section 534

534 Where switchgear fault levels are found to be above the values outlined

in 23 attention shall be given to operating with bus-section breakers

open as opposed to purchasing higher fault level switchgear Where an

open bus-section breaker philosophy is being given attention the need

to restore rapidly the supplies to drives shall determine whether

automatic closure of bus section circuit breaker(s) is to be employed

Switchgear fault levels could be readily reduced by increasing the impedance of

incoming transformers (Where new transformers will be purchased) However

increasing the impedance of transformers increases the voltage regulation between

light and full load There is therefore a trade-off between fault duty and normal voltage regulation

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

54 Triple Radial

541 Critical and essential loads may be alternatively supplied by triple

identically rated radial systems These systems are preferred to double

radial systems wherever there is an overall total cost advantage

A triple radial system comprises three feeders and three feeder transformers to

provide supply to a distribution switchboard

542 Each circuit of triple fed radial systems shall be capable of providing at

least 55 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall be split into at

least three sections with two bus-section switches

This will allow for the loss of any one of the three circuits leaving the two healthy

circuits still capable of providing 110 of the Maximum Demand

543 Triple radial systems shall be provided where the power flow is

relatively large They shall generally be operated with only two circuits

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE ii

82 Overvoltages38

83 Harmonics 40

84 Power Factor 42

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES44

91 General 44

92 Conventional Studies 45

93 Special Studies48

FIGURE 1 (A)49

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION 49

FIGURE 1 (B) 50

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION 50

FIGURE 1 (C)51

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION 51

APPENDIX A52DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS52

APPENDIX B53

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS53

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE iii

FOREWORD

Introduction to BP Group Recommended Practices and Specifications for Engineering

The Introductory Volume contains a series of documents that provide an introduction to theBP Group Recommended Practices and Specifications for Engineering (RPSEs) In particular

the General Foreword sets out the philosophy of the RPSEs Other documents in the

Introductory Volume provide general guidance on using the RPSEs and background

information to Engineering Standards in BP There are also recommendations for specific

definitions and requirements

Value of this Recommended Practice

This document represents the accumulated practices of the BP Group for ensuring a high

degree of plant availability and electrical system integrity within the constraints for cost

effective engineering

Application

Text in italics is Commentary Commentary provides background information which supports

the requirements of the Recommended Practice and may discuss alternative optionsIt also

gives guidance on the implementation of any Specification or Approval actions specific

actions are indicated by an asterisk () preceding a paragraph number

This document may refer to certain local national or international regulations but the

responsibility to ensure compliance with legislation and any other statutory requirements lieswith the user The user should adapt or supplement this document to ensure compliance for

the specific application

Principal Changes from Previous Edition

This Recommended Practice is a major revision of BP CP 17 Pt 3 Power Systems Design

which was last issued in April 1986 It has been updated in the Way Forward Style to reflect

significant advances in power system design

Feedback and Further Information

Users are invited to feed back any comments and to detail experiences in the application of

BP RPSEs to assist in the process of their continuous improvement

For feedback and further information please contact Standards Group BP International or the

Custodian See Quarterly Status List for contacts

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 1

1 INTRODUCTION

11 Scope

The BP Group RP 12 series of Recommended Practices specify generalrequirements for electrical systems equipment materials andinstallations This document specifies those items which apply generallyto power system design for systems with a highest nominal voltage of 36 kV

It is considered that most of the installations within the sphere of BP operations

would be 345kV or below However it has been found that even for voltages of

132 kV the same principles would tend to apply for industrial systems

12 Although the following items may form part of power systems in certain

activities of the BP Group their designs are not covered by this

document Where necessary the relevant international or national

standard must be applied to these elements of electrical systems

(i) Design of overhead line

(ii) Design of large power rectifier plant

(iii) Design aspects of electrical systems which are special to mine

winding plant earth-moving equipment conveying crushing

and associated metalliferous treatment plants

(iv) Electrical systems in ships

(v) Electrical systems for subsea installations

(vi) Electrical design of installations in commercial administrative

or domestic premises

The above exclusions are considered special in nature andor can be undertaken

more efficiently by directly adopting practice which is common in the area where

the installation is to be employed

2 SYSTEM PARAMETERS

21 Voltage

The most economical voltages shall be selected for a Power System

In general the voltages selected should accord with the economical voltage levels

for machines which are included in BP Group RP 12-11

In any existing installation the selection of voltage levels will be subject also to site

conditions The requirement for having the most economic system voltage is

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 2

intended to ensure that an economic appraisal of alternative courses of action is

undertaken or has been considered

The nominal phase to phase voltage for systems where voltages exceed1000 V should be selected from those detailed in IEC 38 When the

phase to phase voltage is below 1000 V the appropriate nominal

voltage to meet the national standards of the site location should beused For greenfield sites or offshore locations where the possibilityof interconnection with an outside authority is low the use of non-standard voltages below 1000 V (eg 660 V) shall be based oneconomic considerations

In the UK the nominal LV voltage would be either 415 V or 440 V phase to phase

with a tolerance of plusmn 5 (Notwithstanding current legislation which may suggest

that nominal voltages will in future be 380 V plusmn 10 or the provisions of the

Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 which require voltage tolerances to be within plusmn

6 for voltages less than 132 kV) See also 451

Any deployment of non standard voltage systems should be based upon specificeconomic studies which take full account of the need to hold spares which may be

beyond normal stock levels

22 Frequency

The frequency selected for power systems will be either 50 or 60 Hzdepending on the national standards of the site location Where a site isto be remotely located and powered only from on-site generation thefrequency selected should be compatible with the frequency of supplyof the nearest local electrical supply source or public utility if it isenvisaged that future inter-connection is desirable Where future inter-

connection with other sources of electricity supply is not envisaged as being possible or where economic advantages outweigh the benefits infuture possible interconnections the frequency of supply shall beselected on economic considerations and on ease of obtaining suitableequipment

North Sea experience indicates that selecting 60 Hz frequency tends to offer

possible economic advantages and as European equipment (ie widely available

equipment) suppliers can gear their product range to this frequency and the

standard voltages within Europe such selection becomes more likely

23 Rating

(i) Power systems with a voltage in excess of 1000 V should be so

designed that the rms value of the ac component of the short-

circuit breaking current of circuit breakers designed to IEC 56

andor BP Group GS 112-9 should be selected from values

readily available from equipment manufacturers

The selection of 25 kA as a symmetrical short circuit breaking capacity

could be found to represent a general economic ceiling to the available

fault levels for equipment Where there will be economic advantage in

providing switchgear of higher ratings eg 40 kA then this would be

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 3

encouraged In any case in a green field situation the Short Circuit

capability of the installation should be based upon economic grounds The

capability of switchgear should always be proven by test before being

accepted into full duty service Testing would be particularly important

where enhanced make fault levels or enhanced dc content at break levels

are required The requirements for testing is contained within BP Group

GS 112-9 however at the design stage account should be taken for anyneed for Type Testing See also 631

(ii) For power systems with a voltage less than 1000V the rms

value of the ac component of the short-circuit breaking current

of circuit breakers designed to IEC 947 andor BP Group GS

112-8 should not exceed 50 kA

See the commentary for (i) above Where economically viable the selection

of 80 kA or above rated switchgear is encouraged BP Group GS 112-8

includes testing requirements for LV circuit breakers

3 LOADS

31 Rating and Diversity Factors

311 Electrical equipment shall be rated to carry continuously the maximum

load associated with peak design production with an additional 10

contingency The ambient conditions at which this rating applies shall

be defined in equipment specifications and shall not be less than 40degC

maximum air temperature at an altitude not exceeding 1000 m

A load list would normally identify all process loads and would further identify the

power to be absorbed by the mechanical drive This would be adjusted for

efficiency of the electrical drive to arrive at a value of power to be drawn from the

electrical system Aggregated plant loading should be carried out in accordance

with 312 Beyond this estimate only one allowance of contingency should be taken

on the thus identified after diversity plant load Where a total system load is to be

estimated which includes a number of individual switchgear loads estimated in this

manner care should be taken to be assured of only one overall estimate for

contingency

The specification of maximum temperature and elevation are chosen in order to be

assured that equipment has sufficient capacity for the most arduous of likely

conditions albeit at a standard elevation However where the location is such that

it is clear that there is no possibility of reaching the standard 40degC level and there

is economic advantage in relaxing the temperature the actual maximum and

minimum temperatures should be specified Similarly if the elevation is above

1000m the actual elevation should be specified

312 Assessment of maximum load requirements of an installation shall allow

for diversity between various loads drives or plants Appropriate

factors shall consider the likelihood of loads drives production or

process trains coincidentally requiring peak demands and shall be based

on similar installations wherever possible

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 4

It is considered important that power system loading estimates be based upon

absorbed demands for machine loads with appropriate allowances for efficiency

and power factor In addition the effect of diversity should be assessed preferably

by using a concept of intermittence or alternatively by the application of well

proven diversity factors In the absence of either of these methods an average

maximum loading expectation may be assessed by adding 50 of the intermittent

load (that controlled by level switches or by thermocouples or other control

devices) to the continuously running loads In addition to this aggregated load an

assessment of likely standby load operating should be made A maximum of

standby operation may be obtained by considering boiler outage (insufficient steam

for steam turbine drivers) or by a maximum product throughput condition

32 Types of Load

All loads shall be presented with clear definition of their types inaccordance with the following-

321 Basic Information

For each identified electrical load a description of the service should begiven together with an indication of whether the device is a machine or a static load

(i) Dynamic

These are electric motors driving rotating equipment

(ii) Static

These are non-moving types of electrical equipment such as lighting heating

supplies to rectifiers etc

The bulk of the loads on the majority of BP installations comprise dynamic loads

and the proportions of dynamic to static loads are generally in the ratio of 101

Where there are machines supplied by Variable Speed Drives these may exhibit

properties similar to those of some static loads viz constant power demand despite

voltage variations Their contribution to system fault level is limited by the power

electronic system in some cases to zero contribution

322 Essential Loads

These are loads which are important to the safety of the installation or the operational staff and which require power to permit a reasonablycontrolled shutdown in emergency They shall have a secondindependent power source and be generally associated with no break supplies In certain cases a short supply break may be acceptable if thisdoes not represent a hazard to safety

BP Group RP 12-5 contains advice concerning the categorisation of power supplies

suitable for control systems The concept of essential loads used here is fairly close

to the concept of Class A contained in that RP however the loads would not

require the level of duplication required for Class A systems Included in the

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 5

concept of essential power system loads are such devices as Lub oil pumps for Gas

Turbines ventilation systems helipad lighting some floodlighting systems

navigational aids radio systems etc The term Essential used here was chosen to

align with the term Essential as defined in the IEE Recommendations for the

Electrical and Electronic Equipment of Mobile and Fixed Offshore Installations

It is noted that some loads which are essential by this definition may require the provision of Emergency Power Supply Facilities in order to meet Legislative

Requirements This is not inconsistent with the definition of Essential Loads used

here which is aimed at providing a convenient process for being assured that all

such critical loads are covered by the appropriate level of power supply (See

further Section 421)

323 Process Sensitive Loads

These are loads whose loss would affect continuity of plant operationresulting in loss of revenue but would not result in an unsafe situationarising Any decision to provide an alternative source of supply for these types of load shall be based on economic considerations

Included in this category are general lighting systems and process demands

It is sometimes possible particularly where process loadings are relatively low to

include sufficient into an emergency generator capacity to allow some processes to

continue on reduced capacity when main power generators are not available

There are no general rules for this type of provision except to emphasise that

application of such loads should not compromise any emergency services Each

case would be project specific

324 Non-sensitive Loads

Non-sensitive loads are those which do not form an importantcomponent of a production or process plant and their disconnectioncould be borne for relatively long periods with minimal or nuisancevalue They usually form a small proportion of the total connected loadand may have a single power source

Typical examples of these loads are the domestic part of accommodation offices

Workshops some water injection some potable water systems etc

4 POWER SUPPLY SOURCES

41 General

The power supply system shall be designed to provide safe andeconomical operation The safety aspects should cover both plant and

personnel Economic considerations shall cover capital maintenanceand running costs and include an assessment of the reliability andconsequent availability of the system The cost of improved power systems reliability should be weighed against the progressive potentialsavings due to decreased loss of production

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 6

It is expected that for any significant power system design there will have been an

economic comparison of alternative arrangements Larger projects would be

expected to initiate a formal safety review and this process would ensure that the

basic safety needs of the project would be satisfied For smaller projects or plant

extensions where such a formal review may not be arranged the designer should

nonetheless consider safety aspects relating to the electrical system and produce an

outline document which presents these issues for the record

All negotiations with public utilities shall be the sole responsibility of BP

In as much as the arrangements with Public Authorities will form part of the long

term operational environment for the installation it is considered necessary that

the operator (assumed to be BP in the context of this document) is fully aware and

has the sole responsibility for the longer term compliance with the requirements

arising from any negotiations Such responsibility should not be delegated to a third

party unless the third party has an ongoing operational responsibility

It is considered that Contractors may request information from Public Utilities onbehalf of BP in pursuit of the determination of options relating to possible

installations or changes to existing installations but that in doing so it is made clear

that any formal agreement which arises from the information or investigation will

be with the operating company (BP)

The principal source of electrical supply for any location subject to therequirements of 411 to 413 shall be defined

The power supply arrangements are fundamental to any operating site and need to

feature strongly in the overall project concept A power supply philosophy

document which records the arrangements for power supply and the reasoning

associated with any selection is considered highly desirable A contractor mayhave part of his workscope associated with an evaluation and selection of power

supply arrangements in which case such a presentation is assured The selection of

the power supply arrangements may have formed part of a feasibility (or Statement

of Requirements) study which may have been produced by BP in which case the

definition of the power supply arrangements would form part of a contractors

specification

411 Electrical Import from a Public Utility

Where the principal source of electrical power is selected to be from a public utility the supply should be via duplicate feeders An exception

to this may be permitted for economic reasons where low power loadsare to be supplied and where a single feeder may be employed

It would be expected that there could be a costbenefit statement to justify the use of

single feeds Where the supply is low power and not essential for operations (eg

Cathodic Protection supplies) the justification is trivial however single supplies

with on site standby generation which will operate to supply full load in the event of

a main power supply failure may be an economic alternative to a duel supply

arrangement

Essential loads should always be provided for by on-site power supplyequipment

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 7

See 322 (commentary)

Where economically viable power generation on site may be arrangedto peak-lop or otherwise supplement the external power supply

412 On-site Generation with no Public Utility Connection

Where a site is offshore or remote from a public utility network or hasa surplus of fuel or process energy on-site generation will normally beexpected as the principal source of power The on-site power generation arrangements shall be defined taking into account thefollowing factors-

(i) The fuel source

(ii) The nature of the process energy

(iii) The process steam or other heat requirements if any

(iv) The relationship between electric power requirements and the

energy sources on any given site

The number and arrangement of power generating sets should reflectthe particular needs of the installation in terms of Availability andReliability Where an availability of above 80 is required a minimumof 2 generating sets will be required on sites where there is noalternative electricity supply Under these circumstances the following

criteria should be satisfied-

(i) There should be sufficient generation to meet the Maximum

Demand when the largest single source of electrical supply is

out of service at peak demand times due to maintenance or any

other reason

(ii) Where more than 2 generators are installed those loads

considered as Process Sensitive (ie those loads which must

operate to maintain either full or a reduced production) shall be

supplied when the largest capacity generator is out of service

and the second largest generator is coincidentally shut down due

to unforeseen circumstances

All power generation facilities which cannot derive alternative power from another source shall be arranged with Black Start facilities TheBlack Start arrangements may involve use of Emergency or In-Housediesel generators

For systems requiring high reliability the probability of having sufficient power

generation for 100 of the load (provided by the main power supply system) in a 12

month period should be 99 This would normally require an installation of at

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 8

least 3 generators Under some circumstances this (high) reliability requirement

can be relaxed particularly where the consequences of power supply failure are not

severe In such circumstances only two (or even one) main power generators could

be considered

Where multiple power generators are provided there needs to be a philosophy of

supply related to normal operation maintenance shutdown and to failure Where 3 generators are installed it is reasonable to expect that substantial production could

be achieved by a single set remaining available following failure of the second set

with the third unavailable

413 On-site Generation Run in Parallel with a Public Utility

Where on-site generation is selected to be the principal source of power and where a connection to a public utility is available considerationshall be given to the following options related to connection to thePublic Utility-

(i) As a standby source of electric power

(ii) A means of export of surplus electrical power

(iii) A combination of both

(iv) As a Black Start Facility

It is expected that the power generation philosophy would consider these options

which would be contained within a formal design record See also 411 where

there may be economic benefit in peak lopping of the Public Utility supply taking advantage of tariff opportunities

42 Emergency Power Supply Equipment

421 Power supplies to Essential loads should be achieved by one or more of

the following-

(i) Providing an alternative source of energy such as batteries

(ii) Increasing the amount (or being assured of sufficient sheer

numbers) of normal supply generation equipment with anarrangement for duplicate fuel supply which effectively avoids

single contingency power outage

(iii) Ensuring a number of alternative supply feeds are available to

the loads and that the alternatives effectively provide duplication

to avoid single contingency power loss

(iv) Local Diesel Generation

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 9

In general it is expected that Essential loads would receive battery supplies or

would be associated with an emergency generator However where this is

impractical leads to low reliability or is prohibitively expensive the least cost of

the remaining alternatives should normally be adopted

The concept of increased power generation in (ii) above is meant to allow for

emergency power supplies to be designed as part of a normal power generation and distribution system The criteria for design would be that the power source and the

distribution system for the Essential loads would maintain sufficiently high security

for these safety critical systems A similar concept is considered appropriate for

the concept of having a suitable number of alternative supply feeds detailed in (iii)

above

422 In the application of 421 (ii) the power supply to Essential loads shall

be designed to remain available in the event of at least two of the

installed main power generators being unavailable The probability of

zero interruptions to the Essential load feed busbar over a 12 month

period shall be 99 or better Where necessary a loadshedding schemeshall be installed to secure the supply to the Essential loads Essential

loads shall not form part of the loadshedding arrangements

The concept of additional power generation being suitable for emergency supply

duty will clearly not be possible without there being at least 3 power generation sets

available Where one power generator thus installed is of lower capacity than the

system maximum demand andor the nature of the load can lead to instability it is

expected that a load shedding scheme would be employed to ensure that the

Essential loads would be maintained for any fault condition which could leave a

single machine on the busbar

423 Where increased main generating plant or local standby plant is selectedto provide power to Essential loads it shall be either diesel engine or

gas turbine driven generator set(s) Local standby or emergency

generator prime movers shall have their own dedicated fuel supply All

prime movers for main generators (where these are deemed to provide

Essential supplies) shall be arranged for two fuel sources with

automatic transfer Power generation for Essential loads shall be rated

to have a spare capacity of at least 10

These provisions are designed to ensure that a single contingency fault (eg fuel

supply failure) will not cause power supply loss

424 Emergency generator sets shall be capable of starting and running when

no alternative source of electrical ac power is available ie a black

start capability This may be achieved by compressed air starting with

air receivers being capable of six engine starts from one air charge or

by battery starting with a similar capability or by both methods

The requirements for emergency generators are contained in BP Group GS 160-1

In general two starting methods are required It should be noted that the location

of emergency generators should normally be in a non-classified area with supply

air derived from a clean source For offshore installations the location of the

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 10

emergency generator should be on an outside wall which can have louvers open to

supply combustion air Care should be taken to ensure that the exhaust and air

intakes are located to avoid problems associated with other adjacent plant or

systems

425 Emergency generators shall be provided with automatic starting and

loading facilities A simple and reliable method of ensuring that

emergency generators can be immediately switched to their pre-defined

load shall be arranged Manual facilities shall also be provided for

regular testing purposes Testing facilities should permit the loading of

standby generator sets

It is preferred that the emergency generator should be capable of running in

parallel with the mains supply for testing purposes and for the purposes of

transferring load without the need for supply break

43 Reliability

For each power supply arrangement a reliability assessment shall becarried out to determine the probability of failure of supply

In the early stages of design a reliability study may be undertaken as part of the

comparison of alternative methods of providing power supplies Such studies would

also be useful in determining the cost of material failures The undertaking of

these studies may form part of the Contractors workscope Where the Project Team

is required to carry out such a study the terms of reference related to objectives

data gathering and evaluation shall be clearly specified

44 Primary Substation

441 Generator circuits (other than local emergency generators) and public

utility power intakes should be connected together at a common

primary substation the busbars of which are used as the main load

distribution centre Where generators and public utility power intakes

may be located at different points throughout the site these shall be

interconnected

Thus there will be at least one and for larger sites more primary substations

442 The switchgear for primary substations shall comply with BP Group GS112-9 (or BP Group GS 112-8 where only LV supplies are involved)

Detailed guid ance for H V and LV switchgear is contained in BP Group RP 12-6

and BP Group RP 12-7

443 Busbar arrangements shall be selected to be cost effective operationally

flexible and safe The following technical points shall be taken into

account

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 11

(i) Operational flexibility to permit loads and power supplies to be effectively

connected under scheduled and unscheduled outages of circuits and

busbar sections

(ii) Minimal switchgear per circuit and simple control and protection

(iii) Unscheduled loss of busbar sections shall not shut down the system beyond the level designed and provided for

(iv) Scheduled maintenance of busbars shall be possible without system

shutdowns beyond those designed and provided for

It may often be found necessary to locate the incoming circuit breakers of a busbar

to a location half way along one side of a busbar in order to be more assured that

100 of the load is unlikely to flow in one section of the busbars

The possibility of bus section circuit breaker fault conditions in metal enclosed

switchgear which may cause a full switchboard shutdown for remedial repairs

should be considered However unless there are overriding reasons for thecontrary BP do not design switchboards to cater for this eventuality

444 Single busbar arrangements for primary supply substations should be

provided subject to the following criteria-

(i) The switchgear shall be indoor metalclad type

(ii) The single busbar shall be split into a number of sections by

using suitable switchgear The number of sections of busbars

shall be consistent with the acceptable loss of incoming or

outgoing circuits under both scheduled and unscheduled lossconditions

(iii) Routine busbar maintenance shall not be considered to be

necessary or shall be an infrequent occurrence

Where there would be 3 incoming transformer feeders the busbar would normally

be expected to be in 3 parts with feeder circuit breakers arranged on each of the

sections of busbar

445 Double busbar arrangements shall be provided in installations where

outdoor air insulated busbars are installed or where regular busbar maintenance is considered necessary for environmental or pollution

reasons They may also be supplied where the operational flexibility

available from being able to connect incoming power circuits and

outgoing load circuits in a variety of ways is considered to be

particularly advantageous

The perceived need for double busbar arrangements for indoor metalclad HV

switchgear was strong in early Refinery designs but has virtually disappeared from

modern Refinery and other industrial installations Therefore the use of double

busbar arrangements needs to be carefully considered and advantages balanced

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 12

against the considerable additional costs of Building Switchgear and Protective

arrangements One generally clear case for double busbar arrangements lies in

outdoor installations where maintenance work on busbars would be greater

446 Ringbars or mesh busbars arrangements shall not be used

Ring or mesh arrangements are generally difficult to extend and therefore are

considered to have limited application However this type of arrangement has

switchgear saving advantages where the system is unlikely to require modification

447 Where the power supply is obtained from a public utility via equipment

such as transformers or feeders the busbars shall be sectionalised to

prevent total power system shutdown in the event of unscheduled

outage of any busbar section Coincidental maintenance of a public

utility intake transformer shall not be considered

It is considered that maintenance of incoming transformers and feeds would be lowand would be quickly completed Therefore high expense in order to reduce an

already unlikely event is not considered worthwhile

448 The maximum number of busbar sections should not exceed the number

of individual power sources

This requirement sets out to avoid over flexibility in a power system which although

useful in contemplation is of little economic benefit in practice

449 The outgoing load circuits shall be connected to busbar sections in such

a way as to optimise power flow across busbar section switches

commensurate with reliability and operating considerations and shall

also permit unscheduled and scheduled busbar section outages with the

minimum disturbance to the loads being supplied

See also the commentary to section 443

4410 Generators may be connected either directly to the primary power

supply busbar or via generator transformers The type of connection

shall be selected depending upon the economics associated with both

the generation voltage and the primary supply busbar voltage

Typical arrangements for primary substations for a variety of types of power supply are shown in Figure 1

Primary substations should be located in areas which are not classifiedas hazardous The selected location within the site shall-

(a) Take account of the ability to distribute power to the onsite

loads without unnecessarily high distribution equipment costs

(b) Be adjacent to the generation or public utility intake

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 13

(c) Be suitable for future expansion

Where it is impossible to locate the primary substation outside of the hazardous

areas arrangements for forced ventilation of the substation shall be made Air for

the ventilation shall be taken from a remote and safe area the substation shall beequipped with air lock doors gas detectors (which shall cause immediate de-

energisation of all electrical equipment in the substation which is not suitable for a

zone 1 environment) and loss of sufficient ventilation and pressurisation shall

initiate an alarm condition which although not causing a trip of the switchgear

shall be used as an operator based time dependent system for the effect of repair

Shutdown shall be initiated should repairs not be possible within an operator

defined time scale

45 Frequency and Voltage Regulation

451 The power system design shall be arranged to ensure that the voltage

variation (between full load and lightly loaded conditions) experiencedat any piece of equipment designated as a load (ie not including

distribution equipment) shall not exceed plusmn 5 of the declared system

nominal voltage Further the power system shall be arranged to be able

to withstand without undue stress a transient voltage variation to 80

of nominal for a 10 second period or such longer duration at specific

points if necessary Special consideration shall be given to power

frequency overvoltage effects and the need for Power System

equipment to withstand higher overvoltages under some circumstances

This requirement ensures that standard equipment parameters would not be

compromised Where the system voltage deviates beyond the 5 limit apart fromequipment life expectation being eroded there is a danger of exceeding the

hazardous area certification limits for that equipment installed in a hazardous area

This may not actually yield failures or temperatures likely to cause ignition of a

vapour which may be present but will increase the likelihood of such occurrences

and will infringe the basic safety intention

The Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 r equires voltage variations to be within plusmn

6 However standards for equipment state a plusmn 5 tolerance for voltage Hence

the lower limit is specified here

Where power systems which have automatic voltage control can experience

significant load rejection (eg as may be the case of a Power System supplied by generators must direct-on-line start large machines which subsequently exhibit

rapid VAr decrease leaving machines in an overexcited state) significant

overvoltage levels may be predicted (120 to 125 of nominal voltage can be

predicted) This may require special specification of transformers to avoid

problems caused by overfluxing or increased current due to magnetic excitation

Special attention should be paid to voltage and frequency tolerance specifications

for generator transformers which may need to match the run up characteristic of the

generator This can require the transformer to be capable of withstanding full rated

voltage at 80 of rated frequency

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 14

See 811 for motor starting requirements This can give rise to a voltage

depression at motor terminals of 20 which therefore requires that the power

system should be able to successfully accept this condition for the starting period

Typical starting periods can range from 1 to 10 seconds depending upon machine

and system ratings and machine inertia Starting times beyond 10 seconds are

possible where particularly high inertia loads need to be accelerated (eg fans)

however these would constitute a special application and should be treated byexception

452 Where the public utility intake of a site is via transformers these

transformers and their voltage regulation equipment shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance on transformer construction and specification is given in BP

Group RP 12-9

Where necessary for voltage regulation purposes the incoming transformers shall

be equipped with on load and automatic tap change equipment

453 Where there is on-site generation the generators and their governor

and voltage regulation equipment shall comply with BP Group GS 112-

6 or BP Group GS 160-1

Detailed guidance on generator application is not featured as a separate part of the

BP Group RP 12 series of documents

454 Automatic voltage regulation equipment of power systems which have

both on-site generation and public utility intakes via transformers shall

be designed so that there is no detrimental inter-action

There are a number of options which can be considered for voltage control In

general the excitation of the power generators can be arranged for zero VAr

importexport for the whole site and at the same time the intake transformer

controller can be arranged to maintain voltage at a pre set level

455 The excitation systems of synchronous motors shall be arranged to

ensure no detrimental interactive effects with transformer automatic tap

change equipment

In the case of synchronous motors where it is probable that the synchronous motor would be small in relation to the supply intake capacity it is probable that the

excitation can be arranged to maintain a constant power factor to the machine and

the transformer tap change control would be arranged to maintain voltage within

pre set levels

456 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation where

the site has no public utility connection shall be designed such that

generator loading may be automatically shared between the operating

sets and that the nominal supply frequency is maintained within the

approved tolerance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 15

Where governor droop control is employed there should be an operator in

attendance who could take action from time to time to ensure that the system

frequency remained within reasonable limits Such limits should be plusmn 1 and the

output system frequency time should be within 30 seconds of standard time

Statement of these limits for design purposes does not indicate a need to supply an

appropriate standard clock arrangement although power plants supplying

townships or camp areas are encouraged to have this facility The limit for frequency time may be relaxed for small power plants and those where frequency

time is considered unimportant (eg Where there are no time signals reliant upon

mains frequency)

For unmanned power plants or for those where constant operator intervention

would be undesirable the system frequency may be controlled by an isochronous

controller designed to provide overall frequency and generator loadings within

prescribed limits

457 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation at a

site with a public utility connection shall be designed for parallel

operation with the public utility and shall incorporate the protection

arrangements which shall ensure that under public utility collapse ( or

unacceptable major disturbance) the site will retain a defined loading

condition The arrangement shall also incorporate the means for

independent operation

Where a facility is interconnected with a Public Utility the control of the power

system frequency must be under the control of the Public Utility Therefore only

defined load governor settings or droop load sharing control systems are possible

However such interconnection is always subject to disconnection under automatic

protection system operation which will leave the power generators supplying the

site load Under these conditions whatever the original generator control arrangements the generators must revert to independent load sharing control

46 Synchronising

461 Synchronising andor check synchronising equipment shall be provided

wherever more than one source of power may be operated in parallel

with another A synchronising philosophy shall be prepared

See also sections 463 and 464 Because there can be many alternative ways of

achieving a reasonable synchronising arrangement it is expected that there would

be prepared a synchronisingcheck synchronising philosophy (or design document) for every installation which will define the particular arrangements

462 Manual synchronising arrangements shall always be provided for the

incoming power generator circuit breakers This shall comprise

voltmeters and a synchroscope to show the voltage and frequency

differences between the two systems that need to be paralleled A

check synchronising relay should be utilised to prevent operator

maloperation but in order to allow closing a power source on to a dead

system as is required under black start conditions the check

synchronising relay shall have a means of manual or automatic override

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 16

Wherever possible and economically feasible the manual synchronising system

supplied shall also include automatic synchronising applied to the generator

controls

Manual synchronising facilities should also be applied to any primary switchgear

bus section circuit breaker and to circuit breakers incoming to the primary switchboard which can make a parallel connection with other sources

463 Synchronising or check synchronising facilities shall be fitted to busbar

section and bus coupler circuit breakers where it is possible to run the

two systems feeding either section of a busbar completely segregated

from the other The number of circuit breakers provided with

synchronising or check synchronising facilities should be kept to a

minimum A similar logic shall be applied to public utility intake

circuits Alternatively circuit breaker interlocking schemes shall be

installed to preclude the possibility of paralleling two sources of power

where synchronising facilities are excluded

Notwithstanding the provisions of 464 it is not expected that there would be a

need to include synchronising or check synchronising facilities on system voltage

levels more than two levels removed from the power generation busbar where the

power system is operated with bus sections normally closed However this is a

general rule and should the system be commonly operated with open bus sections

for significant periods and there is little central system control or information

dissemination the arrangement should be reviewed

464 Synchronising facilities shall be provided at the primary power supply

voltage and should be avoided at other voltages by use of appropriatecircuit breaker interlocking

The form of interlocking should avoid the need for break-before-make action unless

absolutely necessary This may need to be associated with upstream bus section

circuit breakers and incoming circuit breakers to the upstream switchboard See

463 (commentary) for provisions should distances be too great for the economic

use of interlocking

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems

Detailed guidance on this subject is given in BP Group RP 12-5 dc

power supplies for control systems shall comply with BP Group GS112-11 and ac power supplies shall comply with BP Group GS 112-10

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 17

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

51 General

511 The distribution network shall be designed to carry continuously at least

110 of the Maximum Demand associated with peak design production at the maximum ambient conditions

The requirement for 110 capacity is considered to be applicable to all

components within the distribution system including transformer capacity It does

not include capacity of equipment considered to constitute a load to the power

system eg Induction Machines which should be rated as close as possible to

actual process demands

Refer also to the commentary to Section 311

Switchboards should be supplied with a de gree of s pares and room for expansion

Further details may be found in BP Group RP 12-6 and 7

512 Where required the reliability associated with any part of the system

shall be assessed and presented in qualitative and quantitative terms

In general the design of the power system distribution should be based upon

qualitative requirements which include assessments for meeting power supply

continuity in the event of maintenance and in the event of failure Since electrical

distribution systems are inherently reliable the design requirements are commonly

based upon the need to disconnect distribution electrical equipment to carry out

routine maintenance and at the same time keep power supplies available for

operating plant However under some circumstances the need to assess the

electrical reliability may arise (perhaps as part of an overall assessment of plant failure but possibly as part of a comparison of alternative supplies for new plant)

Under these circumstances the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and the Mean

Time To Repair (MTTR) concerning power system failure at any particular

switchboard would be required In addition it is recommended that the quantitative

statement indicate the probability of failure occurring over a particular timeframe

(eg Provide a value and definition of the probability of zero failures over a 12

month period)

See also sections 412 (commentary) 422 and 43

513 The distribution system shall be designed using one of the basic

arrangements further outlined in 52 through 56 and incorporating thecontrol features of 57 The system designed shall be described in a

design philosophy document

It is considered that the design features contained in sections 52 through 56 would

be suitable for all of the industrial power systems likely to be required by BP

However should an alternative philosophy be available it should be compared with

a standard double radial system in terms of operation reliability maintainability

and cost

The depictions in the drawings which illustrate the texts of 52 and 55 are fairly

conventional in that Contactors are employed only for motor feeders Under some

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 18

circumstances Contactors can prove an economic choice for transformer or

Switchboard feeders The depictions are for an extensive installation typical of

Refinery or other large system Offshore systems may be considered as similar but

without the higher voltage level and interconnections to Public Utility

52 Single Radial

521 These should be used to provide power to non essential electrical loads

those where alternative sources of energy are available such as standby

generating plant or those process loads for which a lower availability

can be accepted

Where minimum facilities engineering is required and the process plant can be (or

will regularly be) switched off then single radial systems may be contemplated to

satisfy process demands It is considered that maintenance of electrical systems

could be scheduled for normal process plant shutdown times and the reliability of

electrical distribution systems is generally much better than required by the process

system

522 Each component of the single radial circuit shall be capable of supplying

110 of the required electrical load Transformers or other plant

which includes forced cooling equipment shall not rely entirely on the

forced cooling arrangements to obtain the necessary rating

Refer to the commentary to Section 311 for more detail on load estimation

Where the loading is of a cyclical nature and the forced cooling would not be

expected to operate for more than 2 hours in any 12 hour period then capacities

based upon forced cooling can be considered However where this is the case acooling system failure alarm shall be provided

53 Double Radial

531 Essential and Process Sensitive loads should be supplied by two or

more identically rated radial systems

Figure 1(a) details a double radial system of feed

532 In double radial systems each circuit shall be capable of carrying a

110 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall include bussection switchgear They shall be arranged to ensure that unscheduled

outage of any component of the circuit would not result in loss of

power supply after the faulty equipment has been disconnected from the

system

See section 311 for detail on load estimation

Exceptions to the requirement for all supplies to be maintained may be made in the

following cases-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 19

(a) For bus section circuit breaker faults These may sometimes cause damage

which may require complete switchboard shutdown However the

occurrence of such faults is sufficiently rare as to be neglected

(b) Where there may be some non-essential loads supplied from a double

radial system These may receive a single radial supply from a double

radial system and therefore would not receive a supply in the event of some forms of double radial system outage

533 Double radially fed systems should generally be operated in parallel

with all bus-section switches closed

It is considered that the advantage of continuity of supply in the event of relatively

light fault conditions which is offered by closed bus section systems outweighs the

disadvantages of increased fault disturbance for heavy fault conditions It is also

more inherently safe since the switchgear fault conditions are based upon the worst

possible supply condition However see also section 534

534 Where switchgear fault levels are found to be above the values outlined

in 23 attention shall be given to operating with bus-section breakers

open as opposed to purchasing higher fault level switchgear Where an

open bus-section breaker philosophy is being given attention the need

to restore rapidly the supplies to drives shall determine whether

automatic closure of bus section circuit breaker(s) is to be employed

Switchgear fault levels could be readily reduced by increasing the impedance of

incoming transformers (Where new transformers will be purchased) However

increasing the impedance of transformers increases the voltage regulation between

light and full load There is therefore a trade-off between fault duty and normal voltage regulation

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

54 Triple Radial

541 Critical and essential loads may be alternatively supplied by triple

identically rated radial systems These systems are preferred to double

radial systems wherever there is an overall total cost advantage

A triple radial system comprises three feeders and three feeder transformers to

provide supply to a distribution switchboard

542 Each circuit of triple fed radial systems shall be capable of providing at

least 55 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall be split into at

least three sections with two bus-section switches

This will allow for the loss of any one of the three circuits leaving the two healthy

circuits still capable of providing 110 of the Maximum Demand

543 Triple radial systems shall be provided where the power flow is

relatively large They shall generally be operated with only two circuits

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE iii

FOREWORD

Introduction to BP Group Recommended Practices and Specifications for Engineering

The Introductory Volume contains a series of documents that provide an introduction to theBP Group Recommended Practices and Specifications for Engineering (RPSEs) In particular

the General Foreword sets out the philosophy of the RPSEs Other documents in the

Introductory Volume provide general guidance on using the RPSEs and background

information to Engineering Standards in BP There are also recommendations for specific

definitions and requirements

Value of this Recommended Practice

This document represents the accumulated practices of the BP Group for ensuring a high

degree of plant availability and electrical system integrity within the constraints for cost

effective engineering

Application

Text in italics is Commentary Commentary provides background information which supports

the requirements of the Recommended Practice and may discuss alternative optionsIt also

gives guidance on the implementation of any Specification or Approval actions specific

actions are indicated by an asterisk () preceding a paragraph number

This document may refer to certain local national or international regulations but the

responsibility to ensure compliance with legislation and any other statutory requirements lieswith the user The user should adapt or supplement this document to ensure compliance for

the specific application

Principal Changes from Previous Edition

This Recommended Practice is a major revision of BP CP 17 Pt 3 Power Systems Design

which was last issued in April 1986 It has been updated in the Way Forward Style to reflect

significant advances in power system design

Feedback and Further Information

Users are invited to feed back any comments and to detail experiences in the application of

BP RPSEs to assist in the process of their continuous improvement

For feedback and further information please contact Standards Group BP International or the

Custodian See Quarterly Status List for contacts

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 1

1 INTRODUCTION

11 Scope

The BP Group RP 12 series of Recommended Practices specify generalrequirements for electrical systems equipment materials andinstallations This document specifies those items which apply generallyto power system design for systems with a highest nominal voltage of 36 kV

It is considered that most of the installations within the sphere of BP operations

would be 345kV or below However it has been found that even for voltages of

132 kV the same principles would tend to apply for industrial systems

12 Although the following items may form part of power systems in certain

activities of the BP Group their designs are not covered by this

document Where necessary the relevant international or national

standard must be applied to these elements of electrical systems

(i) Design of overhead line

(ii) Design of large power rectifier plant

(iii) Design aspects of electrical systems which are special to mine

winding plant earth-moving equipment conveying crushing

and associated metalliferous treatment plants

(iv) Electrical systems in ships

(v) Electrical systems for subsea installations

(vi) Electrical design of installations in commercial administrative

or domestic premises

The above exclusions are considered special in nature andor can be undertaken

more efficiently by directly adopting practice which is common in the area where

the installation is to be employed

2 SYSTEM PARAMETERS

21 Voltage

The most economical voltages shall be selected for a Power System

In general the voltages selected should accord with the economical voltage levels

for machines which are included in BP Group RP 12-11

In any existing installation the selection of voltage levels will be subject also to site

conditions The requirement for having the most economic system voltage is

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 2

intended to ensure that an economic appraisal of alternative courses of action is

undertaken or has been considered

The nominal phase to phase voltage for systems where voltages exceed1000 V should be selected from those detailed in IEC 38 When the

phase to phase voltage is below 1000 V the appropriate nominal

voltage to meet the national standards of the site location should beused For greenfield sites or offshore locations where the possibilityof interconnection with an outside authority is low the use of non-standard voltages below 1000 V (eg 660 V) shall be based oneconomic considerations

In the UK the nominal LV voltage would be either 415 V or 440 V phase to phase

with a tolerance of plusmn 5 (Notwithstanding current legislation which may suggest

that nominal voltages will in future be 380 V plusmn 10 or the provisions of the

Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 which require voltage tolerances to be within plusmn

6 for voltages less than 132 kV) See also 451

Any deployment of non standard voltage systems should be based upon specificeconomic studies which take full account of the need to hold spares which may be

beyond normal stock levels

22 Frequency

The frequency selected for power systems will be either 50 or 60 Hzdepending on the national standards of the site location Where a site isto be remotely located and powered only from on-site generation thefrequency selected should be compatible with the frequency of supplyof the nearest local electrical supply source or public utility if it isenvisaged that future inter-connection is desirable Where future inter-

connection with other sources of electricity supply is not envisaged as being possible or where economic advantages outweigh the benefits infuture possible interconnections the frequency of supply shall beselected on economic considerations and on ease of obtaining suitableequipment

North Sea experience indicates that selecting 60 Hz frequency tends to offer

possible economic advantages and as European equipment (ie widely available

equipment) suppliers can gear their product range to this frequency and the

standard voltages within Europe such selection becomes more likely

23 Rating

(i) Power systems with a voltage in excess of 1000 V should be so

designed that the rms value of the ac component of the short-

circuit breaking current of circuit breakers designed to IEC 56

andor BP Group GS 112-9 should be selected from values

readily available from equipment manufacturers

The selection of 25 kA as a symmetrical short circuit breaking capacity

could be found to represent a general economic ceiling to the available

fault levels for equipment Where there will be economic advantage in

providing switchgear of higher ratings eg 40 kA then this would be

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 3

encouraged In any case in a green field situation the Short Circuit

capability of the installation should be based upon economic grounds The

capability of switchgear should always be proven by test before being

accepted into full duty service Testing would be particularly important

where enhanced make fault levels or enhanced dc content at break levels

are required The requirements for testing is contained within BP Group

GS 112-9 however at the design stage account should be taken for anyneed for Type Testing See also 631

(ii) For power systems with a voltage less than 1000V the rms

value of the ac component of the short-circuit breaking current

of circuit breakers designed to IEC 947 andor BP Group GS

112-8 should not exceed 50 kA

See the commentary for (i) above Where economically viable the selection

of 80 kA or above rated switchgear is encouraged BP Group GS 112-8

includes testing requirements for LV circuit breakers

3 LOADS

31 Rating and Diversity Factors

311 Electrical equipment shall be rated to carry continuously the maximum

load associated with peak design production with an additional 10

contingency The ambient conditions at which this rating applies shall

be defined in equipment specifications and shall not be less than 40degC

maximum air temperature at an altitude not exceeding 1000 m

A load list would normally identify all process loads and would further identify the

power to be absorbed by the mechanical drive This would be adjusted for

efficiency of the electrical drive to arrive at a value of power to be drawn from the

electrical system Aggregated plant loading should be carried out in accordance

with 312 Beyond this estimate only one allowance of contingency should be taken

on the thus identified after diversity plant load Where a total system load is to be

estimated which includes a number of individual switchgear loads estimated in this

manner care should be taken to be assured of only one overall estimate for

contingency

The specification of maximum temperature and elevation are chosen in order to be

assured that equipment has sufficient capacity for the most arduous of likely

conditions albeit at a standard elevation However where the location is such that

it is clear that there is no possibility of reaching the standard 40degC level and there

is economic advantage in relaxing the temperature the actual maximum and

minimum temperatures should be specified Similarly if the elevation is above

1000m the actual elevation should be specified

312 Assessment of maximum load requirements of an installation shall allow

for diversity between various loads drives or plants Appropriate

factors shall consider the likelihood of loads drives production or

process trains coincidentally requiring peak demands and shall be based

on similar installations wherever possible

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 4

It is considered important that power system loading estimates be based upon

absorbed demands for machine loads with appropriate allowances for efficiency

and power factor In addition the effect of diversity should be assessed preferably

by using a concept of intermittence or alternatively by the application of well

proven diversity factors In the absence of either of these methods an average

maximum loading expectation may be assessed by adding 50 of the intermittent

load (that controlled by level switches or by thermocouples or other control

devices) to the continuously running loads In addition to this aggregated load an

assessment of likely standby load operating should be made A maximum of

standby operation may be obtained by considering boiler outage (insufficient steam

for steam turbine drivers) or by a maximum product throughput condition

32 Types of Load

All loads shall be presented with clear definition of their types inaccordance with the following-

321 Basic Information

For each identified electrical load a description of the service should begiven together with an indication of whether the device is a machine or a static load

(i) Dynamic

These are electric motors driving rotating equipment

(ii) Static

These are non-moving types of electrical equipment such as lighting heating

supplies to rectifiers etc

The bulk of the loads on the majority of BP installations comprise dynamic loads

and the proportions of dynamic to static loads are generally in the ratio of 101

Where there are machines supplied by Variable Speed Drives these may exhibit

properties similar to those of some static loads viz constant power demand despite

voltage variations Their contribution to system fault level is limited by the power

electronic system in some cases to zero contribution

322 Essential Loads

These are loads which are important to the safety of the installation or the operational staff and which require power to permit a reasonablycontrolled shutdown in emergency They shall have a secondindependent power source and be generally associated with no break supplies In certain cases a short supply break may be acceptable if thisdoes not represent a hazard to safety

BP Group RP 12-5 contains advice concerning the categorisation of power supplies

suitable for control systems The concept of essential loads used here is fairly close

to the concept of Class A contained in that RP however the loads would not

require the level of duplication required for Class A systems Included in the

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 5

concept of essential power system loads are such devices as Lub oil pumps for Gas

Turbines ventilation systems helipad lighting some floodlighting systems

navigational aids radio systems etc The term Essential used here was chosen to

align with the term Essential as defined in the IEE Recommendations for the

Electrical and Electronic Equipment of Mobile and Fixed Offshore Installations

It is noted that some loads which are essential by this definition may require the provision of Emergency Power Supply Facilities in order to meet Legislative

Requirements This is not inconsistent with the definition of Essential Loads used

here which is aimed at providing a convenient process for being assured that all

such critical loads are covered by the appropriate level of power supply (See

further Section 421)

323 Process Sensitive Loads

These are loads whose loss would affect continuity of plant operationresulting in loss of revenue but would not result in an unsafe situationarising Any decision to provide an alternative source of supply for these types of load shall be based on economic considerations

Included in this category are general lighting systems and process demands

It is sometimes possible particularly where process loadings are relatively low to

include sufficient into an emergency generator capacity to allow some processes to

continue on reduced capacity when main power generators are not available

There are no general rules for this type of provision except to emphasise that

application of such loads should not compromise any emergency services Each

case would be project specific

324 Non-sensitive Loads

Non-sensitive loads are those which do not form an importantcomponent of a production or process plant and their disconnectioncould be borne for relatively long periods with minimal or nuisancevalue They usually form a small proportion of the total connected loadand may have a single power source

Typical examples of these loads are the domestic part of accommodation offices

Workshops some water injection some potable water systems etc

4 POWER SUPPLY SOURCES

41 General

The power supply system shall be designed to provide safe andeconomical operation The safety aspects should cover both plant and

personnel Economic considerations shall cover capital maintenanceand running costs and include an assessment of the reliability andconsequent availability of the system The cost of improved power systems reliability should be weighed against the progressive potentialsavings due to decreased loss of production

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 6

It is expected that for any significant power system design there will have been an

economic comparison of alternative arrangements Larger projects would be

expected to initiate a formal safety review and this process would ensure that the

basic safety needs of the project would be satisfied For smaller projects or plant

extensions where such a formal review may not be arranged the designer should

nonetheless consider safety aspects relating to the electrical system and produce an

outline document which presents these issues for the record

All negotiations with public utilities shall be the sole responsibility of BP

In as much as the arrangements with Public Authorities will form part of the long

term operational environment for the installation it is considered necessary that

the operator (assumed to be BP in the context of this document) is fully aware and

has the sole responsibility for the longer term compliance with the requirements

arising from any negotiations Such responsibility should not be delegated to a third

party unless the third party has an ongoing operational responsibility

It is considered that Contractors may request information from Public Utilities onbehalf of BP in pursuit of the determination of options relating to possible

installations or changes to existing installations but that in doing so it is made clear

that any formal agreement which arises from the information or investigation will

be with the operating company (BP)

The principal source of electrical supply for any location subject to therequirements of 411 to 413 shall be defined

The power supply arrangements are fundamental to any operating site and need to

feature strongly in the overall project concept A power supply philosophy

document which records the arrangements for power supply and the reasoning

associated with any selection is considered highly desirable A contractor mayhave part of his workscope associated with an evaluation and selection of power

supply arrangements in which case such a presentation is assured The selection of

the power supply arrangements may have formed part of a feasibility (or Statement

of Requirements) study which may have been produced by BP in which case the

definition of the power supply arrangements would form part of a contractors

specification

411 Electrical Import from a Public Utility

Where the principal source of electrical power is selected to be from a public utility the supply should be via duplicate feeders An exception

to this may be permitted for economic reasons where low power loadsare to be supplied and where a single feeder may be employed

It would be expected that there could be a costbenefit statement to justify the use of

single feeds Where the supply is low power and not essential for operations (eg

Cathodic Protection supplies) the justification is trivial however single supplies

with on site standby generation which will operate to supply full load in the event of

a main power supply failure may be an economic alternative to a duel supply

arrangement

Essential loads should always be provided for by on-site power supplyequipment

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 7

See 322 (commentary)

Where economically viable power generation on site may be arrangedto peak-lop or otherwise supplement the external power supply

412 On-site Generation with no Public Utility Connection

Where a site is offshore or remote from a public utility network or hasa surplus of fuel or process energy on-site generation will normally beexpected as the principal source of power The on-site power generation arrangements shall be defined taking into account thefollowing factors-

(i) The fuel source

(ii) The nature of the process energy

(iii) The process steam or other heat requirements if any

(iv) The relationship between electric power requirements and the

energy sources on any given site

The number and arrangement of power generating sets should reflectthe particular needs of the installation in terms of Availability andReliability Where an availability of above 80 is required a minimumof 2 generating sets will be required on sites where there is noalternative electricity supply Under these circumstances the following

criteria should be satisfied-

(i) There should be sufficient generation to meet the Maximum

Demand when the largest single source of electrical supply is

out of service at peak demand times due to maintenance or any

other reason

(ii) Where more than 2 generators are installed those loads

considered as Process Sensitive (ie those loads which must

operate to maintain either full or a reduced production) shall be

supplied when the largest capacity generator is out of service

and the second largest generator is coincidentally shut down due

to unforeseen circumstances

All power generation facilities which cannot derive alternative power from another source shall be arranged with Black Start facilities TheBlack Start arrangements may involve use of Emergency or In-Housediesel generators

For systems requiring high reliability the probability of having sufficient power

generation for 100 of the load (provided by the main power supply system) in a 12

month period should be 99 This would normally require an installation of at

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 8

least 3 generators Under some circumstances this (high) reliability requirement

can be relaxed particularly where the consequences of power supply failure are not

severe In such circumstances only two (or even one) main power generators could

be considered

Where multiple power generators are provided there needs to be a philosophy of

supply related to normal operation maintenance shutdown and to failure Where 3 generators are installed it is reasonable to expect that substantial production could

be achieved by a single set remaining available following failure of the second set

with the third unavailable

413 On-site Generation Run in Parallel with a Public Utility

Where on-site generation is selected to be the principal source of power and where a connection to a public utility is available considerationshall be given to the following options related to connection to thePublic Utility-

(i) As a standby source of electric power

(ii) A means of export of surplus electrical power

(iii) A combination of both

(iv) As a Black Start Facility

It is expected that the power generation philosophy would consider these options

which would be contained within a formal design record See also 411 where

there may be economic benefit in peak lopping of the Public Utility supply taking advantage of tariff opportunities

42 Emergency Power Supply Equipment

421 Power supplies to Essential loads should be achieved by one or more of

the following-

(i) Providing an alternative source of energy such as batteries

(ii) Increasing the amount (or being assured of sufficient sheer

numbers) of normal supply generation equipment with anarrangement for duplicate fuel supply which effectively avoids

single contingency power outage

(iii) Ensuring a number of alternative supply feeds are available to

the loads and that the alternatives effectively provide duplication

to avoid single contingency power loss

(iv) Local Diesel Generation

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 9

In general it is expected that Essential loads would receive battery supplies or

would be associated with an emergency generator However where this is

impractical leads to low reliability or is prohibitively expensive the least cost of

the remaining alternatives should normally be adopted

The concept of increased power generation in (ii) above is meant to allow for

emergency power supplies to be designed as part of a normal power generation and distribution system The criteria for design would be that the power source and the

distribution system for the Essential loads would maintain sufficiently high security

for these safety critical systems A similar concept is considered appropriate for

the concept of having a suitable number of alternative supply feeds detailed in (iii)

above

422 In the application of 421 (ii) the power supply to Essential loads shall

be designed to remain available in the event of at least two of the

installed main power generators being unavailable The probability of

zero interruptions to the Essential load feed busbar over a 12 month

period shall be 99 or better Where necessary a loadshedding schemeshall be installed to secure the supply to the Essential loads Essential

loads shall not form part of the loadshedding arrangements

The concept of additional power generation being suitable for emergency supply

duty will clearly not be possible without there being at least 3 power generation sets

available Where one power generator thus installed is of lower capacity than the

system maximum demand andor the nature of the load can lead to instability it is

expected that a load shedding scheme would be employed to ensure that the

Essential loads would be maintained for any fault condition which could leave a

single machine on the busbar

423 Where increased main generating plant or local standby plant is selectedto provide power to Essential loads it shall be either diesel engine or

gas turbine driven generator set(s) Local standby or emergency

generator prime movers shall have their own dedicated fuel supply All

prime movers for main generators (where these are deemed to provide

Essential supplies) shall be arranged for two fuel sources with

automatic transfer Power generation for Essential loads shall be rated

to have a spare capacity of at least 10

These provisions are designed to ensure that a single contingency fault (eg fuel

supply failure) will not cause power supply loss

424 Emergency generator sets shall be capable of starting and running when

no alternative source of electrical ac power is available ie a black

start capability This may be achieved by compressed air starting with

air receivers being capable of six engine starts from one air charge or

by battery starting with a similar capability or by both methods

The requirements for emergency generators are contained in BP Group GS 160-1

In general two starting methods are required It should be noted that the location

of emergency generators should normally be in a non-classified area with supply

air derived from a clean source For offshore installations the location of the

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 10

emergency generator should be on an outside wall which can have louvers open to

supply combustion air Care should be taken to ensure that the exhaust and air

intakes are located to avoid problems associated with other adjacent plant or

systems

425 Emergency generators shall be provided with automatic starting and

loading facilities A simple and reliable method of ensuring that

emergency generators can be immediately switched to their pre-defined

load shall be arranged Manual facilities shall also be provided for

regular testing purposes Testing facilities should permit the loading of

standby generator sets

It is preferred that the emergency generator should be capable of running in

parallel with the mains supply for testing purposes and for the purposes of

transferring load without the need for supply break

43 Reliability

For each power supply arrangement a reliability assessment shall becarried out to determine the probability of failure of supply

In the early stages of design a reliability study may be undertaken as part of the

comparison of alternative methods of providing power supplies Such studies would

also be useful in determining the cost of material failures The undertaking of

these studies may form part of the Contractors workscope Where the Project Team

is required to carry out such a study the terms of reference related to objectives

data gathering and evaluation shall be clearly specified

44 Primary Substation

441 Generator circuits (other than local emergency generators) and public

utility power intakes should be connected together at a common

primary substation the busbars of which are used as the main load

distribution centre Where generators and public utility power intakes

may be located at different points throughout the site these shall be

interconnected

Thus there will be at least one and for larger sites more primary substations

442 The switchgear for primary substations shall comply with BP Group GS112-9 (or BP Group GS 112-8 where only LV supplies are involved)

Detailed guid ance for H V and LV switchgear is contained in BP Group RP 12-6

and BP Group RP 12-7

443 Busbar arrangements shall be selected to be cost effective operationally

flexible and safe The following technical points shall be taken into

account

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 11

(i) Operational flexibility to permit loads and power supplies to be effectively

connected under scheduled and unscheduled outages of circuits and

busbar sections

(ii) Minimal switchgear per circuit and simple control and protection

(iii) Unscheduled loss of busbar sections shall not shut down the system beyond the level designed and provided for

(iv) Scheduled maintenance of busbars shall be possible without system

shutdowns beyond those designed and provided for

It may often be found necessary to locate the incoming circuit breakers of a busbar

to a location half way along one side of a busbar in order to be more assured that

100 of the load is unlikely to flow in one section of the busbars

The possibility of bus section circuit breaker fault conditions in metal enclosed

switchgear which may cause a full switchboard shutdown for remedial repairs

should be considered However unless there are overriding reasons for thecontrary BP do not design switchboards to cater for this eventuality

444 Single busbar arrangements for primary supply substations should be

provided subject to the following criteria-

(i) The switchgear shall be indoor metalclad type

(ii) The single busbar shall be split into a number of sections by

using suitable switchgear The number of sections of busbars

shall be consistent with the acceptable loss of incoming or

outgoing circuits under both scheduled and unscheduled lossconditions

(iii) Routine busbar maintenance shall not be considered to be

necessary or shall be an infrequent occurrence

Where there would be 3 incoming transformer feeders the busbar would normally

be expected to be in 3 parts with feeder circuit breakers arranged on each of the

sections of busbar

445 Double busbar arrangements shall be provided in installations where

outdoor air insulated busbars are installed or where regular busbar maintenance is considered necessary for environmental or pollution

reasons They may also be supplied where the operational flexibility

available from being able to connect incoming power circuits and

outgoing load circuits in a variety of ways is considered to be

particularly advantageous

The perceived need for double busbar arrangements for indoor metalclad HV

switchgear was strong in early Refinery designs but has virtually disappeared from

modern Refinery and other industrial installations Therefore the use of double

busbar arrangements needs to be carefully considered and advantages balanced

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 12

against the considerable additional costs of Building Switchgear and Protective

arrangements One generally clear case for double busbar arrangements lies in

outdoor installations where maintenance work on busbars would be greater

446 Ringbars or mesh busbars arrangements shall not be used

Ring or mesh arrangements are generally difficult to extend and therefore are

considered to have limited application However this type of arrangement has

switchgear saving advantages where the system is unlikely to require modification

447 Where the power supply is obtained from a public utility via equipment

such as transformers or feeders the busbars shall be sectionalised to

prevent total power system shutdown in the event of unscheduled

outage of any busbar section Coincidental maintenance of a public

utility intake transformer shall not be considered

It is considered that maintenance of incoming transformers and feeds would be lowand would be quickly completed Therefore high expense in order to reduce an

already unlikely event is not considered worthwhile

448 The maximum number of busbar sections should not exceed the number

of individual power sources

This requirement sets out to avoid over flexibility in a power system which although

useful in contemplation is of little economic benefit in practice

449 The outgoing load circuits shall be connected to busbar sections in such

a way as to optimise power flow across busbar section switches

commensurate with reliability and operating considerations and shall

also permit unscheduled and scheduled busbar section outages with the

minimum disturbance to the loads being supplied

See also the commentary to section 443

4410 Generators may be connected either directly to the primary power

supply busbar or via generator transformers The type of connection

shall be selected depending upon the economics associated with both

the generation voltage and the primary supply busbar voltage

Typical arrangements for primary substations for a variety of types of power supply are shown in Figure 1

Primary substations should be located in areas which are not classifiedas hazardous The selected location within the site shall-

(a) Take account of the ability to distribute power to the onsite

loads without unnecessarily high distribution equipment costs

(b) Be adjacent to the generation or public utility intake

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 13

(c) Be suitable for future expansion

Where it is impossible to locate the primary substation outside of the hazardous

areas arrangements for forced ventilation of the substation shall be made Air for

the ventilation shall be taken from a remote and safe area the substation shall beequipped with air lock doors gas detectors (which shall cause immediate de-

energisation of all electrical equipment in the substation which is not suitable for a

zone 1 environment) and loss of sufficient ventilation and pressurisation shall

initiate an alarm condition which although not causing a trip of the switchgear

shall be used as an operator based time dependent system for the effect of repair

Shutdown shall be initiated should repairs not be possible within an operator

defined time scale

45 Frequency and Voltage Regulation

451 The power system design shall be arranged to ensure that the voltage

variation (between full load and lightly loaded conditions) experiencedat any piece of equipment designated as a load (ie not including

distribution equipment) shall not exceed plusmn 5 of the declared system

nominal voltage Further the power system shall be arranged to be able

to withstand without undue stress a transient voltage variation to 80

of nominal for a 10 second period or such longer duration at specific

points if necessary Special consideration shall be given to power

frequency overvoltage effects and the need for Power System

equipment to withstand higher overvoltages under some circumstances

This requirement ensures that standard equipment parameters would not be

compromised Where the system voltage deviates beyond the 5 limit apart fromequipment life expectation being eroded there is a danger of exceeding the

hazardous area certification limits for that equipment installed in a hazardous area

This may not actually yield failures or temperatures likely to cause ignition of a

vapour which may be present but will increase the likelihood of such occurrences

and will infringe the basic safety intention

The Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 r equires voltage variations to be within plusmn

6 However standards for equipment state a plusmn 5 tolerance for voltage Hence

the lower limit is specified here

Where power systems which have automatic voltage control can experience

significant load rejection (eg as may be the case of a Power System supplied by generators must direct-on-line start large machines which subsequently exhibit

rapid VAr decrease leaving machines in an overexcited state) significant

overvoltage levels may be predicted (120 to 125 of nominal voltage can be

predicted) This may require special specification of transformers to avoid

problems caused by overfluxing or increased current due to magnetic excitation

Special attention should be paid to voltage and frequency tolerance specifications

for generator transformers which may need to match the run up characteristic of the

generator This can require the transformer to be capable of withstanding full rated

voltage at 80 of rated frequency

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 14

See 811 for motor starting requirements This can give rise to a voltage

depression at motor terminals of 20 which therefore requires that the power

system should be able to successfully accept this condition for the starting period

Typical starting periods can range from 1 to 10 seconds depending upon machine

and system ratings and machine inertia Starting times beyond 10 seconds are

possible where particularly high inertia loads need to be accelerated (eg fans)

however these would constitute a special application and should be treated byexception

452 Where the public utility intake of a site is via transformers these

transformers and their voltage regulation equipment shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance on transformer construction and specification is given in BP

Group RP 12-9

Where necessary for voltage regulation purposes the incoming transformers shall

be equipped with on load and automatic tap change equipment

453 Where there is on-site generation the generators and their governor

and voltage regulation equipment shall comply with BP Group GS 112-

6 or BP Group GS 160-1

Detailed guidance on generator application is not featured as a separate part of the

BP Group RP 12 series of documents

454 Automatic voltage regulation equipment of power systems which have

both on-site generation and public utility intakes via transformers shall

be designed so that there is no detrimental inter-action

There are a number of options which can be considered for voltage control In

general the excitation of the power generators can be arranged for zero VAr

importexport for the whole site and at the same time the intake transformer

controller can be arranged to maintain voltage at a pre set level

455 The excitation systems of synchronous motors shall be arranged to

ensure no detrimental interactive effects with transformer automatic tap

change equipment

In the case of synchronous motors where it is probable that the synchronous motor would be small in relation to the supply intake capacity it is probable that the

excitation can be arranged to maintain a constant power factor to the machine and

the transformer tap change control would be arranged to maintain voltage within

pre set levels

456 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation where

the site has no public utility connection shall be designed such that

generator loading may be automatically shared between the operating

sets and that the nominal supply frequency is maintained within the

approved tolerance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 15

Where governor droop control is employed there should be an operator in

attendance who could take action from time to time to ensure that the system

frequency remained within reasonable limits Such limits should be plusmn 1 and the

output system frequency time should be within 30 seconds of standard time

Statement of these limits for design purposes does not indicate a need to supply an

appropriate standard clock arrangement although power plants supplying

townships or camp areas are encouraged to have this facility The limit for frequency time may be relaxed for small power plants and those where frequency

time is considered unimportant (eg Where there are no time signals reliant upon

mains frequency)

For unmanned power plants or for those where constant operator intervention

would be undesirable the system frequency may be controlled by an isochronous

controller designed to provide overall frequency and generator loadings within

prescribed limits

457 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation at a

site with a public utility connection shall be designed for parallel

operation with the public utility and shall incorporate the protection

arrangements which shall ensure that under public utility collapse ( or

unacceptable major disturbance) the site will retain a defined loading

condition The arrangement shall also incorporate the means for

independent operation

Where a facility is interconnected with a Public Utility the control of the power

system frequency must be under the control of the Public Utility Therefore only

defined load governor settings or droop load sharing control systems are possible

However such interconnection is always subject to disconnection under automatic

protection system operation which will leave the power generators supplying the

site load Under these conditions whatever the original generator control arrangements the generators must revert to independent load sharing control

46 Synchronising

461 Synchronising andor check synchronising equipment shall be provided

wherever more than one source of power may be operated in parallel

with another A synchronising philosophy shall be prepared

See also sections 463 and 464 Because there can be many alternative ways of

achieving a reasonable synchronising arrangement it is expected that there would

be prepared a synchronisingcheck synchronising philosophy (or design document) for every installation which will define the particular arrangements

462 Manual synchronising arrangements shall always be provided for the

incoming power generator circuit breakers This shall comprise

voltmeters and a synchroscope to show the voltage and frequency

differences between the two systems that need to be paralleled A

check synchronising relay should be utilised to prevent operator

maloperation but in order to allow closing a power source on to a dead

system as is required under black start conditions the check

synchronising relay shall have a means of manual or automatic override

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 16

Wherever possible and economically feasible the manual synchronising system

supplied shall also include automatic synchronising applied to the generator

controls

Manual synchronising facilities should also be applied to any primary switchgear

bus section circuit breaker and to circuit breakers incoming to the primary switchboard which can make a parallel connection with other sources

463 Synchronising or check synchronising facilities shall be fitted to busbar

section and bus coupler circuit breakers where it is possible to run the

two systems feeding either section of a busbar completely segregated

from the other The number of circuit breakers provided with

synchronising or check synchronising facilities should be kept to a

minimum A similar logic shall be applied to public utility intake

circuits Alternatively circuit breaker interlocking schemes shall be

installed to preclude the possibility of paralleling two sources of power

where synchronising facilities are excluded

Notwithstanding the provisions of 464 it is not expected that there would be a

need to include synchronising or check synchronising facilities on system voltage

levels more than two levels removed from the power generation busbar where the

power system is operated with bus sections normally closed However this is a

general rule and should the system be commonly operated with open bus sections

for significant periods and there is little central system control or information

dissemination the arrangement should be reviewed

464 Synchronising facilities shall be provided at the primary power supply

voltage and should be avoided at other voltages by use of appropriatecircuit breaker interlocking

The form of interlocking should avoid the need for break-before-make action unless

absolutely necessary This may need to be associated with upstream bus section

circuit breakers and incoming circuit breakers to the upstream switchboard See

463 (commentary) for provisions should distances be too great for the economic

use of interlocking

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems

Detailed guidance on this subject is given in BP Group RP 12-5 dc

power supplies for control systems shall comply with BP Group GS112-11 and ac power supplies shall comply with BP Group GS 112-10

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 17

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

51 General

511 The distribution network shall be designed to carry continuously at least

110 of the Maximum Demand associated with peak design production at the maximum ambient conditions

The requirement for 110 capacity is considered to be applicable to all

components within the distribution system including transformer capacity It does

not include capacity of equipment considered to constitute a load to the power

system eg Induction Machines which should be rated as close as possible to

actual process demands

Refer also to the commentary to Section 311

Switchboards should be supplied with a de gree of s pares and room for expansion

Further details may be found in BP Group RP 12-6 and 7

512 Where required the reliability associated with any part of the system

shall be assessed and presented in qualitative and quantitative terms

In general the design of the power system distribution should be based upon

qualitative requirements which include assessments for meeting power supply

continuity in the event of maintenance and in the event of failure Since electrical

distribution systems are inherently reliable the design requirements are commonly

based upon the need to disconnect distribution electrical equipment to carry out

routine maintenance and at the same time keep power supplies available for

operating plant However under some circumstances the need to assess the

electrical reliability may arise (perhaps as part of an overall assessment of plant failure but possibly as part of a comparison of alternative supplies for new plant)

Under these circumstances the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and the Mean

Time To Repair (MTTR) concerning power system failure at any particular

switchboard would be required In addition it is recommended that the quantitative

statement indicate the probability of failure occurring over a particular timeframe

(eg Provide a value and definition of the probability of zero failures over a 12

month period)

See also sections 412 (commentary) 422 and 43

513 The distribution system shall be designed using one of the basic

arrangements further outlined in 52 through 56 and incorporating thecontrol features of 57 The system designed shall be described in a

design philosophy document

It is considered that the design features contained in sections 52 through 56 would

be suitable for all of the industrial power systems likely to be required by BP

However should an alternative philosophy be available it should be compared with

a standard double radial system in terms of operation reliability maintainability

and cost

The depictions in the drawings which illustrate the texts of 52 and 55 are fairly

conventional in that Contactors are employed only for motor feeders Under some

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 18

circumstances Contactors can prove an economic choice for transformer or

Switchboard feeders The depictions are for an extensive installation typical of

Refinery or other large system Offshore systems may be considered as similar but

without the higher voltage level and interconnections to Public Utility

52 Single Radial

521 These should be used to provide power to non essential electrical loads

those where alternative sources of energy are available such as standby

generating plant or those process loads for which a lower availability

can be accepted

Where minimum facilities engineering is required and the process plant can be (or

will regularly be) switched off then single radial systems may be contemplated to

satisfy process demands It is considered that maintenance of electrical systems

could be scheduled for normal process plant shutdown times and the reliability of

electrical distribution systems is generally much better than required by the process

system

522 Each component of the single radial circuit shall be capable of supplying

110 of the required electrical load Transformers or other plant

which includes forced cooling equipment shall not rely entirely on the

forced cooling arrangements to obtain the necessary rating

Refer to the commentary to Section 311 for more detail on load estimation

Where the loading is of a cyclical nature and the forced cooling would not be

expected to operate for more than 2 hours in any 12 hour period then capacities

based upon forced cooling can be considered However where this is the case acooling system failure alarm shall be provided

53 Double Radial

531 Essential and Process Sensitive loads should be supplied by two or

more identically rated radial systems

Figure 1(a) details a double radial system of feed

532 In double radial systems each circuit shall be capable of carrying a

110 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall include bussection switchgear They shall be arranged to ensure that unscheduled

outage of any component of the circuit would not result in loss of

power supply after the faulty equipment has been disconnected from the

system

See section 311 for detail on load estimation

Exceptions to the requirement for all supplies to be maintained may be made in the

following cases-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 19

(a) For bus section circuit breaker faults These may sometimes cause damage

which may require complete switchboard shutdown However the

occurrence of such faults is sufficiently rare as to be neglected

(b) Where there may be some non-essential loads supplied from a double

radial system These may receive a single radial supply from a double

radial system and therefore would not receive a supply in the event of some forms of double radial system outage

533 Double radially fed systems should generally be operated in parallel

with all bus-section switches closed

It is considered that the advantage of continuity of supply in the event of relatively

light fault conditions which is offered by closed bus section systems outweighs the

disadvantages of increased fault disturbance for heavy fault conditions It is also

more inherently safe since the switchgear fault conditions are based upon the worst

possible supply condition However see also section 534

534 Where switchgear fault levels are found to be above the values outlined

in 23 attention shall be given to operating with bus-section breakers

open as opposed to purchasing higher fault level switchgear Where an

open bus-section breaker philosophy is being given attention the need

to restore rapidly the supplies to drives shall determine whether

automatic closure of bus section circuit breaker(s) is to be employed

Switchgear fault levels could be readily reduced by increasing the impedance of

incoming transformers (Where new transformers will be purchased) However

increasing the impedance of transformers increases the voltage regulation between

light and full load There is therefore a trade-off between fault duty and normal voltage regulation

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

54 Triple Radial

541 Critical and essential loads may be alternatively supplied by triple

identically rated radial systems These systems are preferred to double

radial systems wherever there is an overall total cost advantage

A triple radial system comprises three feeders and three feeder transformers to

provide supply to a distribution switchboard

542 Each circuit of triple fed radial systems shall be capable of providing at

least 55 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall be split into at

least three sections with two bus-section switches

This will allow for the loss of any one of the three circuits leaving the two healthy

circuits still capable of providing 110 of the Maximum Demand

543 Triple radial systems shall be provided where the power flow is

relatively large They shall generally be operated with only two circuits

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 1

1 INTRODUCTION

11 Scope

The BP Group RP 12 series of Recommended Practices specify generalrequirements for electrical systems equipment materials andinstallations This document specifies those items which apply generallyto power system design for systems with a highest nominal voltage of 36 kV

It is considered that most of the installations within the sphere of BP operations

would be 345kV or below However it has been found that even for voltages of

132 kV the same principles would tend to apply for industrial systems

12 Although the following items may form part of power systems in certain

activities of the BP Group their designs are not covered by this

document Where necessary the relevant international or national

standard must be applied to these elements of electrical systems

(i) Design of overhead line

(ii) Design of large power rectifier plant

(iii) Design aspects of electrical systems which are special to mine

winding plant earth-moving equipment conveying crushing

and associated metalliferous treatment plants

(iv) Electrical systems in ships

(v) Electrical systems for subsea installations

(vi) Electrical design of installations in commercial administrative

or domestic premises

The above exclusions are considered special in nature andor can be undertaken

more efficiently by directly adopting practice which is common in the area where

the installation is to be employed

2 SYSTEM PARAMETERS

21 Voltage

The most economical voltages shall be selected for a Power System

In general the voltages selected should accord with the economical voltage levels

for machines which are included in BP Group RP 12-11

In any existing installation the selection of voltage levels will be subject also to site

conditions The requirement for having the most economic system voltage is

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 2

intended to ensure that an economic appraisal of alternative courses of action is

undertaken or has been considered

The nominal phase to phase voltage for systems where voltages exceed1000 V should be selected from those detailed in IEC 38 When the

phase to phase voltage is below 1000 V the appropriate nominal

voltage to meet the national standards of the site location should beused For greenfield sites or offshore locations where the possibilityof interconnection with an outside authority is low the use of non-standard voltages below 1000 V (eg 660 V) shall be based oneconomic considerations

In the UK the nominal LV voltage would be either 415 V or 440 V phase to phase

with a tolerance of plusmn 5 (Notwithstanding current legislation which may suggest

that nominal voltages will in future be 380 V plusmn 10 or the provisions of the

Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 which require voltage tolerances to be within plusmn

6 for voltages less than 132 kV) See also 451

Any deployment of non standard voltage systems should be based upon specificeconomic studies which take full account of the need to hold spares which may be

beyond normal stock levels

22 Frequency

The frequency selected for power systems will be either 50 or 60 Hzdepending on the national standards of the site location Where a site isto be remotely located and powered only from on-site generation thefrequency selected should be compatible with the frequency of supplyof the nearest local electrical supply source or public utility if it isenvisaged that future inter-connection is desirable Where future inter-

connection with other sources of electricity supply is not envisaged as being possible or where economic advantages outweigh the benefits infuture possible interconnections the frequency of supply shall beselected on economic considerations and on ease of obtaining suitableequipment

North Sea experience indicates that selecting 60 Hz frequency tends to offer

possible economic advantages and as European equipment (ie widely available

equipment) suppliers can gear their product range to this frequency and the

standard voltages within Europe such selection becomes more likely

23 Rating

(i) Power systems with a voltage in excess of 1000 V should be so

designed that the rms value of the ac component of the short-

circuit breaking current of circuit breakers designed to IEC 56

andor BP Group GS 112-9 should be selected from values

readily available from equipment manufacturers

The selection of 25 kA as a symmetrical short circuit breaking capacity

could be found to represent a general economic ceiling to the available

fault levels for equipment Where there will be economic advantage in

providing switchgear of higher ratings eg 40 kA then this would be

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 3

encouraged In any case in a green field situation the Short Circuit

capability of the installation should be based upon economic grounds The

capability of switchgear should always be proven by test before being

accepted into full duty service Testing would be particularly important

where enhanced make fault levels or enhanced dc content at break levels

are required The requirements for testing is contained within BP Group

GS 112-9 however at the design stage account should be taken for anyneed for Type Testing See also 631

(ii) For power systems with a voltage less than 1000V the rms

value of the ac component of the short-circuit breaking current

of circuit breakers designed to IEC 947 andor BP Group GS

112-8 should not exceed 50 kA

See the commentary for (i) above Where economically viable the selection

of 80 kA or above rated switchgear is encouraged BP Group GS 112-8

includes testing requirements for LV circuit breakers

3 LOADS

31 Rating and Diversity Factors

311 Electrical equipment shall be rated to carry continuously the maximum

load associated with peak design production with an additional 10

contingency The ambient conditions at which this rating applies shall

be defined in equipment specifications and shall not be less than 40degC

maximum air temperature at an altitude not exceeding 1000 m

A load list would normally identify all process loads and would further identify the

power to be absorbed by the mechanical drive This would be adjusted for

efficiency of the electrical drive to arrive at a value of power to be drawn from the

electrical system Aggregated plant loading should be carried out in accordance

with 312 Beyond this estimate only one allowance of contingency should be taken

on the thus identified after diversity plant load Where a total system load is to be

estimated which includes a number of individual switchgear loads estimated in this

manner care should be taken to be assured of only one overall estimate for

contingency

The specification of maximum temperature and elevation are chosen in order to be

assured that equipment has sufficient capacity for the most arduous of likely

conditions albeit at a standard elevation However where the location is such that

it is clear that there is no possibility of reaching the standard 40degC level and there

is economic advantage in relaxing the temperature the actual maximum and

minimum temperatures should be specified Similarly if the elevation is above

1000m the actual elevation should be specified

312 Assessment of maximum load requirements of an installation shall allow

for diversity between various loads drives or plants Appropriate

factors shall consider the likelihood of loads drives production or

process trains coincidentally requiring peak demands and shall be based

on similar installations wherever possible

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 4

It is considered important that power system loading estimates be based upon

absorbed demands for machine loads with appropriate allowances for efficiency

and power factor In addition the effect of diversity should be assessed preferably

by using a concept of intermittence or alternatively by the application of well

proven diversity factors In the absence of either of these methods an average

maximum loading expectation may be assessed by adding 50 of the intermittent

load (that controlled by level switches or by thermocouples or other control

devices) to the continuously running loads In addition to this aggregated load an

assessment of likely standby load operating should be made A maximum of

standby operation may be obtained by considering boiler outage (insufficient steam

for steam turbine drivers) or by a maximum product throughput condition

32 Types of Load

All loads shall be presented with clear definition of their types inaccordance with the following-

321 Basic Information

For each identified electrical load a description of the service should begiven together with an indication of whether the device is a machine or a static load

(i) Dynamic

These are electric motors driving rotating equipment

(ii) Static

These are non-moving types of electrical equipment such as lighting heating

supplies to rectifiers etc

The bulk of the loads on the majority of BP installations comprise dynamic loads

and the proportions of dynamic to static loads are generally in the ratio of 101

Where there are machines supplied by Variable Speed Drives these may exhibit

properties similar to those of some static loads viz constant power demand despite

voltage variations Their contribution to system fault level is limited by the power

electronic system in some cases to zero contribution

322 Essential Loads

These are loads which are important to the safety of the installation or the operational staff and which require power to permit a reasonablycontrolled shutdown in emergency They shall have a secondindependent power source and be generally associated with no break supplies In certain cases a short supply break may be acceptable if thisdoes not represent a hazard to safety

BP Group RP 12-5 contains advice concerning the categorisation of power supplies

suitable for control systems The concept of essential loads used here is fairly close

to the concept of Class A contained in that RP however the loads would not

require the level of duplication required for Class A systems Included in the

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 5

concept of essential power system loads are such devices as Lub oil pumps for Gas

Turbines ventilation systems helipad lighting some floodlighting systems

navigational aids radio systems etc The term Essential used here was chosen to

align with the term Essential as defined in the IEE Recommendations for the

Electrical and Electronic Equipment of Mobile and Fixed Offshore Installations

It is noted that some loads which are essential by this definition may require the provision of Emergency Power Supply Facilities in order to meet Legislative

Requirements This is not inconsistent with the definition of Essential Loads used

here which is aimed at providing a convenient process for being assured that all

such critical loads are covered by the appropriate level of power supply (See

further Section 421)

323 Process Sensitive Loads

These are loads whose loss would affect continuity of plant operationresulting in loss of revenue but would not result in an unsafe situationarising Any decision to provide an alternative source of supply for these types of load shall be based on economic considerations

Included in this category are general lighting systems and process demands

It is sometimes possible particularly where process loadings are relatively low to

include sufficient into an emergency generator capacity to allow some processes to

continue on reduced capacity when main power generators are not available

There are no general rules for this type of provision except to emphasise that

application of such loads should not compromise any emergency services Each

case would be project specific

324 Non-sensitive Loads

Non-sensitive loads are those which do not form an importantcomponent of a production or process plant and their disconnectioncould be borne for relatively long periods with minimal or nuisancevalue They usually form a small proportion of the total connected loadand may have a single power source

Typical examples of these loads are the domestic part of accommodation offices

Workshops some water injection some potable water systems etc

4 POWER SUPPLY SOURCES

41 General

The power supply system shall be designed to provide safe andeconomical operation The safety aspects should cover both plant and

personnel Economic considerations shall cover capital maintenanceand running costs and include an assessment of the reliability andconsequent availability of the system The cost of improved power systems reliability should be weighed against the progressive potentialsavings due to decreased loss of production

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 6

It is expected that for any significant power system design there will have been an

economic comparison of alternative arrangements Larger projects would be

expected to initiate a formal safety review and this process would ensure that the

basic safety needs of the project would be satisfied For smaller projects or plant

extensions where such a formal review may not be arranged the designer should

nonetheless consider safety aspects relating to the electrical system and produce an

outline document which presents these issues for the record

All negotiations with public utilities shall be the sole responsibility of BP

In as much as the arrangements with Public Authorities will form part of the long

term operational environment for the installation it is considered necessary that

the operator (assumed to be BP in the context of this document) is fully aware and

has the sole responsibility for the longer term compliance with the requirements

arising from any negotiations Such responsibility should not be delegated to a third

party unless the third party has an ongoing operational responsibility

It is considered that Contractors may request information from Public Utilities onbehalf of BP in pursuit of the determination of options relating to possible

installations or changes to existing installations but that in doing so it is made clear

that any formal agreement which arises from the information or investigation will

be with the operating company (BP)

The principal source of electrical supply for any location subject to therequirements of 411 to 413 shall be defined

The power supply arrangements are fundamental to any operating site and need to

feature strongly in the overall project concept A power supply philosophy

document which records the arrangements for power supply and the reasoning

associated with any selection is considered highly desirable A contractor mayhave part of his workscope associated with an evaluation and selection of power

supply arrangements in which case such a presentation is assured The selection of

the power supply arrangements may have formed part of a feasibility (or Statement

of Requirements) study which may have been produced by BP in which case the

definition of the power supply arrangements would form part of a contractors

specification

411 Electrical Import from a Public Utility

Where the principal source of electrical power is selected to be from a public utility the supply should be via duplicate feeders An exception

to this may be permitted for economic reasons where low power loadsare to be supplied and where a single feeder may be employed

It would be expected that there could be a costbenefit statement to justify the use of

single feeds Where the supply is low power and not essential for operations (eg

Cathodic Protection supplies) the justification is trivial however single supplies

with on site standby generation which will operate to supply full load in the event of

a main power supply failure may be an economic alternative to a duel supply

arrangement

Essential loads should always be provided for by on-site power supplyequipment

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 7

See 322 (commentary)

Where economically viable power generation on site may be arrangedto peak-lop or otherwise supplement the external power supply

412 On-site Generation with no Public Utility Connection

Where a site is offshore or remote from a public utility network or hasa surplus of fuel or process energy on-site generation will normally beexpected as the principal source of power The on-site power generation arrangements shall be defined taking into account thefollowing factors-

(i) The fuel source

(ii) The nature of the process energy

(iii) The process steam or other heat requirements if any

(iv) The relationship between electric power requirements and the

energy sources on any given site

The number and arrangement of power generating sets should reflectthe particular needs of the installation in terms of Availability andReliability Where an availability of above 80 is required a minimumof 2 generating sets will be required on sites where there is noalternative electricity supply Under these circumstances the following

criteria should be satisfied-

(i) There should be sufficient generation to meet the Maximum

Demand when the largest single source of electrical supply is

out of service at peak demand times due to maintenance or any

other reason

(ii) Where more than 2 generators are installed those loads

considered as Process Sensitive (ie those loads which must

operate to maintain either full or a reduced production) shall be

supplied when the largest capacity generator is out of service

and the second largest generator is coincidentally shut down due

to unforeseen circumstances

All power generation facilities which cannot derive alternative power from another source shall be arranged with Black Start facilities TheBlack Start arrangements may involve use of Emergency or In-Housediesel generators

For systems requiring high reliability the probability of having sufficient power

generation for 100 of the load (provided by the main power supply system) in a 12

month period should be 99 This would normally require an installation of at

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 8

least 3 generators Under some circumstances this (high) reliability requirement

can be relaxed particularly where the consequences of power supply failure are not

severe In such circumstances only two (or even one) main power generators could

be considered

Where multiple power generators are provided there needs to be a philosophy of

supply related to normal operation maintenance shutdown and to failure Where 3 generators are installed it is reasonable to expect that substantial production could

be achieved by a single set remaining available following failure of the second set

with the third unavailable

413 On-site Generation Run in Parallel with a Public Utility

Where on-site generation is selected to be the principal source of power and where a connection to a public utility is available considerationshall be given to the following options related to connection to thePublic Utility-

(i) As a standby source of electric power

(ii) A means of export of surplus electrical power

(iii) A combination of both

(iv) As a Black Start Facility

It is expected that the power generation philosophy would consider these options

which would be contained within a formal design record See also 411 where

there may be economic benefit in peak lopping of the Public Utility supply taking advantage of tariff opportunities

42 Emergency Power Supply Equipment

421 Power supplies to Essential loads should be achieved by one or more of

the following-

(i) Providing an alternative source of energy such as batteries

(ii) Increasing the amount (or being assured of sufficient sheer

numbers) of normal supply generation equipment with anarrangement for duplicate fuel supply which effectively avoids

single contingency power outage

(iii) Ensuring a number of alternative supply feeds are available to

the loads and that the alternatives effectively provide duplication

to avoid single contingency power loss

(iv) Local Diesel Generation

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 9

In general it is expected that Essential loads would receive battery supplies or

would be associated with an emergency generator However where this is

impractical leads to low reliability or is prohibitively expensive the least cost of

the remaining alternatives should normally be adopted

The concept of increased power generation in (ii) above is meant to allow for

emergency power supplies to be designed as part of a normal power generation and distribution system The criteria for design would be that the power source and the

distribution system for the Essential loads would maintain sufficiently high security

for these safety critical systems A similar concept is considered appropriate for

the concept of having a suitable number of alternative supply feeds detailed in (iii)

above

422 In the application of 421 (ii) the power supply to Essential loads shall

be designed to remain available in the event of at least two of the

installed main power generators being unavailable The probability of

zero interruptions to the Essential load feed busbar over a 12 month

period shall be 99 or better Where necessary a loadshedding schemeshall be installed to secure the supply to the Essential loads Essential

loads shall not form part of the loadshedding arrangements

The concept of additional power generation being suitable for emergency supply

duty will clearly not be possible without there being at least 3 power generation sets

available Where one power generator thus installed is of lower capacity than the

system maximum demand andor the nature of the load can lead to instability it is

expected that a load shedding scheme would be employed to ensure that the

Essential loads would be maintained for any fault condition which could leave a

single machine on the busbar

423 Where increased main generating plant or local standby plant is selectedto provide power to Essential loads it shall be either diesel engine or

gas turbine driven generator set(s) Local standby or emergency

generator prime movers shall have their own dedicated fuel supply All

prime movers for main generators (where these are deemed to provide

Essential supplies) shall be arranged for two fuel sources with

automatic transfer Power generation for Essential loads shall be rated

to have a spare capacity of at least 10

These provisions are designed to ensure that a single contingency fault (eg fuel

supply failure) will not cause power supply loss

424 Emergency generator sets shall be capable of starting and running when

no alternative source of electrical ac power is available ie a black

start capability This may be achieved by compressed air starting with

air receivers being capable of six engine starts from one air charge or

by battery starting with a similar capability or by both methods

The requirements for emergency generators are contained in BP Group GS 160-1

In general two starting methods are required It should be noted that the location

of emergency generators should normally be in a non-classified area with supply

air derived from a clean source For offshore installations the location of the

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 10

emergency generator should be on an outside wall which can have louvers open to

supply combustion air Care should be taken to ensure that the exhaust and air

intakes are located to avoid problems associated with other adjacent plant or

systems

425 Emergency generators shall be provided with automatic starting and

loading facilities A simple and reliable method of ensuring that

emergency generators can be immediately switched to their pre-defined

load shall be arranged Manual facilities shall also be provided for

regular testing purposes Testing facilities should permit the loading of

standby generator sets

It is preferred that the emergency generator should be capable of running in

parallel with the mains supply for testing purposes and for the purposes of

transferring load without the need for supply break

43 Reliability

For each power supply arrangement a reliability assessment shall becarried out to determine the probability of failure of supply

In the early stages of design a reliability study may be undertaken as part of the

comparison of alternative methods of providing power supplies Such studies would

also be useful in determining the cost of material failures The undertaking of

these studies may form part of the Contractors workscope Where the Project Team

is required to carry out such a study the terms of reference related to objectives

data gathering and evaluation shall be clearly specified

44 Primary Substation

441 Generator circuits (other than local emergency generators) and public

utility power intakes should be connected together at a common

primary substation the busbars of which are used as the main load

distribution centre Where generators and public utility power intakes

may be located at different points throughout the site these shall be

interconnected

Thus there will be at least one and for larger sites more primary substations

442 The switchgear for primary substations shall comply with BP Group GS112-9 (or BP Group GS 112-8 where only LV supplies are involved)

Detailed guid ance for H V and LV switchgear is contained in BP Group RP 12-6

and BP Group RP 12-7

443 Busbar arrangements shall be selected to be cost effective operationally

flexible and safe The following technical points shall be taken into

account

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 11

(i) Operational flexibility to permit loads and power supplies to be effectively

connected under scheduled and unscheduled outages of circuits and

busbar sections

(ii) Minimal switchgear per circuit and simple control and protection

(iii) Unscheduled loss of busbar sections shall not shut down the system beyond the level designed and provided for

(iv) Scheduled maintenance of busbars shall be possible without system

shutdowns beyond those designed and provided for

It may often be found necessary to locate the incoming circuit breakers of a busbar

to a location half way along one side of a busbar in order to be more assured that

100 of the load is unlikely to flow in one section of the busbars

The possibility of bus section circuit breaker fault conditions in metal enclosed

switchgear which may cause a full switchboard shutdown for remedial repairs

should be considered However unless there are overriding reasons for thecontrary BP do not design switchboards to cater for this eventuality

444 Single busbar arrangements for primary supply substations should be

provided subject to the following criteria-

(i) The switchgear shall be indoor metalclad type

(ii) The single busbar shall be split into a number of sections by

using suitable switchgear The number of sections of busbars

shall be consistent with the acceptable loss of incoming or

outgoing circuits under both scheduled and unscheduled lossconditions

(iii) Routine busbar maintenance shall not be considered to be

necessary or shall be an infrequent occurrence

Where there would be 3 incoming transformer feeders the busbar would normally

be expected to be in 3 parts with feeder circuit breakers arranged on each of the

sections of busbar

445 Double busbar arrangements shall be provided in installations where

outdoor air insulated busbars are installed or where regular busbar maintenance is considered necessary for environmental or pollution

reasons They may also be supplied where the operational flexibility

available from being able to connect incoming power circuits and

outgoing load circuits in a variety of ways is considered to be

particularly advantageous

The perceived need for double busbar arrangements for indoor metalclad HV

switchgear was strong in early Refinery designs but has virtually disappeared from

modern Refinery and other industrial installations Therefore the use of double

busbar arrangements needs to be carefully considered and advantages balanced

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 12

against the considerable additional costs of Building Switchgear and Protective

arrangements One generally clear case for double busbar arrangements lies in

outdoor installations where maintenance work on busbars would be greater

446 Ringbars or mesh busbars arrangements shall not be used

Ring or mesh arrangements are generally difficult to extend and therefore are

considered to have limited application However this type of arrangement has

switchgear saving advantages where the system is unlikely to require modification

447 Where the power supply is obtained from a public utility via equipment

such as transformers or feeders the busbars shall be sectionalised to

prevent total power system shutdown in the event of unscheduled

outage of any busbar section Coincidental maintenance of a public

utility intake transformer shall not be considered

It is considered that maintenance of incoming transformers and feeds would be lowand would be quickly completed Therefore high expense in order to reduce an

already unlikely event is not considered worthwhile

448 The maximum number of busbar sections should not exceed the number

of individual power sources

This requirement sets out to avoid over flexibility in a power system which although

useful in contemplation is of little economic benefit in practice

449 The outgoing load circuits shall be connected to busbar sections in such

a way as to optimise power flow across busbar section switches

commensurate with reliability and operating considerations and shall

also permit unscheduled and scheduled busbar section outages with the

minimum disturbance to the loads being supplied

See also the commentary to section 443

4410 Generators may be connected either directly to the primary power

supply busbar or via generator transformers The type of connection

shall be selected depending upon the economics associated with both

the generation voltage and the primary supply busbar voltage

Typical arrangements for primary substations for a variety of types of power supply are shown in Figure 1

Primary substations should be located in areas which are not classifiedas hazardous The selected location within the site shall-

(a) Take account of the ability to distribute power to the onsite

loads without unnecessarily high distribution equipment costs

(b) Be adjacent to the generation or public utility intake

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 13

(c) Be suitable for future expansion

Where it is impossible to locate the primary substation outside of the hazardous

areas arrangements for forced ventilation of the substation shall be made Air for

the ventilation shall be taken from a remote and safe area the substation shall beequipped with air lock doors gas detectors (which shall cause immediate de-

energisation of all electrical equipment in the substation which is not suitable for a

zone 1 environment) and loss of sufficient ventilation and pressurisation shall

initiate an alarm condition which although not causing a trip of the switchgear

shall be used as an operator based time dependent system for the effect of repair

Shutdown shall be initiated should repairs not be possible within an operator

defined time scale

45 Frequency and Voltage Regulation

451 The power system design shall be arranged to ensure that the voltage

variation (between full load and lightly loaded conditions) experiencedat any piece of equipment designated as a load (ie not including

distribution equipment) shall not exceed plusmn 5 of the declared system

nominal voltage Further the power system shall be arranged to be able

to withstand without undue stress a transient voltage variation to 80

of nominal for a 10 second period or such longer duration at specific

points if necessary Special consideration shall be given to power

frequency overvoltage effects and the need for Power System

equipment to withstand higher overvoltages under some circumstances

This requirement ensures that standard equipment parameters would not be

compromised Where the system voltage deviates beyond the 5 limit apart fromequipment life expectation being eroded there is a danger of exceeding the

hazardous area certification limits for that equipment installed in a hazardous area

This may not actually yield failures or temperatures likely to cause ignition of a

vapour which may be present but will increase the likelihood of such occurrences

and will infringe the basic safety intention

The Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 r equires voltage variations to be within plusmn

6 However standards for equipment state a plusmn 5 tolerance for voltage Hence

the lower limit is specified here

Where power systems which have automatic voltage control can experience

significant load rejection (eg as may be the case of a Power System supplied by generators must direct-on-line start large machines which subsequently exhibit

rapid VAr decrease leaving machines in an overexcited state) significant

overvoltage levels may be predicted (120 to 125 of nominal voltage can be

predicted) This may require special specification of transformers to avoid

problems caused by overfluxing or increased current due to magnetic excitation

Special attention should be paid to voltage and frequency tolerance specifications

for generator transformers which may need to match the run up characteristic of the

generator This can require the transformer to be capable of withstanding full rated

voltage at 80 of rated frequency

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 14

See 811 for motor starting requirements This can give rise to a voltage

depression at motor terminals of 20 which therefore requires that the power

system should be able to successfully accept this condition for the starting period

Typical starting periods can range from 1 to 10 seconds depending upon machine

and system ratings and machine inertia Starting times beyond 10 seconds are

possible where particularly high inertia loads need to be accelerated (eg fans)

however these would constitute a special application and should be treated byexception

452 Where the public utility intake of a site is via transformers these

transformers and their voltage regulation equipment shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance on transformer construction and specification is given in BP

Group RP 12-9

Where necessary for voltage regulation purposes the incoming transformers shall

be equipped with on load and automatic tap change equipment

453 Where there is on-site generation the generators and their governor

and voltage regulation equipment shall comply with BP Group GS 112-

6 or BP Group GS 160-1

Detailed guidance on generator application is not featured as a separate part of the

BP Group RP 12 series of documents

454 Automatic voltage regulation equipment of power systems which have

both on-site generation and public utility intakes via transformers shall

be designed so that there is no detrimental inter-action

There are a number of options which can be considered for voltage control In

general the excitation of the power generators can be arranged for zero VAr

importexport for the whole site and at the same time the intake transformer

controller can be arranged to maintain voltage at a pre set level

455 The excitation systems of synchronous motors shall be arranged to

ensure no detrimental interactive effects with transformer automatic tap

change equipment

In the case of synchronous motors where it is probable that the synchronous motor would be small in relation to the supply intake capacity it is probable that the

excitation can be arranged to maintain a constant power factor to the machine and

the transformer tap change control would be arranged to maintain voltage within

pre set levels

456 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation where

the site has no public utility connection shall be designed such that

generator loading may be automatically shared between the operating

sets and that the nominal supply frequency is maintained within the

approved tolerance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 15

Where governor droop control is employed there should be an operator in

attendance who could take action from time to time to ensure that the system

frequency remained within reasonable limits Such limits should be plusmn 1 and the

output system frequency time should be within 30 seconds of standard time

Statement of these limits for design purposes does not indicate a need to supply an

appropriate standard clock arrangement although power plants supplying

townships or camp areas are encouraged to have this facility The limit for frequency time may be relaxed for small power plants and those where frequency

time is considered unimportant (eg Where there are no time signals reliant upon

mains frequency)

For unmanned power plants or for those where constant operator intervention

would be undesirable the system frequency may be controlled by an isochronous

controller designed to provide overall frequency and generator loadings within

prescribed limits

457 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation at a

site with a public utility connection shall be designed for parallel

operation with the public utility and shall incorporate the protection

arrangements which shall ensure that under public utility collapse ( or

unacceptable major disturbance) the site will retain a defined loading

condition The arrangement shall also incorporate the means for

independent operation

Where a facility is interconnected with a Public Utility the control of the power

system frequency must be under the control of the Public Utility Therefore only

defined load governor settings or droop load sharing control systems are possible

However such interconnection is always subject to disconnection under automatic

protection system operation which will leave the power generators supplying the

site load Under these conditions whatever the original generator control arrangements the generators must revert to independent load sharing control

46 Synchronising

461 Synchronising andor check synchronising equipment shall be provided

wherever more than one source of power may be operated in parallel

with another A synchronising philosophy shall be prepared

See also sections 463 and 464 Because there can be many alternative ways of

achieving a reasonable synchronising arrangement it is expected that there would

be prepared a synchronisingcheck synchronising philosophy (or design document) for every installation which will define the particular arrangements

462 Manual synchronising arrangements shall always be provided for the

incoming power generator circuit breakers This shall comprise

voltmeters and a synchroscope to show the voltage and frequency

differences between the two systems that need to be paralleled A

check synchronising relay should be utilised to prevent operator

maloperation but in order to allow closing a power source on to a dead

system as is required under black start conditions the check

synchronising relay shall have a means of manual or automatic override

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 16

Wherever possible and economically feasible the manual synchronising system

supplied shall also include automatic synchronising applied to the generator

controls

Manual synchronising facilities should also be applied to any primary switchgear

bus section circuit breaker and to circuit breakers incoming to the primary switchboard which can make a parallel connection with other sources

463 Synchronising or check synchronising facilities shall be fitted to busbar

section and bus coupler circuit breakers where it is possible to run the

two systems feeding either section of a busbar completely segregated

from the other The number of circuit breakers provided with

synchronising or check synchronising facilities should be kept to a

minimum A similar logic shall be applied to public utility intake

circuits Alternatively circuit breaker interlocking schemes shall be

installed to preclude the possibility of paralleling two sources of power

where synchronising facilities are excluded

Notwithstanding the provisions of 464 it is not expected that there would be a

need to include synchronising or check synchronising facilities on system voltage

levels more than two levels removed from the power generation busbar where the

power system is operated with bus sections normally closed However this is a

general rule and should the system be commonly operated with open bus sections

for significant periods and there is little central system control or information

dissemination the arrangement should be reviewed

464 Synchronising facilities shall be provided at the primary power supply

voltage and should be avoided at other voltages by use of appropriatecircuit breaker interlocking

The form of interlocking should avoid the need for break-before-make action unless

absolutely necessary This may need to be associated with upstream bus section

circuit breakers and incoming circuit breakers to the upstream switchboard See

463 (commentary) for provisions should distances be too great for the economic

use of interlocking

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems

Detailed guidance on this subject is given in BP Group RP 12-5 dc

power supplies for control systems shall comply with BP Group GS112-11 and ac power supplies shall comply with BP Group GS 112-10

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 17

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

51 General

511 The distribution network shall be designed to carry continuously at least

110 of the Maximum Demand associated with peak design production at the maximum ambient conditions

The requirement for 110 capacity is considered to be applicable to all

components within the distribution system including transformer capacity It does

not include capacity of equipment considered to constitute a load to the power

system eg Induction Machines which should be rated as close as possible to

actual process demands

Refer also to the commentary to Section 311

Switchboards should be supplied with a de gree of s pares and room for expansion

Further details may be found in BP Group RP 12-6 and 7

512 Where required the reliability associated with any part of the system

shall be assessed and presented in qualitative and quantitative terms

In general the design of the power system distribution should be based upon

qualitative requirements which include assessments for meeting power supply

continuity in the event of maintenance and in the event of failure Since electrical

distribution systems are inherently reliable the design requirements are commonly

based upon the need to disconnect distribution electrical equipment to carry out

routine maintenance and at the same time keep power supplies available for

operating plant However under some circumstances the need to assess the

electrical reliability may arise (perhaps as part of an overall assessment of plant failure but possibly as part of a comparison of alternative supplies for new plant)

Under these circumstances the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and the Mean

Time To Repair (MTTR) concerning power system failure at any particular

switchboard would be required In addition it is recommended that the quantitative

statement indicate the probability of failure occurring over a particular timeframe

(eg Provide a value and definition of the probability of zero failures over a 12

month period)

See also sections 412 (commentary) 422 and 43

513 The distribution system shall be designed using one of the basic

arrangements further outlined in 52 through 56 and incorporating thecontrol features of 57 The system designed shall be described in a

design philosophy document

It is considered that the design features contained in sections 52 through 56 would

be suitable for all of the industrial power systems likely to be required by BP

However should an alternative philosophy be available it should be compared with

a standard double radial system in terms of operation reliability maintainability

and cost

The depictions in the drawings which illustrate the texts of 52 and 55 are fairly

conventional in that Contactors are employed only for motor feeders Under some

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 18

circumstances Contactors can prove an economic choice for transformer or

Switchboard feeders The depictions are for an extensive installation typical of

Refinery or other large system Offshore systems may be considered as similar but

without the higher voltage level and interconnections to Public Utility

52 Single Radial

521 These should be used to provide power to non essential electrical loads

those where alternative sources of energy are available such as standby

generating plant or those process loads for which a lower availability

can be accepted

Where minimum facilities engineering is required and the process plant can be (or

will regularly be) switched off then single radial systems may be contemplated to

satisfy process demands It is considered that maintenance of electrical systems

could be scheduled for normal process plant shutdown times and the reliability of

electrical distribution systems is generally much better than required by the process

system

522 Each component of the single radial circuit shall be capable of supplying

110 of the required electrical load Transformers or other plant

which includes forced cooling equipment shall not rely entirely on the

forced cooling arrangements to obtain the necessary rating

Refer to the commentary to Section 311 for more detail on load estimation

Where the loading is of a cyclical nature and the forced cooling would not be

expected to operate for more than 2 hours in any 12 hour period then capacities

based upon forced cooling can be considered However where this is the case acooling system failure alarm shall be provided

53 Double Radial

531 Essential and Process Sensitive loads should be supplied by two or

more identically rated radial systems

Figure 1(a) details a double radial system of feed

532 In double radial systems each circuit shall be capable of carrying a

110 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall include bussection switchgear They shall be arranged to ensure that unscheduled

outage of any component of the circuit would not result in loss of

power supply after the faulty equipment has been disconnected from the

system

See section 311 for detail on load estimation

Exceptions to the requirement for all supplies to be maintained may be made in the

following cases-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 19

(a) For bus section circuit breaker faults These may sometimes cause damage

which may require complete switchboard shutdown However the

occurrence of such faults is sufficiently rare as to be neglected

(b) Where there may be some non-essential loads supplied from a double

radial system These may receive a single radial supply from a double

radial system and therefore would not receive a supply in the event of some forms of double radial system outage

533 Double radially fed systems should generally be operated in parallel

with all bus-section switches closed

It is considered that the advantage of continuity of supply in the event of relatively

light fault conditions which is offered by closed bus section systems outweighs the

disadvantages of increased fault disturbance for heavy fault conditions It is also

more inherently safe since the switchgear fault conditions are based upon the worst

possible supply condition However see also section 534

534 Where switchgear fault levels are found to be above the values outlined

in 23 attention shall be given to operating with bus-section breakers

open as opposed to purchasing higher fault level switchgear Where an

open bus-section breaker philosophy is being given attention the need

to restore rapidly the supplies to drives shall determine whether

automatic closure of bus section circuit breaker(s) is to be employed

Switchgear fault levels could be readily reduced by increasing the impedance of

incoming transformers (Where new transformers will be purchased) However

increasing the impedance of transformers increases the voltage regulation between

light and full load There is therefore a trade-off between fault duty and normal voltage regulation

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

54 Triple Radial

541 Critical and essential loads may be alternatively supplied by triple

identically rated radial systems These systems are preferred to double

radial systems wherever there is an overall total cost advantage

A triple radial system comprises three feeders and three feeder transformers to

provide supply to a distribution switchboard

542 Each circuit of triple fed radial systems shall be capable of providing at

least 55 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall be split into at

least three sections with two bus-section switches

This will allow for the loss of any one of the three circuits leaving the two healthy

circuits still capable of providing 110 of the Maximum Demand

543 Triple radial systems shall be provided where the power flow is

relatively large They shall generally be operated with only two circuits

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 2

intended to ensure that an economic appraisal of alternative courses of action is

undertaken or has been considered

The nominal phase to phase voltage for systems where voltages exceed1000 V should be selected from those detailed in IEC 38 When the

phase to phase voltage is below 1000 V the appropriate nominal

voltage to meet the national standards of the site location should beused For greenfield sites or offshore locations where the possibilityof interconnection with an outside authority is low the use of non-standard voltages below 1000 V (eg 660 V) shall be based oneconomic considerations

In the UK the nominal LV voltage would be either 415 V or 440 V phase to phase

with a tolerance of plusmn 5 (Notwithstanding current legislation which may suggest

that nominal voltages will in future be 380 V plusmn 10 or the provisions of the

Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 which require voltage tolerances to be within plusmn

6 for voltages less than 132 kV) See also 451

Any deployment of non standard voltage systems should be based upon specificeconomic studies which take full account of the need to hold spares which may be

beyond normal stock levels

22 Frequency

The frequency selected for power systems will be either 50 or 60 Hzdepending on the national standards of the site location Where a site isto be remotely located and powered only from on-site generation thefrequency selected should be compatible with the frequency of supplyof the nearest local electrical supply source or public utility if it isenvisaged that future inter-connection is desirable Where future inter-

connection with other sources of electricity supply is not envisaged as being possible or where economic advantages outweigh the benefits infuture possible interconnections the frequency of supply shall beselected on economic considerations and on ease of obtaining suitableequipment

North Sea experience indicates that selecting 60 Hz frequency tends to offer

possible economic advantages and as European equipment (ie widely available

equipment) suppliers can gear their product range to this frequency and the

standard voltages within Europe such selection becomes more likely

23 Rating

(i) Power systems with a voltage in excess of 1000 V should be so

designed that the rms value of the ac component of the short-

circuit breaking current of circuit breakers designed to IEC 56

andor BP Group GS 112-9 should be selected from values

readily available from equipment manufacturers

The selection of 25 kA as a symmetrical short circuit breaking capacity

could be found to represent a general economic ceiling to the available

fault levels for equipment Where there will be economic advantage in

providing switchgear of higher ratings eg 40 kA then this would be

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 3

encouraged In any case in a green field situation the Short Circuit

capability of the installation should be based upon economic grounds The

capability of switchgear should always be proven by test before being

accepted into full duty service Testing would be particularly important

where enhanced make fault levels or enhanced dc content at break levels

are required The requirements for testing is contained within BP Group

GS 112-9 however at the design stage account should be taken for anyneed for Type Testing See also 631

(ii) For power systems with a voltage less than 1000V the rms

value of the ac component of the short-circuit breaking current

of circuit breakers designed to IEC 947 andor BP Group GS

112-8 should not exceed 50 kA

See the commentary for (i) above Where economically viable the selection

of 80 kA or above rated switchgear is encouraged BP Group GS 112-8

includes testing requirements for LV circuit breakers

3 LOADS

31 Rating and Diversity Factors

311 Electrical equipment shall be rated to carry continuously the maximum

load associated with peak design production with an additional 10

contingency The ambient conditions at which this rating applies shall

be defined in equipment specifications and shall not be less than 40degC

maximum air temperature at an altitude not exceeding 1000 m

A load list would normally identify all process loads and would further identify the

power to be absorbed by the mechanical drive This would be adjusted for

efficiency of the electrical drive to arrive at a value of power to be drawn from the

electrical system Aggregated plant loading should be carried out in accordance

with 312 Beyond this estimate only one allowance of contingency should be taken

on the thus identified after diversity plant load Where a total system load is to be

estimated which includes a number of individual switchgear loads estimated in this

manner care should be taken to be assured of only one overall estimate for

contingency

The specification of maximum temperature and elevation are chosen in order to be

assured that equipment has sufficient capacity for the most arduous of likely

conditions albeit at a standard elevation However where the location is such that

it is clear that there is no possibility of reaching the standard 40degC level and there

is economic advantage in relaxing the temperature the actual maximum and

minimum temperatures should be specified Similarly if the elevation is above

1000m the actual elevation should be specified

312 Assessment of maximum load requirements of an installation shall allow

for diversity between various loads drives or plants Appropriate

factors shall consider the likelihood of loads drives production or

process trains coincidentally requiring peak demands and shall be based

on similar installations wherever possible

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 4

It is considered important that power system loading estimates be based upon

absorbed demands for machine loads with appropriate allowances for efficiency

and power factor In addition the effect of diversity should be assessed preferably

by using a concept of intermittence or alternatively by the application of well

proven diversity factors In the absence of either of these methods an average

maximum loading expectation may be assessed by adding 50 of the intermittent

load (that controlled by level switches or by thermocouples or other control

devices) to the continuously running loads In addition to this aggregated load an

assessment of likely standby load operating should be made A maximum of

standby operation may be obtained by considering boiler outage (insufficient steam

for steam turbine drivers) or by a maximum product throughput condition

32 Types of Load

All loads shall be presented with clear definition of their types inaccordance with the following-

321 Basic Information

For each identified electrical load a description of the service should begiven together with an indication of whether the device is a machine or a static load

(i) Dynamic

These are electric motors driving rotating equipment

(ii) Static

These are non-moving types of electrical equipment such as lighting heating

supplies to rectifiers etc

The bulk of the loads on the majority of BP installations comprise dynamic loads

and the proportions of dynamic to static loads are generally in the ratio of 101

Where there are machines supplied by Variable Speed Drives these may exhibit

properties similar to those of some static loads viz constant power demand despite

voltage variations Their contribution to system fault level is limited by the power

electronic system in some cases to zero contribution

322 Essential Loads

These are loads which are important to the safety of the installation or the operational staff and which require power to permit a reasonablycontrolled shutdown in emergency They shall have a secondindependent power source and be generally associated with no break supplies In certain cases a short supply break may be acceptable if thisdoes not represent a hazard to safety

BP Group RP 12-5 contains advice concerning the categorisation of power supplies

suitable for control systems The concept of essential loads used here is fairly close

to the concept of Class A contained in that RP however the loads would not

require the level of duplication required for Class A systems Included in the

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 5

concept of essential power system loads are such devices as Lub oil pumps for Gas

Turbines ventilation systems helipad lighting some floodlighting systems

navigational aids radio systems etc The term Essential used here was chosen to

align with the term Essential as defined in the IEE Recommendations for the

Electrical and Electronic Equipment of Mobile and Fixed Offshore Installations

It is noted that some loads which are essential by this definition may require the provision of Emergency Power Supply Facilities in order to meet Legislative

Requirements This is not inconsistent with the definition of Essential Loads used

here which is aimed at providing a convenient process for being assured that all

such critical loads are covered by the appropriate level of power supply (See

further Section 421)

323 Process Sensitive Loads

These are loads whose loss would affect continuity of plant operationresulting in loss of revenue but would not result in an unsafe situationarising Any decision to provide an alternative source of supply for these types of load shall be based on economic considerations

Included in this category are general lighting systems and process demands

It is sometimes possible particularly where process loadings are relatively low to

include sufficient into an emergency generator capacity to allow some processes to

continue on reduced capacity when main power generators are not available

There are no general rules for this type of provision except to emphasise that

application of such loads should not compromise any emergency services Each

case would be project specific

324 Non-sensitive Loads

Non-sensitive loads are those which do not form an importantcomponent of a production or process plant and their disconnectioncould be borne for relatively long periods with minimal or nuisancevalue They usually form a small proportion of the total connected loadand may have a single power source

Typical examples of these loads are the domestic part of accommodation offices

Workshops some water injection some potable water systems etc

4 POWER SUPPLY SOURCES

41 General

The power supply system shall be designed to provide safe andeconomical operation The safety aspects should cover both plant and

personnel Economic considerations shall cover capital maintenanceand running costs and include an assessment of the reliability andconsequent availability of the system The cost of improved power systems reliability should be weighed against the progressive potentialsavings due to decreased loss of production

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 6

It is expected that for any significant power system design there will have been an

economic comparison of alternative arrangements Larger projects would be

expected to initiate a formal safety review and this process would ensure that the

basic safety needs of the project would be satisfied For smaller projects or plant

extensions where such a formal review may not be arranged the designer should

nonetheless consider safety aspects relating to the electrical system and produce an

outline document which presents these issues for the record

All negotiations with public utilities shall be the sole responsibility of BP

In as much as the arrangements with Public Authorities will form part of the long

term operational environment for the installation it is considered necessary that

the operator (assumed to be BP in the context of this document) is fully aware and

has the sole responsibility for the longer term compliance with the requirements

arising from any negotiations Such responsibility should not be delegated to a third

party unless the third party has an ongoing operational responsibility

It is considered that Contractors may request information from Public Utilities onbehalf of BP in pursuit of the determination of options relating to possible

installations or changes to existing installations but that in doing so it is made clear

that any formal agreement which arises from the information or investigation will

be with the operating company (BP)

The principal source of electrical supply for any location subject to therequirements of 411 to 413 shall be defined

The power supply arrangements are fundamental to any operating site and need to

feature strongly in the overall project concept A power supply philosophy

document which records the arrangements for power supply and the reasoning

associated with any selection is considered highly desirable A contractor mayhave part of his workscope associated with an evaluation and selection of power

supply arrangements in which case such a presentation is assured The selection of

the power supply arrangements may have formed part of a feasibility (or Statement

of Requirements) study which may have been produced by BP in which case the

definition of the power supply arrangements would form part of a contractors

specification

411 Electrical Import from a Public Utility

Where the principal source of electrical power is selected to be from a public utility the supply should be via duplicate feeders An exception

to this may be permitted for economic reasons where low power loadsare to be supplied and where a single feeder may be employed

It would be expected that there could be a costbenefit statement to justify the use of

single feeds Where the supply is low power and not essential for operations (eg

Cathodic Protection supplies) the justification is trivial however single supplies

with on site standby generation which will operate to supply full load in the event of

a main power supply failure may be an economic alternative to a duel supply

arrangement

Essential loads should always be provided for by on-site power supplyequipment

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 7

See 322 (commentary)

Where economically viable power generation on site may be arrangedto peak-lop or otherwise supplement the external power supply

412 On-site Generation with no Public Utility Connection

Where a site is offshore or remote from a public utility network or hasa surplus of fuel or process energy on-site generation will normally beexpected as the principal source of power The on-site power generation arrangements shall be defined taking into account thefollowing factors-

(i) The fuel source

(ii) The nature of the process energy

(iii) The process steam or other heat requirements if any

(iv) The relationship between electric power requirements and the

energy sources on any given site

The number and arrangement of power generating sets should reflectthe particular needs of the installation in terms of Availability andReliability Where an availability of above 80 is required a minimumof 2 generating sets will be required on sites where there is noalternative electricity supply Under these circumstances the following

criteria should be satisfied-

(i) There should be sufficient generation to meet the Maximum

Demand when the largest single source of electrical supply is

out of service at peak demand times due to maintenance or any

other reason

(ii) Where more than 2 generators are installed those loads

considered as Process Sensitive (ie those loads which must

operate to maintain either full or a reduced production) shall be

supplied when the largest capacity generator is out of service

and the second largest generator is coincidentally shut down due

to unforeseen circumstances

All power generation facilities which cannot derive alternative power from another source shall be arranged with Black Start facilities TheBlack Start arrangements may involve use of Emergency or In-Housediesel generators

For systems requiring high reliability the probability of having sufficient power

generation for 100 of the load (provided by the main power supply system) in a 12

month period should be 99 This would normally require an installation of at

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 8

least 3 generators Under some circumstances this (high) reliability requirement

can be relaxed particularly where the consequences of power supply failure are not

severe In such circumstances only two (or even one) main power generators could

be considered

Where multiple power generators are provided there needs to be a philosophy of

supply related to normal operation maintenance shutdown and to failure Where 3 generators are installed it is reasonable to expect that substantial production could

be achieved by a single set remaining available following failure of the second set

with the third unavailable

413 On-site Generation Run in Parallel with a Public Utility

Where on-site generation is selected to be the principal source of power and where a connection to a public utility is available considerationshall be given to the following options related to connection to thePublic Utility-

(i) As a standby source of electric power

(ii) A means of export of surplus electrical power

(iii) A combination of both

(iv) As a Black Start Facility

It is expected that the power generation philosophy would consider these options

which would be contained within a formal design record See also 411 where

there may be economic benefit in peak lopping of the Public Utility supply taking advantage of tariff opportunities

42 Emergency Power Supply Equipment

421 Power supplies to Essential loads should be achieved by one or more of

the following-

(i) Providing an alternative source of energy such as batteries

(ii) Increasing the amount (or being assured of sufficient sheer

numbers) of normal supply generation equipment with anarrangement for duplicate fuel supply which effectively avoids

single contingency power outage

(iii) Ensuring a number of alternative supply feeds are available to

the loads and that the alternatives effectively provide duplication

to avoid single contingency power loss

(iv) Local Diesel Generation

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 9

In general it is expected that Essential loads would receive battery supplies or

would be associated with an emergency generator However where this is

impractical leads to low reliability or is prohibitively expensive the least cost of

the remaining alternatives should normally be adopted

The concept of increased power generation in (ii) above is meant to allow for

emergency power supplies to be designed as part of a normal power generation and distribution system The criteria for design would be that the power source and the

distribution system for the Essential loads would maintain sufficiently high security

for these safety critical systems A similar concept is considered appropriate for

the concept of having a suitable number of alternative supply feeds detailed in (iii)

above

422 In the application of 421 (ii) the power supply to Essential loads shall

be designed to remain available in the event of at least two of the

installed main power generators being unavailable The probability of

zero interruptions to the Essential load feed busbar over a 12 month

period shall be 99 or better Where necessary a loadshedding schemeshall be installed to secure the supply to the Essential loads Essential

loads shall not form part of the loadshedding arrangements

The concept of additional power generation being suitable for emergency supply

duty will clearly not be possible without there being at least 3 power generation sets

available Where one power generator thus installed is of lower capacity than the

system maximum demand andor the nature of the load can lead to instability it is

expected that a load shedding scheme would be employed to ensure that the

Essential loads would be maintained for any fault condition which could leave a

single machine on the busbar

423 Where increased main generating plant or local standby plant is selectedto provide power to Essential loads it shall be either diesel engine or

gas turbine driven generator set(s) Local standby or emergency

generator prime movers shall have their own dedicated fuel supply All

prime movers for main generators (where these are deemed to provide

Essential supplies) shall be arranged for two fuel sources with

automatic transfer Power generation for Essential loads shall be rated

to have a spare capacity of at least 10

These provisions are designed to ensure that a single contingency fault (eg fuel

supply failure) will not cause power supply loss

424 Emergency generator sets shall be capable of starting and running when

no alternative source of electrical ac power is available ie a black

start capability This may be achieved by compressed air starting with

air receivers being capable of six engine starts from one air charge or

by battery starting with a similar capability or by both methods

The requirements for emergency generators are contained in BP Group GS 160-1

In general two starting methods are required It should be noted that the location

of emergency generators should normally be in a non-classified area with supply

air derived from a clean source For offshore installations the location of the

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 10

emergency generator should be on an outside wall which can have louvers open to

supply combustion air Care should be taken to ensure that the exhaust and air

intakes are located to avoid problems associated with other adjacent plant or

systems

425 Emergency generators shall be provided with automatic starting and

loading facilities A simple and reliable method of ensuring that

emergency generators can be immediately switched to their pre-defined

load shall be arranged Manual facilities shall also be provided for

regular testing purposes Testing facilities should permit the loading of

standby generator sets

It is preferred that the emergency generator should be capable of running in

parallel with the mains supply for testing purposes and for the purposes of

transferring load without the need for supply break

43 Reliability

For each power supply arrangement a reliability assessment shall becarried out to determine the probability of failure of supply

In the early stages of design a reliability study may be undertaken as part of the

comparison of alternative methods of providing power supplies Such studies would

also be useful in determining the cost of material failures The undertaking of

these studies may form part of the Contractors workscope Where the Project Team

is required to carry out such a study the terms of reference related to objectives

data gathering and evaluation shall be clearly specified

44 Primary Substation

441 Generator circuits (other than local emergency generators) and public

utility power intakes should be connected together at a common

primary substation the busbars of which are used as the main load

distribution centre Where generators and public utility power intakes

may be located at different points throughout the site these shall be

interconnected

Thus there will be at least one and for larger sites more primary substations

442 The switchgear for primary substations shall comply with BP Group GS112-9 (or BP Group GS 112-8 where only LV supplies are involved)

Detailed guid ance for H V and LV switchgear is contained in BP Group RP 12-6

and BP Group RP 12-7

443 Busbar arrangements shall be selected to be cost effective operationally

flexible and safe The following technical points shall be taken into

account

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 11

(i) Operational flexibility to permit loads and power supplies to be effectively

connected under scheduled and unscheduled outages of circuits and

busbar sections

(ii) Minimal switchgear per circuit and simple control and protection

(iii) Unscheduled loss of busbar sections shall not shut down the system beyond the level designed and provided for

(iv) Scheduled maintenance of busbars shall be possible without system

shutdowns beyond those designed and provided for

It may often be found necessary to locate the incoming circuit breakers of a busbar

to a location half way along one side of a busbar in order to be more assured that

100 of the load is unlikely to flow in one section of the busbars

The possibility of bus section circuit breaker fault conditions in metal enclosed

switchgear which may cause a full switchboard shutdown for remedial repairs

should be considered However unless there are overriding reasons for thecontrary BP do not design switchboards to cater for this eventuality

444 Single busbar arrangements for primary supply substations should be

provided subject to the following criteria-

(i) The switchgear shall be indoor metalclad type

(ii) The single busbar shall be split into a number of sections by

using suitable switchgear The number of sections of busbars

shall be consistent with the acceptable loss of incoming or

outgoing circuits under both scheduled and unscheduled lossconditions

(iii) Routine busbar maintenance shall not be considered to be

necessary or shall be an infrequent occurrence

Where there would be 3 incoming transformer feeders the busbar would normally

be expected to be in 3 parts with feeder circuit breakers arranged on each of the

sections of busbar

445 Double busbar arrangements shall be provided in installations where

outdoor air insulated busbars are installed or where regular busbar maintenance is considered necessary for environmental or pollution

reasons They may also be supplied where the operational flexibility

available from being able to connect incoming power circuits and

outgoing load circuits in a variety of ways is considered to be

particularly advantageous

The perceived need for double busbar arrangements for indoor metalclad HV

switchgear was strong in early Refinery designs but has virtually disappeared from

modern Refinery and other industrial installations Therefore the use of double

busbar arrangements needs to be carefully considered and advantages balanced

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 12

against the considerable additional costs of Building Switchgear and Protective

arrangements One generally clear case for double busbar arrangements lies in

outdoor installations where maintenance work on busbars would be greater

446 Ringbars or mesh busbars arrangements shall not be used

Ring or mesh arrangements are generally difficult to extend and therefore are

considered to have limited application However this type of arrangement has

switchgear saving advantages where the system is unlikely to require modification

447 Where the power supply is obtained from a public utility via equipment

such as transformers or feeders the busbars shall be sectionalised to

prevent total power system shutdown in the event of unscheduled

outage of any busbar section Coincidental maintenance of a public

utility intake transformer shall not be considered

It is considered that maintenance of incoming transformers and feeds would be lowand would be quickly completed Therefore high expense in order to reduce an

already unlikely event is not considered worthwhile

448 The maximum number of busbar sections should not exceed the number

of individual power sources

This requirement sets out to avoid over flexibility in a power system which although

useful in contemplation is of little economic benefit in practice

449 The outgoing load circuits shall be connected to busbar sections in such

a way as to optimise power flow across busbar section switches

commensurate with reliability and operating considerations and shall

also permit unscheduled and scheduled busbar section outages with the

minimum disturbance to the loads being supplied

See also the commentary to section 443

4410 Generators may be connected either directly to the primary power

supply busbar or via generator transformers The type of connection

shall be selected depending upon the economics associated with both

the generation voltage and the primary supply busbar voltage

Typical arrangements for primary substations for a variety of types of power supply are shown in Figure 1

Primary substations should be located in areas which are not classifiedas hazardous The selected location within the site shall-

(a) Take account of the ability to distribute power to the onsite

loads without unnecessarily high distribution equipment costs

(b) Be adjacent to the generation or public utility intake

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 13

(c) Be suitable for future expansion

Where it is impossible to locate the primary substation outside of the hazardous

areas arrangements for forced ventilation of the substation shall be made Air for

the ventilation shall be taken from a remote and safe area the substation shall beequipped with air lock doors gas detectors (which shall cause immediate de-

energisation of all electrical equipment in the substation which is not suitable for a

zone 1 environment) and loss of sufficient ventilation and pressurisation shall

initiate an alarm condition which although not causing a trip of the switchgear

shall be used as an operator based time dependent system for the effect of repair

Shutdown shall be initiated should repairs not be possible within an operator

defined time scale

45 Frequency and Voltage Regulation

451 The power system design shall be arranged to ensure that the voltage

variation (between full load and lightly loaded conditions) experiencedat any piece of equipment designated as a load (ie not including

distribution equipment) shall not exceed plusmn 5 of the declared system

nominal voltage Further the power system shall be arranged to be able

to withstand without undue stress a transient voltage variation to 80

of nominal for a 10 second period or such longer duration at specific

points if necessary Special consideration shall be given to power

frequency overvoltage effects and the need for Power System

equipment to withstand higher overvoltages under some circumstances

This requirement ensures that standard equipment parameters would not be

compromised Where the system voltage deviates beyond the 5 limit apart fromequipment life expectation being eroded there is a danger of exceeding the

hazardous area certification limits for that equipment installed in a hazardous area

This may not actually yield failures or temperatures likely to cause ignition of a

vapour which may be present but will increase the likelihood of such occurrences

and will infringe the basic safety intention

The Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 r equires voltage variations to be within plusmn

6 However standards for equipment state a plusmn 5 tolerance for voltage Hence

the lower limit is specified here

Where power systems which have automatic voltage control can experience

significant load rejection (eg as may be the case of a Power System supplied by generators must direct-on-line start large machines which subsequently exhibit

rapid VAr decrease leaving machines in an overexcited state) significant

overvoltage levels may be predicted (120 to 125 of nominal voltage can be

predicted) This may require special specification of transformers to avoid

problems caused by overfluxing or increased current due to magnetic excitation

Special attention should be paid to voltage and frequency tolerance specifications

for generator transformers which may need to match the run up characteristic of the

generator This can require the transformer to be capable of withstanding full rated

voltage at 80 of rated frequency

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 14

See 811 for motor starting requirements This can give rise to a voltage

depression at motor terminals of 20 which therefore requires that the power

system should be able to successfully accept this condition for the starting period

Typical starting periods can range from 1 to 10 seconds depending upon machine

and system ratings and machine inertia Starting times beyond 10 seconds are

possible where particularly high inertia loads need to be accelerated (eg fans)

however these would constitute a special application and should be treated byexception

452 Where the public utility intake of a site is via transformers these

transformers and their voltage regulation equipment shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance on transformer construction and specification is given in BP

Group RP 12-9

Where necessary for voltage regulation purposes the incoming transformers shall

be equipped with on load and automatic tap change equipment

453 Where there is on-site generation the generators and their governor

and voltage regulation equipment shall comply with BP Group GS 112-

6 or BP Group GS 160-1

Detailed guidance on generator application is not featured as a separate part of the

BP Group RP 12 series of documents

454 Automatic voltage regulation equipment of power systems which have

both on-site generation and public utility intakes via transformers shall

be designed so that there is no detrimental inter-action

There are a number of options which can be considered for voltage control In

general the excitation of the power generators can be arranged for zero VAr

importexport for the whole site and at the same time the intake transformer

controller can be arranged to maintain voltage at a pre set level

455 The excitation systems of synchronous motors shall be arranged to

ensure no detrimental interactive effects with transformer automatic tap

change equipment

In the case of synchronous motors where it is probable that the synchronous motor would be small in relation to the supply intake capacity it is probable that the

excitation can be arranged to maintain a constant power factor to the machine and

the transformer tap change control would be arranged to maintain voltage within

pre set levels

456 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation where

the site has no public utility connection shall be designed such that

generator loading may be automatically shared between the operating

sets and that the nominal supply frequency is maintained within the

approved tolerance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 15

Where governor droop control is employed there should be an operator in

attendance who could take action from time to time to ensure that the system

frequency remained within reasonable limits Such limits should be plusmn 1 and the

output system frequency time should be within 30 seconds of standard time

Statement of these limits for design purposes does not indicate a need to supply an

appropriate standard clock arrangement although power plants supplying

townships or camp areas are encouraged to have this facility The limit for frequency time may be relaxed for small power plants and those where frequency

time is considered unimportant (eg Where there are no time signals reliant upon

mains frequency)

For unmanned power plants or for those where constant operator intervention

would be undesirable the system frequency may be controlled by an isochronous

controller designed to provide overall frequency and generator loadings within

prescribed limits

457 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation at a

site with a public utility connection shall be designed for parallel

operation with the public utility and shall incorporate the protection

arrangements which shall ensure that under public utility collapse ( or

unacceptable major disturbance) the site will retain a defined loading

condition The arrangement shall also incorporate the means for

independent operation

Where a facility is interconnected with a Public Utility the control of the power

system frequency must be under the control of the Public Utility Therefore only

defined load governor settings or droop load sharing control systems are possible

However such interconnection is always subject to disconnection under automatic

protection system operation which will leave the power generators supplying the

site load Under these conditions whatever the original generator control arrangements the generators must revert to independent load sharing control

46 Synchronising

461 Synchronising andor check synchronising equipment shall be provided

wherever more than one source of power may be operated in parallel

with another A synchronising philosophy shall be prepared

See also sections 463 and 464 Because there can be many alternative ways of

achieving a reasonable synchronising arrangement it is expected that there would

be prepared a synchronisingcheck synchronising philosophy (or design document) for every installation which will define the particular arrangements

462 Manual synchronising arrangements shall always be provided for the

incoming power generator circuit breakers This shall comprise

voltmeters and a synchroscope to show the voltage and frequency

differences between the two systems that need to be paralleled A

check synchronising relay should be utilised to prevent operator

maloperation but in order to allow closing a power source on to a dead

system as is required under black start conditions the check

synchronising relay shall have a means of manual or automatic override

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 16

Wherever possible and economically feasible the manual synchronising system

supplied shall also include automatic synchronising applied to the generator

controls

Manual synchronising facilities should also be applied to any primary switchgear

bus section circuit breaker and to circuit breakers incoming to the primary switchboard which can make a parallel connection with other sources

463 Synchronising or check synchronising facilities shall be fitted to busbar

section and bus coupler circuit breakers where it is possible to run the

two systems feeding either section of a busbar completely segregated

from the other The number of circuit breakers provided with

synchronising or check synchronising facilities should be kept to a

minimum A similar logic shall be applied to public utility intake

circuits Alternatively circuit breaker interlocking schemes shall be

installed to preclude the possibility of paralleling two sources of power

where synchronising facilities are excluded

Notwithstanding the provisions of 464 it is not expected that there would be a

need to include synchronising or check synchronising facilities on system voltage

levels more than two levels removed from the power generation busbar where the

power system is operated with bus sections normally closed However this is a

general rule and should the system be commonly operated with open bus sections

for significant periods and there is little central system control or information

dissemination the arrangement should be reviewed

464 Synchronising facilities shall be provided at the primary power supply

voltage and should be avoided at other voltages by use of appropriatecircuit breaker interlocking

The form of interlocking should avoid the need for break-before-make action unless

absolutely necessary This may need to be associated with upstream bus section

circuit breakers and incoming circuit breakers to the upstream switchboard See

463 (commentary) for provisions should distances be too great for the economic

use of interlocking

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems

Detailed guidance on this subject is given in BP Group RP 12-5 dc

power supplies for control systems shall comply with BP Group GS112-11 and ac power supplies shall comply with BP Group GS 112-10

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 17

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

51 General

511 The distribution network shall be designed to carry continuously at least

110 of the Maximum Demand associated with peak design production at the maximum ambient conditions

The requirement for 110 capacity is considered to be applicable to all

components within the distribution system including transformer capacity It does

not include capacity of equipment considered to constitute a load to the power

system eg Induction Machines which should be rated as close as possible to

actual process demands

Refer also to the commentary to Section 311

Switchboards should be supplied with a de gree of s pares and room for expansion

Further details may be found in BP Group RP 12-6 and 7

512 Where required the reliability associated with any part of the system

shall be assessed and presented in qualitative and quantitative terms

In general the design of the power system distribution should be based upon

qualitative requirements which include assessments for meeting power supply

continuity in the event of maintenance and in the event of failure Since electrical

distribution systems are inherently reliable the design requirements are commonly

based upon the need to disconnect distribution electrical equipment to carry out

routine maintenance and at the same time keep power supplies available for

operating plant However under some circumstances the need to assess the

electrical reliability may arise (perhaps as part of an overall assessment of plant failure but possibly as part of a comparison of alternative supplies for new plant)

Under these circumstances the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and the Mean

Time To Repair (MTTR) concerning power system failure at any particular

switchboard would be required In addition it is recommended that the quantitative

statement indicate the probability of failure occurring over a particular timeframe

(eg Provide a value and definition of the probability of zero failures over a 12

month period)

See also sections 412 (commentary) 422 and 43

513 The distribution system shall be designed using one of the basic

arrangements further outlined in 52 through 56 and incorporating thecontrol features of 57 The system designed shall be described in a

design philosophy document

It is considered that the design features contained in sections 52 through 56 would

be suitable for all of the industrial power systems likely to be required by BP

However should an alternative philosophy be available it should be compared with

a standard double radial system in terms of operation reliability maintainability

and cost

The depictions in the drawings which illustrate the texts of 52 and 55 are fairly

conventional in that Contactors are employed only for motor feeders Under some

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 18

circumstances Contactors can prove an economic choice for transformer or

Switchboard feeders The depictions are for an extensive installation typical of

Refinery or other large system Offshore systems may be considered as similar but

without the higher voltage level and interconnections to Public Utility

52 Single Radial

521 These should be used to provide power to non essential electrical loads

those where alternative sources of energy are available such as standby

generating plant or those process loads for which a lower availability

can be accepted

Where minimum facilities engineering is required and the process plant can be (or

will regularly be) switched off then single radial systems may be contemplated to

satisfy process demands It is considered that maintenance of electrical systems

could be scheduled for normal process plant shutdown times and the reliability of

electrical distribution systems is generally much better than required by the process

system

522 Each component of the single radial circuit shall be capable of supplying

110 of the required electrical load Transformers or other plant

which includes forced cooling equipment shall not rely entirely on the

forced cooling arrangements to obtain the necessary rating

Refer to the commentary to Section 311 for more detail on load estimation

Where the loading is of a cyclical nature and the forced cooling would not be

expected to operate for more than 2 hours in any 12 hour period then capacities

based upon forced cooling can be considered However where this is the case acooling system failure alarm shall be provided

53 Double Radial

531 Essential and Process Sensitive loads should be supplied by two or

more identically rated radial systems

Figure 1(a) details a double radial system of feed

532 In double radial systems each circuit shall be capable of carrying a

110 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall include bussection switchgear They shall be arranged to ensure that unscheduled

outage of any component of the circuit would not result in loss of

power supply after the faulty equipment has been disconnected from the

system

See section 311 for detail on load estimation

Exceptions to the requirement for all supplies to be maintained may be made in the

following cases-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 19

(a) For bus section circuit breaker faults These may sometimes cause damage

which may require complete switchboard shutdown However the

occurrence of such faults is sufficiently rare as to be neglected

(b) Where there may be some non-essential loads supplied from a double

radial system These may receive a single radial supply from a double

radial system and therefore would not receive a supply in the event of some forms of double radial system outage

533 Double radially fed systems should generally be operated in parallel

with all bus-section switches closed

It is considered that the advantage of continuity of supply in the event of relatively

light fault conditions which is offered by closed bus section systems outweighs the

disadvantages of increased fault disturbance for heavy fault conditions It is also

more inherently safe since the switchgear fault conditions are based upon the worst

possible supply condition However see also section 534

534 Where switchgear fault levels are found to be above the values outlined

in 23 attention shall be given to operating with bus-section breakers

open as opposed to purchasing higher fault level switchgear Where an

open bus-section breaker philosophy is being given attention the need

to restore rapidly the supplies to drives shall determine whether

automatic closure of bus section circuit breaker(s) is to be employed

Switchgear fault levels could be readily reduced by increasing the impedance of

incoming transformers (Where new transformers will be purchased) However

increasing the impedance of transformers increases the voltage regulation between

light and full load There is therefore a trade-off between fault duty and normal voltage regulation

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

54 Triple Radial

541 Critical and essential loads may be alternatively supplied by triple

identically rated radial systems These systems are preferred to double

radial systems wherever there is an overall total cost advantage

A triple radial system comprises three feeders and three feeder transformers to

provide supply to a distribution switchboard

542 Each circuit of triple fed radial systems shall be capable of providing at

least 55 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall be split into at

least three sections with two bus-section switches

This will allow for the loss of any one of the three circuits leaving the two healthy

circuits still capable of providing 110 of the Maximum Demand

543 Triple radial systems shall be provided where the power flow is

relatively large They shall generally be operated with only two circuits

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 3

encouraged In any case in a green field situation the Short Circuit

capability of the installation should be based upon economic grounds The

capability of switchgear should always be proven by test before being

accepted into full duty service Testing would be particularly important

where enhanced make fault levels or enhanced dc content at break levels

are required The requirements for testing is contained within BP Group

GS 112-9 however at the design stage account should be taken for anyneed for Type Testing See also 631

(ii) For power systems with a voltage less than 1000V the rms

value of the ac component of the short-circuit breaking current

of circuit breakers designed to IEC 947 andor BP Group GS

112-8 should not exceed 50 kA

See the commentary for (i) above Where economically viable the selection

of 80 kA or above rated switchgear is encouraged BP Group GS 112-8

includes testing requirements for LV circuit breakers

3 LOADS

31 Rating and Diversity Factors

311 Electrical equipment shall be rated to carry continuously the maximum

load associated with peak design production with an additional 10

contingency The ambient conditions at which this rating applies shall

be defined in equipment specifications and shall not be less than 40degC

maximum air temperature at an altitude not exceeding 1000 m

A load list would normally identify all process loads and would further identify the

power to be absorbed by the mechanical drive This would be adjusted for

efficiency of the electrical drive to arrive at a value of power to be drawn from the

electrical system Aggregated plant loading should be carried out in accordance

with 312 Beyond this estimate only one allowance of contingency should be taken

on the thus identified after diversity plant load Where a total system load is to be

estimated which includes a number of individual switchgear loads estimated in this

manner care should be taken to be assured of only one overall estimate for

contingency

The specification of maximum temperature and elevation are chosen in order to be

assured that equipment has sufficient capacity for the most arduous of likely

conditions albeit at a standard elevation However where the location is such that

it is clear that there is no possibility of reaching the standard 40degC level and there

is economic advantage in relaxing the temperature the actual maximum and

minimum temperatures should be specified Similarly if the elevation is above

1000m the actual elevation should be specified

312 Assessment of maximum load requirements of an installation shall allow

for diversity between various loads drives or plants Appropriate

factors shall consider the likelihood of loads drives production or

process trains coincidentally requiring peak demands and shall be based

on similar installations wherever possible

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 4

It is considered important that power system loading estimates be based upon

absorbed demands for machine loads with appropriate allowances for efficiency

and power factor In addition the effect of diversity should be assessed preferably

by using a concept of intermittence or alternatively by the application of well

proven diversity factors In the absence of either of these methods an average

maximum loading expectation may be assessed by adding 50 of the intermittent

load (that controlled by level switches or by thermocouples or other control

devices) to the continuously running loads In addition to this aggregated load an

assessment of likely standby load operating should be made A maximum of

standby operation may be obtained by considering boiler outage (insufficient steam

for steam turbine drivers) or by a maximum product throughput condition

32 Types of Load

All loads shall be presented with clear definition of their types inaccordance with the following-

321 Basic Information

For each identified electrical load a description of the service should begiven together with an indication of whether the device is a machine or a static load

(i) Dynamic

These are electric motors driving rotating equipment

(ii) Static

These are non-moving types of electrical equipment such as lighting heating

supplies to rectifiers etc

The bulk of the loads on the majority of BP installations comprise dynamic loads

and the proportions of dynamic to static loads are generally in the ratio of 101

Where there are machines supplied by Variable Speed Drives these may exhibit

properties similar to those of some static loads viz constant power demand despite

voltage variations Their contribution to system fault level is limited by the power

electronic system in some cases to zero contribution

322 Essential Loads

These are loads which are important to the safety of the installation or the operational staff and which require power to permit a reasonablycontrolled shutdown in emergency They shall have a secondindependent power source and be generally associated with no break supplies In certain cases a short supply break may be acceptable if thisdoes not represent a hazard to safety

BP Group RP 12-5 contains advice concerning the categorisation of power supplies

suitable for control systems The concept of essential loads used here is fairly close

to the concept of Class A contained in that RP however the loads would not

require the level of duplication required for Class A systems Included in the

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 5

concept of essential power system loads are such devices as Lub oil pumps for Gas

Turbines ventilation systems helipad lighting some floodlighting systems

navigational aids radio systems etc The term Essential used here was chosen to

align with the term Essential as defined in the IEE Recommendations for the

Electrical and Electronic Equipment of Mobile and Fixed Offshore Installations

It is noted that some loads which are essential by this definition may require the provision of Emergency Power Supply Facilities in order to meet Legislative

Requirements This is not inconsistent with the definition of Essential Loads used

here which is aimed at providing a convenient process for being assured that all

such critical loads are covered by the appropriate level of power supply (See

further Section 421)

323 Process Sensitive Loads

These are loads whose loss would affect continuity of plant operationresulting in loss of revenue but would not result in an unsafe situationarising Any decision to provide an alternative source of supply for these types of load shall be based on economic considerations

Included in this category are general lighting systems and process demands

It is sometimes possible particularly where process loadings are relatively low to

include sufficient into an emergency generator capacity to allow some processes to

continue on reduced capacity when main power generators are not available

There are no general rules for this type of provision except to emphasise that

application of such loads should not compromise any emergency services Each

case would be project specific

324 Non-sensitive Loads

Non-sensitive loads are those which do not form an importantcomponent of a production or process plant and their disconnectioncould be borne for relatively long periods with minimal or nuisancevalue They usually form a small proportion of the total connected loadand may have a single power source

Typical examples of these loads are the domestic part of accommodation offices

Workshops some water injection some potable water systems etc

4 POWER SUPPLY SOURCES

41 General

The power supply system shall be designed to provide safe andeconomical operation The safety aspects should cover both plant and

personnel Economic considerations shall cover capital maintenanceand running costs and include an assessment of the reliability andconsequent availability of the system The cost of improved power systems reliability should be weighed against the progressive potentialsavings due to decreased loss of production

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 6

It is expected that for any significant power system design there will have been an

economic comparison of alternative arrangements Larger projects would be

expected to initiate a formal safety review and this process would ensure that the

basic safety needs of the project would be satisfied For smaller projects or plant

extensions where such a formal review may not be arranged the designer should

nonetheless consider safety aspects relating to the electrical system and produce an

outline document which presents these issues for the record

All negotiations with public utilities shall be the sole responsibility of BP

In as much as the arrangements with Public Authorities will form part of the long

term operational environment for the installation it is considered necessary that

the operator (assumed to be BP in the context of this document) is fully aware and

has the sole responsibility for the longer term compliance with the requirements

arising from any negotiations Such responsibility should not be delegated to a third

party unless the third party has an ongoing operational responsibility

It is considered that Contractors may request information from Public Utilities onbehalf of BP in pursuit of the determination of options relating to possible

installations or changes to existing installations but that in doing so it is made clear

that any formal agreement which arises from the information or investigation will

be with the operating company (BP)

The principal source of electrical supply for any location subject to therequirements of 411 to 413 shall be defined

The power supply arrangements are fundamental to any operating site and need to

feature strongly in the overall project concept A power supply philosophy

document which records the arrangements for power supply and the reasoning

associated with any selection is considered highly desirable A contractor mayhave part of his workscope associated with an evaluation and selection of power

supply arrangements in which case such a presentation is assured The selection of

the power supply arrangements may have formed part of a feasibility (or Statement

of Requirements) study which may have been produced by BP in which case the

definition of the power supply arrangements would form part of a contractors

specification

411 Electrical Import from a Public Utility

Where the principal source of electrical power is selected to be from a public utility the supply should be via duplicate feeders An exception

to this may be permitted for economic reasons where low power loadsare to be supplied and where a single feeder may be employed

It would be expected that there could be a costbenefit statement to justify the use of

single feeds Where the supply is low power and not essential for operations (eg

Cathodic Protection supplies) the justification is trivial however single supplies

with on site standby generation which will operate to supply full load in the event of

a main power supply failure may be an economic alternative to a duel supply

arrangement

Essential loads should always be provided for by on-site power supplyequipment

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 7

See 322 (commentary)

Where economically viable power generation on site may be arrangedto peak-lop or otherwise supplement the external power supply

412 On-site Generation with no Public Utility Connection

Where a site is offshore or remote from a public utility network or hasa surplus of fuel or process energy on-site generation will normally beexpected as the principal source of power The on-site power generation arrangements shall be defined taking into account thefollowing factors-

(i) The fuel source

(ii) The nature of the process energy

(iii) The process steam or other heat requirements if any

(iv) The relationship between electric power requirements and the

energy sources on any given site

The number and arrangement of power generating sets should reflectthe particular needs of the installation in terms of Availability andReliability Where an availability of above 80 is required a minimumof 2 generating sets will be required on sites where there is noalternative electricity supply Under these circumstances the following

criteria should be satisfied-

(i) There should be sufficient generation to meet the Maximum

Demand when the largest single source of electrical supply is

out of service at peak demand times due to maintenance or any

other reason

(ii) Where more than 2 generators are installed those loads

considered as Process Sensitive (ie those loads which must

operate to maintain either full or a reduced production) shall be

supplied when the largest capacity generator is out of service

and the second largest generator is coincidentally shut down due

to unforeseen circumstances

All power generation facilities which cannot derive alternative power from another source shall be arranged with Black Start facilities TheBlack Start arrangements may involve use of Emergency or In-Housediesel generators

For systems requiring high reliability the probability of having sufficient power

generation for 100 of the load (provided by the main power supply system) in a 12

month period should be 99 This would normally require an installation of at

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 8

least 3 generators Under some circumstances this (high) reliability requirement

can be relaxed particularly where the consequences of power supply failure are not

severe In such circumstances only two (or even one) main power generators could

be considered

Where multiple power generators are provided there needs to be a philosophy of

supply related to normal operation maintenance shutdown and to failure Where 3 generators are installed it is reasonable to expect that substantial production could

be achieved by a single set remaining available following failure of the second set

with the third unavailable

413 On-site Generation Run in Parallel with a Public Utility

Where on-site generation is selected to be the principal source of power and where a connection to a public utility is available considerationshall be given to the following options related to connection to thePublic Utility-

(i) As a standby source of electric power

(ii) A means of export of surplus electrical power

(iii) A combination of both

(iv) As a Black Start Facility

It is expected that the power generation philosophy would consider these options

which would be contained within a formal design record See also 411 where

there may be economic benefit in peak lopping of the Public Utility supply taking advantage of tariff opportunities

42 Emergency Power Supply Equipment

421 Power supplies to Essential loads should be achieved by one or more of

the following-

(i) Providing an alternative source of energy such as batteries

(ii) Increasing the amount (or being assured of sufficient sheer

numbers) of normal supply generation equipment with anarrangement for duplicate fuel supply which effectively avoids

single contingency power outage

(iii) Ensuring a number of alternative supply feeds are available to

the loads and that the alternatives effectively provide duplication

to avoid single contingency power loss

(iv) Local Diesel Generation

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 9

In general it is expected that Essential loads would receive battery supplies or

would be associated with an emergency generator However where this is

impractical leads to low reliability or is prohibitively expensive the least cost of

the remaining alternatives should normally be adopted

The concept of increased power generation in (ii) above is meant to allow for

emergency power supplies to be designed as part of a normal power generation and distribution system The criteria for design would be that the power source and the

distribution system for the Essential loads would maintain sufficiently high security

for these safety critical systems A similar concept is considered appropriate for

the concept of having a suitable number of alternative supply feeds detailed in (iii)

above

422 In the application of 421 (ii) the power supply to Essential loads shall

be designed to remain available in the event of at least two of the

installed main power generators being unavailable The probability of

zero interruptions to the Essential load feed busbar over a 12 month

period shall be 99 or better Where necessary a loadshedding schemeshall be installed to secure the supply to the Essential loads Essential

loads shall not form part of the loadshedding arrangements

The concept of additional power generation being suitable for emergency supply

duty will clearly not be possible without there being at least 3 power generation sets

available Where one power generator thus installed is of lower capacity than the

system maximum demand andor the nature of the load can lead to instability it is

expected that a load shedding scheme would be employed to ensure that the

Essential loads would be maintained for any fault condition which could leave a

single machine on the busbar

423 Where increased main generating plant or local standby plant is selectedto provide power to Essential loads it shall be either diesel engine or

gas turbine driven generator set(s) Local standby or emergency

generator prime movers shall have their own dedicated fuel supply All

prime movers for main generators (where these are deemed to provide

Essential supplies) shall be arranged for two fuel sources with

automatic transfer Power generation for Essential loads shall be rated

to have a spare capacity of at least 10

These provisions are designed to ensure that a single contingency fault (eg fuel

supply failure) will not cause power supply loss

424 Emergency generator sets shall be capable of starting and running when

no alternative source of electrical ac power is available ie a black

start capability This may be achieved by compressed air starting with

air receivers being capable of six engine starts from one air charge or

by battery starting with a similar capability or by both methods

The requirements for emergency generators are contained in BP Group GS 160-1

In general two starting methods are required It should be noted that the location

of emergency generators should normally be in a non-classified area with supply

air derived from a clean source For offshore installations the location of the

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 10

emergency generator should be on an outside wall which can have louvers open to

supply combustion air Care should be taken to ensure that the exhaust and air

intakes are located to avoid problems associated with other adjacent plant or

systems

425 Emergency generators shall be provided with automatic starting and

loading facilities A simple and reliable method of ensuring that

emergency generators can be immediately switched to their pre-defined

load shall be arranged Manual facilities shall also be provided for

regular testing purposes Testing facilities should permit the loading of

standby generator sets

It is preferred that the emergency generator should be capable of running in

parallel with the mains supply for testing purposes and for the purposes of

transferring load without the need for supply break

43 Reliability

For each power supply arrangement a reliability assessment shall becarried out to determine the probability of failure of supply

In the early stages of design a reliability study may be undertaken as part of the

comparison of alternative methods of providing power supplies Such studies would

also be useful in determining the cost of material failures The undertaking of

these studies may form part of the Contractors workscope Where the Project Team

is required to carry out such a study the terms of reference related to objectives

data gathering and evaluation shall be clearly specified

44 Primary Substation

441 Generator circuits (other than local emergency generators) and public

utility power intakes should be connected together at a common

primary substation the busbars of which are used as the main load

distribution centre Where generators and public utility power intakes

may be located at different points throughout the site these shall be

interconnected

Thus there will be at least one and for larger sites more primary substations

442 The switchgear for primary substations shall comply with BP Group GS112-9 (or BP Group GS 112-8 where only LV supplies are involved)

Detailed guid ance for H V and LV switchgear is contained in BP Group RP 12-6

and BP Group RP 12-7

443 Busbar arrangements shall be selected to be cost effective operationally

flexible and safe The following technical points shall be taken into

account

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 11

(i) Operational flexibility to permit loads and power supplies to be effectively

connected under scheduled and unscheduled outages of circuits and

busbar sections

(ii) Minimal switchgear per circuit and simple control and protection

(iii) Unscheduled loss of busbar sections shall not shut down the system beyond the level designed and provided for

(iv) Scheduled maintenance of busbars shall be possible without system

shutdowns beyond those designed and provided for

It may often be found necessary to locate the incoming circuit breakers of a busbar

to a location half way along one side of a busbar in order to be more assured that

100 of the load is unlikely to flow in one section of the busbars

The possibility of bus section circuit breaker fault conditions in metal enclosed

switchgear which may cause a full switchboard shutdown for remedial repairs

should be considered However unless there are overriding reasons for thecontrary BP do not design switchboards to cater for this eventuality

444 Single busbar arrangements for primary supply substations should be

provided subject to the following criteria-

(i) The switchgear shall be indoor metalclad type

(ii) The single busbar shall be split into a number of sections by

using suitable switchgear The number of sections of busbars

shall be consistent with the acceptable loss of incoming or

outgoing circuits under both scheduled and unscheduled lossconditions

(iii) Routine busbar maintenance shall not be considered to be

necessary or shall be an infrequent occurrence

Where there would be 3 incoming transformer feeders the busbar would normally

be expected to be in 3 parts with feeder circuit breakers arranged on each of the

sections of busbar

445 Double busbar arrangements shall be provided in installations where

outdoor air insulated busbars are installed or where regular busbar maintenance is considered necessary for environmental or pollution

reasons They may also be supplied where the operational flexibility

available from being able to connect incoming power circuits and

outgoing load circuits in a variety of ways is considered to be

particularly advantageous

The perceived need for double busbar arrangements for indoor metalclad HV

switchgear was strong in early Refinery designs but has virtually disappeared from

modern Refinery and other industrial installations Therefore the use of double

busbar arrangements needs to be carefully considered and advantages balanced

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 12

against the considerable additional costs of Building Switchgear and Protective

arrangements One generally clear case for double busbar arrangements lies in

outdoor installations where maintenance work on busbars would be greater

446 Ringbars or mesh busbars arrangements shall not be used

Ring or mesh arrangements are generally difficult to extend and therefore are

considered to have limited application However this type of arrangement has

switchgear saving advantages where the system is unlikely to require modification

447 Where the power supply is obtained from a public utility via equipment

such as transformers or feeders the busbars shall be sectionalised to

prevent total power system shutdown in the event of unscheduled

outage of any busbar section Coincidental maintenance of a public

utility intake transformer shall not be considered

It is considered that maintenance of incoming transformers and feeds would be lowand would be quickly completed Therefore high expense in order to reduce an

already unlikely event is not considered worthwhile

448 The maximum number of busbar sections should not exceed the number

of individual power sources

This requirement sets out to avoid over flexibility in a power system which although

useful in contemplation is of little economic benefit in practice

449 The outgoing load circuits shall be connected to busbar sections in such

a way as to optimise power flow across busbar section switches

commensurate with reliability and operating considerations and shall

also permit unscheduled and scheduled busbar section outages with the

minimum disturbance to the loads being supplied

See also the commentary to section 443

4410 Generators may be connected either directly to the primary power

supply busbar or via generator transformers The type of connection

shall be selected depending upon the economics associated with both

the generation voltage and the primary supply busbar voltage

Typical arrangements for primary substations for a variety of types of power supply are shown in Figure 1

Primary substations should be located in areas which are not classifiedas hazardous The selected location within the site shall-

(a) Take account of the ability to distribute power to the onsite

loads without unnecessarily high distribution equipment costs

(b) Be adjacent to the generation or public utility intake

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 13

(c) Be suitable for future expansion

Where it is impossible to locate the primary substation outside of the hazardous

areas arrangements for forced ventilation of the substation shall be made Air for

the ventilation shall be taken from a remote and safe area the substation shall beequipped with air lock doors gas detectors (which shall cause immediate de-

energisation of all electrical equipment in the substation which is not suitable for a

zone 1 environment) and loss of sufficient ventilation and pressurisation shall

initiate an alarm condition which although not causing a trip of the switchgear

shall be used as an operator based time dependent system for the effect of repair

Shutdown shall be initiated should repairs not be possible within an operator

defined time scale

45 Frequency and Voltage Regulation

451 The power system design shall be arranged to ensure that the voltage

variation (between full load and lightly loaded conditions) experiencedat any piece of equipment designated as a load (ie not including

distribution equipment) shall not exceed plusmn 5 of the declared system

nominal voltage Further the power system shall be arranged to be able

to withstand without undue stress a transient voltage variation to 80

of nominal for a 10 second period or such longer duration at specific

points if necessary Special consideration shall be given to power

frequency overvoltage effects and the need for Power System

equipment to withstand higher overvoltages under some circumstances

This requirement ensures that standard equipment parameters would not be

compromised Where the system voltage deviates beyond the 5 limit apart fromequipment life expectation being eroded there is a danger of exceeding the

hazardous area certification limits for that equipment installed in a hazardous area

This may not actually yield failures or temperatures likely to cause ignition of a

vapour which may be present but will increase the likelihood of such occurrences

and will infringe the basic safety intention

The Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 r equires voltage variations to be within plusmn

6 However standards for equipment state a plusmn 5 tolerance for voltage Hence

the lower limit is specified here

Where power systems which have automatic voltage control can experience

significant load rejection (eg as may be the case of a Power System supplied by generators must direct-on-line start large machines which subsequently exhibit

rapid VAr decrease leaving machines in an overexcited state) significant

overvoltage levels may be predicted (120 to 125 of nominal voltage can be

predicted) This may require special specification of transformers to avoid

problems caused by overfluxing or increased current due to magnetic excitation

Special attention should be paid to voltage and frequency tolerance specifications

for generator transformers which may need to match the run up characteristic of the

generator This can require the transformer to be capable of withstanding full rated

voltage at 80 of rated frequency

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 14

See 811 for motor starting requirements This can give rise to a voltage

depression at motor terminals of 20 which therefore requires that the power

system should be able to successfully accept this condition for the starting period

Typical starting periods can range from 1 to 10 seconds depending upon machine

and system ratings and machine inertia Starting times beyond 10 seconds are

possible where particularly high inertia loads need to be accelerated (eg fans)

however these would constitute a special application and should be treated byexception

452 Where the public utility intake of a site is via transformers these

transformers and their voltage regulation equipment shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance on transformer construction and specification is given in BP

Group RP 12-9

Where necessary for voltage regulation purposes the incoming transformers shall

be equipped with on load and automatic tap change equipment

453 Where there is on-site generation the generators and their governor

and voltage regulation equipment shall comply with BP Group GS 112-

6 or BP Group GS 160-1

Detailed guidance on generator application is not featured as a separate part of the

BP Group RP 12 series of documents

454 Automatic voltage regulation equipment of power systems which have

both on-site generation and public utility intakes via transformers shall

be designed so that there is no detrimental inter-action

There are a number of options which can be considered for voltage control In

general the excitation of the power generators can be arranged for zero VAr

importexport for the whole site and at the same time the intake transformer

controller can be arranged to maintain voltage at a pre set level

455 The excitation systems of synchronous motors shall be arranged to

ensure no detrimental interactive effects with transformer automatic tap

change equipment

In the case of synchronous motors where it is probable that the synchronous motor would be small in relation to the supply intake capacity it is probable that the

excitation can be arranged to maintain a constant power factor to the machine and

the transformer tap change control would be arranged to maintain voltage within

pre set levels

456 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation where

the site has no public utility connection shall be designed such that

generator loading may be automatically shared between the operating

sets and that the nominal supply frequency is maintained within the

approved tolerance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 15

Where governor droop control is employed there should be an operator in

attendance who could take action from time to time to ensure that the system

frequency remained within reasonable limits Such limits should be plusmn 1 and the

output system frequency time should be within 30 seconds of standard time

Statement of these limits for design purposes does not indicate a need to supply an

appropriate standard clock arrangement although power plants supplying

townships or camp areas are encouraged to have this facility The limit for frequency time may be relaxed for small power plants and those where frequency

time is considered unimportant (eg Where there are no time signals reliant upon

mains frequency)

For unmanned power plants or for those where constant operator intervention

would be undesirable the system frequency may be controlled by an isochronous

controller designed to provide overall frequency and generator loadings within

prescribed limits

457 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation at a

site with a public utility connection shall be designed for parallel

operation with the public utility and shall incorporate the protection

arrangements which shall ensure that under public utility collapse ( or

unacceptable major disturbance) the site will retain a defined loading

condition The arrangement shall also incorporate the means for

independent operation

Where a facility is interconnected with a Public Utility the control of the power

system frequency must be under the control of the Public Utility Therefore only

defined load governor settings or droop load sharing control systems are possible

However such interconnection is always subject to disconnection under automatic

protection system operation which will leave the power generators supplying the

site load Under these conditions whatever the original generator control arrangements the generators must revert to independent load sharing control

46 Synchronising

461 Synchronising andor check synchronising equipment shall be provided

wherever more than one source of power may be operated in parallel

with another A synchronising philosophy shall be prepared

See also sections 463 and 464 Because there can be many alternative ways of

achieving a reasonable synchronising arrangement it is expected that there would

be prepared a synchronisingcheck synchronising philosophy (or design document) for every installation which will define the particular arrangements

462 Manual synchronising arrangements shall always be provided for the

incoming power generator circuit breakers This shall comprise

voltmeters and a synchroscope to show the voltage and frequency

differences between the two systems that need to be paralleled A

check synchronising relay should be utilised to prevent operator

maloperation but in order to allow closing a power source on to a dead

system as is required under black start conditions the check

synchronising relay shall have a means of manual or automatic override

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 16

Wherever possible and economically feasible the manual synchronising system

supplied shall also include automatic synchronising applied to the generator

controls

Manual synchronising facilities should also be applied to any primary switchgear

bus section circuit breaker and to circuit breakers incoming to the primary switchboard which can make a parallel connection with other sources

463 Synchronising or check synchronising facilities shall be fitted to busbar

section and bus coupler circuit breakers where it is possible to run the

two systems feeding either section of a busbar completely segregated

from the other The number of circuit breakers provided with

synchronising or check synchronising facilities should be kept to a

minimum A similar logic shall be applied to public utility intake

circuits Alternatively circuit breaker interlocking schemes shall be

installed to preclude the possibility of paralleling two sources of power

where synchronising facilities are excluded

Notwithstanding the provisions of 464 it is not expected that there would be a

need to include synchronising or check synchronising facilities on system voltage

levels more than two levels removed from the power generation busbar where the

power system is operated with bus sections normally closed However this is a

general rule and should the system be commonly operated with open bus sections

for significant periods and there is little central system control or information

dissemination the arrangement should be reviewed

464 Synchronising facilities shall be provided at the primary power supply

voltage and should be avoided at other voltages by use of appropriatecircuit breaker interlocking

The form of interlocking should avoid the need for break-before-make action unless

absolutely necessary This may need to be associated with upstream bus section

circuit breakers and incoming circuit breakers to the upstream switchboard See

463 (commentary) for provisions should distances be too great for the economic

use of interlocking

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems

Detailed guidance on this subject is given in BP Group RP 12-5 dc

power supplies for control systems shall comply with BP Group GS112-11 and ac power supplies shall comply with BP Group GS 112-10

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 17

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

51 General

511 The distribution network shall be designed to carry continuously at least

110 of the Maximum Demand associated with peak design production at the maximum ambient conditions

The requirement for 110 capacity is considered to be applicable to all

components within the distribution system including transformer capacity It does

not include capacity of equipment considered to constitute a load to the power

system eg Induction Machines which should be rated as close as possible to

actual process demands

Refer also to the commentary to Section 311

Switchboards should be supplied with a de gree of s pares and room for expansion

Further details may be found in BP Group RP 12-6 and 7

512 Where required the reliability associated with any part of the system

shall be assessed and presented in qualitative and quantitative terms

In general the design of the power system distribution should be based upon

qualitative requirements which include assessments for meeting power supply

continuity in the event of maintenance and in the event of failure Since electrical

distribution systems are inherently reliable the design requirements are commonly

based upon the need to disconnect distribution electrical equipment to carry out

routine maintenance and at the same time keep power supplies available for

operating plant However under some circumstances the need to assess the

electrical reliability may arise (perhaps as part of an overall assessment of plant failure but possibly as part of a comparison of alternative supplies for new plant)

Under these circumstances the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and the Mean

Time To Repair (MTTR) concerning power system failure at any particular

switchboard would be required In addition it is recommended that the quantitative

statement indicate the probability of failure occurring over a particular timeframe

(eg Provide a value and definition of the probability of zero failures over a 12

month period)

See also sections 412 (commentary) 422 and 43

513 The distribution system shall be designed using one of the basic

arrangements further outlined in 52 through 56 and incorporating thecontrol features of 57 The system designed shall be described in a

design philosophy document

It is considered that the design features contained in sections 52 through 56 would

be suitable for all of the industrial power systems likely to be required by BP

However should an alternative philosophy be available it should be compared with

a standard double radial system in terms of operation reliability maintainability

and cost

The depictions in the drawings which illustrate the texts of 52 and 55 are fairly

conventional in that Contactors are employed only for motor feeders Under some

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 18

circumstances Contactors can prove an economic choice for transformer or

Switchboard feeders The depictions are for an extensive installation typical of

Refinery or other large system Offshore systems may be considered as similar but

without the higher voltage level and interconnections to Public Utility

52 Single Radial

521 These should be used to provide power to non essential electrical loads

those where alternative sources of energy are available such as standby

generating plant or those process loads for which a lower availability

can be accepted

Where minimum facilities engineering is required and the process plant can be (or

will regularly be) switched off then single radial systems may be contemplated to

satisfy process demands It is considered that maintenance of electrical systems

could be scheduled for normal process plant shutdown times and the reliability of

electrical distribution systems is generally much better than required by the process

system

522 Each component of the single radial circuit shall be capable of supplying

110 of the required electrical load Transformers or other plant

which includes forced cooling equipment shall not rely entirely on the

forced cooling arrangements to obtain the necessary rating

Refer to the commentary to Section 311 for more detail on load estimation

Where the loading is of a cyclical nature and the forced cooling would not be

expected to operate for more than 2 hours in any 12 hour period then capacities

based upon forced cooling can be considered However where this is the case acooling system failure alarm shall be provided

53 Double Radial

531 Essential and Process Sensitive loads should be supplied by two or

more identically rated radial systems

Figure 1(a) details a double radial system of feed

532 In double radial systems each circuit shall be capable of carrying a

110 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall include bussection switchgear They shall be arranged to ensure that unscheduled

outage of any component of the circuit would not result in loss of

power supply after the faulty equipment has been disconnected from the

system

See section 311 for detail on load estimation

Exceptions to the requirement for all supplies to be maintained may be made in the

following cases-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 19

(a) For bus section circuit breaker faults These may sometimes cause damage

which may require complete switchboard shutdown However the

occurrence of such faults is sufficiently rare as to be neglected

(b) Where there may be some non-essential loads supplied from a double

radial system These may receive a single radial supply from a double

radial system and therefore would not receive a supply in the event of some forms of double radial system outage

533 Double radially fed systems should generally be operated in parallel

with all bus-section switches closed

It is considered that the advantage of continuity of supply in the event of relatively

light fault conditions which is offered by closed bus section systems outweighs the

disadvantages of increased fault disturbance for heavy fault conditions It is also

more inherently safe since the switchgear fault conditions are based upon the worst

possible supply condition However see also section 534

534 Where switchgear fault levels are found to be above the values outlined

in 23 attention shall be given to operating with bus-section breakers

open as opposed to purchasing higher fault level switchgear Where an

open bus-section breaker philosophy is being given attention the need

to restore rapidly the supplies to drives shall determine whether

automatic closure of bus section circuit breaker(s) is to be employed

Switchgear fault levels could be readily reduced by increasing the impedance of

incoming transformers (Where new transformers will be purchased) However

increasing the impedance of transformers increases the voltage regulation between

light and full load There is therefore a trade-off between fault duty and normal voltage regulation

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

54 Triple Radial

541 Critical and essential loads may be alternatively supplied by triple

identically rated radial systems These systems are preferred to double

radial systems wherever there is an overall total cost advantage

A triple radial system comprises three feeders and three feeder transformers to

provide supply to a distribution switchboard

542 Each circuit of triple fed radial systems shall be capable of providing at

least 55 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall be split into at

least three sections with two bus-section switches

This will allow for the loss of any one of the three circuits leaving the two healthy

circuits still capable of providing 110 of the Maximum Demand

543 Triple radial systems shall be provided where the power flow is

relatively large They shall generally be operated with only two circuits

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 4

It is considered important that power system loading estimates be based upon

absorbed demands for machine loads with appropriate allowances for efficiency

and power factor In addition the effect of diversity should be assessed preferably

by using a concept of intermittence or alternatively by the application of well

proven diversity factors In the absence of either of these methods an average

maximum loading expectation may be assessed by adding 50 of the intermittent

load (that controlled by level switches or by thermocouples or other control

devices) to the continuously running loads In addition to this aggregated load an

assessment of likely standby load operating should be made A maximum of

standby operation may be obtained by considering boiler outage (insufficient steam

for steam turbine drivers) or by a maximum product throughput condition

32 Types of Load

All loads shall be presented with clear definition of their types inaccordance with the following-

321 Basic Information

For each identified electrical load a description of the service should begiven together with an indication of whether the device is a machine or a static load

(i) Dynamic

These are electric motors driving rotating equipment

(ii) Static

These are non-moving types of electrical equipment such as lighting heating

supplies to rectifiers etc

The bulk of the loads on the majority of BP installations comprise dynamic loads

and the proportions of dynamic to static loads are generally in the ratio of 101

Where there are machines supplied by Variable Speed Drives these may exhibit

properties similar to those of some static loads viz constant power demand despite

voltage variations Their contribution to system fault level is limited by the power

electronic system in some cases to zero contribution

322 Essential Loads

These are loads which are important to the safety of the installation or the operational staff and which require power to permit a reasonablycontrolled shutdown in emergency They shall have a secondindependent power source and be generally associated with no break supplies In certain cases a short supply break may be acceptable if thisdoes not represent a hazard to safety

BP Group RP 12-5 contains advice concerning the categorisation of power supplies

suitable for control systems The concept of essential loads used here is fairly close

to the concept of Class A contained in that RP however the loads would not

require the level of duplication required for Class A systems Included in the

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 5

concept of essential power system loads are such devices as Lub oil pumps for Gas

Turbines ventilation systems helipad lighting some floodlighting systems

navigational aids radio systems etc The term Essential used here was chosen to

align with the term Essential as defined in the IEE Recommendations for the

Electrical and Electronic Equipment of Mobile and Fixed Offshore Installations

It is noted that some loads which are essential by this definition may require the provision of Emergency Power Supply Facilities in order to meet Legislative

Requirements This is not inconsistent with the definition of Essential Loads used

here which is aimed at providing a convenient process for being assured that all

such critical loads are covered by the appropriate level of power supply (See

further Section 421)

323 Process Sensitive Loads

These are loads whose loss would affect continuity of plant operationresulting in loss of revenue but would not result in an unsafe situationarising Any decision to provide an alternative source of supply for these types of load shall be based on economic considerations

Included in this category are general lighting systems and process demands

It is sometimes possible particularly where process loadings are relatively low to

include sufficient into an emergency generator capacity to allow some processes to

continue on reduced capacity when main power generators are not available

There are no general rules for this type of provision except to emphasise that

application of such loads should not compromise any emergency services Each

case would be project specific

324 Non-sensitive Loads

Non-sensitive loads are those which do not form an importantcomponent of a production or process plant and their disconnectioncould be borne for relatively long periods with minimal or nuisancevalue They usually form a small proportion of the total connected loadand may have a single power source

Typical examples of these loads are the domestic part of accommodation offices

Workshops some water injection some potable water systems etc

4 POWER SUPPLY SOURCES

41 General

The power supply system shall be designed to provide safe andeconomical operation The safety aspects should cover both plant and

personnel Economic considerations shall cover capital maintenanceand running costs and include an assessment of the reliability andconsequent availability of the system The cost of improved power systems reliability should be weighed against the progressive potentialsavings due to decreased loss of production

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 6

It is expected that for any significant power system design there will have been an

economic comparison of alternative arrangements Larger projects would be

expected to initiate a formal safety review and this process would ensure that the

basic safety needs of the project would be satisfied For smaller projects or plant

extensions where such a formal review may not be arranged the designer should

nonetheless consider safety aspects relating to the electrical system and produce an

outline document which presents these issues for the record

All negotiations with public utilities shall be the sole responsibility of BP

In as much as the arrangements with Public Authorities will form part of the long

term operational environment for the installation it is considered necessary that

the operator (assumed to be BP in the context of this document) is fully aware and

has the sole responsibility for the longer term compliance with the requirements

arising from any negotiations Such responsibility should not be delegated to a third

party unless the third party has an ongoing operational responsibility

It is considered that Contractors may request information from Public Utilities onbehalf of BP in pursuit of the determination of options relating to possible

installations or changes to existing installations but that in doing so it is made clear

that any formal agreement which arises from the information or investigation will

be with the operating company (BP)

The principal source of electrical supply for any location subject to therequirements of 411 to 413 shall be defined

The power supply arrangements are fundamental to any operating site and need to

feature strongly in the overall project concept A power supply philosophy

document which records the arrangements for power supply and the reasoning

associated with any selection is considered highly desirable A contractor mayhave part of his workscope associated with an evaluation and selection of power

supply arrangements in which case such a presentation is assured The selection of

the power supply arrangements may have formed part of a feasibility (or Statement

of Requirements) study which may have been produced by BP in which case the

definition of the power supply arrangements would form part of a contractors

specification

411 Electrical Import from a Public Utility

Where the principal source of electrical power is selected to be from a public utility the supply should be via duplicate feeders An exception

to this may be permitted for economic reasons where low power loadsare to be supplied and where a single feeder may be employed

It would be expected that there could be a costbenefit statement to justify the use of

single feeds Where the supply is low power and not essential for operations (eg

Cathodic Protection supplies) the justification is trivial however single supplies

with on site standby generation which will operate to supply full load in the event of

a main power supply failure may be an economic alternative to a duel supply

arrangement

Essential loads should always be provided for by on-site power supplyequipment

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 7

See 322 (commentary)

Where economically viable power generation on site may be arrangedto peak-lop or otherwise supplement the external power supply

412 On-site Generation with no Public Utility Connection

Where a site is offshore or remote from a public utility network or hasa surplus of fuel or process energy on-site generation will normally beexpected as the principal source of power The on-site power generation arrangements shall be defined taking into account thefollowing factors-

(i) The fuel source

(ii) The nature of the process energy

(iii) The process steam or other heat requirements if any

(iv) The relationship between electric power requirements and the

energy sources on any given site

The number and arrangement of power generating sets should reflectthe particular needs of the installation in terms of Availability andReliability Where an availability of above 80 is required a minimumof 2 generating sets will be required on sites where there is noalternative electricity supply Under these circumstances the following

criteria should be satisfied-

(i) There should be sufficient generation to meet the Maximum

Demand when the largest single source of electrical supply is

out of service at peak demand times due to maintenance or any

other reason

(ii) Where more than 2 generators are installed those loads

considered as Process Sensitive (ie those loads which must

operate to maintain either full or a reduced production) shall be

supplied when the largest capacity generator is out of service

and the second largest generator is coincidentally shut down due

to unforeseen circumstances

All power generation facilities which cannot derive alternative power from another source shall be arranged with Black Start facilities TheBlack Start arrangements may involve use of Emergency or In-Housediesel generators

For systems requiring high reliability the probability of having sufficient power

generation for 100 of the load (provided by the main power supply system) in a 12

month period should be 99 This would normally require an installation of at

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 8

least 3 generators Under some circumstances this (high) reliability requirement

can be relaxed particularly where the consequences of power supply failure are not

severe In such circumstances only two (or even one) main power generators could

be considered

Where multiple power generators are provided there needs to be a philosophy of

supply related to normal operation maintenance shutdown and to failure Where 3 generators are installed it is reasonable to expect that substantial production could

be achieved by a single set remaining available following failure of the second set

with the third unavailable

413 On-site Generation Run in Parallel with a Public Utility

Where on-site generation is selected to be the principal source of power and where a connection to a public utility is available considerationshall be given to the following options related to connection to thePublic Utility-

(i) As a standby source of electric power

(ii) A means of export of surplus electrical power

(iii) A combination of both

(iv) As a Black Start Facility

It is expected that the power generation philosophy would consider these options

which would be contained within a formal design record See also 411 where

there may be economic benefit in peak lopping of the Public Utility supply taking advantage of tariff opportunities

42 Emergency Power Supply Equipment

421 Power supplies to Essential loads should be achieved by one or more of

the following-

(i) Providing an alternative source of energy such as batteries

(ii) Increasing the amount (or being assured of sufficient sheer

numbers) of normal supply generation equipment with anarrangement for duplicate fuel supply which effectively avoids

single contingency power outage

(iii) Ensuring a number of alternative supply feeds are available to

the loads and that the alternatives effectively provide duplication

to avoid single contingency power loss

(iv) Local Diesel Generation

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 9

In general it is expected that Essential loads would receive battery supplies or

would be associated with an emergency generator However where this is

impractical leads to low reliability or is prohibitively expensive the least cost of

the remaining alternatives should normally be adopted

The concept of increased power generation in (ii) above is meant to allow for

emergency power supplies to be designed as part of a normal power generation and distribution system The criteria for design would be that the power source and the

distribution system for the Essential loads would maintain sufficiently high security

for these safety critical systems A similar concept is considered appropriate for

the concept of having a suitable number of alternative supply feeds detailed in (iii)

above

422 In the application of 421 (ii) the power supply to Essential loads shall

be designed to remain available in the event of at least two of the

installed main power generators being unavailable The probability of

zero interruptions to the Essential load feed busbar over a 12 month

period shall be 99 or better Where necessary a loadshedding schemeshall be installed to secure the supply to the Essential loads Essential

loads shall not form part of the loadshedding arrangements

The concept of additional power generation being suitable for emergency supply

duty will clearly not be possible without there being at least 3 power generation sets

available Where one power generator thus installed is of lower capacity than the

system maximum demand andor the nature of the load can lead to instability it is

expected that a load shedding scheme would be employed to ensure that the

Essential loads would be maintained for any fault condition which could leave a

single machine on the busbar

423 Where increased main generating plant or local standby plant is selectedto provide power to Essential loads it shall be either diesel engine or

gas turbine driven generator set(s) Local standby or emergency

generator prime movers shall have their own dedicated fuel supply All

prime movers for main generators (where these are deemed to provide

Essential supplies) shall be arranged for two fuel sources with

automatic transfer Power generation for Essential loads shall be rated

to have a spare capacity of at least 10

These provisions are designed to ensure that a single contingency fault (eg fuel

supply failure) will not cause power supply loss

424 Emergency generator sets shall be capable of starting and running when

no alternative source of electrical ac power is available ie a black

start capability This may be achieved by compressed air starting with

air receivers being capable of six engine starts from one air charge or

by battery starting with a similar capability or by both methods

The requirements for emergency generators are contained in BP Group GS 160-1

In general two starting methods are required It should be noted that the location

of emergency generators should normally be in a non-classified area with supply

air derived from a clean source For offshore installations the location of the

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 10

emergency generator should be on an outside wall which can have louvers open to

supply combustion air Care should be taken to ensure that the exhaust and air

intakes are located to avoid problems associated with other adjacent plant or

systems

425 Emergency generators shall be provided with automatic starting and

loading facilities A simple and reliable method of ensuring that

emergency generators can be immediately switched to their pre-defined

load shall be arranged Manual facilities shall also be provided for

regular testing purposes Testing facilities should permit the loading of

standby generator sets

It is preferred that the emergency generator should be capable of running in

parallel with the mains supply for testing purposes and for the purposes of

transferring load without the need for supply break

43 Reliability

For each power supply arrangement a reliability assessment shall becarried out to determine the probability of failure of supply

In the early stages of design a reliability study may be undertaken as part of the

comparison of alternative methods of providing power supplies Such studies would

also be useful in determining the cost of material failures The undertaking of

these studies may form part of the Contractors workscope Where the Project Team

is required to carry out such a study the terms of reference related to objectives

data gathering and evaluation shall be clearly specified

44 Primary Substation

441 Generator circuits (other than local emergency generators) and public

utility power intakes should be connected together at a common

primary substation the busbars of which are used as the main load

distribution centre Where generators and public utility power intakes

may be located at different points throughout the site these shall be

interconnected

Thus there will be at least one and for larger sites more primary substations

442 The switchgear for primary substations shall comply with BP Group GS112-9 (or BP Group GS 112-8 where only LV supplies are involved)

Detailed guid ance for H V and LV switchgear is contained in BP Group RP 12-6

and BP Group RP 12-7

443 Busbar arrangements shall be selected to be cost effective operationally

flexible and safe The following technical points shall be taken into

account

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 11

(i) Operational flexibility to permit loads and power supplies to be effectively

connected under scheduled and unscheduled outages of circuits and

busbar sections

(ii) Minimal switchgear per circuit and simple control and protection

(iii) Unscheduled loss of busbar sections shall not shut down the system beyond the level designed and provided for

(iv) Scheduled maintenance of busbars shall be possible without system

shutdowns beyond those designed and provided for

It may often be found necessary to locate the incoming circuit breakers of a busbar

to a location half way along one side of a busbar in order to be more assured that

100 of the load is unlikely to flow in one section of the busbars

The possibility of bus section circuit breaker fault conditions in metal enclosed

switchgear which may cause a full switchboard shutdown for remedial repairs

should be considered However unless there are overriding reasons for thecontrary BP do not design switchboards to cater for this eventuality

444 Single busbar arrangements for primary supply substations should be

provided subject to the following criteria-

(i) The switchgear shall be indoor metalclad type

(ii) The single busbar shall be split into a number of sections by

using suitable switchgear The number of sections of busbars

shall be consistent with the acceptable loss of incoming or

outgoing circuits under both scheduled and unscheduled lossconditions

(iii) Routine busbar maintenance shall not be considered to be

necessary or shall be an infrequent occurrence

Where there would be 3 incoming transformer feeders the busbar would normally

be expected to be in 3 parts with feeder circuit breakers arranged on each of the

sections of busbar

445 Double busbar arrangements shall be provided in installations where

outdoor air insulated busbars are installed or where regular busbar maintenance is considered necessary for environmental or pollution

reasons They may also be supplied where the operational flexibility

available from being able to connect incoming power circuits and

outgoing load circuits in a variety of ways is considered to be

particularly advantageous

The perceived need for double busbar arrangements for indoor metalclad HV

switchgear was strong in early Refinery designs but has virtually disappeared from

modern Refinery and other industrial installations Therefore the use of double

busbar arrangements needs to be carefully considered and advantages balanced

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 12

against the considerable additional costs of Building Switchgear and Protective

arrangements One generally clear case for double busbar arrangements lies in

outdoor installations where maintenance work on busbars would be greater

446 Ringbars or mesh busbars arrangements shall not be used

Ring or mesh arrangements are generally difficult to extend and therefore are

considered to have limited application However this type of arrangement has

switchgear saving advantages where the system is unlikely to require modification

447 Where the power supply is obtained from a public utility via equipment

such as transformers or feeders the busbars shall be sectionalised to

prevent total power system shutdown in the event of unscheduled

outage of any busbar section Coincidental maintenance of a public

utility intake transformer shall not be considered

It is considered that maintenance of incoming transformers and feeds would be lowand would be quickly completed Therefore high expense in order to reduce an

already unlikely event is not considered worthwhile

448 The maximum number of busbar sections should not exceed the number

of individual power sources

This requirement sets out to avoid over flexibility in a power system which although

useful in contemplation is of little economic benefit in practice

449 The outgoing load circuits shall be connected to busbar sections in such

a way as to optimise power flow across busbar section switches

commensurate with reliability and operating considerations and shall

also permit unscheduled and scheduled busbar section outages with the

minimum disturbance to the loads being supplied

See also the commentary to section 443

4410 Generators may be connected either directly to the primary power

supply busbar or via generator transformers The type of connection

shall be selected depending upon the economics associated with both

the generation voltage and the primary supply busbar voltage

Typical arrangements for primary substations for a variety of types of power supply are shown in Figure 1

Primary substations should be located in areas which are not classifiedas hazardous The selected location within the site shall-

(a) Take account of the ability to distribute power to the onsite

loads without unnecessarily high distribution equipment costs

(b) Be adjacent to the generation or public utility intake

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 13

(c) Be suitable for future expansion

Where it is impossible to locate the primary substation outside of the hazardous

areas arrangements for forced ventilation of the substation shall be made Air for

the ventilation shall be taken from a remote and safe area the substation shall beequipped with air lock doors gas detectors (which shall cause immediate de-

energisation of all electrical equipment in the substation which is not suitable for a

zone 1 environment) and loss of sufficient ventilation and pressurisation shall

initiate an alarm condition which although not causing a trip of the switchgear

shall be used as an operator based time dependent system for the effect of repair

Shutdown shall be initiated should repairs not be possible within an operator

defined time scale

45 Frequency and Voltage Regulation

451 The power system design shall be arranged to ensure that the voltage

variation (between full load and lightly loaded conditions) experiencedat any piece of equipment designated as a load (ie not including

distribution equipment) shall not exceed plusmn 5 of the declared system

nominal voltage Further the power system shall be arranged to be able

to withstand without undue stress a transient voltage variation to 80

of nominal for a 10 second period or such longer duration at specific

points if necessary Special consideration shall be given to power

frequency overvoltage effects and the need for Power System

equipment to withstand higher overvoltages under some circumstances

This requirement ensures that standard equipment parameters would not be

compromised Where the system voltage deviates beyond the 5 limit apart fromequipment life expectation being eroded there is a danger of exceeding the

hazardous area certification limits for that equipment installed in a hazardous area

This may not actually yield failures or temperatures likely to cause ignition of a

vapour which may be present but will increase the likelihood of such occurrences

and will infringe the basic safety intention

The Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 r equires voltage variations to be within plusmn

6 However standards for equipment state a plusmn 5 tolerance for voltage Hence

the lower limit is specified here

Where power systems which have automatic voltage control can experience

significant load rejection (eg as may be the case of a Power System supplied by generators must direct-on-line start large machines which subsequently exhibit

rapid VAr decrease leaving machines in an overexcited state) significant

overvoltage levels may be predicted (120 to 125 of nominal voltage can be

predicted) This may require special specification of transformers to avoid

problems caused by overfluxing or increased current due to magnetic excitation

Special attention should be paid to voltage and frequency tolerance specifications

for generator transformers which may need to match the run up characteristic of the

generator This can require the transformer to be capable of withstanding full rated

voltage at 80 of rated frequency

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 14

See 811 for motor starting requirements This can give rise to a voltage

depression at motor terminals of 20 which therefore requires that the power

system should be able to successfully accept this condition for the starting period

Typical starting periods can range from 1 to 10 seconds depending upon machine

and system ratings and machine inertia Starting times beyond 10 seconds are

possible where particularly high inertia loads need to be accelerated (eg fans)

however these would constitute a special application and should be treated byexception

452 Where the public utility intake of a site is via transformers these

transformers and their voltage regulation equipment shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance on transformer construction and specification is given in BP

Group RP 12-9

Where necessary for voltage regulation purposes the incoming transformers shall

be equipped with on load and automatic tap change equipment

453 Where there is on-site generation the generators and their governor

and voltage regulation equipment shall comply with BP Group GS 112-

6 or BP Group GS 160-1

Detailed guidance on generator application is not featured as a separate part of the

BP Group RP 12 series of documents

454 Automatic voltage regulation equipment of power systems which have

both on-site generation and public utility intakes via transformers shall

be designed so that there is no detrimental inter-action

There are a number of options which can be considered for voltage control In

general the excitation of the power generators can be arranged for zero VAr

importexport for the whole site and at the same time the intake transformer

controller can be arranged to maintain voltage at a pre set level

455 The excitation systems of synchronous motors shall be arranged to

ensure no detrimental interactive effects with transformer automatic tap

change equipment

In the case of synchronous motors where it is probable that the synchronous motor would be small in relation to the supply intake capacity it is probable that the

excitation can be arranged to maintain a constant power factor to the machine and

the transformer tap change control would be arranged to maintain voltage within

pre set levels

456 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation where

the site has no public utility connection shall be designed such that

generator loading may be automatically shared between the operating

sets and that the nominal supply frequency is maintained within the

approved tolerance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 15

Where governor droop control is employed there should be an operator in

attendance who could take action from time to time to ensure that the system

frequency remained within reasonable limits Such limits should be plusmn 1 and the

output system frequency time should be within 30 seconds of standard time

Statement of these limits for design purposes does not indicate a need to supply an

appropriate standard clock arrangement although power plants supplying

townships or camp areas are encouraged to have this facility The limit for frequency time may be relaxed for small power plants and those where frequency

time is considered unimportant (eg Where there are no time signals reliant upon

mains frequency)

For unmanned power plants or for those where constant operator intervention

would be undesirable the system frequency may be controlled by an isochronous

controller designed to provide overall frequency and generator loadings within

prescribed limits

457 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation at a

site with a public utility connection shall be designed for parallel

operation with the public utility and shall incorporate the protection

arrangements which shall ensure that under public utility collapse ( or

unacceptable major disturbance) the site will retain a defined loading

condition The arrangement shall also incorporate the means for

independent operation

Where a facility is interconnected with a Public Utility the control of the power

system frequency must be under the control of the Public Utility Therefore only

defined load governor settings or droop load sharing control systems are possible

However such interconnection is always subject to disconnection under automatic

protection system operation which will leave the power generators supplying the

site load Under these conditions whatever the original generator control arrangements the generators must revert to independent load sharing control

46 Synchronising

461 Synchronising andor check synchronising equipment shall be provided

wherever more than one source of power may be operated in parallel

with another A synchronising philosophy shall be prepared

See also sections 463 and 464 Because there can be many alternative ways of

achieving a reasonable synchronising arrangement it is expected that there would

be prepared a synchronisingcheck synchronising philosophy (or design document) for every installation which will define the particular arrangements

462 Manual synchronising arrangements shall always be provided for the

incoming power generator circuit breakers This shall comprise

voltmeters and a synchroscope to show the voltage and frequency

differences between the two systems that need to be paralleled A

check synchronising relay should be utilised to prevent operator

maloperation but in order to allow closing a power source on to a dead

system as is required under black start conditions the check

synchronising relay shall have a means of manual or automatic override

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 16

Wherever possible and economically feasible the manual synchronising system

supplied shall also include automatic synchronising applied to the generator

controls

Manual synchronising facilities should also be applied to any primary switchgear

bus section circuit breaker and to circuit breakers incoming to the primary switchboard which can make a parallel connection with other sources

463 Synchronising or check synchronising facilities shall be fitted to busbar

section and bus coupler circuit breakers where it is possible to run the

two systems feeding either section of a busbar completely segregated

from the other The number of circuit breakers provided with

synchronising or check synchronising facilities should be kept to a

minimum A similar logic shall be applied to public utility intake

circuits Alternatively circuit breaker interlocking schemes shall be

installed to preclude the possibility of paralleling two sources of power

where synchronising facilities are excluded

Notwithstanding the provisions of 464 it is not expected that there would be a

need to include synchronising or check synchronising facilities on system voltage

levels more than two levels removed from the power generation busbar where the

power system is operated with bus sections normally closed However this is a

general rule and should the system be commonly operated with open bus sections

for significant periods and there is little central system control or information

dissemination the arrangement should be reviewed

464 Synchronising facilities shall be provided at the primary power supply

voltage and should be avoided at other voltages by use of appropriatecircuit breaker interlocking

The form of interlocking should avoid the need for break-before-make action unless

absolutely necessary This may need to be associated with upstream bus section

circuit breakers and incoming circuit breakers to the upstream switchboard See

463 (commentary) for provisions should distances be too great for the economic

use of interlocking

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems

Detailed guidance on this subject is given in BP Group RP 12-5 dc

power supplies for control systems shall comply with BP Group GS112-11 and ac power supplies shall comply with BP Group GS 112-10

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 17

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

51 General

511 The distribution network shall be designed to carry continuously at least

110 of the Maximum Demand associated with peak design production at the maximum ambient conditions

The requirement for 110 capacity is considered to be applicable to all

components within the distribution system including transformer capacity It does

not include capacity of equipment considered to constitute a load to the power

system eg Induction Machines which should be rated as close as possible to

actual process demands

Refer also to the commentary to Section 311

Switchboards should be supplied with a de gree of s pares and room for expansion

Further details may be found in BP Group RP 12-6 and 7

512 Where required the reliability associated with any part of the system

shall be assessed and presented in qualitative and quantitative terms

In general the design of the power system distribution should be based upon

qualitative requirements which include assessments for meeting power supply

continuity in the event of maintenance and in the event of failure Since electrical

distribution systems are inherently reliable the design requirements are commonly

based upon the need to disconnect distribution electrical equipment to carry out

routine maintenance and at the same time keep power supplies available for

operating plant However under some circumstances the need to assess the

electrical reliability may arise (perhaps as part of an overall assessment of plant failure but possibly as part of a comparison of alternative supplies for new plant)

Under these circumstances the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and the Mean

Time To Repair (MTTR) concerning power system failure at any particular

switchboard would be required In addition it is recommended that the quantitative

statement indicate the probability of failure occurring over a particular timeframe

(eg Provide a value and definition of the probability of zero failures over a 12

month period)

See also sections 412 (commentary) 422 and 43

513 The distribution system shall be designed using one of the basic

arrangements further outlined in 52 through 56 and incorporating thecontrol features of 57 The system designed shall be described in a

design philosophy document

It is considered that the design features contained in sections 52 through 56 would

be suitable for all of the industrial power systems likely to be required by BP

However should an alternative philosophy be available it should be compared with

a standard double radial system in terms of operation reliability maintainability

and cost

The depictions in the drawings which illustrate the texts of 52 and 55 are fairly

conventional in that Contactors are employed only for motor feeders Under some

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 18

circumstances Contactors can prove an economic choice for transformer or

Switchboard feeders The depictions are for an extensive installation typical of

Refinery or other large system Offshore systems may be considered as similar but

without the higher voltage level and interconnections to Public Utility

52 Single Radial

521 These should be used to provide power to non essential electrical loads

those where alternative sources of energy are available such as standby

generating plant or those process loads for which a lower availability

can be accepted

Where minimum facilities engineering is required and the process plant can be (or

will regularly be) switched off then single radial systems may be contemplated to

satisfy process demands It is considered that maintenance of electrical systems

could be scheduled for normal process plant shutdown times and the reliability of

electrical distribution systems is generally much better than required by the process

system

522 Each component of the single radial circuit shall be capable of supplying

110 of the required electrical load Transformers or other plant

which includes forced cooling equipment shall not rely entirely on the

forced cooling arrangements to obtain the necessary rating

Refer to the commentary to Section 311 for more detail on load estimation

Where the loading is of a cyclical nature and the forced cooling would not be

expected to operate for more than 2 hours in any 12 hour period then capacities

based upon forced cooling can be considered However where this is the case acooling system failure alarm shall be provided

53 Double Radial

531 Essential and Process Sensitive loads should be supplied by two or

more identically rated radial systems

Figure 1(a) details a double radial system of feed

532 In double radial systems each circuit shall be capable of carrying a

110 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall include bussection switchgear They shall be arranged to ensure that unscheduled

outage of any component of the circuit would not result in loss of

power supply after the faulty equipment has been disconnected from the

system

See section 311 for detail on load estimation

Exceptions to the requirement for all supplies to be maintained may be made in the

following cases-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 19

(a) For bus section circuit breaker faults These may sometimes cause damage

which may require complete switchboard shutdown However the

occurrence of such faults is sufficiently rare as to be neglected

(b) Where there may be some non-essential loads supplied from a double

radial system These may receive a single radial supply from a double

radial system and therefore would not receive a supply in the event of some forms of double radial system outage

533 Double radially fed systems should generally be operated in parallel

with all bus-section switches closed

It is considered that the advantage of continuity of supply in the event of relatively

light fault conditions which is offered by closed bus section systems outweighs the

disadvantages of increased fault disturbance for heavy fault conditions It is also

more inherently safe since the switchgear fault conditions are based upon the worst

possible supply condition However see also section 534

534 Where switchgear fault levels are found to be above the values outlined

in 23 attention shall be given to operating with bus-section breakers

open as opposed to purchasing higher fault level switchgear Where an

open bus-section breaker philosophy is being given attention the need

to restore rapidly the supplies to drives shall determine whether

automatic closure of bus section circuit breaker(s) is to be employed

Switchgear fault levels could be readily reduced by increasing the impedance of

incoming transformers (Where new transformers will be purchased) However

increasing the impedance of transformers increases the voltage regulation between

light and full load There is therefore a trade-off between fault duty and normal voltage regulation

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

54 Triple Radial

541 Critical and essential loads may be alternatively supplied by triple

identically rated radial systems These systems are preferred to double

radial systems wherever there is an overall total cost advantage

A triple radial system comprises three feeders and three feeder transformers to

provide supply to a distribution switchboard

542 Each circuit of triple fed radial systems shall be capable of providing at

least 55 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall be split into at

least three sections with two bus-section switches

This will allow for the loss of any one of the three circuits leaving the two healthy

circuits still capable of providing 110 of the Maximum Demand

543 Triple radial systems shall be provided where the power flow is

relatively large They shall generally be operated with only two circuits

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 5

concept of essential power system loads are such devices as Lub oil pumps for Gas

Turbines ventilation systems helipad lighting some floodlighting systems

navigational aids radio systems etc The term Essential used here was chosen to

align with the term Essential as defined in the IEE Recommendations for the

Electrical and Electronic Equipment of Mobile and Fixed Offshore Installations

It is noted that some loads which are essential by this definition may require the provision of Emergency Power Supply Facilities in order to meet Legislative

Requirements This is not inconsistent with the definition of Essential Loads used

here which is aimed at providing a convenient process for being assured that all

such critical loads are covered by the appropriate level of power supply (See

further Section 421)

323 Process Sensitive Loads

These are loads whose loss would affect continuity of plant operationresulting in loss of revenue but would not result in an unsafe situationarising Any decision to provide an alternative source of supply for these types of load shall be based on economic considerations

Included in this category are general lighting systems and process demands

It is sometimes possible particularly where process loadings are relatively low to

include sufficient into an emergency generator capacity to allow some processes to

continue on reduced capacity when main power generators are not available

There are no general rules for this type of provision except to emphasise that

application of such loads should not compromise any emergency services Each

case would be project specific

324 Non-sensitive Loads

Non-sensitive loads are those which do not form an importantcomponent of a production or process plant and their disconnectioncould be borne for relatively long periods with minimal or nuisancevalue They usually form a small proportion of the total connected loadand may have a single power source

Typical examples of these loads are the domestic part of accommodation offices

Workshops some water injection some potable water systems etc

4 POWER SUPPLY SOURCES

41 General

The power supply system shall be designed to provide safe andeconomical operation The safety aspects should cover both plant and

personnel Economic considerations shall cover capital maintenanceand running costs and include an assessment of the reliability andconsequent availability of the system The cost of improved power systems reliability should be weighed against the progressive potentialsavings due to decreased loss of production

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 6

It is expected that for any significant power system design there will have been an

economic comparison of alternative arrangements Larger projects would be

expected to initiate a formal safety review and this process would ensure that the

basic safety needs of the project would be satisfied For smaller projects or plant

extensions where such a formal review may not be arranged the designer should

nonetheless consider safety aspects relating to the electrical system and produce an

outline document which presents these issues for the record

All negotiations with public utilities shall be the sole responsibility of BP

In as much as the arrangements with Public Authorities will form part of the long

term operational environment for the installation it is considered necessary that

the operator (assumed to be BP in the context of this document) is fully aware and

has the sole responsibility for the longer term compliance with the requirements

arising from any negotiations Such responsibility should not be delegated to a third

party unless the third party has an ongoing operational responsibility

It is considered that Contractors may request information from Public Utilities onbehalf of BP in pursuit of the determination of options relating to possible

installations or changes to existing installations but that in doing so it is made clear

that any formal agreement which arises from the information or investigation will

be with the operating company (BP)

The principal source of electrical supply for any location subject to therequirements of 411 to 413 shall be defined

The power supply arrangements are fundamental to any operating site and need to

feature strongly in the overall project concept A power supply philosophy

document which records the arrangements for power supply and the reasoning

associated with any selection is considered highly desirable A contractor mayhave part of his workscope associated with an evaluation and selection of power

supply arrangements in which case such a presentation is assured The selection of

the power supply arrangements may have formed part of a feasibility (or Statement

of Requirements) study which may have been produced by BP in which case the

definition of the power supply arrangements would form part of a contractors

specification

411 Electrical Import from a Public Utility

Where the principal source of electrical power is selected to be from a public utility the supply should be via duplicate feeders An exception

to this may be permitted for economic reasons where low power loadsare to be supplied and where a single feeder may be employed

It would be expected that there could be a costbenefit statement to justify the use of

single feeds Where the supply is low power and not essential for operations (eg

Cathodic Protection supplies) the justification is trivial however single supplies

with on site standby generation which will operate to supply full load in the event of

a main power supply failure may be an economic alternative to a duel supply

arrangement

Essential loads should always be provided for by on-site power supplyequipment

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 7

See 322 (commentary)

Where economically viable power generation on site may be arrangedto peak-lop or otherwise supplement the external power supply

412 On-site Generation with no Public Utility Connection

Where a site is offshore or remote from a public utility network or hasa surplus of fuel or process energy on-site generation will normally beexpected as the principal source of power The on-site power generation arrangements shall be defined taking into account thefollowing factors-

(i) The fuel source

(ii) The nature of the process energy

(iii) The process steam or other heat requirements if any

(iv) The relationship between electric power requirements and the

energy sources on any given site

The number and arrangement of power generating sets should reflectthe particular needs of the installation in terms of Availability andReliability Where an availability of above 80 is required a minimumof 2 generating sets will be required on sites where there is noalternative electricity supply Under these circumstances the following

criteria should be satisfied-

(i) There should be sufficient generation to meet the Maximum

Demand when the largest single source of electrical supply is

out of service at peak demand times due to maintenance or any

other reason

(ii) Where more than 2 generators are installed those loads

considered as Process Sensitive (ie those loads which must

operate to maintain either full or a reduced production) shall be

supplied when the largest capacity generator is out of service

and the second largest generator is coincidentally shut down due

to unforeseen circumstances

All power generation facilities which cannot derive alternative power from another source shall be arranged with Black Start facilities TheBlack Start arrangements may involve use of Emergency or In-Housediesel generators

For systems requiring high reliability the probability of having sufficient power

generation for 100 of the load (provided by the main power supply system) in a 12

month period should be 99 This would normally require an installation of at

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 8

least 3 generators Under some circumstances this (high) reliability requirement

can be relaxed particularly where the consequences of power supply failure are not

severe In such circumstances only two (or even one) main power generators could

be considered

Where multiple power generators are provided there needs to be a philosophy of

supply related to normal operation maintenance shutdown and to failure Where 3 generators are installed it is reasonable to expect that substantial production could

be achieved by a single set remaining available following failure of the second set

with the third unavailable

413 On-site Generation Run in Parallel with a Public Utility

Where on-site generation is selected to be the principal source of power and where a connection to a public utility is available considerationshall be given to the following options related to connection to thePublic Utility-

(i) As a standby source of electric power

(ii) A means of export of surplus electrical power

(iii) A combination of both

(iv) As a Black Start Facility

It is expected that the power generation philosophy would consider these options

which would be contained within a formal design record See also 411 where

there may be economic benefit in peak lopping of the Public Utility supply taking advantage of tariff opportunities

42 Emergency Power Supply Equipment

421 Power supplies to Essential loads should be achieved by one or more of

the following-

(i) Providing an alternative source of energy such as batteries

(ii) Increasing the amount (or being assured of sufficient sheer

numbers) of normal supply generation equipment with anarrangement for duplicate fuel supply which effectively avoids

single contingency power outage

(iii) Ensuring a number of alternative supply feeds are available to

the loads and that the alternatives effectively provide duplication

to avoid single contingency power loss

(iv) Local Diesel Generation

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 9

In general it is expected that Essential loads would receive battery supplies or

would be associated with an emergency generator However where this is

impractical leads to low reliability or is prohibitively expensive the least cost of

the remaining alternatives should normally be adopted

The concept of increased power generation in (ii) above is meant to allow for

emergency power supplies to be designed as part of a normal power generation and distribution system The criteria for design would be that the power source and the

distribution system for the Essential loads would maintain sufficiently high security

for these safety critical systems A similar concept is considered appropriate for

the concept of having a suitable number of alternative supply feeds detailed in (iii)

above

422 In the application of 421 (ii) the power supply to Essential loads shall

be designed to remain available in the event of at least two of the

installed main power generators being unavailable The probability of

zero interruptions to the Essential load feed busbar over a 12 month

period shall be 99 or better Where necessary a loadshedding schemeshall be installed to secure the supply to the Essential loads Essential

loads shall not form part of the loadshedding arrangements

The concept of additional power generation being suitable for emergency supply

duty will clearly not be possible without there being at least 3 power generation sets

available Where one power generator thus installed is of lower capacity than the

system maximum demand andor the nature of the load can lead to instability it is

expected that a load shedding scheme would be employed to ensure that the

Essential loads would be maintained for any fault condition which could leave a

single machine on the busbar

423 Where increased main generating plant or local standby plant is selectedto provide power to Essential loads it shall be either diesel engine or

gas turbine driven generator set(s) Local standby or emergency

generator prime movers shall have their own dedicated fuel supply All

prime movers for main generators (where these are deemed to provide

Essential supplies) shall be arranged for two fuel sources with

automatic transfer Power generation for Essential loads shall be rated

to have a spare capacity of at least 10

These provisions are designed to ensure that a single contingency fault (eg fuel

supply failure) will not cause power supply loss

424 Emergency generator sets shall be capable of starting and running when

no alternative source of electrical ac power is available ie a black

start capability This may be achieved by compressed air starting with

air receivers being capable of six engine starts from one air charge or

by battery starting with a similar capability or by both methods

The requirements for emergency generators are contained in BP Group GS 160-1

In general two starting methods are required It should be noted that the location

of emergency generators should normally be in a non-classified area with supply

air derived from a clean source For offshore installations the location of the

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 10

emergency generator should be on an outside wall which can have louvers open to

supply combustion air Care should be taken to ensure that the exhaust and air

intakes are located to avoid problems associated with other adjacent plant or

systems

425 Emergency generators shall be provided with automatic starting and

loading facilities A simple and reliable method of ensuring that

emergency generators can be immediately switched to their pre-defined

load shall be arranged Manual facilities shall also be provided for

regular testing purposes Testing facilities should permit the loading of

standby generator sets

It is preferred that the emergency generator should be capable of running in

parallel with the mains supply for testing purposes and for the purposes of

transferring load without the need for supply break

43 Reliability

For each power supply arrangement a reliability assessment shall becarried out to determine the probability of failure of supply

In the early stages of design a reliability study may be undertaken as part of the

comparison of alternative methods of providing power supplies Such studies would

also be useful in determining the cost of material failures The undertaking of

these studies may form part of the Contractors workscope Where the Project Team

is required to carry out such a study the terms of reference related to objectives

data gathering and evaluation shall be clearly specified

44 Primary Substation

441 Generator circuits (other than local emergency generators) and public

utility power intakes should be connected together at a common

primary substation the busbars of which are used as the main load

distribution centre Where generators and public utility power intakes

may be located at different points throughout the site these shall be

interconnected

Thus there will be at least one and for larger sites more primary substations

442 The switchgear for primary substations shall comply with BP Group GS112-9 (or BP Group GS 112-8 where only LV supplies are involved)

Detailed guid ance for H V and LV switchgear is contained in BP Group RP 12-6

and BP Group RP 12-7

443 Busbar arrangements shall be selected to be cost effective operationally

flexible and safe The following technical points shall be taken into

account

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 11

(i) Operational flexibility to permit loads and power supplies to be effectively

connected under scheduled and unscheduled outages of circuits and

busbar sections

(ii) Minimal switchgear per circuit and simple control and protection

(iii) Unscheduled loss of busbar sections shall not shut down the system beyond the level designed and provided for

(iv) Scheduled maintenance of busbars shall be possible without system

shutdowns beyond those designed and provided for

It may often be found necessary to locate the incoming circuit breakers of a busbar

to a location half way along one side of a busbar in order to be more assured that

100 of the load is unlikely to flow in one section of the busbars

The possibility of bus section circuit breaker fault conditions in metal enclosed

switchgear which may cause a full switchboard shutdown for remedial repairs

should be considered However unless there are overriding reasons for thecontrary BP do not design switchboards to cater for this eventuality

444 Single busbar arrangements for primary supply substations should be

provided subject to the following criteria-

(i) The switchgear shall be indoor metalclad type

(ii) The single busbar shall be split into a number of sections by

using suitable switchgear The number of sections of busbars

shall be consistent with the acceptable loss of incoming or

outgoing circuits under both scheduled and unscheduled lossconditions

(iii) Routine busbar maintenance shall not be considered to be

necessary or shall be an infrequent occurrence

Where there would be 3 incoming transformer feeders the busbar would normally

be expected to be in 3 parts with feeder circuit breakers arranged on each of the

sections of busbar

445 Double busbar arrangements shall be provided in installations where

outdoor air insulated busbars are installed or where regular busbar maintenance is considered necessary for environmental or pollution

reasons They may also be supplied where the operational flexibility

available from being able to connect incoming power circuits and

outgoing load circuits in a variety of ways is considered to be

particularly advantageous

The perceived need for double busbar arrangements for indoor metalclad HV

switchgear was strong in early Refinery designs but has virtually disappeared from

modern Refinery and other industrial installations Therefore the use of double

busbar arrangements needs to be carefully considered and advantages balanced

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 12

against the considerable additional costs of Building Switchgear and Protective

arrangements One generally clear case for double busbar arrangements lies in

outdoor installations where maintenance work on busbars would be greater

446 Ringbars or mesh busbars arrangements shall not be used

Ring or mesh arrangements are generally difficult to extend and therefore are

considered to have limited application However this type of arrangement has

switchgear saving advantages where the system is unlikely to require modification

447 Where the power supply is obtained from a public utility via equipment

such as transformers or feeders the busbars shall be sectionalised to

prevent total power system shutdown in the event of unscheduled

outage of any busbar section Coincidental maintenance of a public

utility intake transformer shall not be considered

It is considered that maintenance of incoming transformers and feeds would be lowand would be quickly completed Therefore high expense in order to reduce an

already unlikely event is not considered worthwhile

448 The maximum number of busbar sections should not exceed the number

of individual power sources

This requirement sets out to avoid over flexibility in a power system which although

useful in contemplation is of little economic benefit in practice

449 The outgoing load circuits shall be connected to busbar sections in such

a way as to optimise power flow across busbar section switches

commensurate with reliability and operating considerations and shall

also permit unscheduled and scheduled busbar section outages with the

minimum disturbance to the loads being supplied

See also the commentary to section 443

4410 Generators may be connected either directly to the primary power

supply busbar or via generator transformers The type of connection

shall be selected depending upon the economics associated with both

the generation voltage and the primary supply busbar voltage

Typical arrangements for primary substations for a variety of types of power supply are shown in Figure 1

Primary substations should be located in areas which are not classifiedas hazardous The selected location within the site shall-

(a) Take account of the ability to distribute power to the onsite

loads without unnecessarily high distribution equipment costs

(b) Be adjacent to the generation or public utility intake

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 13

(c) Be suitable for future expansion

Where it is impossible to locate the primary substation outside of the hazardous

areas arrangements for forced ventilation of the substation shall be made Air for

the ventilation shall be taken from a remote and safe area the substation shall beequipped with air lock doors gas detectors (which shall cause immediate de-

energisation of all electrical equipment in the substation which is not suitable for a

zone 1 environment) and loss of sufficient ventilation and pressurisation shall

initiate an alarm condition which although not causing a trip of the switchgear

shall be used as an operator based time dependent system for the effect of repair

Shutdown shall be initiated should repairs not be possible within an operator

defined time scale

45 Frequency and Voltage Regulation

451 The power system design shall be arranged to ensure that the voltage

variation (between full load and lightly loaded conditions) experiencedat any piece of equipment designated as a load (ie not including

distribution equipment) shall not exceed plusmn 5 of the declared system

nominal voltage Further the power system shall be arranged to be able

to withstand without undue stress a transient voltage variation to 80

of nominal for a 10 second period or such longer duration at specific

points if necessary Special consideration shall be given to power

frequency overvoltage effects and the need for Power System

equipment to withstand higher overvoltages under some circumstances

This requirement ensures that standard equipment parameters would not be

compromised Where the system voltage deviates beyond the 5 limit apart fromequipment life expectation being eroded there is a danger of exceeding the

hazardous area certification limits for that equipment installed in a hazardous area

This may not actually yield failures or temperatures likely to cause ignition of a

vapour which may be present but will increase the likelihood of such occurrences

and will infringe the basic safety intention

The Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 r equires voltage variations to be within plusmn

6 However standards for equipment state a plusmn 5 tolerance for voltage Hence

the lower limit is specified here

Where power systems which have automatic voltage control can experience

significant load rejection (eg as may be the case of a Power System supplied by generators must direct-on-line start large machines which subsequently exhibit

rapid VAr decrease leaving machines in an overexcited state) significant

overvoltage levels may be predicted (120 to 125 of nominal voltage can be

predicted) This may require special specification of transformers to avoid

problems caused by overfluxing or increased current due to magnetic excitation

Special attention should be paid to voltage and frequency tolerance specifications

for generator transformers which may need to match the run up characteristic of the

generator This can require the transformer to be capable of withstanding full rated

voltage at 80 of rated frequency

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 14

See 811 for motor starting requirements This can give rise to a voltage

depression at motor terminals of 20 which therefore requires that the power

system should be able to successfully accept this condition for the starting period

Typical starting periods can range from 1 to 10 seconds depending upon machine

and system ratings and machine inertia Starting times beyond 10 seconds are

possible where particularly high inertia loads need to be accelerated (eg fans)

however these would constitute a special application and should be treated byexception

452 Where the public utility intake of a site is via transformers these

transformers and their voltage regulation equipment shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance on transformer construction and specification is given in BP

Group RP 12-9

Where necessary for voltage regulation purposes the incoming transformers shall

be equipped with on load and automatic tap change equipment

453 Where there is on-site generation the generators and their governor

and voltage regulation equipment shall comply with BP Group GS 112-

6 or BP Group GS 160-1

Detailed guidance on generator application is not featured as a separate part of the

BP Group RP 12 series of documents

454 Automatic voltage regulation equipment of power systems which have

both on-site generation and public utility intakes via transformers shall

be designed so that there is no detrimental inter-action

There are a number of options which can be considered for voltage control In

general the excitation of the power generators can be arranged for zero VAr

importexport for the whole site and at the same time the intake transformer

controller can be arranged to maintain voltage at a pre set level

455 The excitation systems of synchronous motors shall be arranged to

ensure no detrimental interactive effects with transformer automatic tap

change equipment

In the case of synchronous motors where it is probable that the synchronous motor would be small in relation to the supply intake capacity it is probable that the

excitation can be arranged to maintain a constant power factor to the machine and

the transformer tap change control would be arranged to maintain voltage within

pre set levels

456 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation where

the site has no public utility connection shall be designed such that

generator loading may be automatically shared between the operating

sets and that the nominal supply frequency is maintained within the

approved tolerance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 15

Where governor droop control is employed there should be an operator in

attendance who could take action from time to time to ensure that the system

frequency remained within reasonable limits Such limits should be plusmn 1 and the

output system frequency time should be within 30 seconds of standard time

Statement of these limits for design purposes does not indicate a need to supply an

appropriate standard clock arrangement although power plants supplying

townships or camp areas are encouraged to have this facility The limit for frequency time may be relaxed for small power plants and those where frequency

time is considered unimportant (eg Where there are no time signals reliant upon

mains frequency)

For unmanned power plants or for those where constant operator intervention

would be undesirable the system frequency may be controlled by an isochronous

controller designed to provide overall frequency and generator loadings within

prescribed limits

457 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation at a

site with a public utility connection shall be designed for parallel

operation with the public utility and shall incorporate the protection

arrangements which shall ensure that under public utility collapse ( or

unacceptable major disturbance) the site will retain a defined loading

condition The arrangement shall also incorporate the means for

independent operation

Where a facility is interconnected with a Public Utility the control of the power

system frequency must be under the control of the Public Utility Therefore only

defined load governor settings or droop load sharing control systems are possible

However such interconnection is always subject to disconnection under automatic

protection system operation which will leave the power generators supplying the

site load Under these conditions whatever the original generator control arrangements the generators must revert to independent load sharing control

46 Synchronising

461 Synchronising andor check synchronising equipment shall be provided

wherever more than one source of power may be operated in parallel

with another A synchronising philosophy shall be prepared

See also sections 463 and 464 Because there can be many alternative ways of

achieving a reasonable synchronising arrangement it is expected that there would

be prepared a synchronisingcheck synchronising philosophy (or design document) for every installation which will define the particular arrangements

462 Manual synchronising arrangements shall always be provided for the

incoming power generator circuit breakers This shall comprise

voltmeters and a synchroscope to show the voltage and frequency

differences between the two systems that need to be paralleled A

check synchronising relay should be utilised to prevent operator

maloperation but in order to allow closing a power source on to a dead

system as is required under black start conditions the check

synchronising relay shall have a means of manual or automatic override

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 16

Wherever possible and economically feasible the manual synchronising system

supplied shall also include automatic synchronising applied to the generator

controls

Manual synchronising facilities should also be applied to any primary switchgear

bus section circuit breaker and to circuit breakers incoming to the primary switchboard which can make a parallel connection with other sources

463 Synchronising or check synchronising facilities shall be fitted to busbar

section and bus coupler circuit breakers where it is possible to run the

two systems feeding either section of a busbar completely segregated

from the other The number of circuit breakers provided with

synchronising or check synchronising facilities should be kept to a

minimum A similar logic shall be applied to public utility intake

circuits Alternatively circuit breaker interlocking schemes shall be

installed to preclude the possibility of paralleling two sources of power

where synchronising facilities are excluded

Notwithstanding the provisions of 464 it is not expected that there would be a

need to include synchronising or check synchronising facilities on system voltage

levels more than two levels removed from the power generation busbar where the

power system is operated with bus sections normally closed However this is a

general rule and should the system be commonly operated with open bus sections

for significant periods and there is little central system control or information

dissemination the arrangement should be reviewed

464 Synchronising facilities shall be provided at the primary power supply

voltage and should be avoided at other voltages by use of appropriatecircuit breaker interlocking

The form of interlocking should avoid the need for break-before-make action unless

absolutely necessary This may need to be associated with upstream bus section

circuit breakers and incoming circuit breakers to the upstream switchboard See

463 (commentary) for provisions should distances be too great for the economic

use of interlocking

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems

Detailed guidance on this subject is given in BP Group RP 12-5 dc

power supplies for control systems shall comply with BP Group GS112-11 and ac power supplies shall comply with BP Group GS 112-10

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 17

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

51 General

511 The distribution network shall be designed to carry continuously at least

110 of the Maximum Demand associated with peak design production at the maximum ambient conditions

The requirement for 110 capacity is considered to be applicable to all

components within the distribution system including transformer capacity It does

not include capacity of equipment considered to constitute a load to the power

system eg Induction Machines which should be rated as close as possible to

actual process demands

Refer also to the commentary to Section 311

Switchboards should be supplied with a de gree of s pares and room for expansion

Further details may be found in BP Group RP 12-6 and 7

512 Where required the reliability associated with any part of the system

shall be assessed and presented in qualitative and quantitative terms

In general the design of the power system distribution should be based upon

qualitative requirements which include assessments for meeting power supply

continuity in the event of maintenance and in the event of failure Since electrical

distribution systems are inherently reliable the design requirements are commonly

based upon the need to disconnect distribution electrical equipment to carry out

routine maintenance and at the same time keep power supplies available for

operating plant However under some circumstances the need to assess the

electrical reliability may arise (perhaps as part of an overall assessment of plant failure but possibly as part of a comparison of alternative supplies for new plant)

Under these circumstances the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and the Mean

Time To Repair (MTTR) concerning power system failure at any particular

switchboard would be required In addition it is recommended that the quantitative

statement indicate the probability of failure occurring over a particular timeframe

(eg Provide a value and definition of the probability of zero failures over a 12

month period)

See also sections 412 (commentary) 422 and 43

513 The distribution system shall be designed using one of the basic

arrangements further outlined in 52 through 56 and incorporating thecontrol features of 57 The system designed shall be described in a

design philosophy document

It is considered that the design features contained in sections 52 through 56 would

be suitable for all of the industrial power systems likely to be required by BP

However should an alternative philosophy be available it should be compared with

a standard double radial system in terms of operation reliability maintainability

and cost

The depictions in the drawings which illustrate the texts of 52 and 55 are fairly

conventional in that Contactors are employed only for motor feeders Under some

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 18

circumstances Contactors can prove an economic choice for transformer or

Switchboard feeders The depictions are for an extensive installation typical of

Refinery or other large system Offshore systems may be considered as similar but

without the higher voltage level and interconnections to Public Utility

52 Single Radial

521 These should be used to provide power to non essential electrical loads

those where alternative sources of energy are available such as standby

generating plant or those process loads for which a lower availability

can be accepted

Where minimum facilities engineering is required and the process plant can be (or

will regularly be) switched off then single radial systems may be contemplated to

satisfy process demands It is considered that maintenance of electrical systems

could be scheduled for normal process plant shutdown times and the reliability of

electrical distribution systems is generally much better than required by the process

system

522 Each component of the single radial circuit shall be capable of supplying

110 of the required electrical load Transformers or other plant

which includes forced cooling equipment shall not rely entirely on the

forced cooling arrangements to obtain the necessary rating

Refer to the commentary to Section 311 for more detail on load estimation

Where the loading is of a cyclical nature and the forced cooling would not be

expected to operate for more than 2 hours in any 12 hour period then capacities

based upon forced cooling can be considered However where this is the case acooling system failure alarm shall be provided

53 Double Radial

531 Essential and Process Sensitive loads should be supplied by two or

more identically rated radial systems

Figure 1(a) details a double radial system of feed

532 In double radial systems each circuit shall be capable of carrying a

110 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall include bussection switchgear They shall be arranged to ensure that unscheduled

outage of any component of the circuit would not result in loss of

power supply after the faulty equipment has been disconnected from the

system

See section 311 for detail on load estimation

Exceptions to the requirement for all supplies to be maintained may be made in the

following cases-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 19

(a) For bus section circuit breaker faults These may sometimes cause damage

which may require complete switchboard shutdown However the

occurrence of such faults is sufficiently rare as to be neglected

(b) Where there may be some non-essential loads supplied from a double

radial system These may receive a single radial supply from a double

radial system and therefore would not receive a supply in the event of some forms of double radial system outage

533 Double radially fed systems should generally be operated in parallel

with all bus-section switches closed

It is considered that the advantage of continuity of supply in the event of relatively

light fault conditions which is offered by closed bus section systems outweighs the

disadvantages of increased fault disturbance for heavy fault conditions It is also

more inherently safe since the switchgear fault conditions are based upon the worst

possible supply condition However see also section 534

534 Where switchgear fault levels are found to be above the values outlined

in 23 attention shall be given to operating with bus-section breakers

open as opposed to purchasing higher fault level switchgear Where an

open bus-section breaker philosophy is being given attention the need

to restore rapidly the supplies to drives shall determine whether

automatic closure of bus section circuit breaker(s) is to be employed

Switchgear fault levels could be readily reduced by increasing the impedance of

incoming transformers (Where new transformers will be purchased) However

increasing the impedance of transformers increases the voltage regulation between

light and full load There is therefore a trade-off between fault duty and normal voltage regulation

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

54 Triple Radial

541 Critical and essential loads may be alternatively supplied by triple

identically rated radial systems These systems are preferred to double

radial systems wherever there is an overall total cost advantage

A triple radial system comprises three feeders and three feeder transformers to

provide supply to a distribution switchboard

542 Each circuit of triple fed radial systems shall be capable of providing at

least 55 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall be split into at

least three sections with two bus-section switches

This will allow for the loss of any one of the three circuits leaving the two healthy

circuits still capable of providing 110 of the Maximum Demand

543 Triple radial systems shall be provided where the power flow is

relatively large They shall generally be operated with only two circuits

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 6

It is expected that for any significant power system design there will have been an

economic comparison of alternative arrangements Larger projects would be

expected to initiate a formal safety review and this process would ensure that the

basic safety needs of the project would be satisfied For smaller projects or plant

extensions where such a formal review may not be arranged the designer should

nonetheless consider safety aspects relating to the electrical system and produce an

outline document which presents these issues for the record

All negotiations with public utilities shall be the sole responsibility of BP

In as much as the arrangements with Public Authorities will form part of the long

term operational environment for the installation it is considered necessary that

the operator (assumed to be BP in the context of this document) is fully aware and

has the sole responsibility for the longer term compliance with the requirements

arising from any negotiations Such responsibility should not be delegated to a third

party unless the third party has an ongoing operational responsibility

It is considered that Contractors may request information from Public Utilities onbehalf of BP in pursuit of the determination of options relating to possible

installations or changes to existing installations but that in doing so it is made clear

that any formal agreement which arises from the information or investigation will

be with the operating company (BP)

The principal source of electrical supply for any location subject to therequirements of 411 to 413 shall be defined

The power supply arrangements are fundamental to any operating site and need to

feature strongly in the overall project concept A power supply philosophy

document which records the arrangements for power supply and the reasoning

associated with any selection is considered highly desirable A contractor mayhave part of his workscope associated with an evaluation and selection of power

supply arrangements in which case such a presentation is assured The selection of

the power supply arrangements may have formed part of a feasibility (or Statement

of Requirements) study which may have been produced by BP in which case the

definition of the power supply arrangements would form part of a contractors

specification

411 Electrical Import from a Public Utility

Where the principal source of electrical power is selected to be from a public utility the supply should be via duplicate feeders An exception

to this may be permitted for economic reasons where low power loadsare to be supplied and where a single feeder may be employed

It would be expected that there could be a costbenefit statement to justify the use of

single feeds Where the supply is low power and not essential for operations (eg

Cathodic Protection supplies) the justification is trivial however single supplies

with on site standby generation which will operate to supply full load in the event of

a main power supply failure may be an economic alternative to a duel supply

arrangement

Essential loads should always be provided for by on-site power supplyequipment

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 7

See 322 (commentary)

Where economically viable power generation on site may be arrangedto peak-lop or otherwise supplement the external power supply

412 On-site Generation with no Public Utility Connection

Where a site is offshore or remote from a public utility network or hasa surplus of fuel or process energy on-site generation will normally beexpected as the principal source of power The on-site power generation arrangements shall be defined taking into account thefollowing factors-

(i) The fuel source

(ii) The nature of the process energy

(iii) The process steam or other heat requirements if any

(iv) The relationship between electric power requirements and the

energy sources on any given site

The number and arrangement of power generating sets should reflectthe particular needs of the installation in terms of Availability andReliability Where an availability of above 80 is required a minimumof 2 generating sets will be required on sites where there is noalternative electricity supply Under these circumstances the following

criteria should be satisfied-

(i) There should be sufficient generation to meet the Maximum

Demand when the largest single source of electrical supply is

out of service at peak demand times due to maintenance or any

other reason

(ii) Where more than 2 generators are installed those loads

considered as Process Sensitive (ie those loads which must

operate to maintain either full or a reduced production) shall be

supplied when the largest capacity generator is out of service

and the second largest generator is coincidentally shut down due

to unforeseen circumstances

All power generation facilities which cannot derive alternative power from another source shall be arranged with Black Start facilities TheBlack Start arrangements may involve use of Emergency or In-Housediesel generators

For systems requiring high reliability the probability of having sufficient power

generation for 100 of the load (provided by the main power supply system) in a 12

month period should be 99 This would normally require an installation of at

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 8

least 3 generators Under some circumstances this (high) reliability requirement

can be relaxed particularly where the consequences of power supply failure are not

severe In such circumstances only two (or even one) main power generators could

be considered

Where multiple power generators are provided there needs to be a philosophy of

supply related to normal operation maintenance shutdown and to failure Where 3 generators are installed it is reasonable to expect that substantial production could

be achieved by a single set remaining available following failure of the second set

with the third unavailable

413 On-site Generation Run in Parallel with a Public Utility

Where on-site generation is selected to be the principal source of power and where a connection to a public utility is available considerationshall be given to the following options related to connection to thePublic Utility-

(i) As a standby source of electric power

(ii) A means of export of surplus electrical power

(iii) A combination of both

(iv) As a Black Start Facility

It is expected that the power generation philosophy would consider these options

which would be contained within a formal design record See also 411 where

there may be economic benefit in peak lopping of the Public Utility supply taking advantage of tariff opportunities

42 Emergency Power Supply Equipment

421 Power supplies to Essential loads should be achieved by one or more of

the following-

(i) Providing an alternative source of energy such as batteries

(ii) Increasing the amount (or being assured of sufficient sheer

numbers) of normal supply generation equipment with anarrangement for duplicate fuel supply which effectively avoids

single contingency power outage

(iii) Ensuring a number of alternative supply feeds are available to

the loads and that the alternatives effectively provide duplication

to avoid single contingency power loss

(iv) Local Diesel Generation

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 9

In general it is expected that Essential loads would receive battery supplies or

would be associated with an emergency generator However where this is

impractical leads to low reliability or is prohibitively expensive the least cost of

the remaining alternatives should normally be adopted

The concept of increased power generation in (ii) above is meant to allow for

emergency power supplies to be designed as part of a normal power generation and distribution system The criteria for design would be that the power source and the

distribution system for the Essential loads would maintain sufficiently high security

for these safety critical systems A similar concept is considered appropriate for

the concept of having a suitable number of alternative supply feeds detailed in (iii)

above

422 In the application of 421 (ii) the power supply to Essential loads shall

be designed to remain available in the event of at least two of the

installed main power generators being unavailable The probability of

zero interruptions to the Essential load feed busbar over a 12 month

period shall be 99 or better Where necessary a loadshedding schemeshall be installed to secure the supply to the Essential loads Essential

loads shall not form part of the loadshedding arrangements

The concept of additional power generation being suitable for emergency supply

duty will clearly not be possible without there being at least 3 power generation sets

available Where one power generator thus installed is of lower capacity than the

system maximum demand andor the nature of the load can lead to instability it is

expected that a load shedding scheme would be employed to ensure that the

Essential loads would be maintained for any fault condition which could leave a

single machine on the busbar

423 Where increased main generating plant or local standby plant is selectedto provide power to Essential loads it shall be either diesel engine or

gas turbine driven generator set(s) Local standby or emergency

generator prime movers shall have their own dedicated fuel supply All

prime movers for main generators (where these are deemed to provide

Essential supplies) shall be arranged for two fuel sources with

automatic transfer Power generation for Essential loads shall be rated

to have a spare capacity of at least 10

These provisions are designed to ensure that a single contingency fault (eg fuel

supply failure) will not cause power supply loss

424 Emergency generator sets shall be capable of starting and running when

no alternative source of electrical ac power is available ie a black

start capability This may be achieved by compressed air starting with

air receivers being capable of six engine starts from one air charge or

by battery starting with a similar capability or by both methods

The requirements for emergency generators are contained in BP Group GS 160-1

In general two starting methods are required It should be noted that the location

of emergency generators should normally be in a non-classified area with supply

air derived from a clean source For offshore installations the location of the

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 10

emergency generator should be on an outside wall which can have louvers open to

supply combustion air Care should be taken to ensure that the exhaust and air

intakes are located to avoid problems associated with other adjacent plant or

systems

425 Emergency generators shall be provided with automatic starting and

loading facilities A simple and reliable method of ensuring that

emergency generators can be immediately switched to their pre-defined

load shall be arranged Manual facilities shall also be provided for

regular testing purposes Testing facilities should permit the loading of

standby generator sets

It is preferred that the emergency generator should be capable of running in

parallel with the mains supply for testing purposes and for the purposes of

transferring load without the need for supply break

43 Reliability

For each power supply arrangement a reliability assessment shall becarried out to determine the probability of failure of supply

In the early stages of design a reliability study may be undertaken as part of the

comparison of alternative methods of providing power supplies Such studies would

also be useful in determining the cost of material failures The undertaking of

these studies may form part of the Contractors workscope Where the Project Team

is required to carry out such a study the terms of reference related to objectives

data gathering and evaluation shall be clearly specified

44 Primary Substation

441 Generator circuits (other than local emergency generators) and public

utility power intakes should be connected together at a common

primary substation the busbars of which are used as the main load

distribution centre Where generators and public utility power intakes

may be located at different points throughout the site these shall be

interconnected

Thus there will be at least one and for larger sites more primary substations

442 The switchgear for primary substations shall comply with BP Group GS112-9 (or BP Group GS 112-8 where only LV supplies are involved)

Detailed guid ance for H V and LV switchgear is contained in BP Group RP 12-6

and BP Group RP 12-7

443 Busbar arrangements shall be selected to be cost effective operationally

flexible and safe The following technical points shall be taken into

account

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 11

(i) Operational flexibility to permit loads and power supplies to be effectively

connected under scheduled and unscheduled outages of circuits and

busbar sections

(ii) Minimal switchgear per circuit and simple control and protection

(iii) Unscheduled loss of busbar sections shall not shut down the system beyond the level designed and provided for

(iv) Scheduled maintenance of busbars shall be possible without system

shutdowns beyond those designed and provided for

It may often be found necessary to locate the incoming circuit breakers of a busbar

to a location half way along one side of a busbar in order to be more assured that

100 of the load is unlikely to flow in one section of the busbars

The possibility of bus section circuit breaker fault conditions in metal enclosed

switchgear which may cause a full switchboard shutdown for remedial repairs

should be considered However unless there are overriding reasons for thecontrary BP do not design switchboards to cater for this eventuality

444 Single busbar arrangements for primary supply substations should be

provided subject to the following criteria-

(i) The switchgear shall be indoor metalclad type

(ii) The single busbar shall be split into a number of sections by

using suitable switchgear The number of sections of busbars

shall be consistent with the acceptable loss of incoming or

outgoing circuits under both scheduled and unscheduled lossconditions

(iii) Routine busbar maintenance shall not be considered to be

necessary or shall be an infrequent occurrence

Where there would be 3 incoming transformer feeders the busbar would normally

be expected to be in 3 parts with feeder circuit breakers arranged on each of the

sections of busbar

445 Double busbar arrangements shall be provided in installations where

outdoor air insulated busbars are installed or where regular busbar maintenance is considered necessary for environmental or pollution

reasons They may also be supplied where the operational flexibility

available from being able to connect incoming power circuits and

outgoing load circuits in a variety of ways is considered to be

particularly advantageous

The perceived need for double busbar arrangements for indoor metalclad HV

switchgear was strong in early Refinery designs but has virtually disappeared from

modern Refinery and other industrial installations Therefore the use of double

busbar arrangements needs to be carefully considered and advantages balanced

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 12

against the considerable additional costs of Building Switchgear and Protective

arrangements One generally clear case for double busbar arrangements lies in

outdoor installations where maintenance work on busbars would be greater

446 Ringbars or mesh busbars arrangements shall not be used

Ring or mesh arrangements are generally difficult to extend and therefore are

considered to have limited application However this type of arrangement has

switchgear saving advantages where the system is unlikely to require modification

447 Where the power supply is obtained from a public utility via equipment

such as transformers or feeders the busbars shall be sectionalised to

prevent total power system shutdown in the event of unscheduled

outage of any busbar section Coincidental maintenance of a public

utility intake transformer shall not be considered

It is considered that maintenance of incoming transformers and feeds would be lowand would be quickly completed Therefore high expense in order to reduce an

already unlikely event is not considered worthwhile

448 The maximum number of busbar sections should not exceed the number

of individual power sources

This requirement sets out to avoid over flexibility in a power system which although

useful in contemplation is of little economic benefit in practice

449 The outgoing load circuits shall be connected to busbar sections in such

a way as to optimise power flow across busbar section switches

commensurate with reliability and operating considerations and shall

also permit unscheduled and scheduled busbar section outages with the

minimum disturbance to the loads being supplied

See also the commentary to section 443

4410 Generators may be connected either directly to the primary power

supply busbar or via generator transformers The type of connection

shall be selected depending upon the economics associated with both

the generation voltage and the primary supply busbar voltage

Typical arrangements for primary substations for a variety of types of power supply are shown in Figure 1

Primary substations should be located in areas which are not classifiedas hazardous The selected location within the site shall-

(a) Take account of the ability to distribute power to the onsite

loads without unnecessarily high distribution equipment costs

(b) Be adjacent to the generation or public utility intake

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 13

(c) Be suitable for future expansion

Where it is impossible to locate the primary substation outside of the hazardous

areas arrangements for forced ventilation of the substation shall be made Air for

the ventilation shall be taken from a remote and safe area the substation shall beequipped with air lock doors gas detectors (which shall cause immediate de-

energisation of all electrical equipment in the substation which is not suitable for a

zone 1 environment) and loss of sufficient ventilation and pressurisation shall

initiate an alarm condition which although not causing a trip of the switchgear

shall be used as an operator based time dependent system for the effect of repair

Shutdown shall be initiated should repairs not be possible within an operator

defined time scale

45 Frequency and Voltage Regulation

451 The power system design shall be arranged to ensure that the voltage

variation (between full load and lightly loaded conditions) experiencedat any piece of equipment designated as a load (ie not including

distribution equipment) shall not exceed plusmn 5 of the declared system

nominal voltage Further the power system shall be arranged to be able

to withstand without undue stress a transient voltage variation to 80

of nominal for a 10 second period or such longer duration at specific

points if necessary Special consideration shall be given to power

frequency overvoltage effects and the need for Power System

equipment to withstand higher overvoltages under some circumstances

This requirement ensures that standard equipment parameters would not be

compromised Where the system voltage deviates beyond the 5 limit apart fromequipment life expectation being eroded there is a danger of exceeding the

hazardous area certification limits for that equipment installed in a hazardous area

This may not actually yield failures or temperatures likely to cause ignition of a

vapour which may be present but will increase the likelihood of such occurrences

and will infringe the basic safety intention

The Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 r equires voltage variations to be within plusmn

6 However standards for equipment state a plusmn 5 tolerance for voltage Hence

the lower limit is specified here

Where power systems which have automatic voltage control can experience

significant load rejection (eg as may be the case of a Power System supplied by generators must direct-on-line start large machines which subsequently exhibit

rapid VAr decrease leaving machines in an overexcited state) significant

overvoltage levels may be predicted (120 to 125 of nominal voltage can be

predicted) This may require special specification of transformers to avoid

problems caused by overfluxing or increased current due to magnetic excitation

Special attention should be paid to voltage and frequency tolerance specifications

for generator transformers which may need to match the run up characteristic of the

generator This can require the transformer to be capable of withstanding full rated

voltage at 80 of rated frequency

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 14

See 811 for motor starting requirements This can give rise to a voltage

depression at motor terminals of 20 which therefore requires that the power

system should be able to successfully accept this condition for the starting period

Typical starting periods can range from 1 to 10 seconds depending upon machine

and system ratings and machine inertia Starting times beyond 10 seconds are

possible where particularly high inertia loads need to be accelerated (eg fans)

however these would constitute a special application and should be treated byexception

452 Where the public utility intake of a site is via transformers these

transformers and their voltage regulation equipment shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance on transformer construction and specification is given in BP

Group RP 12-9

Where necessary for voltage regulation purposes the incoming transformers shall

be equipped with on load and automatic tap change equipment

453 Where there is on-site generation the generators and their governor

and voltage regulation equipment shall comply with BP Group GS 112-

6 or BP Group GS 160-1

Detailed guidance on generator application is not featured as a separate part of the

BP Group RP 12 series of documents

454 Automatic voltage regulation equipment of power systems which have

both on-site generation and public utility intakes via transformers shall

be designed so that there is no detrimental inter-action

There are a number of options which can be considered for voltage control In

general the excitation of the power generators can be arranged for zero VAr

importexport for the whole site and at the same time the intake transformer

controller can be arranged to maintain voltage at a pre set level

455 The excitation systems of synchronous motors shall be arranged to

ensure no detrimental interactive effects with transformer automatic tap

change equipment

In the case of synchronous motors where it is probable that the synchronous motor would be small in relation to the supply intake capacity it is probable that the

excitation can be arranged to maintain a constant power factor to the machine and

the transformer tap change control would be arranged to maintain voltage within

pre set levels

456 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation where

the site has no public utility connection shall be designed such that

generator loading may be automatically shared between the operating

sets and that the nominal supply frequency is maintained within the

approved tolerance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 15

Where governor droop control is employed there should be an operator in

attendance who could take action from time to time to ensure that the system

frequency remained within reasonable limits Such limits should be plusmn 1 and the

output system frequency time should be within 30 seconds of standard time

Statement of these limits for design purposes does not indicate a need to supply an

appropriate standard clock arrangement although power plants supplying

townships or camp areas are encouraged to have this facility The limit for frequency time may be relaxed for small power plants and those where frequency

time is considered unimportant (eg Where there are no time signals reliant upon

mains frequency)

For unmanned power plants or for those where constant operator intervention

would be undesirable the system frequency may be controlled by an isochronous

controller designed to provide overall frequency and generator loadings within

prescribed limits

457 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation at a

site with a public utility connection shall be designed for parallel

operation with the public utility and shall incorporate the protection

arrangements which shall ensure that under public utility collapse ( or

unacceptable major disturbance) the site will retain a defined loading

condition The arrangement shall also incorporate the means for

independent operation

Where a facility is interconnected with a Public Utility the control of the power

system frequency must be under the control of the Public Utility Therefore only

defined load governor settings or droop load sharing control systems are possible

However such interconnection is always subject to disconnection under automatic

protection system operation which will leave the power generators supplying the

site load Under these conditions whatever the original generator control arrangements the generators must revert to independent load sharing control

46 Synchronising

461 Synchronising andor check synchronising equipment shall be provided

wherever more than one source of power may be operated in parallel

with another A synchronising philosophy shall be prepared

See also sections 463 and 464 Because there can be many alternative ways of

achieving a reasonable synchronising arrangement it is expected that there would

be prepared a synchronisingcheck synchronising philosophy (or design document) for every installation which will define the particular arrangements

462 Manual synchronising arrangements shall always be provided for the

incoming power generator circuit breakers This shall comprise

voltmeters and a synchroscope to show the voltage and frequency

differences between the two systems that need to be paralleled A

check synchronising relay should be utilised to prevent operator

maloperation but in order to allow closing a power source on to a dead

system as is required under black start conditions the check

synchronising relay shall have a means of manual or automatic override

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 16

Wherever possible and economically feasible the manual synchronising system

supplied shall also include automatic synchronising applied to the generator

controls

Manual synchronising facilities should also be applied to any primary switchgear

bus section circuit breaker and to circuit breakers incoming to the primary switchboard which can make a parallel connection with other sources

463 Synchronising or check synchronising facilities shall be fitted to busbar

section and bus coupler circuit breakers where it is possible to run the

two systems feeding either section of a busbar completely segregated

from the other The number of circuit breakers provided with

synchronising or check synchronising facilities should be kept to a

minimum A similar logic shall be applied to public utility intake

circuits Alternatively circuit breaker interlocking schemes shall be

installed to preclude the possibility of paralleling two sources of power

where synchronising facilities are excluded

Notwithstanding the provisions of 464 it is not expected that there would be a

need to include synchronising or check synchronising facilities on system voltage

levels more than two levels removed from the power generation busbar where the

power system is operated with bus sections normally closed However this is a

general rule and should the system be commonly operated with open bus sections

for significant periods and there is little central system control or information

dissemination the arrangement should be reviewed

464 Synchronising facilities shall be provided at the primary power supply

voltage and should be avoided at other voltages by use of appropriatecircuit breaker interlocking

The form of interlocking should avoid the need for break-before-make action unless

absolutely necessary This may need to be associated with upstream bus section

circuit breakers and incoming circuit breakers to the upstream switchboard See

463 (commentary) for provisions should distances be too great for the economic

use of interlocking

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems

Detailed guidance on this subject is given in BP Group RP 12-5 dc

power supplies for control systems shall comply with BP Group GS112-11 and ac power supplies shall comply with BP Group GS 112-10

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 17

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

51 General

511 The distribution network shall be designed to carry continuously at least

110 of the Maximum Demand associated with peak design production at the maximum ambient conditions

The requirement for 110 capacity is considered to be applicable to all

components within the distribution system including transformer capacity It does

not include capacity of equipment considered to constitute a load to the power

system eg Induction Machines which should be rated as close as possible to

actual process demands

Refer also to the commentary to Section 311

Switchboards should be supplied with a de gree of s pares and room for expansion

Further details may be found in BP Group RP 12-6 and 7

512 Where required the reliability associated with any part of the system

shall be assessed and presented in qualitative and quantitative terms

In general the design of the power system distribution should be based upon

qualitative requirements which include assessments for meeting power supply

continuity in the event of maintenance and in the event of failure Since electrical

distribution systems are inherently reliable the design requirements are commonly

based upon the need to disconnect distribution electrical equipment to carry out

routine maintenance and at the same time keep power supplies available for

operating plant However under some circumstances the need to assess the

electrical reliability may arise (perhaps as part of an overall assessment of plant failure but possibly as part of a comparison of alternative supplies for new plant)

Under these circumstances the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and the Mean

Time To Repair (MTTR) concerning power system failure at any particular

switchboard would be required In addition it is recommended that the quantitative

statement indicate the probability of failure occurring over a particular timeframe

(eg Provide a value and definition of the probability of zero failures over a 12

month period)

See also sections 412 (commentary) 422 and 43

513 The distribution system shall be designed using one of the basic

arrangements further outlined in 52 through 56 and incorporating thecontrol features of 57 The system designed shall be described in a

design philosophy document

It is considered that the design features contained in sections 52 through 56 would

be suitable for all of the industrial power systems likely to be required by BP

However should an alternative philosophy be available it should be compared with

a standard double radial system in terms of operation reliability maintainability

and cost

The depictions in the drawings which illustrate the texts of 52 and 55 are fairly

conventional in that Contactors are employed only for motor feeders Under some

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 18

circumstances Contactors can prove an economic choice for transformer or

Switchboard feeders The depictions are for an extensive installation typical of

Refinery or other large system Offshore systems may be considered as similar but

without the higher voltage level and interconnections to Public Utility

52 Single Radial

521 These should be used to provide power to non essential electrical loads

those where alternative sources of energy are available such as standby

generating plant or those process loads for which a lower availability

can be accepted

Where minimum facilities engineering is required and the process plant can be (or

will regularly be) switched off then single radial systems may be contemplated to

satisfy process demands It is considered that maintenance of electrical systems

could be scheduled for normal process plant shutdown times and the reliability of

electrical distribution systems is generally much better than required by the process

system

522 Each component of the single radial circuit shall be capable of supplying

110 of the required electrical load Transformers or other plant

which includes forced cooling equipment shall not rely entirely on the

forced cooling arrangements to obtain the necessary rating

Refer to the commentary to Section 311 for more detail on load estimation

Where the loading is of a cyclical nature and the forced cooling would not be

expected to operate for more than 2 hours in any 12 hour period then capacities

based upon forced cooling can be considered However where this is the case acooling system failure alarm shall be provided

53 Double Radial

531 Essential and Process Sensitive loads should be supplied by two or

more identically rated radial systems

Figure 1(a) details a double radial system of feed

532 In double radial systems each circuit shall be capable of carrying a

110 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall include bussection switchgear They shall be arranged to ensure that unscheduled

outage of any component of the circuit would not result in loss of

power supply after the faulty equipment has been disconnected from the

system

See section 311 for detail on load estimation

Exceptions to the requirement for all supplies to be maintained may be made in the

following cases-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 19

(a) For bus section circuit breaker faults These may sometimes cause damage

which may require complete switchboard shutdown However the

occurrence of such faults is sufficiently rare as to be neglected

(b) Where there may be some non-essential loads supplied from a double

radial system These may receive a single radial supply from a double

radial system and therefore would not receive a supply in the event of some forms of double radial system outage

533 Double radially fed systems should generally be operated in parallel

with all bus-section switches closed

It is considered that the advantage of continuity of supply in the event of relatively

light fault conditions which is offered by closed bus section systems outweighs the

disadvantages of increased fault disturbance for heavy fault conditions It is also

more inherently safe since the switchgear fault conditions are based upon the worst

possible supply condition However see also section 534

534 Where switchgear fault levels are found to be above the values outlined

in 23 attention shall be given to operating with bus-section breakers

open as opposed to purchasing higher fault level switchgear Where an

open bus-section breaker philosophy is being given attention the need

to restore rapidly the supplies to drives shall determine whether

automatic closure of bus section circuit breaker(s) is to be employed

Switchgear fault levels could be readily reduced by increasing the impedance of

incoming transformers (Where new transformers will be purchased) However

increasing the impedance of transformers increases the voltage regulation between

light and full load There is therefore a trade-off between fault duty and normal voltage regulation

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

54 Triple Radial

541 Critical and essential loads may be alternatively supplied by triple

identically rated radial systems These systems are preferred to double

radial systems wherever there is an overall total cost advantage

A triple radial system comprises three feeders and three feeder transformers to

provide supply to a distribution switchboard

542 Each circuit of triple fed radial systems shall be capable of providing at

least 55 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall be split into at

least three sections with two bus-section switches

This will allow for the loss of any one of the three circuits leaving the two healthy

circuits still capable of providing 110 of the Maximum Demand

543 Triple radial systems shall be provided where the power flow is

relatively large They shall generally be operated with only two circuits

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 7

See 322 (commentary)

Where economically viable power generation on site may be arrangedto peak-lop or otherwise supplement the external power supply

412 On-site Generation with no Public Utility Connection

Where a site is offshore or remote from a public utility network or hasa surplus of fuel or process energy on-site generation will normally beexpected as the principal source of power The on-site power generation arrangements shall be defined taking into account thefollowing factors-

(i) The fuel source

(ii) The nature of the process energy

(iii) The process steam or other heat requirements if any

(iv) The relationship between electric power requirements and the

energy sources on any given site

The number and arrangement of power generating sets should reflectthe particular needs of the installation in terms of Availability andReliability Where an availability of above 80 is required a minimumof 2 generating sets will be required on sites where there is noalternative electricity supply Under these circumstances the following

criteria should be satisfied-

(i) There should be sufficient generation to meet the Maximum

Demand when the largest single source of electrical supply is

out of service at peak demand times due to maintenance or any

other reason

(ii) Where more than 2 generators are installed those loads

considered as Process Sensitive (ie those loads which must

operate to maintain either full or a reduced production) shall be

supplied when the largest capacity generator is out of service

and the second largest generator is coincidentally shut down due

to unforeseen circumstances

All power generation facilities which cannot derive alternative power from another source shall be arranged with Black Start facilities TheBlack Start arrangements may involve use of Emergency or In-Housediesel generators

For systems requiring high reliability the probability of having sufficient power

generation for 100 of the load (provided by the main power supply system) in a 12

month period should be 99 This would normally require an installation of at

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 8

least 3 generators Under some circumstances this (high) reliability requirement

can be relaxed particularly where the consequences of power supply failure are not

severe In such circumstances only two (or even one) main power generators could

be considered

Where multiple power generators are provided there needs to be a philosophy of

supply related to normal operation maintenance shutdown and to failure Where 3 generators are installed it is reasonable to expect that substantial production could

be achieved by a single set remaining available following failure of the second set

with the third unavailable

413 On-site Generation Run in Parallel with a Public Utility

Where on-site generation is selected to be the principal source of power and where a connection to a public utility is available considerationshall be given to the following options related to connection to thePublic Utility-

(i) As a standby source of electric power

(ii) A means of export of surplus electrical power

(iii) A combination of both

(iv) As a Black Start Facility

It is expected that the power generation philosophy would consider these options

which would be contained within a formal design record See also 411 where

there may be economic benefit in peak lopping of the Public Utility supply taking advantage of tariff opportunities

42 Emergency Power Supply Equipment

421 Power supplies to Essential loads should be achieved by one or more of

the following-

(i) Providing an alternative source of energy such as batteries

(ii) Increasing the amount (or being assured of sufficient sheer

numbers) of normal supply generation equipment with anarrangement for duplicate fuel supply which effectively avoids

single contingency power outage

(iii) Ensuring a number of alternative supply feeds are available to

the loads and that the alternatives effectively provide duplication

to avoid single contingency power loss

(iv) Local Diesel Generation

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 9

In general it is expected that Essential loads would receive battery supplies or

would be associated with an emergency generator However where this is

impractical leads to low reliability or is prohibitively expensive the least cost of

the remaining alternatives should normally be adopted

The concept of increased power generation in (ii) above is meant to allow for

emergency power supplies to be designed as part of a normal power generation and distribution system The criteria for design would be that the power source and the

distribution system for the Essential loads would maintain sufficiently high security

for these safety critical systems A similar concept is considered appropriate for

the concept of having a suitable number of alternative supply feeds detailed in (iii)

above

422 In the application of 421 (ii) the power supply to Essential loads shall

be designed to remain available in the event of at least two of the

installed main power generators being unavailable The probability of

zero interruptions to the Essential load feed busbar over a 12 month

period shall be 99 or better Where necessary a loadshedding schemeshall be installed to secure the supply to the Essential loads Essential

loads shall not form part of the loadshedding arrangements

The concept of additional power generation being suitable for emergency supply

duty will clearly not be possible without there being at least 3 power generation sets

available Where one power generator thus installed is of lower capacity than the

system maximum demand andor the nature of the load can lead to instability it is

expected that a load shedding scheme would be employed to ensure that the

Essential loads would be maintained for any fault condition which could leave a

single machine on the busbar

423 Where increased main generating plant or local standby plant is selectedto provide power to Essential loads it shall be either diesel engine or

gas turbine driven generator set(s) Local standby or emergency

generator prime movers shall have their own dedicated fuel supply All

prime movers for main generators (where these are deemed to provide

Essential supplies) shall be arranged for two fuel sources with

automatic transfer Power generation for Essential loads shall be rated

to have a spare capacity of at least 10

These provisions are designed to ensure that a single contingency fault (eg fuel

supply failure) will not cause power supply loss

424 Emergency generator sets shall be capable of starting and running when

no alternative source of electrical ac power is available ie a black

start capability This may be achieved by compressed air starting with

air receivers being capable of six engine starts from one air charge or

by battery starting with a similar capability or by both methods

The requirements for emergency generators are contained in BP Group GS 160-1

In general two starting methods are required It should be noted that the location

of emergency generators should normally be in a non-classified area with supply

air derived from a clean source For offshore installations the location of the

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 10

emergency generator should be on an outside wall which can have louvers open to

supply combustion air Care should be taken to ensure that the exhaust and air

intakes are located to avoid problems associated with other adjacent plant or

systems

425 Emergency generators shall be provided with automatic starting and

loading facilities A simple and reliable method of ensuring that

emergency generators can be immediately switched to their pre-defined

load shall be arranged Manual facilities shall also be provided for

regular testing purposes Testing facilities should permit the loading of

standby generator sets

It is preferred that the emergency generator should be capable of running in

parallel with the mains supply for testing purposes and for the purposes of

transferring load without the need for supply break

43 Reliability

For each power supply arrangement a reliability assessment shall becarried out to determine the probability of failure of supply

In the early stages of design a reliability study may be undertaken as part of the

comparison of alternative methods of providing power supplies Such studies would

also be useful in determining the cost of material failures The undertaking of

these studies may form part of the Contractors workscope Where the Project Team

is required to carry out such a study the terms of reference related to objectives

data gathering and evaluation shall be clearly specified

44 Primary Substation

441 Generator circuits (other than local emergency generators) and public

utility power intakes should be connected together at a common

primary substation the busbars of which are used as the main load

distribution centre Where generators and public utility power intakes

may be located at different points throughout the site these shall be

interconnected

Thus there will be at least one and for larger sites more primary substations

442 The switchgear for primary substations shall comply with BP Group GS112-9 (or BP Group GS 112-8 where only LV supplies are involved)

Detailed guid ance for H V and LV switchgear is contained in BP Group RP 12-6

and BP Group RP 12-7

443 Busbar arrangements shall be selected to be cost effective operationally

flexible and safe The following technical points shall be taken into

account

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 11

(i) Operational flexibility to permit loads and power supplies to be effectively

connected under scheduled and unscheduled outages of circuits and

busbar sections

(ii) Minimal switchgear per circuit and simple control and protection

(iii) Unscheduled loss of busbar sections shall not shut down the system beyond the level designed and provided for

(iv) Scheduled maintenance of busbars shall be possible without system

shutdowns beyond those designed and provided for

It may often be found necessary to locate the incoming circuit breakers of a busbar

to a location half way along one side of a busbar in order to be more assured that

100 of the load is unlikely to flow in one section of the busbars

The possibility of bus section circuit breaker fault conditions in metal enclosed

switchgear which may cause a full switchboard shutdown for remedial repairs

should be considered However unless there are overriding reasons for thecontrary BP do not design switchboards to cater for this eventuality

444 Single busbar arrangements for primary supply substations should be

provided subject to the following criteria-

(i) The switchgear shall be indoor metalclad type

(ii) The single busbar shall be split into a number of sections by

using suitable switchgear The number of sections of busbars

shall be consistent with the acceptable loss of incoming or

outgoing circuits under both scheduled and unscheduled lossconditions

(iii) Routine busbar maintenance shall not be considered to be

necessary or shall be an infrequent occurrence

Where there would be 3 incoming transformer feeders the busbar would normally

be expected to be in 3 parts with feeder circuit breakers arranged on each of the

sections of busbar

445 Double busbar arrangements shall be provided in installations where

outdoor air insulated busbars are installed or where regular busbar maintenance is considered necessary for environmental or pollution

reasons They may also be supplied where the operational flexibility

available from being able to connect incoming power circuits and

outgoing load circuits in a variety of ways is considered to be

particularly advantageous

The perceived need for double busbar arrangements for indoor metalclad HV

switchgear was strong in early Refinery designs but has virtually disappeared from

modern Refinery and other industrial installations Therefore the use of double

busbar arrangements needs to be carefully considered and advantages balanced

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 12

against the considerable additional costs of Building Switchgear and Protective

arrangements One generally clear case for double busbar arrangements lies in

outdoor installations where maintenance work on busbars would be greater

446 Ringbars or mesh busbars arrangements shall not be used

Ring or mesh arrangements are generally difficult to extend and therefore are

considered to have limited application However this type of arrangement has

switchgear saving advantages where the system is unlikely to require modification

447 Where the power supply is obtained from a public utility via equipment

such as transformers or feeders the busbars shall be sectionalised to

prevent total power system shutdown in the event of unscheduled

outage of any busbar section Coincidental maintenance of a public

utility intake transformer shall not be considered

It is considered that maintenance of incoming transformers and feeds would be lowand would be quickly completed Therefore high expense in order to reduce an

already unlikely event is not considered worthwhile

448 The maximum number of busbar sections should not exceed the number

of individual power sources

This requirement sets out to avoid over flexibility in a power system which although

useful in contemplation is of little economic benefit in practice

449 The outgoing load circuits shall be connected to busbar sections in such

a way as to optimise power flow across busbar section switches

commensurate with reliability and operating considerations and shall

also permit unscheduled and scheduled busbar section outages with the

minimum disturbance to the loads being supplied

See also the commentary to section 443

4410 Generators may be connected either directly to the primary power

supply busbar or via generator transformers The type of connection

shall be selected depending upon the economics associated with both

the generation voltage and the primary supply busbar voltage

Typical arrangements for primary substations for a variety of types of power supply are shown in Figure 1

Primary substations should be located in areas which are not classifiedas hazardous The selected location within the site shall-

(a) Take account of the ability to distribute power to the onsite

loads without unnecessarily high distribution equipment costs

(b) Be adjacent to the generation or public utility intake

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 13

(c) Be suitable for future expansion

Where it is impossible to locate the primary substation outside of the hazardous

areas arrangements for forced ventilation of the substation shall be made Air for

the ventilation shall be taken from a remote and safe area the substation shall beequipped with air lock doors gas detectors (which shall cause immediate de-

energisation of all electrical equipment in the substation which is not suitable for a

zone 1 environment) and loss of sufficient ventilation and pressurisation shall

initiate an alarm condition which although not causing a trip of the switchgear

shall be used as an operator based time dependent system for the effect of repair

Shutdown shall be initiated should repairs not be possible within an operator

defined time scale

45 Frequency and Voltage Regulation

451 The power system design shall be arranged to ensure that the voltage

variation (between full load and lightly loaded conditions) experiencedat any piece of equipment designated as a load (ie not including

distribution equipment) shall not exceed plusmn 5 of the declared system

nominal voltage Further the power system shall be arranged to be able

to withstand without undue stress a transient voltage variation to 80

of nominal for a 10 second period or such longer duration at specific

points if necessary Special consideration shall be given to power

frequency overvoltage effects and the need for Power System

equipment to withstand higher overvoltages under some circumstances

This requirement ensures that standard equipment parameters would not be

compromised Where the system voltage deviates beyond the 5 limit apart fromequipment life expectation being eroded there is a danger of exceeding the

hazardous area certification limits for that equipment installed in a hazardous area

This may not actually yield failures or temperatures likely to cause ignition of a

vapour which may be present but will increase the likelihood of such occurrences

and will infringe the basic safety intention

The Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 r equires voltage variations to be within plusmn

6 However standards for equipment state a plusmn 5 tolerance for voltage Hence

the lower limit is specified here

Where power systems which have automatic voltage control can experience

significant load rejection (eg as may be the case of a Power System supplied by generators must direct-on-line start large machines which subsequently exhibit

rapid VAr decrease leaving machines in an overexcited state) significant

overvoltage levels may be predicted (120 to 125 of nominal voltage can be

predicted) This may require special specification of transformers to avoid

problems caused by overfluxing or increased current due to magnetic excitation

Special attention should be paid to voltage and frequency tolerance specifications

for generator transformers which may need to match the run up characteristic of the

generator This can require the transformer to be capable of withstanding full rated

voltage at 80 of rated frequency

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 14

See 811 for motor starting requirements This can give rise to a voltage

depression at motor terminals of 20 which therefore requires that the power

system should be able to successfully accept this condition for the starting period

Typical starting periods can range from 1 to 10 seconds depending upon machine

and system ratings and machine inertia Starting times beyond 10 seconds are

possible where particularly high inertia loads need to be accelerated (eg fans)

however these would constitute a special application and should be treated byexception

452 Where the public utility intake of a site is via transformers these

transformers and their voltage regulation equipment shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance on transformer construction and specification is given in BP

Group RP 12-9

Where necessary for voltage regulation purposes the incoming transformers shall

be equipped with on load and automatic tap change equipment

453 Where there is on-site generation the generators and their governor

and voltage regulation equipment shall comply with BP Group GS 112-

6 or BP Group GS 160-1

Detailed guidance on generator application is not featured as a separate part of the

BP Group RP 12 series of documents

454 Automatic voltage regulation equipment of power systems which have

both on-site generation and public utility intakes via transformers shall

be designed so that there is no detrimental inter-action

There are a number of options which can be considered for voltage control In

general the excitation of the power generators can be arranged for zero VAr

importexport for the whole site and at the same time the intake transformer

controller can be arranged to maintain voltage at a pre set level

455 The excitation systems of synchronous motors shall be arranged to

ensure no detrimental interactive effects with transformer automatic tap

change equipment

In the case of synchronous motors where it is probable that the synchronous motor would be small in relation to the supply intake capacity it is probable that the

excitation can be arranged to maintain a constant power factor to the machine and

the transformer tap change control would be arranged to maintain voltage within

pre set levels

456 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation where

the site has no public utility connection shall be designed such that

generator loading may be automatically shared between the operating

sets and that the nominal supply frequency is maintained within the

approved tolerance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 15

Where governor droop control is employed there should be an operator in

attendance who could take action from time to time to ensure that the system

frequency remained within reasonable limits Such limits should be plusmn 1 and the

output system frequency time should be within 30 seconds of standard time

Statement of these limits for design purposes does not indicate a need to supply an

appropriate standard clock arrangement although power plants supplying

townships or camp areas are encouraged to have this facility The limit for frequency time may be relaxed for small power plants and those where frequency

time is considered unimportant (eg Where there are no time signals reliant upon

mains frequency)

For unmanned power plants or for those where constant operator intervention

would be undesirable the system frequency may be controlled by an isochronous

controller designed to provide overall frequency and generator loadings within

prescribed limits

457 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation at a

site with a public utility connection shall be designed for parallel

operation with the public utility and shall incorporate the protection

arrangements which shall ensure that under public utility collapse ( or

unacceptable major disturbance) the site will retain a defined loading

condition The arrangement shall also incorporate the means for

independent operation

Where a facility is interconnected with a Public Utility the control of the power

system frequency must be under the control of the Public Utility Therefore only

defined load governor settings or droop load sharing control systems are possible

However such interconnection is always subject to disconnection under automatic

protection system operation which will leave the power generators supplying the

site load Under these conditions whatever the original generator control arrangements the generators must revert to independent load sharing control

46 Synchronising

461 Synchronising andor check synchronising equipment shall be provided

wherever more than one source of power may be operated in parallel

with another A synchronising philosophy shall be prepared

See also sections 463 and 464 Because there can be many alternative ways of

achieving a reasonable synchronising arrangement it is expected that there would

be prepared a synchronisingcheck synchronising philosophy (or design document) for every installation which will define the particular arrangements

462 Manual synchronising arrangements shall always be provided for the

incoming power generator circuit breakers This shall comprise

voltmeters and a synchroscope to show the voltage and frequency

differences between the two systems that need to be paralleled A

check synchronising relay should be utilised to prevent operator

maloperation but in order to allow closing a power source on to a dead

system as is required under black start conditions the check

synchronising relay shall have a means of manual or automatic override

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 16

Wherever possible and economically feasible the manual synchronising system

supplied shall also include automatic synchronising applied to the generator

controls

Manual synchronising facilities should also be applied to any primary switchgear

bus section circuit breaker and to circuit breakers incoming to the primary switchboard which can make a parallel connection with other sources

463 Synchronising or check synchronising facilities shall be fitted to busbar

section and bus coupler circuit breakers where it is possible to run the

two systems feeding either section of a busbar completely segregated

from the other The number of circuit breakers provided with

synchronising or check synchronising facilities should be kept to a

minimum A similar logic shall be applied to public utility intake

circuits Alternatively circuit breaker interlocking schemes shall be

installed to preclude the possibility of paralleling two sources of power

where synchronising facilities are excluded

Notwithstanding the provisions of 464 it is not expected that there would be a

need to include synchronising or check synchronising facilities on system voltage

levels more than two levels removed from the power generation busbar where the

power system is operated with bus sections normally closed However this is a

general rule and should the system be commonly operated with open bus sections

for significant periods and there is little central system control or information

dissemination the arrangement should be reviewed

464 Synchronising facilities shall be provided at the primary power supply

voltage and should be avoided at other voltages by use of appropriatecircuit breaker interlocking

The form of interlocking should avoid the need for break-before-make action unless

absolutely necessary This may need to be associated with upstream bus section

circuit breakers and incoming circuit breakers to the upstream switchboard See

463 (commentary) for provisions should distances be too great for the economic

use of interlocking

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems

Detailed guidance on this subject is given in BP Group RP 12-5 dc

power supplies for control systems shall comply with BP Group GS112-11 and ac power supplies shall comply with BP Group GS 112-10

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 17

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

51 General

511 The distribution network shall be designed to carry continuously at least

110 of the Maximum Demand associated with peak design production at the maximum ambient conditions

The requirement for 110 capacity is considered to be applicable to all

components within the distribution system including transformer capacity It does

not include capacity of equipment considered to constitute a load to the power

system eg Induction Machines which should be rated as close as possible to

actual process demands

Refer also to the commentary to Section 311

Switchboards should be supplied with a de gree of s pares and room for expansion

Further details may be found in BP Group RP 12-6 and 7

512 Where required the reliability associated with any part of the system

shall be assessed and presented in qualitative and quantitative terms

In general the design of the power system distribution should be based upon

qualitative requirements which include assessments for meeting power supply

continuity in the event of maintenance and in the event of failure Since electrical

distribution systems are inherently reliable the design requirements are commonly

based upon the need to disconnect distribution electrical equipment to carry out

routine maintenance and at the same time keep power supplies available for

operating plant However under some circumstances the need to assess the

electrical reliability may arise (perhaps as part of an overall assessment of plant failure but possibly as part of a comparison of alternative supplies for new plant)

Under these circumstances the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and the Mean

Time To Repair (MTTR) concerning power system failure at any particular

switchboard would be required In addition it is recommended that the quantitative

statement indicate the probability of failure occurring over a particular timeframe

(eg Provide a value and definition of the probability of zero failures over a 12

month period)

See also sections 412 (commentary) 422 and 43

513 The distribution system shall be designed using one of the basic

arrangements further outlined in 52 through 56 and incorporating thecontrol features of 57 The system designed shall be described in a

design philosophy document

It is considered that the design features contained in sections 52 through 56 would

be suitable for all of the industrial power systems likely to be required by BP

However should an alternative philosophy be available it should be compared with

a standard double radial system in terms of operation reliability maintainability

and cost

The depictions in the drawings which illustrate the texts of 52 and 55 are fairly

conventional in that Contactors are employed only for motor feeders Under some

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 18

circumstances Contactors can prove an economic choice for transformer or

Switchboard feeders The depictions are for an extensive installation typical of

Refinery or other large system Offshore systems may be considered as similar but

without the higher voltage level and interconnections to Public Utility

52 Single Radial

521 These should be used to provide power to non essential electrical loads

those where alternative sources of energy are available such as standby

generating plant or those process loads for which a lower availability

can be accepted

Where minimum facilities engineering is required and the process plant can be (or

will regularly be) switched off then single radial systems may be contemplated to

satisfy process demands It is considered that maintenance of electrical systems

could be scheduled for normal process plant shutdown times and the reliability of

electrical distribution systems is generally much better than required by the process

system

522 Each component of the single radial circuit shall be capable of supplying

110 of the required electrical load Transformers or other plant

which includes forced cooling equipment shall not rely entirely on the

forced cooling arrangements to obtain the necessary rating

Refer to the commentary to Section 311 for more detail on load estimation

Where the loading is of a cyclical nature and the forced cooling would not be

expected to operate for more than 2 hours in any 12 hour period then capacities

based upon forced cooling can be considered However where this is the case acooling system failure alarm shall be provided

53 Double Radial

531 Essential and Process Sensitive loads should be supplied by two or

more identically rated radial systems

Figure 1(a) details a double radial system of feed

532 In double radial systems each circuit shall be capable of carrying a

110 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall include bussection switchgear They shall be arranged to ensure that unscheduled

outage of any component of the circuit would not result in loss of

power supply after the faulty equipment has been disconnected from the

system

See section 311 for detail on load estimation

Exceptions to the requirement for all supplies to be maintained may be made in the

following cases-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 19

(a) For bus section circuit breaker faults These may sometimes cause damage

which may require complete switchboard shutdown However the

occurrence of such faults is sufficiently rare as to be neglected

(b) Where there may be some non-essential loads supplied from a double

radial system These may receive a single radial supply from a double

radial system and therefore would not receive a supply in the event of some forms of double radial system outage

533 Double radially fed systems should generally be operated in parallel

with all bus-section switches closed

It is considered that the advantage of continuity of supply in the event of relatively

light fault conditions which is offered by closed bus section systems outweighs the

disadvantages of increased fault disturbance for heavy fault conditions It is also

more inherently safe since the switchgear fault conditions are based upon the worst

possible supply condition However see also section 534

534 Where switchgear fault levels are found to be above the values outlined

in 23 attention shall be given to operating with bus-section breakers

open as opposed to purchasing higher fault level switchgear Where an

open bus-section breaker philosophy is being given attention the need

to restore rapidly the supplies to drives shall determine whether

automatic closure of bus section circuit breaker(s) is to be employed

Switchgear fault levels could be readily reduced by increasing the impedance of

incoming transformers (Where new transformers will be purchased) However

increasing the impedance of transformers increases the voltage regulation between

light and full load There is therefore a trade-off between fault duty and normal voltage regulation

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

54 Triple Radial

541 Critical and essential loads may be alternatively supplied by triple

identically rated radial systems These systems are preferred to double

radial systems wherever there is an overall total cost advantage

A triple radial system comprises three feeders and three feeder transformers to

provide supply to a distribution switchboard

542 Each circuit of triple fed radial systems shall be capable of providing at

least 55 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall be split into at

least three sections with two bus-section switches

This will allow for the loss of any one of the three circuits leaving the two healthy

circuits still capable of providing 110 of the Maximum Demand

543 Triple radial systems shall be provided where the power flow is

relatively large They shall generally be operated with only two circuits

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 8

least 3 generators Under some circumstances this (high) reliability requirement

can be relaxed particularly where the consequences of power supply failure are not

severe In such circumstances only two (or even one) main power generators could

be considered

Where multiple power generators are provided there needs to be a philosophy of

supply related to normal operation maintenance shutdown and to failure Where 3 generators are installed it is reasonable to expect that substantial production could

be achieved by a single set remaining available following failure of the second set

with the third unavailable

413 On-site Generation Run in Parallel with a Public Utility

Where on-site generation is selected to be the principal source of power and where a connection to a public utility is available considerationshall be given to the following options related to connection to thePublic Utility-

(i) As a standby source of electric power

(ii) A means of export of surplus electrical power

(iii) A combination of both

(iv) As a Black Start Facility

It is expected that the power generation philosophy would consider these options

which would be contained within a formal design record See also 411 where

there may be economic benefit in peak lopping of the Public Utility supply taking advantage of tariff opportunities

42 Emergency Power Supply Equipment

421 Power supplies to Essential loads should be achieved by one or more of

the following-

(i) Providing an alternative source of energy such as batteries

(ii) Increasing the amount (or being assured of sufficient sheer

numbers) of normal supply generation equipment with anarrangement for duplicate fuel supply which effectively avoids

single contingency power outage

(iii) Ensuring a number of alternative supply feeds are available to

the loads and that the alternatives effectively provide duplication

to avoid single contingency power loss

(iv) Local Diesel Generation

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 9

In general it is expected that Essential loads would receive battery supplies or

would be associated with an emergency generator However where this is

impractical leads to low reliability or is prohibitively expensive the least cost of

the remaining alternatives should normally be adopted

The concept of increased power generation in (ii) above is meant to allow for

emergency power supplies to be designed as part of a normal power generation and distribution system The criteria for design would be that the power source and the

distribution system for the Essential loads would maintain sufficiently high security

for these safety critical systems A similar concept is considered appropriate for

the concept of having a suitable number of alternative supply feeds detailed in (iii)

above

422 In the application of 421 (ii) the power supply to Essential loads shall

be designed to remain available in the event of at least two of the

installed main power generators being unavailable The probability of

zero interruptions to the Essential load feed busbar over a 12 month

period shall be 99 or better Where necessary a loadshedding schemeshall be installed to secure the supply to the Essential loads Essential

loads shall not form part of the loadshedding arrangements

The concept of additional power generation being suitable for emergency supply

duty will clearly not be possible without there being at least 3 power generation sets

available Where one power generator thus installed is of lower capacity than the

system maximum demand andor the nature of the load can lead to instability it is

expected that a load shedding scheme would be employed to ensure that the

Essential loads would be maintained for any fault condition which could leave a

single machine on the busbar

423 Where increased main generating plant or local standby plant is selectedto provide power to Essential loads it shall be either diesel engine or

gas turbine driven generator set(s) Local standby or emergency

generator prime movers shall have their own dedicated fuel supply All

prime movers for main generators (where these are deemed to provide

Essential supplies) shall be arranged for two fuel sources with

automatic transfer Power generation for Essential loads shall be rated

to have a spare capacity of at least 10

These provisions are designed to ensure that a single contingency fault (eg fuel

supply failure) will not cause power supply loss

424 Emergency generator sets shall be capable of starting and running when

no alternative source of electrical ac power is available ie a black

start capability This may be achieved by compressed air starting with

air receivers being capable of six engine starts from one air charge or

by battery starting with a similar capability or by both methods

The requirements for emergency generators are contained in BP Group GS 160-1

In general two starting methods are required It should be noted that the location

of emergency generators should normally be in a non-classified area with supply

air derived from a clean source For offshore installations the location of the

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 10

emergency generator should be on an outside wall which can have louvers open to

supply combustion air Care should be taken to ensure that the exhaust and air

intakes are located to avoid problems associated with other adjacent plant or

systems

425 Emergency generators shall be provided with automatic starting and

loading facilities A simple and reliable method of ensuring that

emergency generators can be immediately switched to their pre-defined

load shall be arranged Manual facilities shall also be provided for

regular testing purposes Testing facilities should permit the loading of

standby generator sets

It is preferred that the emergency generator should be capable of running in

parallel with the mains supply for testing purposes and for the purposes of

transferring load without the need for supply break

43 Reliability

For each power supply arrangement a reliability assessment shall becarried out to determine the probability of failure of supply

In the early stages of design a reliability study may be undertaken as part of the

comparison of alternative methods of providing power supplies Such studies would

also be useful in determining the cost of material failures The undertaking of

these studies may form part of the Contractors workscope Where the Project Team

is required to carry out such a study the terms of reference related to objectives

data gathering and evaluation shall be clearly specified

44 Primary Substation

441 Generator circuits (other than local emergency generators) and public

utility power intakes should be connected together at a common

primary substation the busbars of which are used as the main load

distribution centre Where generators and public utility power intakes

may be located at different points throughout the site these shall be

interconnected

Thus there will be at least one and for larger sites more primary substations

442 The switchgear for primary substations shall comply with BP Group GS112-9 (or BP Group GS 112-8 where only LV supplies are involved)

Detailed guid ance for H V and LV switchgear is contained in BP Group RP 12-6

and BP Group RP 12-7

443 Busbar arrangements shall be selected to be cost effective operationally

flexible and safe The following technical points shall be taken into

account

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 11

(i) Operational flexibility to permit loads and power supplies to be effectively

connected under scheduled and unscheduled outages of circuits and

busbar sections

(ii) Minimal switchgear per circuit and simple control and protection

(iii) Unscheduled loss of busbar sections shall not shut down the system beyond the level designed and provided for

(iv) Scheduled maintenance of busbars shall be possible without system

shutdowns beyond those designed and provided for

It may often be found necessary to locate the incoming circuit breakers of a busbar

to a location half way along one side of a busbar in order to be more assured that

100 of the load is unlikely to flow in one section of the busbars

The possibility of bus section circuit breaker fault conditions in metal enclosed

switchgear which may cause a full switchboard shutdown for remedial repairs

should be considered However unless there are overriding reasons for thecontrary BP do not design switchboards to cater for this eventuality

444 Single busbar arrangements for primary supply substations should be

provided subject to the following criteria-

(i) The switchgear shall be indoor metalclad type

(ii) The single busbar shall be split into a number of sections by

using suitable switchgear The number of sections of busbars

shall be consistent with the acceptable loss of incoming or

outgoing circuits under both scheduled and unscheduled lossconditions

(iii) Routine busbar maintenance shall not be considered to be

necessary or shall be an infrequent occurrence

Where there would be 3 incoming transformer feeders the busbar would normally

be expected to be in 3 parts with feeder circuit breakers arranged on each of the

sections of busbar

445 Double busbar arrangements shall be provided in installations where

outdoor air insulated busbars are installed or where regular busbar maintenance is considered necessary for environmental or pollution

reasons They may also be supplied where the operational flexibility

available from being able to connect incoming power circuits and

outgoing load circuits in a variety of ways is considered to be

particularly advantageous

The perceived need for double busbar arrangements for indoor metalclad HV

switchgear was strong in early Refinery designs but has virtually disappeared from

modern Refinery and other industrial installations Therefore the use of double

busbar arrangements needs to be carefully considered and advantages balanced

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 12

against the considerable additional costs of Building Switchgear and Protective

arrangements One generally clear case for double busbar arrangements lies in

outdoor installations where maintenance work on busbars would be greater

446 Ringbars or mesh busbars arrangements shall not be used

Ring or mesh arrangements are generally difficult to extend and therefore are

considered to have limited application However this type of arrangement has

switchgear saving advantages where the system is unlikely to require modification

447 Where the power supply is obtained from a public utility via equipment

such as transformers or feeders the busbars shall be sectionalised to

prevent total power system shutdown in the event of unscheduled

outage of any busbar section Coincidental maintenance of a public

utility intake transformer shall not be considered

It is considered that maintenance of incoming transformers and feeds would be lowand would be quickly completed Therefore high expense in order to reduce an

already unlikely event is not considered worthwhile

448 The maximum number of busbar sections should not exceed the number

of individual power sources

This requirement sets out to avoid over flexibility in a power system which although

useful in contemplation is of little economic benefit in practice

449 The outgoing load circuits shall be connected to busbar sections in such

a way as to optimise power flow across busbar section switches

commensurate with reliability and operating considerations and shall

also permit unscheduled and scheduled busbar section outages with the

minimum disturbance to the loads being supplied

See also the commentary to section 443

4410 Generators may be connected either directly to the primary power

supply busbar or via generator transformers The type of connection

shall be selected depending upon the economics associated with both

the generation voltage and the primary supply busbar voltage

Typical arrangements for primary substations for a variety of types of power supply are shown in Figure 1

Primary substations should be located in areas which are not classifiedas hazardous The selected location within the site shall-

(a) Take account of the ability to distribute power to the onsite

loads without unnecessarily high distribution equipment costs

(b) Be adjacent to the generation or public utility intake

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 13

(c) Be suitable for future expansion

Where it is impossible to locate the primary substation outside of the hazardous

areas arrangements for forced ventilation of the substation shall be made Air for

the ventilation shall be taken from a remote and safe area the substation shall beequipped with air lock doors gas detectors (which shall cause immediate de-

energisation of all electrical equipment in the substation which is not suitable for a

zone 1 environment) and loss of sufficient ventilation and pressurisation shall

initiate an alarm condition which although not causing a trip of the switchgear

shall be used as an operator based time dependent system for the effect of repair

Shutdown shall be initiated should repairs not be possible within an operator

defined time scale

45 Frequency and Voltage Regulation

451 The power system design shall be arranged to ensure that the voltage

variation (between full load and lightly loaded conditions) experiencedat any piece of equipment designated as a load (ie not including

distribution equipment) shall not exceed plusmn 5 of the declared system

nominal voltage Further the power system shall be arranged to be able

to withstand without undue stress a transient voltage variation to 80

of nominal for a 10 second period or such longer duration at specific

points if necessary Special consideration shall be given to power

frequency overvoltage effects and the need for Power System

equipment to withstand higher overvoltages under some circumstances

This requirement ensures that standard equipment parameters would not be

compromised Where the system voltage deviates beyond the 5 limit apart fromequipment life expectation being eroded there is a danger of exceeding the

hazardous area certification limits for that equipment installed in a hazardous area

This may not actually yield failures or temperatures likely to cause ignition of a

vapour which may be present but will increase the likelihood of such occurrences

and will infringe the basic safety intention

The Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 r equires voltage variations to be within plusmn

6 However standards for equipment state a plusmn 5 tolerance for voltage Hence

the lower limit is specified here

Where power systems which have automatic voltage control can experience

significant load rejection (eg as may be the case of a Power System supplied by generators must direct-on-line start large machines which subsequently exhibit

rapid VAr decrease leaving machines in an overexcited state) significant

overvoltage levels may be predicted (120 to 125 of nominal voltage can be

predicted) This may require special specification of transformers to avoid

problems caused by overfluxing or increased current due to magnetic excitation

Special attention should be paid to voltage and frequency tolerance specifications

for generator transformers which may need to match the run up characteristic of the

generator This can require the transformer to be capable of withstanding full rated

voltage at 80 of rated frequency

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 14

See 811 for motor starting requirements This can give rise to a voltage

depression at motor terminals of 20 which therefore requires that the power

system should be able to successfully accept this condition for the starting period

Typical starting periods can range from 1 to 10 seconds depending upon machine

and system ratings and machine inertia Starting times beyond 10 seconds are

possible where particularly high inertia loads need to be accelerated (eg fans)

however these would constitute a special application and should be treated byexception

452 Where the public utility intake of a site is via transformers these

transformers and their voltage regulation equipment shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance on transformer construction and specification is given in BP

Group RP 12-9

Where necessary for voltage regulation purposes the incoming transformers shall

be equipped with on load and automatic tap change equipment

453 Where there is on-site generation the generators and their governor

and voltage regulation equipment shall comply with BP Group GS 112-

6 or BP Group GS 160-1

Detailed guidance on generator application is not featured as a separate part of the

BP Group RP 12 series of documents

454 Automatic voltage regulation equipment of power systems which have

both on-site generation and public utility intakes via transformers shall

be designed so that there is no detrimental inter-action

There are a number of options which can be considered for voltage control In

general the excitation of the power generators can be arranged for zero VAr

importexport for the whole site and at the same time the intake transformer

controller can be arranged to maintain voltage at a pre set level

455 The excitation systems of synchronous motors shall be arranged to

ensure no detrimental interactive effects with transformer automatic tap

change equipment

In the case of synchronous motors where it is probable that the synchronous motor would be small in relation to the supply intake capacity it is probable that the

excitation can be arranged to maintain a constant power factor to the machine and

the transformer tap change control would be arranged to maintain voltage within

pre set levels

456 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation where

the site has no public utility connection shall be designed such that

generator loading may be automatically shared between the operating

sets and that the nominal supply frequency is maintained within the

approved tolerance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 15

Where governor droop control is employed there should be an operator in

attendance who could take action from time to time to ensure that the system

frequency remained within reasonable limits Such limits should be plusmn 1 and the

output system frequency time should be within 30 seconds of standard time

Statement of these limits for design purposes does not indicate a need to supply an

appropriate standard clock arrangement although power plants supplying

townships or camp areas are encouraged to have this facility The limit for frequency time may be relaxed for small power plants and those where frequency

time is considered unimportant (eg Where there are no time signals reliant upon

mains frequency)

For unmanned power plants or for those where constant operator intervention

would be undesirable the system frequency may be controlled by an isochronous

controller designed to provide overall frequency and generator loadings within

prescribed limits

457 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation at a

site with a public utility connection shall be designed for parallel

operation with the public utility and shall incorporate the protection

arrangements which shall ensure that under public utility collapse ( or

unacceptable major disturbance) the site will retain a defined loading

condition The arrangement shall also incorporate the means for

independent operation

Where a facility is interconnected with a Public Utility the control of the power

system frequency must be under the control of the Public Utility Therefore only

defined load governor settings or droop load sharing control systems are possible

However such interconnection is always subject to disconnection under automatic

protection system operation which will leave the power generators supplying the

site load Under these conditions whatever the original generator control arrangements the generators must revert to independent load sharing control

46 Synchronising

461 Synchronising andor check synchronising equipment shall be provided

wherever more than one source of power may be operated in parallel

with another A synchronising philosophy shall be prepared

See also sections 463 and 464 Because there can be many alternative ways of

achieving a reasonable synchronising arrangement it is expected that there would

be prepared a synchronisingcheck synchronising philosophy (or design document) for every installation which will define the particular arrangements

462 Manual synchronising arrangements shall always be provided for the

incoming power generator circuit breakers This shall comprise

voltmeters and a synchroscope to show the voltage and frequency

differences between the two systems that need to be paralleled A

check synchronising relay should be utilised to prevent operator

maloperation but in order to allow closing a power source on to a dead

system as is required under black start conditions the check

synchronising relay shall have a means of manual or automatic override

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 16

Wherever possible and economically feasible the manual synchronising system

supplied shall also include automatic synchronising applied to the generator

controls

Manual synchronising facilities should also be applied to any primary switchgear

bus section circuit breaker and to circuit breakers incoming to the primary switchboard which can make a parallel connection with other sources

463 Synchronising or check synchronising facilities shall be fitted to busbar

section and bus coupler circuit breakers where it is possible to run the

two systems feeding either section of a busbar completely segregated

from the other The number of circuit breakers provided with

synchronising or check synchronising facilities should be kept to a

minimum A similar logic shall be applied to public utility intake

circuits Alternatively circuit breaker interlocking schemes shall be

installed to preclude the possibility of paralleling two sources of power

where synchronising facilities are excluded

Notwithstanding the provisions of 464 it is not expected that there would be a

need to include synchronising or check synchronising facilities on system voltage

levels more than two levels removed from the power generation busbar where the

power system is operated with bus sections normally closed However this is a

general rule and should the system be commonly operated with open bus sections

for significant periods and there is little central system control or information

dissemination the arrangement should be reviewed

464 Synchronising facilities shall be provided at the primary power supply

voltage and should be avoided at other voltages by use of appropriatecircuit breaker interlocking

The form of interlocking should avoid the need for break-before-make action unless

absolutely necessary This may need to be associated with upstream bus section

circuit breakers and incoming circuit breakers to the upstream switchboard See

463 (commentary) for provisions should distances be too great for the economic

use of interlocking

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems

Detailed guidance on this subject is given in BP Group RP 12-5 dc

power supplies for control systems shall comply with BP Group GS112-11 and ac power supplies shall comply with BP Group GS 112-10

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 17

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

51 General

511 The distribution network shall be designed to carry continuously at least

110 of the Maximum Demand associated with peak design production at the maximum ambient conditions

The requirement for 110 capacity is considered to be applicable to all

components within the distribution system including transformer capacity It does

not include capacity of equipment considered to constitute a load to the power

system eg Induction Machines which should be rated as close as possible to

actual process demands

Refer also to the commentary to Section 311

Switchboards should be supplied with a de gree of s pares and room for expansion

Further details may be found in BP Group RP 12-6 and 7

512 Where required the reliability associated with any part of the system

shall be assessed and presented in qualitative and quantitative terms

In general the design of the power system distribution should be based upon

qualitative requirements which include assessments for meeting power supply

continuity in the event of maintenance and in the event of failure Since electrical

distribution systems are inherently reliable the design requirements are commonly

based upon the need to disconnect distribution electrical equipment to carry out

routine maintenance and at the same time keep power supplies available for

operating plant However under some circumstances the need to assess the

electrical reliability may arise (perhaps as part of an overall assessment of plant failure but possibly as part of a comparison of alternative supplies for new plant)

Under these circumstances the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and the Mean

Time To Repair (MTTR) concerning power system failure at any particular

switchboard would be required In addition it is recommended that the quantitative

statement indicate the probability of failure occurring over a particular timeframe

(eg Provide a value and definition of the probability of zero failures over a 12

month period)

See also sections 412 (commentary) 422 and 43

513 The distribution system shall be designed using one of the basic

arrangements further outlined in 52 through 56 and incorporating thecontrol features of 57 The system designed shall be described in a

design philosophy document

It is considered that the design features contained in sections 52 through 56 would

be suitable for all of the industrial power systems likely to be required by BP

However should an alternative philosophy be available it should be compared with

a standard double radial system in terms of operation reliability maintainability

and cost

The depictions in the drawings which illustrate the texts of 52 and 55 are fairly

conventional in that Contactors are employed only for motor feeders Under some

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 18

circumstances Contactors can prove an economic choice for transformer or

Switchboard feeders The depictions are for an extensive installation typical of

Refinery or other large system Offshore systems may be considered as similar but

without the higher voltage level and interconnections to Public Utility

52 Single Radial

521 These should be used to provide power to non essential electrical loads

those where alternative sources of energy are available such as standby

generating plant or those process loads for which a lower availability

can be accepted

Where minimum facilities engineering is required and the process plant can be (or

will regularly be) switched off then single radial systems may be contemplated to

satisfy process demands It is considered that maintenance of electrical systems

could be scheduled for normal process plant shutdown times and the reliability of

electrical distribution systems is generally much better than required by the process

system

522 Each component of the single radial circuit shall be capable of supplying

110 of the required electrical load Transformers or other plant

which includes forced cooling equipment shall not rely entirely on the

forced cooling arrangements to obtain the necessary rating

Refer to the commentary to Section 311 for more detail on load estimation

Where the loading is of a cyclical nature and the forced cooling would not be

expected to operate for more than 2 hours in any 12 hour period then capacities

based upon forced cooling can be considered However where this is the case acooling system failure alarm shall be provided

53 Double Radial

531 Essential and Process Sensitive loads should be supplied by two or

more identically rated radial systems

Figure 1(a) details a double radial system of feed

532 In double radial systems each circuit shall be capable of carrying a

110 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall include bussection switchgear They shall be arranged to ensure that unscheduled

outage of any component of the circuit would not result in loss of

power supply after the faulty equipment has been disconnected from the

system

See section 311 for detail on load estimation

Exceptions to the requirement for all supplies to be maintained may be made in the

following cases-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 19

(a) For bus section circuit breaker faults These may sometimes cause damage

which may require complete switchboard shutdown However the

occurrence of such faults is sufficiently rare as to be neglected

(b) Where there may be some non-essential loads supplied from a double

radial system These may receive a single radial supply from a double

radial system and therefore would not receive a supply in the event of some forms of double radial system outage

533 Double radially fed systems should generally be operated in parallel

with all bus-section switches closed

It is considered that the advantage of continuity of supply in the event of relatively

light fault conditions which is offered by closed bus section systems outweighs the

disadvantages of increased fault disturbance for heavy fault conditions It is also

more inherently safe since the switchgear fault conditions are based upon the worst

possible supply condition However see also section 534

534 Where switchgear fault levels are found to be above the values outlined

in 23 attention shall be given to operating with bus-section breakers

open as opposed to purchasing higher fault level switchgear Where an

open bus-section breaker philosophy is being given attention the need

to restore rapidly the supplies to drives shall determine whether

automatic closure of bus section circuit breaker(s) is to be employed

Switchgear fault levels could be readily reduced by increasing the impedance of

incoming transformers (Where new transformers will be purchased) However

increasing the impedance of transformers increases the voltage regulation between

light and full load There is therefore a trade-off between fault duty and normal voltage regulation

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

54 Triple Radial

541 Critical and essential loads may be alternatively supplied by triple

identically rated radial systems These systems are preferred to double

radial systems wherever there is an overall total cost advantage

A triple radial system comprises three feeders and three feeder transformers to

provide supply to a distribution switchboard

542 Each circuit of triple fed radial systems shall be capable of providing at

least 55 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall be split into at

least three sections with two bus-section switches

This will allow for the loss of any one of the three circuits leaving the two healthy

circuits still capable of providing 110 of the Maximum Demand

543 Triple radial systems shall be provided where the power flow is

relatively large They shall generally be operated with only two circuits

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 9

In general it is expected that Essential loads would receive battery supplies or

would be associated with an emergency generator However where this is

impractical leads to low reliability or is prohibitively expensive the least cost of

the remaining alternatives should normally be adopted

The concept of increased power generation in (ii) above is meant to allow for

emergency power supplies to be designed as part of a normal power generation and distribution system The criteria for design would be that the power source and the

distribution system for the Essential loads would maintain sufficiently high security

for these safety critical systems A similar concept is considered appropriate for

the concept of having a suitable number of alternative supply feeds detailed in (iii)

above

422 In the application of 421 (ii) the power supply to Essential loads shall

be designed to remain available in the event of at least two of the

installed main power generators being unavailable The probability of

zero interruptions to the Essential load feed busbar over a 12 month

period shall be 99 or better Where necessary a loadshedding schemeshall be installed to secure the supply to the Essential loads Essential

loads shall not form part of the loadshedding arrangements

The concept of additional power generation being suitable for emergency supply

duty will clearly not be possible without there being at least 3 power generation sets

available Where one power generator thus installed is of lower capacity than the

system maximum demand andor the nature of the load can lead to instability it is

expected that a load shedding scheme would be employed to ensure that the

Essential loads would be maintained for any fault condition which could leave a

single machine on the busbar

423 Where increased main generating plant or local standby plant is selectedto provide power to Essential loads it shall be either diesel engine or

gas turbine driven generator set(s) Local standby or emergency

generator prime movers shall have their own dedicated fuel supply All

prime movers for main generators (where these are deemed to provide

Essential supplies) shall be arranged for two fuel sources with

automatic transfer Power generation for Essential loads shall be rated

to have a spare capacity of at least 10

These provisions are designed to ensure that a single contingency fault (eg fuel

supply failure) will not cause power supply loss

424 Emergency generator sets shall be capable of starting and running when

no alternative source of electrical ac power is available ie a black

start capability This may be achieved by compressed air starting with

air receivers being capable of six engine starts from one air charge or

by battery starting with a similar capability or by both methods

The requirements for emergency generators are contained in BP Group GS 160-1

In general two starting methods are required It should be noted that the location

of emergency generators should normally be in a non-classified area with supply

air derived from a clean source For offshore installations the location of the

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 10

emergency generator should be on an outside wall which can have louvers open to

supply combustion air Care should be taken to ensure that the exhaust and air

intakes are located to avoid problems associated with other adjacent plant or

systems

425 Emergency generators shall be provided with automatic starting and

loading facilities A simple and reliable method of ensuring that

emergency generators can be immediately switched to their pre-defined

load shall be arranged Manual facilities shall also be provided for

regular testing purposes Testing facilities should permit the loading of

standby generator sets

It is preferred that the emergency generator should be capable of running in

parallel with the mains supply for testing purposes and for the purposes of

transferring load without the need for supply break

43 Reliability

For each power supply arrangement a reliability assessment shall becarried out to determine the probability of failure of supply

In the early stages of design a reliability study may be undertaken as part of the

comparison of alternative methods of providing power supplies Such studies would

also be useful in determining the cost of material failures The undertaking of

these studies may form part of the Contractors workscope Where the Project Team

is required to carry out such a study the terms of reference related to objectives

data gathering and evaluation shall be clearly specified

44 Primary Substation

441 Generator circuits (other than local emergency generators) and public

utility power intakes should be connected together at a common

primary substation the busbars of which are used as the main load

distribution centre Where generators and public utility power intakes

may be located at different points throughout the site these shall be

interconnected

Thus there will be at least one and for larger sites more primary substations

442 The switchgear for primary substations shall comply with BP Group GS112-9 (or BP Group GS 112-8 where only LV supplies are involved)

Detailed guid ance for H V and LV switchgear is contained in BP Group RP 12-6

and BP Group RP 12-7

443 Busbar arrangements shall be selected to be cost effective operationally

flexible and safe The following technical points shall be taken into

account

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 11

(i) Operational flexibility to permit loads and power supplies to be effectively

connected under scheduled and unscheduled outages of circuits and

busbar sections

(ii) Minimal switchgear per circuit and simple control and protection

(iii) Unscheduled loss of busbar sections shall not shut down the system beyond the level designed and provided for

(iv) Scheduled maintenance of busbars shall be possible without system

shutdowns beyond those designed and provided for

It may often be found necessary to locate the incoming circuit breakers of a busbar

to a location half way along one side of a busbar in order to be more assured that

100 of the load is unlikely to flow in one section of the busbars

The possibility of bus section circuit breaker fault conditions in metal enclosed

switchgear which may cause a full switchboard shutdown for remedial repairs

should be considered However unless there are overriding reasons for thecontrary BP do not design switchboards to cater for this eventuality

444 Single busbar arrangements for primary supply substations should be

provided subject to the following criteria-

(i) The switchgear shall be indoor metalclad type

(ii) The single busbar shall be split into a number of sections by

using suitable switchgear The number of sections of busbars

shall be consistent with the acceptable loss of incoming or

outgoing circuits under both scheduled and unscheduled lossconditions

(iii) Routine busbar maintenance shall not be considered to be

necessary or shall be an infrequent occurrence

Where there would be 3 incoming transformer feeders the busbar would normally

be expected to be in 3 parts with feeder circuit breakers arranged on each of the

sections of busbar

445 Double busbar arrangements shall be provided in installations where

outdoor air insulated busbars are installed or where regular busbar maintenance is considered necessary for environmental or pollution

reasons They may also be supplied where the operational flexibility

available from being able to connect incoming power circuits and

outgoing load circuits in a variety of ways is considered to be

particularly advantageous

The perceived need for double busbar arrangements for indoor metalclad HV

switchgear was strong in early Refinery designs but has virtually disappeared from

modern Refinery and other industrial installations Therefore the use of double

busbar arrangements needs to be carefully considered and advantages balanced

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 12

against the considerable additional costs of Building Switchgear and Protective

arrangements One generally clear case for double busbar arrangements lies in

outdoor installations where maintenance work on busbars would be greater

446 Ringbars or mesh busbars arrangements shall not be used

Ring or mesh arrangements are generally difficult to extend and therefore are

considered to have limited application However this type of arrangement has

switchgear saving advantages where the system is unlikely to require modification

447 Where the power supply is obtained from a public utility via equipment

such as transformers or feeders the busbars shall be sectionalised to

prevent total power system shutdown in the event of unscheduled

outage of any busbar section Coincidental maintenance of a public

utility intake transformer shall not be considered

It is considered that maintenance of incoming transformers and feeds would be lowand would be quickly completed Therefore high expense in order to reduce an

already unlikely event is not considered worthwhile

448 The maximum number of busbar sections should not exceed the number

of individual power sources

This requirement sets out to avoid over flexibility in a power system which although

useful in contemplation is of little economic benefit in practice

449 The outgoing load circuits shall be connected to busbar sections in such

a way as to optimise power flow across busbar section switches

commensurate with reliability and operating considerations and shall

also permit unscheduled and scheduled busbar section outages with the

minimum disturbance to the loads being supplied

See also the commentary to section 443

4410 Generators may be connected either directly to the primary power

supply busbar or via generator transformers The type of connection

shall be selected depending upon the economics associated with both

the generation voltage and the primary supply busbar voltage

Typical arrangements for primary substations for a variety of types of power supply are shown in Figure 1

Primary substations should be located in areas which are not classifiedas hazardous The selected location within the site shall-

(a) Take account of the ability to distribute power to the onsite

loads without unnecessarily high distribution equipment costs

(b) Be adjacent to the generation or public utility intake

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 13

(c) Be suitable for future expansion

Where it is impossible to locate the primary substation outside of the hazardous

areas arrangements for forced ventilation of the substation shall be made Air for

the ventilation shall be taken from a remote and safe area the substation shall beequipped with air lock doors gas detectors (which shall cause immediate de-

energisation of all electrical equipment in the substation which is not suitable for a

zone 1 environment) and loss of sufficient ventilation and pressurisation shall

initiate an alarm condition which although not causing a trip of the switchgear

shall be used as an operator based time dependent system for the effect of repair

Shutdown shall be initiated should repairs not be possible within an operator

defined time scale

45 Frequency and Voltage Regulation

451 The power system design shall be arranged to ensure that the voltage

variation (between full load and lightly loaded conditions) experiencedat any piece of equipment designated as a load (ie not including

distribution equipment) shall not exceed plusmn 5 of the declared system

nominal voltage Further the power system shall be arranged to be able

to withstand without undue stress a transient voltage variation to 80

of nominal for a 10 second period or such longer duration at specific

points if necessary Special consideration shall be given to power

frequency overvoltage effects and the need for Power System

equipment to withstand higher overvoltages under some circumstances

This requirement ensures that standard equipment parameters would not be

compromised Where the system voltage deviates beyond the 5 limit apart fromequipment life expectation being eroded there is a danger of exceeding the

hazardous area certification limits for that equipment installed in a hazardous area

This may not actually yield failures or temperatures likely to cause ignition of a

vapour which may be present but will increase the likelihood of such occurrences

and will infringe the basic safety intention

The Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 r equires voltage variations to be within plusmn

6 However standards for equipment state a plusmn 5 tolerance for voltage Hence

the lower limit is specified here

Where power systems which have automatic voltage control can experience

significant load rejection (eg as may be the case of a Power System supplied by generators must direct-on-line start large machines which subsequently exhibit

rapid VAr decrease leaving machines in an overexcited state) significant

overvoltage levels may be predicted (120 to 125 of nominal voltage can be

predicted) This may require special specification of transformers to avoid

problems caused by overfluxing or increased current due to magnetic excitation

Special attention should be paid to voltage and frequency tolerance specifications

for generator transformers which may need to match the run up characteristic of the

generator This can require the transformer to be capable of withstanding full rated

voltage at 80 of rated frequency

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 14

See 811 for motor starting requirements This can give rise to a voltage

depression at motor terminals of 20 which therefore requires that the power

system should be able to successfully accept this condition for the starting period

Typical starting periods can range from 1 to 10 seconds depending upon machine

and system ratings and machine inertia Starting times beyond 10 seconds are

possible where particularly high inertia loads need to be accelerated (eg fans)

however these would constitute a special application and should be treated byexception

452 Where the public utility intake of a site is via transformers these

transformers and their voltage regulation equipment shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance on transformer construction and specification is given in BP

Group RP 12-9

Where necessary for voltage regulation purposes the incoming transformers shall

be equipped with on load and automatic tap change equipment

453 Where there is on-site generation the generators and their governor

and voltage regulation equipment shall comply with BP Group GS 112-

6 or BP Group GS 160-1

Detailed guidance on generator application is not featured as a separate part of the

BP Group RP 12 series of documents

454 Automatic voltage regulation equipment of power systems which have

both on-site generation and public utility intakes via transformers shall

be designed so that there is no detrimental inter-action

There are a number of options which can be considered for voltage control In

general the excitation of the power generators can be arranged for zero VAr

importexport for the whole site and at the same time the intake transformer

controller can be arranged to maintain voltage at a pre set level

455 The excitation systems of synchronous motors shall be arranged to

ensure no detrimental interactive effects with transformer automatic tap

change equipment

In the case of synchronous motors where it is probable that the synchronous motor would be small in relation to the supply intake capacity it is probable that the

excitation can be arranged to maintain a constant power factor to the machine and

the transformer tap change control would be arranged to maintain voltage within

pre set levels

456 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation where

the site has no public utility connection shall be designed such that

generator loading may be automatically shared between the operating

sets and that the nominal supply frequency is maintained within the

approved tolerance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 15

Where governor droop control is employed there should be an operator in

attendance who could take action from time to time to ensure that the system

frequency remained within reasonable limits Such limits should be plusmn 1 and the

output system frequency time should be within 30 seconds of standard time

Statement of these limits for design purposes does not indicate a need to supply an

appropriate standard clock arrangement although power plants supplying

townships or camp areas are encouraged to have this facility The limit for frequency time may be relaxed for small power plants and those where frequency

time is considered unimportant (eg Where there are no time signals reliant upon

mains frequency)

For unmanned power plants or for those where constant operator intervention

would be undesirable the system frequency may be controlled by an isochronous

controller designed to provide overall frequency and generator loadings within

prescribed limits

457 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation at a

site with a public utility connection shall be designed for parallel

operation with the public utility and shall incorporate the protection

arrangements which shall ensure that under public utility collapse ( or

unacceptable major disturbance) the site will retain a defined loading

condition The arrangement shall also incorporate the means for

independent operation

Where a facility is interconnected with a Public Utility the control of the power

system frequency must be under the control of the Public Utility Therefore only

defined load governor settings or droop load sharing control systems are possible

However such interconnection is always subject to disconnection under automatic

protection system operation which will leave the power generators supplying the

site load Under these conditions whatever the original generator control arrangements the generators must revert to independent load sharing control

46 Synchronising

461 Synchronising andor check synchronising equipment shall be provided

wherever more than one source of power may be operated in parallel

with another A synchronising philosophy shall be prepared

See also sections 463 and 464 Because there can be many alternative ways of

achieving a reasonable synchronising arrangement it is expected that there would

be prepared a synchronisingcheck synchronising philosophy (or design document) for every installation which will define the particular arrangements

462 Manual synchronising arrangements shall always be provided for the

incoming power generator circuit breakers This shall comprise

voltmeters and a synchroscope to show the voltage and frequency

differences between the two systems that need to be paralleled A

check synchronising relay should be utilised to prevent operator

maloperation but in order to allow closing a power source on to a dead

system as is required under black start conditions the check

synchronising relay shall have a means of manual or automatic override

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 16

Wherever possible and economically feasible the manual synchronising system

supplied shall also include automatic synchronising applied to the generator

controls

Manual synchronising facilities should also be applied to any primary switchgear

bus section circuit breaker and to circuit breakers incoming to the primary switchboard which can make a parallel connection with other sources

463 Synchronising or check synchronising facilities shall be fitted to busbar

section and bus coupler circuit breakers where it is possible to run the

two systems feeding either section of a busbar completely segregated

from the other The number of circuit breakers provided with

synchronising or check synchronising facilities should be kept to a

minimum A similar logic shall be applied to public utility intake

circuits Alternatively circuit breaker interlocking schemes shall be

installed to preclude the possibility of paralleling two sources of power

where synchronising facilities are excluded

Notwithstanding the provisions of 464 it is not expected that there would be a

need to include synchronising or check synchronising facilities on system voltage

levels more than two levels removed from the power generation busbar where the

power system is operated with bus sections normally closed However this is a

general rule and should the system be commonly operated with open bus sections

for significant periods and there is little central system control or information

dissemination the arrangement should be reviewed

464 Synchronising facilities shall be provided at the primary power supply

voltage and should be avoided at other voltages by use of appropriatecircuit breaker interlocking

The form of interlocking should avoid the need for break-before-make action unless

absolutely necessary This may need to be associated with upstream bus section

circuit breakers and incoming circuit breakers to the upstream switchboard See

463 (commentary) for provisions should distances be too great for the economic

use of interlocking

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems

Detailed guidance on this subject is given in BP Group RP 12-5 dc

power supplies for control systems shall comply with BP Group GS112-11 and ac power supplies shall comply with BP Group GS 112-10

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 17

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

51 General

511 The distribution network shall be designed to carry continuously at least

110 of the Maximum Demand associated with peak design production at the maximum ambient conditions

The requirement for 110 capacity is considered to be applicable to all

components within the distribution system including transformer capacity It does

not include capacity of equipment considered to constitute a load to the power

system eg Induction Machines which should be rated as close as possible to

actual process demands

Refer also to the commentary to Section 311

Switchboards should be supplied with a de gree of s pares and room for expansion

Further details may be found in BP Group RP 12-6 and 7

512 Where required the reliability associated with any part of the system

shall be assessed and presented in qualitative and quantitative terms

In general the design of the power system distribution should be based upon

qualitative requirements which include assessments for meeting power supply

continuity in the event of maintenance and in the event of failure Since electrical

distribution systems are inherently reliable the design requirements are commonly

based upon the need to disconnect distribution electrical equipment to carry out

routine maintenance and at the same time keep power supplies available for

operating plant However under some circumstances the need to assess the

electrical reliability may arise (perhaps as part of an overall assessment of plant failure but possibly as part of a comparison of alternative supplies for new plant)

Under these circumstances the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and the Mean

Time To Repair (MTTR) concerning power system failure at any particular

switchboard would be required In addition it is recommended that the quantitative

statement indicate the probability of failure occurring over a particular timeframe

(eg Provide a value and definition of the probability of zero failures over a 12

month period)

See also sections 412 (commentary) 422 and 43

513 The distribution system shall be designed using one of the basic

arrangements further outlined in 52 through 56 and incorporating thecontrol features of 57 The system designed shall be described in a

design philosophy document

It is considered that the design features contained in sections 52 through 56 would

be suitable for all of the industrial power systems likely to be required by BP

However should an alternative philosophy be available it should be compared with

a standard double radial system in terms of operation reliability maintainability

and cost

The depictions in the drawings which illustrate the texts of 52 and 55 are fairly

conventional in that Contactors are employed only for motor feeders Under some

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 18

circumstances Contactors can prove an economic choice for transformer or

Switchboard feeders The depictions are for an extensive installation typical of

Refinery or other large system Offshore systems may be considered as similar but

without the higher voltage level and interconnections to Public Utility

52 Single Radial

521 These should be used to provide power to non essential electrical loads

those where alternative sources of energy are available such as standby

generating plant or those process loads for which a lower availability

can be accepted

Where minimum facilities engineering is required and the process plant can be (or

will regularly be) switched off then single radial systems may be contemplated to

satisfy process demands It is considered that maintenance of electrical systems

could be scheduled for normal process plant shutdown times and the reliability of

electrical distribution systems is generally much better than required by the process

system

522 Each component of the single radial circuit shall be capable of supplying

110 of the required electrical load Transformers or other plant

which includes forced cooling equipment shall not rely entirely on the

forced cooling arrangements to obtain the necessary rating

Refer to the commentary to Section 311 for more detail on load estimation

Where the loading is of a cyclical nature and the forced cooling would not be

expected to operate for more than 2 hours in any 12 hour period then capacities

based upon forced cooling can be considered However where this is the case acooling system failure alarm shall be provided

53 Double Radial

531 Essential and Process Sensitive loads should be supplied by two or

more identically rated radial systems

Figure 1(a) details a double radial system of feed

532 In double radial systems each circuit shall be capable of carrying a

110 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall include bussection switchgear They shall be arranged to ensure that unscheduled

outage of any component of the circuit would not result in loss of

power supply after the faulty equipment has been disconnected from the

system

See section 311 for detail on load estimation

Exceptions to the requirement for all supplies to be maintained may be made in the

following cases-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 19

(a) For bus section circuit breaker faults These may sometimes cause damage

which may require complete switchboard shutdown However the

occurrence of such faults is sufficiently rare as to be neglected

(b) Where there may be some non-essential loads supplied from a double

radial system These may receive a single radial supply from a double

radial system and therefore would not receive a supply in the event of some forms of double radial system outage

533 Double radially fed systems should generally be operated in parallel

with all bus-section switches closed

It is considered that the advantage of continuity of supply in the event of relatively

light fault conditions which is offered by closed bus section systems outweighs the

disadvantages of increased fault disturbance for heavy fault conditions It is also

more inherently safe since the switchgear fault conditions are based upon the worst

possible supply condition However see also section 534

534 Where switchgear fault levels are found to be above the values outlined

in 23 attention shall be given to operating with bus-section breakers

open as opposed to purchasing higher fault level switchgear Where an

open bus-section breaker philosophy is being given attention the need

to restore rapidly the supplies to drives shall determine whether

automatic closure of bus section circuit breaker(s) is to be employed

Switchgear fault levels could be readily reduced by increasing the impedance of

incoming transformers (Where new transformers will be purchased) However

increasing the impedance of transformers increases the voltage regulation between

light and full load There is therefore a trade-off between fault duty and normal voltage regulation

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

54 Triple Radial

541 Critical and essential loads may be alternatively supplied by triple

identically rated radial systems These systems are preferred to double

radial systems wherever there is an overall total cost advantage

A triple radial system comprises three feeders and three feeder transformers to

provide supply to a distribution switchboard

542 Each circuit of triple fed radial systems shall be capable of providing at

least 55 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall be split into at

least three sections with two bus-section switches

This will allow for the loss of any one of the three circuits leaving the two healthy

circuits still capable of providing 110 of the Maximum Demand

543 Triple radial systems shall be provided where the power flow is

relatively large They shall generally be operated with only two circuits

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 10

emergency generator should be on an outside wall which can have louvers open to

supply combustion air Care should be taken to ensure that the exhaust and air

intakes are located to avoid problems associated with other adjacent plant or

systems

425 Emergency generators shall be provided with automatic starting and

loading facilities A simple and reliable method of ensuring that

emergency generators can be immediately switched to their pre-defined

load shall be arranged Manual facilities shall also be provided for

regular testing purposes Testing facilities should permit the loading of

standby generator sets

It is preferred that the emergency generator should be capable of running in

parallel with the mains supply for testing purposes and for the purposes of

transferring load without the need for supply break

43 Reliability

For each power supply arrangement a reliability assessment shall becarried out to determine the probability of failure of supply

In the early stages of design a reliability study may be undertaken as part of the

comparison of alternative methods of providing power supplies Such studies would

also be useful in determining the cost of material failures The undertaking of

these studies may form part of the Contractors workscope Where the Project Team

is required to carry out such a study the terms of reference related to objectives

data gathering and evaluation shall be clearly specified

44 Primary Substation

441 Generator circuits (other than local emergency generators) and public

utility power intakes should be connected together at a common

primary substation the busbars of which are used as the main load

distribution centre Where generators and public utility power intakes

may be located at different points throughout the site these shall be

interconnected

Thus there will be at least one and for larger sites more primary substations

442 The switchgear for primary substations shall comply with BP Group GS112-9 (or BP Group GS 112-8 where only LV supplies are involved)

Detailed guid ance for H V and LV switchgear is contained in BP Group RP 12-6

and BP Group RP 12-7

443 Busbar arrangements shall be selected to be cost effective operationally

flexible and safe The following technical points shall be taken into

account

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 11

(i) Operational flexibility to permit loads and power supplies to be effectively

connected under scheduled and unscheduled outages of circuits and

busbar sections

(ii) Minimal switchgear per circuit and simple control and protection

(iii) Unscheduled loss of busbar sections shall not shut down the system beyond the level designed and provided for

(iv) Scheduled maintenance of busbars shall be possible without system

shutdowns beyond those designed and provided for

It may often be found necessary to locate the incoming circuit breakers of a busbar

to a location half way along one side of a busbar in order to be more assured that

100 of the load is unlikely to flow in one section of the busbars

The possibility of bus section circuit breaker fault conditions in metal enclosed

switchgear which may cause a full switchboard shutdown for remedial repairs

should be considered However unless there are overriding reasons for thecontrary BP do not design switchboards to cater for this eventuality

444 Single busbar arrangements for primary supply substations should be

provided subject to the following criteria-

(i) The switchgear shall be indoor metalclad type

(ii) The single busbar shall be split into a number of sections by

using suitable switchgear The number of sections of busbars

shall be consistent with the acceptable loss of incoming or

outgoing circuits under both scheduled and unscheduled lossconditions

(iii) Routine busbar maintenance shall not be considered to be

necessary or shall be an infrequent occurrence

Where there would be 3 incoming transformer feeders the busbar would normally

be expected to be in 3 parts with feeder circuit breakers arranged on each of the

sections of busbar

445 Double busbar arrangements shall be provided in installations where

outdoor air insulated busbars are installed or where regular busbar maintenance is considered necessary for environmental or pollution

reasons They may also be supplied where the operational flexibility

available from being able to connect incoming power circuits and

outgoing load circuits in a variety of ways is considered to be

particularly advantageous

The perceived need for double busbar arrangements for indoor metalclad HV

switchgear was strong in early Refinery designs but has virtually disappeared from

modern Refinery and other industrial installations Therefore the use of double

busbar arrangements needs to be carefully considered and advantages balanced

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 12

against the considerable additional costs of Building Switchgear and Protective

arrangements One generally clear case for double busbar arrangements lies in

outdoor installations where maintenance work on busbars would be greater

446 Ringbars or mesh busbars arrangements shall not be used

Ring or mesh arrangements are generally difficult to extend and therefore are

considered to have limited application However this type of arrangement has

switchgear saving advantages where the system is unlikely to require modification

447 Where the power supply is obtained from a public utility via equipment

such as transformers or feeders the busbars shall be sectionalised to

prevent total power system shutdown in the event of unscheduled

outage of any busbar section Coincidental maintenance of a public

utility intake transformer shall not be considered

It is considered that maintenance of incoming transformers and feeds would be lowand would be quickly completed Therefore high expense in order to reduce an

already unlikely event is not considered worthwhile

448 The maximum number of busbar sections should not exceed the number

of individual power sources

This requirement sets out to avoid over flexibility in a power system which although

useful in contemplation is of little economic benefit in practice

449 The outgoing load circuits shall be connected to busbar sections in such

a way as to optimise power flow across busbar section switches

commensurate with reliability and operating considerations and shall

also permit unscheduled and scheduled busbar section outages with the

minimum disturbance to the loads being supplied

See also the commentary to section 443

4410 Generators may be connected either directly to the primary power

supply busbar or via generator transformers The type of connection

shall be selected depending upon the economics associated with both

the generation voltage and the primary supply busbar voltage

Typical arrangements for primary substations for a variety of types of power supply are shown in Figure 1

Primary substations should be located in areas which are not classifiedas hazardous The selected location within the site shall-

(a) Take account of the ability to distribute power to the onsite

loads without unnecessarily high distribution equipment costs

(b) Be adjacent to the generation or public utility intake

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 13

(c) Be suitable for future expansion

Where it is impossible to locate the primary substation outside of the hazardous

areas arrangements for forced ventilation of the substation shall be made Air for

the ventilation shall be taken from a remote and safe area the substation shall beequipped with air lock doors gas detectors (which shall cause immediate de-

energisation of all electrical equipment in the substation which is not suitable for a

zone 1 environment) and loss of sufficient ventilation and pressurisation shall

initiate an alarm condition which although not causing a trip of the switchgear

shall be used as an operator based time dependent system for the effect of repair

Shutdown shall be initiated should repairs not be possible within an operator

defined time scale

45 Frequency and Voltage Regulation

451 The power system design shall be arranged to ensure that the voltage

variation (between full load and lightly loaded conditions) experiencedat any piece of equipment designated as a load (ie not including

distribution equipment) shall not exceed plusmn 5 of the declared system

nominal voltage Further the power system shall be arranged to be able

to withstand without undue stress a transient voltage variation to 80

of nominal for a 10 second period or such longer duration at specific

points if necessary Special consideration shall be given to power

frequency overvoltage effects and the need for Power System

equipment to withstand higher overvoltages under some circumstances

This requirement ensures that standard equipment parameters would not be

compromised Where the system voltage deviates beyond the 5 limit apart fromequipment life expectation being eroded there is a danger of exceeding the

hazardous area certification limits for that equipment installed in a hazardous area

This may not actually yield failures or temperatures likely to cause ignition of a

vapour which may be present but will increase the likelihood of such occurrences

and will infringe the basic safety intention

The Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 r equires voltage variations to be within plusmn

6 However standards for equipment state a plusmn 5 tolerance for voltage Hence

the lower limit is specified here

Where power systems which have automatic voltage control can experience

significant load rejection (eg as may be the case of a Power System supplied by generators must direct-on-line start large machines which subsequently exhibit

rapid VAr decrease leaving machines in an overexcited state) significant

overvoltage levels may be predicted (120 to 125 of nominal voltage can be

predicted) This may require special specification of transformers to avoid

problems caused by overfluxing or increased current due to magnetic excitation

Special attention should be paid to voltage and frequency tolerance specifications

for generator transformers which may need to match the run up characteristic of the

generator This can require the transformer to be capable of withstanding full rated

voltage at 80 of rated frequency

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 14

See 811 for motor starting requirements This can give rise to a voltage

depression at motor terminals of 20 which therefore requires that the power

system should be able to successfully accept this condition for the starting period

Typical starting periods can range from 1 to 10 seconds depending upon machine

and system ratings and machine inertia Starting times beyond 10 seconds are

possible where particularly high inertia loads need to be accelerated (eg fans)

however these would constitute a special application and should be treated byexception

452 Where the public utility intake of a site is via transformers these

transformers and their voltage regulation equipment shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance on transformer construction and specification is given in BP

Group RP 12-9

Where necessary for voltage regulation purposes the incoming transformers shall

be equipped with on load and automatic tap change equipment

453 Where there is on-site generation the generators and their governor

and voltage regulation equipment shall comply with BP Group GS 112-

6 or BP Group GS 160-1

Detailed guidance on generator application is not featured as a separate part of the

BP Group RP 12 series of documents

454 Automatic voltage regulation equipment of power systems which have

both on-site generation and public utility intakes via transformers shall

be designed so that there is no detrimental inter-action

There are a number of options which can be considered for voltage control In

general the excitation of the power generators can be arranged for zero VAr

importexport for the whole site and at the same time the intake transformer

controller can be arranged to maintain voltage at a pre set level

455 The excitation systems of synchronous motors shall be arranged to

ensure no detrimental interactive effects with transformer automatic tap

change equipment

In the case of synchronous motors where it is probable that the synchronous motor would be small in relation to the supply intake capacity it is probable that the

excitation can be arranged to maintain a constant power factor to the machine and

the transformer tap change control would be arranged to maintain voltage within

pre set levels

456 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation where

the site has no public utility connection shall be designed such that

generator loading may be automatically shared between the operating

sets and that the nominal supply frequency is maintained within the

approved tolerance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 15

Where governor droop control is employed there should be an operator in

attendance who could take action from time to time to ensure that the system

frequency remained within reasonable limits Such limits should be plusmn 1 and the

output system frequency time should be within 30 seconds of standard time

Statement of these limits for design purposes does not indicate a need to supply an

appropriate standard clock arrangement although power plants supplying

townships or camp areas are encouraged to have this facility The limit for frequency time may be relaxed for small power plants and those where frequency

time is considered unimportant (eg Where there are no time signals reliant upon

mains frequency)

For unmanned power plants or for those where constant operator intervention

would be undesirable the system frequency may be controlled by an isochronous

controller designed to provide overall frequency and generator loadings within

prescribed limits

457 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation at a

site with a public utility connection shall be designed for parallel

operation with the public utility and shall incorporate the protection

arrangements which shall ensure that under public utility collapse ( or

unacceptable major disturbance) the site will retain a defined loading

condition The arrangement shall also incorporate the means for

independent operation

Where a facility is interconnected with a Public Utility the control of the power

system frequency must be under the control of the Public Utility Therefore only

defined load governor settings or droop load sharing control systems are possible

However such interconnection is always subject to disconnection under automatic

protection system operation which will leave the power generators supplying the

site load Under these conditions whatever the original generator control arrangements the generators must revert to independent load sharing control

46 Synchronising

461 Synchronising andor check synchronising equipment shall be provided

wherever more than one source of power may be operated in parallel

with another A synchronising philosophy shall be prepared

See also sections 463 and 464 Because there can be many alternative ways of

achieving a reasonable synchronising arrangement it is expected that there would

be prepared a synchronisingcheck synchronising philosophy (or design document) for every installation which will define the particular arrangements

462 Manual synchronising arrangements shall always be provided for the

incoming power generator circuit breakers This shall comprise

voltmeters and a synchroscope to show the voltage and frequency

differences between the two systems that need to be paralleled A

check synchronising relay should be utilised to prevent operator

maloperation but in order to allow closing a power source on to a dead

system as is required under black start conditions the check

synchronising relay shall have a means of manual or automatic override

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 16

Wherever possible and economically feasible the manual synchronising system

supplied shall also include automatic synchronising applied to the generator

controls

Manual synchronising facilities should also be applied to any primary switchgear

bus section circuit breaker and to circuit breakers incoming to the primary switchboard which can make a parallel connection with other sources

463 Synchronising or check synchronising facilities shall be fitted to busbar

section and bus coupler circuit breakers where it is possible to run the

two systems feeding either section of a busbar completely segregated

from the other The number of circuit breakers provided with

synchronising or check synchronising facilities should be kept to a

minimum A similar logic shall be applied to public utility intake

circuits Alternatively circuit breaker interlocking schemes shall be

installed to preclude the possibility of paralleling two sources of power

where synchronising facilities are excluded

Notwithstanding the provisions of 464 it is not expected that there would be a

need to include synchronising or check synchronising facilities on system voltage

levels more than two levels removed from the power generation busbar where the

power system is operated with bus sections normally closed However this is a

general rule and should the system be commonly operated with open bus sections

for significant periods and there is little central system control or information

dissemination the arrangement should be reviewed

464 Synchronising facilities shall be provided at the primary power supply

voltage and should be avoided at other voltages by use of appropriatecircuit breaker interlocking

The form of interlocking should avoid the need for break-before-make action unless

absolutely necessary This may need to be associated with upstream bus section

circuit breakers and incoming circuit breakers to the upstream switchboard See

463 (commentary) for provisions should distances be too great for the economic

use of interlocking

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems

Detailed guidance on this subject is given in BP Group RP 12-5 dc

power supplies for control systems shall comply with BP Group GS112-11 and ac power supplies shall comply with BP Group GS 112-10

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 17

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

51 General

511 The distribution network shall be designed to carry continuously at least

110 of the Maximum Demand associated with peak design production at the maximum ambient conditions

The requirement for 110 capacity is considered to be applicable to all

components within the distribution system including transformer capacity It does

not include capacity of equipment considered to constitute a load to the power

system eg Induction Machines which should be rated as close as possible to

actual process demands

Refer also to the commentary to Section 311

Switchboards should be supplied with a de gree of s pares and room for expansion

Further details may be found in BP Group RP 12-6 and 7

512 Where required the reliability associated with any part of the system

shall be assessed and presented in qualitative and quantitative terms

In general the design of the power system distribution should be based upon

qualitative requirements which include assessments for meeting power supply

continuity in the event of maintenance and in the event of failure Since electrical

distribution systems are inherently reliable the design requirements are commonly

based upon the need to disconnect distribution electrical equipment to carry out

routine maintenance and at the same time keep power supplies available for

operating plant However under some circumstances the need to assess the

electrical reliability may arise (perhaps as part of an overall assessment of plant failure but possibly as part of a comparison of alternative supplies for new plant)

Under these circumstances the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and the Mean

Time To Repair (MTTR) concerning power system failure at any particular

switchboard would be required In addition it is recommended that the quantitative

statement indicate the probability of failure occurring over a particular timeframe

(eg Provide a value and definition of the probability of zero failures over a 12

month period)

See also sections 412 (commentary) 422 and 43

513 The distribution system shall be designed using one of the basic

arrangements further outlined in 52 through 56 and incorporating thecontrol features of 57 The system designed shall be described in a

design philosophy document

It is considered that the design features contained in sections 52 through 56 would

be suitable for all of the industrial power systems likely to be required by BP

However should an alternative philosophy be available it should be compared with

a standard double radial system in terms of operation reliability maintainability

and cost

The depictions in the drawings which illustrate the texts of 52 and 55 are fairly

conventional in that Contactors are employed only for motor feeders Under some

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 18

circumstances Contactors can prove an economic choice for transformer or

Switchboard feeders The depictions are for an extensive installation typical of

Refinery or other large system Offshore systems may be considered as similar but

without the higher voltage level and interconnections to Public Utility

52 Single Radial

521 These should be used to provide power to non essential electrical loads

those where alternative sources of energy are available such as standby

generating plant or those process loads for which a lower availability

can be accepted

Where minimum facilities engineering is required and the process plant can be (or

will regularly be) switched off then single radial systems may be contemplated to

satisfy process demands It is considered that maintenance of electrical systems

could be scheduled for normal process plant shutdown times and the reliability of

electrical distribution systems is generally much better than required by the process

system

522 Each component of the single radial circuit shall be capable of supplying

110 of the required electrical load Transformers or other plant

which includes forced cooling equipment shall not rely entirely on the

forced cooling arrangements to obtain the necessary rating

Refer to the commentary to Section 311 for more detail on load estimation

Where the loading is of a cyclical nature and the forced cooling would not be

expected to operate for more than 2 hours in any 12 hour period then capacities

based upon forced cooling can be considered However where this is the case acooling system failure alarm shall be provided

53 Double Radial

531 Essential and Process Sensitive loads should be supplied by two or

more identically rated radial systems

Figure 1(a) details a double radial system of feed

532 In double radial systems each circuit shall be capable of carrying a

110 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall include bussection switchgear They shall be arranged to ensure that unscheduled

outage of any component of the circuit would not result in loss of

power supply after the faulty equipment has been disconnected from the

system

See section 311 for detail on load estimation

Exceptions to the requirement for all supplies to be maintained may be made in the

following cases-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 19

(a) For bus section circuit breaker faults These may sometimes cause damage

which may require complete switchboard shutdown However the

occurrence of such faults is sufficiently rare as to be neglected

(b) Where there may be some non-essential loads supplied from a double

radial system These may receive a single radial supply from a double

radial system and therefore would not receive a supply in the event of some forms of double radial system outage

533 Double radially fed systems should generally be operated in parallel

with all bus-section switches closed

It is considered that the advantage of continuity of supply in the event of relatively

light fault conditions which is offered by closed bus section systems outweighs the

disadvantages of increased fault disturbance for heavy fault conditions It is also

more inherently safe since the switchgear fault conditions are based upon the worst

possible supply condition However see also section 534

534 Where switchgear fault levels are found to be above the values outlined

in 23 attention shall be given to operating with bus-section breakers

open as opposed to purchasing higher fault level switchgear Where an

open bus-section breaker philosophy is being given attention the need

to restore rapidly the supplies to drives shall determine whether

automatic closure of bus section circuit breaker(s) is to be employed

Switchgear fault levels could be readily reduced by increasing the impedance of

incoming transformers (Where new transformers will be purchased) However

increasing the impedance of transformers increases the voltage regulation between

light and full load There is therefore a trade-off between fault duty and normal voltage regulation

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

54 Triple Radial

541 Critical and essential loads may be alternatively supplied by triple

identically rated radial systems These systems are preferred to double

radial systems wherever there is an overall total cost advantage

A triple radial system comprises three feeders and three feeder transformers to

provide supply to a distribution switchboard

542 Each circuit of triple fed radial systems shall be capable of providing at

least 55 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall be split into at

least three sections with two bus-section switches

This will allow for the loss of any one of the three circuits leaving the two healthy

circuits still capable of providing 110 of the Maximum Demand

543 Triple radial systems shall be provided where the power flow is

relatively large They shall generally be operated with only two circuits

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 11

(i) Operational flexibility to permit loads and power supplies to be effectively

connected under scheduled and unscheduled outages of circuits and

busbar sections

(ii) Minimal switchgear per circuit and simple control and protection

(iii) Unscheduled loss of busbar sections shall not shut down the system beyond the level designed and provided for

(iv) Scheduled maintenance of busbars shall be possible without system

shutdowns beyond those designed and provided for

It may often be found necessary to locate the incoming circuit breakers of a busbar

to a location half way along one side of a busbar in order to be more assured that

100 of the load is unlikely to flow in one section of the busbars

The possibility of bus section circuit breaker fault conditions in metal enclosed

switchgear which may cause a full switchboard shutdown for remedial repairs

should be considered However unless there are overriding reasons for thecontrary BP do not design switchboards to cater for this eventuality

444 Single busbar arrangements for primary supply substations should be

provided subject to the following criteria-

(i) The switchgear shall be indoor metalclad type

(ii) The single busbar shall be split into a number of sections by

using suitable switchgear The number of sections of busbars

shall be consistent with the acceptable loss of incoming or

outgoing circuits under both scheduled and unscheduled lossconditions

(iii) Routine busbar maintenance shall not be considered to be

necessary or shall be an infrequent occurrence

Where there would be 3 incoming transformer feeders the busbar would normally

be expected to be in 3 parts with feeder circuit breakers arranged on each of the

sections of busbar

445 Double busbar arrangements shall be provided in installations where

outdoor air insulated busbars are installed or where regular busbar maintenance is considered necessary for environmental or pollution

reasons They may also be supplied where the operational flexibility

available from being able to connect incoming power circuits and

outgoing load circuits in a variety of ways is considered to be

particularly advantageous

The perceived need for double busbar arrangements for indoor metalclad HV

switchgear was strong in early Refinery designs but has virtually disappeared from

modern Refinery and other industrial installations Therefore the use of double

busbar arrangements needs to be carefully considered and advantages balanced

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 12

against the considerable additional costs of Building Switchgear and Protective

arrangements One generally clear case for double busbar arrangements lies in

outdoor installations where maintenance work on busbars would be greater

446 Ringbars or mesh busbars arrangements shall not be used

Ring or mesh arrangements are generally difficult to extend and therefore are

considered to have limited application However this type of arrangement has

switchgear saving advantages where the system is unlikely to require modification

447 Where the power supply is obtained from a public utility via equipment

such as transformers or feeders the busbars shall be sectionalised to

prevent total power system shutdown in the event of unscheduled

outage of any busbar section Coincidental maintenance of a public

utility intake transformer shall not be considered

It is considered that maintenance of incoming transformers and feeds would be lowand would be quickly completed Therefore high expense in order to reduce an

already unlikely event is not considered worthwhile

448 The maximum number of busbar sections should not exceed the number

of individual power sources

This requirement sets out to avoid over flexibility in a power system which although

useful in contemplation is of little economic benefit in practice

449 The outgoing load circuits shall be connected to busbar sections in such

a way as to optimise power flow across busbar section switches

commensurate with reliability and operating considerations and shall

also permit unscheduled and scheduled busbar section outages with the

minimum disturbance to the loads being supplied

See also the commentary to section 443

4410 Generators may be connected either directly to the primary power

supply busbar or via generator transformers The type of connection

shall be selected depending upon the economics associated with both

the generation voltage and the primary supply busbar voltage

Typical arrangements for primary substations for a variety of types of power supply are shown in Figure 1

Primary substations should be located in areas which are not classifiedas hazardous The selected location within the site shall-

(a) Take account of the ability to distribute power to the onsite

loads without unnecessarily high distribution equipment costs

(b) Be adjacent to the generation or public utility intake

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 13

(c) Be suitable for future expansion

Where it is impossible to locate the primary substation outside of the hazardous

areas arrangements for forced ventilation of the substation shall be made Air for

the ventilation shall be taken from a remote and safe area the substation shall beequipped with air lock doors gas detectors (which shall cause immediate de-

energisation of all electrical equipment in the substation which is not suitable for a

zone 1 environment) and loss of sufficient ventilation and pressurisation shall

initiate an alarm condition which although not causing a trip of the switchgear

shall be used as an operator based time dependent system for the effect of repair

Shutdown shall be initiated should repairs not be possible within an operator

defined time scale

45 Frequency and Voltage Regulation

451 The power system design shall be arranged to ensure that the voltage

variation (between full load and lightly loaded conditions) experiencedat any piece of equipment designated as a load (ie not including

distribution equipment) shall not exceed plusmn 5 of the declared system

nominal voltage Further the power system shall be arranged to be able

to withstand without undue stress a transient voltage variation to 80

of nominal for a 10 second period or such longer duration at specific

points if necessary Special consideration shall be given to power

frequency overvoltage effects and the need for Power System

equipment to withstand higher overvoltages under some circumstances

This requirement ensures that standard equipment parameters would not be

compromised Where the system voltage deviates beyond the 5 limit apart fromequipment life expectation being eroded there is a danger of exceeding the

hazardous area certification limits for that equipment installed in a hazardous area

This may not actually yield failures or temperatures likely to cause ignition of a

vapour which may be present but will increase the likelihood of such occurrences

and will infringe the basic safety intention

The Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 r equires voltage variations to be within plusmn

6 However standards for equipment state a plusmn 5 tolerance for voltage Hence

the lower limit is specified here

Where power systems which have automatic voltage control can experience

significant load rejection (eg as may be the case of a Power System supplied by generators must direct-on-line start large machines which subsequently exhibit

rapid VAr decrease leaving machines in an overexcited state) significant

overvoltage levels may be predicted (120 to 125 of nominal voltage can be

predicted) This may require special specification of transformers to avoid

problems caused by overfluxing or increased current due to magnetic excitation

Special attention should be paid to voltage and frequency tolerance specifications

for generator transformers which may need to match the run up characteristic of the

generator This can require the transformer to be capable of withstanding full rated

voltage at 80 of rated frequency

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 14

See 811 for motor starting requirements This can give rise to a voltage

depression at motor terminals of 20 which therefore requires that the power

system should be able to successfully accept this condition for the starting period

Typical starting periods can range from 1 to 10 seconds depending upon machine

and system ratings and machine inertia Starting times beyond 10 seconds are

possible where particularly high inertia loads need to be accelerated (eg fans)

however these would constitute a special application and should be treated byexception

452 Where the public utility intake of a site is via transformers these

transformers and their voltage regulation equipment shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance on transformer construction and specification is given in BP

Group RP 12-9

Where necessary for voltage regulation purposes the incoming transformers shall

be equipped with on load and automatic tap change equipment

453 Where there is on-site generation the generators and their governor

and voltage regulation equipment shall comply with BP Group GS 112-

6 or BP Group GS 160-1

Detailed guidance on generator application is not featured as a separate part of the

BP Group RP 12 series of documents

454 Automatic voltage regulation equipment of power systems which have

both on-site generation and public utility intakes via transformers shall

be designed so that there is no detrimental inter-action

There are a number of options which can be considered for voltage control In

general the excitation of the power generators can be arranged for zero VAr

importexport for the whole site and at the same time the intake transformer

controller can be arranged to maintain voltage at a pre set level

455 The excitation systems of synchronous motors shall be arranged to

ensure no detrimental interactive effects with transformer automatic tap

change equipment

In the case of synchronous motors where it is probable that the synchronous motor would be small in relation to the supply intake capacity it is probable that the

excitation can be arranged to maintain a constant power factor to the machine and

the transformer tap change control would be arranged to maintain voltage within

pre set levels

456 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation where

the site has no public utility connection shall be designed such that

generator loading may be automatically shared between the operating

sets and that the nominal supply frequency is maintained within the

approved tolerance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 15

Where governor droop control is employed there should be an operator in

attendance who could take action from time to time to ensure that the system

frequency remained within reasonable limits Such limits should be plusmn 1 and the

output system frequency time should be within 30 seconds of standard time

Statement of these limits for design purposes does not indicate a need to supply an

appropriate standard clock arrangement although power plants supplying

townships or camp areas are encouraged to have this facility The limit for frequency time may be relaxed for small power plants and those where frequency

time is considered unimportant (eg Where there are no time signals reliant upon

mains frequency)

For unmanned power plants or for those where constant operator intervention

would be undesirable the system frequency may be controlled by an isochronous

controller designed to provide overall frequency and generator loadings within

prescribed limits

457 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation at a

site with a public utility connection shall be designed for parallel

operation with the public utility and shall incorporate the protection

arrangements which shall ensure that under public utility collapse ( or

unacceptable major disturbance) the site will retain a defined loading

condition The arrangement shall also incorporate the means for

independent operation

Where a facility is interconnected with a Public Utility the control of the power

system frequency must be under the control of the Public Utility Therefore only

defined load governor settings or droop load sharing control systems are possible

However such interconnection is always subject to disconnection under automatic

protection system operation which will leave the power generators supplying the

site load Under these conditions whatever the original generator control arrangements the generators must revert to independent load sharing control

46 Synchronising

461 Synchronising andor check synchronising equipment shall be provided

wherever more than one source of power may be operated in parallel

with another A synchronising philosophy shall be prepared

See also sections 463 and 464 Because there can be many alternative ways of

achieving a reasonable synchronising arrangement it is expected that there would

be prepared a synchronisingcheck synchronising philosophy (or design document) for every installation which will define the particular arrangements

462 Manual synchronising arrangements shall always be provided for the

incoming power generator circuit breakers This shall comprise

voltmeters and a synchroscope to show the voltage and frequency

differences between the two systems that need to be paralleled A

check synchronising relay should be utilised to prevent operator

maloperation but in order to allow closing a power source on to a dead

system as is required under black start conditions the check

synchronising relay shall have a means of manual or automatic override

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 16

Wherever possible and economically feasible the manual synchronising system

supplied shall also include automatic synchronising applied to the generator

controls

Manual synchronising facilities should also be applied to any primary switchgear

bus section circuit breaker and to circuit breakers incoming to the primary switchboard which can make a parallel connection with other sources

463 Synchronising or check synchronising facilities shall be fitted to busbar

section and bus coupler circuit breakers where it is possible to run the

two systems feeding either section of a busbar completely segregated

from the other The number of circuit breakers provided with

synchronising or check synchronising facilities should be kept to a

minimum A similar logic shall be applied to public utility intake

circuits Alternatively circuit breaker interlocking schemes shall be

installed to preclude the possibility of paralleling two sources of power

where synchronising facilities are excluded

Notwithstanding the provisions of 464 it is not expected that there would be a

need to include synchronising or check synchronising facilities on system voltage

levels more than two levels removed from the power generation busbar where the

power system is operated with bus sections normally closed However this is a

general rule and should the system be commonly operated with open bus sections

for significant periods and there is little central system control or information

dissemination the arrangement should be reviewed

464 Synchronising facilities shall be provided at the primary power supply

voltage and should be avoided at other voltages by use of appropriatecircuit breaker interlocking

The form of interlocking should avoid the need for break-before-make action unless

absolutely necessary This may need to be associated with upstream bus section

circuit breakers and incoming circuit breakers to the upstream switchboard See

463 (commentary) for provisions should distances be too great for the economic

use of interlocking

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems

Detailed guidance on this subject is given in BP Group RP 12-5 dc

power supplies for control systems shall comply with BP Group GS112-11 and ac power supplies shall comply with BP Group GS 112-10

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 17

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

51 General

511 The distribution network shall be designed to carry continuously at least

110 of the Maximum Demand associated with peak design production at the maximum ambient conditions

The requirement for 110 capacity is considered to be applicable to all

components within the distribution system including transformer capacity It does

not include capacity of equipment considered to constitute a load to the power

system eg Induction Machines which should be rated as close as possible to

actual process demands

Refer also to the commentary to Section 311

Switchboards should be supplied with a de gree of s pares and room for expansion

Further details may be found in BP Group RP 12-6 and 7

512 Where required the reliability associated with any part of the system

shall be assessed and presented in qualitative and quantitative terms

In general the design of the power system distribution should be based upon

qualitative requirements which include assessments for meeting power supply

continuity in the event of maintenance and in the event of failure Since electrical

distribution systems are inherently reliable the design requirements are commonly

based upon the need to disconnect distribution electrical equipment to carry out

routine maintenance and at the same time keep power supplies available for

operating plant However under some circumstances the need to assess the

electrical reliability may arise (perhaps as part of an overall assessment of plant failure but possibly as part of a comparison of alternative supplies for new plant)

Under these circumstances the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and the Mean

Time To Repair (MTTR) concerning power system failure at any particular

switchboard would be required In addition it is recommended that the quantitative

statement indicate the probability of failure occurring over a particular timeframe

(eg Provide a value and definition of the probability of zero failures over a 12

month period)

See also sections 412 (commentary) 422 and 43

513 The distribution system shall be designed using one of the basic

arrangements further outlined in 52 through 56 and incorporating thecontrol features of 57 The system designed shall be described in a

design philosophy document

It is considered that the design features contained in sections 52 through 56 would

be suitable for all of the industrial power systems likely to be required by BP

However should an alternative philosophy be available it should be compared with

a standard double radial system in terms of operation reliability maintainability

and cost

The depictions in the drawings which illustrate the texts of 52 and 55 are fairly

conventional in that Contactors are employed only for motor feeders Under some

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 18

circumstances Contactors can prove an economic choice for transformer or

Switchboard feeders The depictions are for an extensive installation typical of

Refinery or other large system Offshore systems may be considered as similar but

without the higher voltage level and interconnections to Public Utility

52 Single Radial

521 These should be used to provide power to non essential electrical loads

those where alternative sources of energy are available such as standby

generating plant or those process loads for which a lower availability

can be accepted

Where minimum facilities engineering is required and the process plant can be (or

will regularly be) switched off then single radial systems may be contemplated to

satisfy process demands It is considered that maintenance of electrical systems

could be scheduled for normal process plant shutdown times and the reliability of

electrical distribution systems is generally much better than required by the process

system

522 Each component of the single radial circuit shall be capable of supplying

110 of the required electrical load Transformers or other plant

which includes forced cooling equipment shall not rely entirely on the

forced cooling arrangements to obtain the necessary rating

Refer to the commentary to Section 311 for more detail on load estimation

Where the loading is of a cyclical nature and the forced cooling would not be

expected to operate for more than 2 hours in any 12 hour period then capacities

based upon forced cooling can be considered However where this is the case acooling system failure alarm shall be provided

53 Double Radial

531 Essential and Process Sensitive loads should be supplied by two or

more identically rated radial systems

Figure 1(a) details a double radial system of feed

532 In double radial systems each circuit shall be capable of carrying a

110 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall include bussection switchgear They shall be arranged to ensure that unscheduled

outage of any component of the circuit would not result in loss of

power supply after the faulty equipment has been disconnected from the

system

See section 311 for detail on load estimation

Exceptions to the requirement for all supplies to be maintained may be made in the

following cases-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 19

(a) For bus section circuit breaker faults These may sometimes cause damage

which may require complete switchboard shutdown However the

occurrence of such faults is sufficiently rare as to be neglected

(b) Where there may be some non-essential loads supplied from a double

radial system These may receive a single radial supply from a double

radial system and therefore would not receive a supply in the event of some forms of double radial system outage

533 Double radially fed systems should generally be operated in parallel

with all bus-section switches closed

It is considered that the advantage of continuity of supply in the event of relatively

light fault conditions which is offered by closed bus section systems outweighs the

disadvantages of increased fault disturbance for heavy fault conditions It is also

more inherently safe since the switchgear fault conditions are based upon the worst

possible supply condition However see also section 534

534 Where switchgear fault levels are found to be above the values outlined

in 23 attention shall be given to operating with bus-section breakers

open as opposed to purchasing higher fault level switchgear Where an

open bus-section breaker philosophy is being given attention the need

to restore rapidly the supplies to drives shall determine whether

automatic closure of bus section circuit breaker(s) is to be employed

Switchgear fault levels could be readily reduced by increasing the impedance of

incoming transformers (Where new transformers will be purchased) However

increasing the impedance of transformers increases the voltage regulation between

light and full load There is therefore a trade-off between fault duty and normal voltage regulation

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

54 Triple Radial

541 Critical and essential loads may be alternatively supplied by triple

identically rated radial systems These systems are preferred to double

radial systems wherever there is an overall total cost advantage

A triple radial system comprises three feeders and three feeder transformers to

provide supply to a distribution switchboard

542 Each circuit of triple fed radial systems shall be capable of providing at

least 55 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall be split into at

least three sections with two bus-section switches

This will allow for the loss of any one of the three circuits leaving the two healthy

circuits still capable of providing 110 of the Maximum Demand

543 Triple radial systems shall be provided where the power flow is

relatively large They shall generally be operated with only two circuits

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 12

against the considerable additional costs of Building Switchgear and Protective

arrangements One generally clear case for double busbar arrangements lies in

outdoor installations where maintenance work on busbars would be greater

446 Ringbars or mesh busbars arrangements shall not be used

Ring or mesh arrangements are generally difficult to extend and therefore are

considered to have limited application However this type of arrangement has

switchgear saving advantages where the system is unlikely to require modification

447 Where the power supply is obtained from a public utility via equipment

such as transformers or feeders the busbars shall be sectionalised to

prevent total power system shutdown in the event of unscheduled

outage of any busbar section Coincidental maintenance of a public

utility intake transformer shall not be considered

It is considered that maintenance of incoming transformers and feeds would be lowand would be quickly completed Therefore high expense in order to reduce an

already unlikely event is not considered worthwhile

448 The maximum number of busbar sections should not exceed the number

of individual power sources

This requirement sets out to avoid over flexibility in a power system which although

useful in contemplation is of little economic benefit in practice

449 The outgoing load circuits shall be connected to busbar sections in such

a way as to optimise power flow across busbar section switches

commensurate with reliability and operating considerations and shall

also permit unscheduled and scheduled busbar section outages with the

minimum disturbance to the loads being supplied

See also the commentary to section 443

4410 Generators may be connected either directly to the primary power

supply busbar or via generator transformers The type of connection

shall be selected depending upon the economics associated with both

the generation voltage and the primary supply busbar voltage

Typical arrangements for primary substations for a variety of types of power supply are shown in Figure 1

Primary substations should be located in areas which are not classifiedas hazardous The selected location within the site shall-

(a) Take account of the ability to distribute power to the onsite

loads without unnecessarily high distribution equipment costs

(b) Be adjacent to the generation or public utility intake

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 13

(c) Be suitable for future expansion

Where it is impossible to locate the primary substation outside of the hazardous

areas arrangements for forced ventilation of the substation shall be made Air for

the ventilation shall be taken from a remote and safe area the substation shall beequipped with air lock doors gas detectors (which shall cause immediate de-

energisation of all electrical equipment in the substation which is not suitable for a

zone 1 environment) and loss of sufficient ventilation and pressurisation shall

initiate an alarm condition which although not causing a trip of the switchgear

shall be used as an operator based time dependent system for the effect of repair

Shutdown shall be initiated should repairs not be possible within an operator

defined time scale

45 Frequency and Voltage Regulation

451 The power system design shall be arranged to ensure that the voltage

variation (between full load and lightly loaded conditions) experiencedat any piece of equipment designated as a load (ie not including

distribution equipment) shall not exceed plusmn 5 of the declared system

nominal voltage Further the power system shall be arranged to be able

to withstand without undue stress a transient voltage variation to 80

of nominal for a 10 second period or such longer duration at specific

points if necessary Special consideration shall be given to power

frequency overvoltage effects and the need for Power System

equipment to withstand higher overvoltages under some circumstances

This requirement ensures that standard equipment parameters would not be

compromised Where the system voltage deviates beyond the 5 limit apart fromequipment life expectation being eroded there is a danger of exceeding the

hazardous area certification limits for that equipment installed in a hazardous area

This may not actually yield failures or temperatures likely to cause ignition of a

vapour which may be present but will increase the likelihood of such occurrences

and will infringe the basic safety intention

The Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 r equires voltage variations to be within plusmn

6 However standards for equipment state a plusmn 5 tolerance for voltage Hence

the lower limit is specified here

Where power systems which have automatic voltage control can experience

significant load rejection (eg as may be the case of a Power System supplied by generators must direct-on-line start large machines which subsequently exhibit

rapid VAr decrease leaving machines in an overexcited state) significant

overvoltage levels may be predicted (120 to 125 of nominal voltage can be

predicted) This may require special specification of transformers to avoid

problems caused by overfluxing or increased current due to magnetic excitation

Special attention should be paid to voltage and frequency tolerance specifications

for generator transformers which may need to match the run up characteristic of the

generator This can require the transformer to be capable of withstanding full rated

voltage at 80 of rated frequency

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 14

See 811 for motor starting requirements This can give rise to a voltage

depression at motor terminals of 20 which therefore requires that the power

system should be able to successfully accept this condition for the starting period

Typical starting periods can range from 1 to 10 seconds depending upon machine

and system ratings and machine inertia Starting times beyond 10 seconds are

possible where particularly high inertia loads need to be accelerated (eg fans)

however these would constitute a special application and should be treated byexception

452 Where the public utility intake of a site is via transformers these

transformers and their voltage regulation equipment shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance on transformer construction and specification is given in BP

Group RP 12-9

Where necessary for voltage regulation purposes the incoming transformers shall

be equipped with on load and automatic tap change equipment

453 Where there is on-site generation the generators and their governor

and voltage regulation equipment shall comply with BP Group GS 112-

6 or BP Group GS 160-1

Detailed guidance on generator application is not featured as a separate part of the

BP Group RP 12 series of documents

454 Automatic voltage regulation equipment of power systems which have

both on-site generation and public utility intakes via transformers shall

be designed so that there is no detrimental inter-action

There are a number of options which can be considered for voltage control In

general the excitation of the power generators can be arranged for zero VAr

importexport for the whole site and at the same time the intake transformer

controller can be arranged to maintain voltage at a pre set level

455 The excitation systems of synchronous motors shall be arranged to

ensure no detrimental interactive effects with transformer automatic tap

change equipment

In the case of synchronous motors where it is probable that the synchronous motor would be small in relation to the supply intake capacity it is probable that the

excitation can be arranged to maintain a constant power factor to the machine and

the transformer tap change control would be arranged to maintain voltage within

pre set levels

456 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation where

the site has no public utility connection shall be designed such that

generator loading may be automatically shared between the operating

sets and that the nominal supply frequency is maintained within the

approved tolerance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 15

Where governor droop control is employed there should be an operator in

attendance who could take action from time to time to ensure that the system

frequency remained within reasonable limits Such limits should be plusmn 1 and the

output system frequency time should be within 30 seconds of standard time

Statement of these limits for design purposes does not indicate a need to supply an

appropriate standard clock arrangement although power plants supplying

townships or camp areas are encouraged to have this facility The limit for frequency time may be relaxed for small power plants and those where frequency

time is considered unimportant (eg Where there are no time signals reliant upon

mains frequency)

For unmanned power plants or for those where constant operator intervention

would be undesirable the system frequency may be controlled by an isochronous

controller designed to provide overall frequency and generator loadings within

prescribed limits

457 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation at a

site with a public utility connection shall be designed for parallel

operation with the public utility and shall incorporate the protection

arrangements which shall ensure that under public utility collapse ( or

unacceptable major disturbance) the site will retain a defined loading

condition The arrangement shall also incorporate the means for

independent operation

Where a facility is interconnected with a Public Utility the control of the power

system frequency must be under the control of the Public Utility Therefore only

defined load governor settings or droop load sharing control systems are possible

However such interconnection is always subject to disconnection under automatic

protection system operation which will leave the power generators supplying the

site load Under these conditions whatever the original generator control arrangements the generators must revert to independent load sharing control

46 Synchronising

461 Synchronising andor check synchronising equipment shall be provided

wherever more than one source of power may be operated in parallel

with another A synchronising philosophy shall be prepared

See also sections 463 and 464 Because there can be many alternative ways of

achieving a reasonable synchronising arrangement it is expected that there would

be prepared a synchronisingcheck synchronising philosophy (or design document) for every installation which will define the particular arrangements

462 Manual synchronising arrangements shall always be provided for the

incoming power generator circuit breakers This shall comprise

voltmeters and a synchroscope to show the voltage and frequency

differences between the two systems that need to be paralleled A

check synchronising relay should be utilised to prevent operator

maloperation but in order to allow closing a power source on to a dead

system as is required under black start conditions the check

synchronising relay shall have a means of manual or automatic override

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 16

Wherever possible and economically feasible the manual synchronising system

supplied shall also include automatic synchronising applied to the generator

controls

Manual synchronising facilities should also be applied to any primary switchgear

bus section circuit breaker and to circuit breakers incoming to the primary switchboard which can make a parallel connection with other sources

463 Synchronising or check synchronising facilities shall be fitted to busbar

section and bus coupler circuit breakers where it is possible to run the

two systems feeding either section of a busbar completely segregated

from the other The number of circuit breakers provided with

synchronising or check synchronising facilities should be kept to a

minimum A similar logic shall be applied to public utility intake

circuits Alternatively circuit breaker interlocking schemes shall be

installed to preclude the possibility of paralleling two sources of power

where synchronising facilities are excluded

Notwithstanding the provisions of 464 it is not expected that there would be a

need to include synchronising or check synchronising facilities on system voltage

levels more than two levels removed from the power generation busbar where the

power system is operated with bus sections normally closed However this is a

general rule and should the system be commonly operated with open bus sections

for significant periods and there is little central system control or information

dissemination the arrangement should be reviewed

464 Synchronising facilities shall be provided at the primary power supply

voltage and should be avoided at other voltages by use of appropriatecircuit breaker interlocking

The form of interlocking should avoid the need for break-before-make action unless

absolutely necessary This may need to be associated with upstream bus section

circuit breakers and incoming circuit breakers to the upstream switchboard See

463 (commentary) for provisions should distances be too great for the economic

use of interlocking

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems

Detailed guidance on this subject is given in BP Group RP 12-5 dc

power supplies for control systems shall comply with BP Group GS112-11 and ac power supplies shall comply with BP Group GS 112-10

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 17

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

51 General

511 The distribution network shall be designed to carry continuously at least

110 of the Maximum Demand associated with peak design production at the maximum ambient conditions

The requirement for 110 capacity is considered to be applicable to all

components within the distribution system including transformer capacity It does

not include capacity of equipment considered to constitute a load to the power

system eg Induction Machines which should be rated as close as possible to

actual process demands

Refer also to the commentary to Section 311

Switchboards should be supplied with a de gree of s pares and room for expansion

Further details may be found in BP Group RP 12-6 and 7

512 Where required the reliability associated with any part of the system

shall be assessed and presented in qualitative and quantitative terms

In general the design of the power system distribution should be based upon

qualitative requirements which include assessments for meeting power supply

continuity in the event of maintenance and in the event of failure Since electrical

distribution systems are inherently reliable the design requirements are commonly

based upon the need to disconnect distribution electrical equipment to carry out

routine maintenance and at the same time keep power supplies available for

operating plant However under some circumstances the need to assess the

electrical reliability may arise (perhaps as part of an overall assessment of plant failure but possibly as part of a comparison of alternative supplies for new plant)

Under these circumstances the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and the Mean

Time To Repair (MTTR) concerning power system failure at any particular

switchboard would be required In addition it is recommended that the quantitative

statement indicate the probability of failure occurring over a particular timeframe

(eg Provide a value and definition of the probability of zero failures over a 12

month period)

See also sections 412 (commentary) 422 and 43

513 The distribution system shall be designed using one of the basic

arrangements further outlined in 52 through 56 and incorporating thecontrol features of 57 The system designed shall be described in a

design philosophy document

It is considered that the design features contained in sections 52 through 56 would

be suitable for all of the industrial power systems likely to be required by BP

However should an alternative philosophy be available it should be compared with

a standard double radial system in terms of operation reliability maintainability

and cost

The depictions in the drawings which illustrate the texts of 52 and 55 are fairly

conventional in that Contactors are employed only for motor feeders Under some

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 18

circumstances Contactors can prove an economic choice for transformer or

Switchboard feeders The depictions are for an extensive installation typical of

Refinery or other large system Offshore systems may be considered as similar but

without the higher voltage level and interconnections to Public Utility

52 Single Radial

521 These should be used to provide power to non essential electrical loads

those where alternative sources of energy are available such as standby

generating plant or those process loads for which a lower availability

can be accepted

Where minimum facilities engineering is required and the process plant can be (or

will regularly be) switched off then single radial systems may be contemplated to

satisfy process demands It is considered that maintenance of electrical systems

could be scheduled for normal process plant shutdown times and the reliability of

electrical distribution systems is generally much better than required by the process

system

522 Each component of the single radial circuit shall be capable of supplying

110 of the required electrical load Transformers or other plant

which includes forced cooling equipment shall not rely entirely on the

forced cooling arrangements to obtain the necessary rating

Refer to the commentary to Section 311 for more detail on load estimation

Where the loading is of a cyclical nature and the forced cooling would not be

expected to operate for more than 2 hours in any 12 hour period then capacities

based upon forced cooling can be considered However where this is the case acooling system failure alarm shall be provided

53 Double Radial

531 Essential and Process Sensitive loads should be supplied by two or

more identically rated radial systems

Figure 1(a) details a double radial system of feed

532 In double radial systems each circuit shall be capable of carrying a

110 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall include bussection switchgear They shall be arranged to ensure that unscheduled

outage of any component of the circuit would not result in loss of

power supply after the faulty equipment has been disconnected from the

system

See section 311 for detail on load estimation

Exceptions to the requirement for all supplies to be maintained may be made in the

following cases-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 19

(a) For bus section circuit breaker faults These may sometimes cause damage

which may require complete switchboard shutdown However the

occurrence of such faults is sufficiently rare as to be neglected

(b) Where there may be some non-essential loads supplied from a double

radial system These may receive a single radial supply from a double

radial system and therefore would not receive a supply in the event of some forms of double radial system outage

533 Double radially fed systems should generally be operated in parallel

with all bus-section switches closed

It is considered that the advantage of continuity of supply in the event of relatively

light fault conditions which is offered by closed bus section systems outweighs the

disadvantages of increased fault disturbance for heavy fault conditions It is also

more inherently safe since the switchgear fault conditions are based upon the worst

possible supply condition However see also section 534

534 Where switchgear fault levels are found to be above the values outlined

in 23 attention shall be given to operating with bus-section breakers

open as opposed to purchasing higher fault level switchgear Where an

open bus-section breaker philosophy is being given attention the need

to restore rapidly the supplies to drives shall determine whether

automatic closure of bus section circuit breaker(s) is to be employed

Switchgear fault levels could be readily reduced by increasing the impedance of

incoming transformers (Where new transformers will be purchased) However

increasing the impedance of transformers increases the voltage regulation between

light and full load There is therefore a trade-off between fault duty and normal voltage regulation

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

54 Triple Radial

541 Critical and essential loads may be alternatively supplied by triple

identically rated radial systems These systems are preferred to double

radial systems wherever there is an overall total cost advantage

A triple radial system comprises three feeders and three feeder transformers to

provide supply to a distribution switchboard

542 Each circuit of triple fed radial systems shall be capable of providing at

least 55 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall be split into at

least three sections with two bus-section switches

This will allow for the loss of any one of the three circuits leaving the two healthy

circuits still capable of providing 110 of the Maximum Demand

543 Triple radial systems shall be provided where the power flow is

relatively large They shall generally be operated with only two circuits

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 1960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 13

(c) Be suitable for future expansion

Where it is impossible to locate the primary substation outside of the hazardous

areas arrangements for forced ventilation of the substation shall be made Air for

the ventilation shall be taken from a remote and safe area the substation shall beequipped with air lock doors gas detectors (which shall cause immediate de-

energisation of all electrical equipment in the substation which is not suitable for a

zone 1 environment) and loss of sufficient ventilation and pressurisation shall

initiate an alarm condition which although not causing a trip of the switchgear

shall be used as an operator based time dependent system for the effect of repair

Shutdown shall be initiated should repairs not be possible within an operator

defined time scale

45 Frequency and Voltage Regulation

451 The power system design shall be arranged to ensure that the voltage

variation (between full load and lightly loaded conditions) experiencedat any piece of equipment designated as a load (ie not including

distribution equipment) shall not exceed plusmn 5 of the declared system

nominal voltage Further the power system shall be arranged to be able

to withstand without undue stress a transient voltage variation to 80

of nominal for a 10 second period or such longer duration at specific

points if necessary Special consideration shall be given to power

frequency overvoltage effects and the need for Power System

equipment to withstand higher overvoltages under some circumstances

This requirement ensures that standard equipment parameters would not be

compromised Where the system voltage deviates beyond the 5 limit apart fromequipment life expectation being eroded there is a danger of exceeding the

hazardous area certification limits for that equipment installed in a hazardous area

This may not actually yield failures or temperatures likely to cause ignition of a

vapour which may be present but will increase the likelihood of such occurrences

and will infringe the basic safety intention

The Electricity Supply Regulations 1988 r equires voltage variations to be within plusmn

6 However standards for equipment state a plusmn 5 tolerance for voltage Hence

the lower limit is specified here

Where power systems which have automatic voltage control can experience

significant load rejection (eg as may be the case of a Power System supplied by generators must direct-on-line start large machines which subsequently exhibit

rapid VAr decrease leaving machines in an overexcited state) significant

overvoltage levels may be predicted (120 to 125 of nominal voltage can be

predicted) This may require special specification of transformers to avoid

problems caused by overfluxing or increased current due to magnetic excitation

Special attention should be paid to voltage and frequency tolerance specifications

for generator transformers which may need to match the run up characteristic of the

generator This can require the transformer to be capable of withstanding full rated

voltage at 80 of rated frequency

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 14

See 811 for motor starting requirements This can give rise to a voltage

depression at motor terminals of 20 which therefore requires that the power

system should be able to successfully accept this condition for the starting period

Typical starting periods can range from 1 to 10 seconds depending upon machine

and system ratings and machine inertia Starting times beyond 10 seconds are

possible where particularly high inertia loads need to be accelerated (eg fans)

however these would constitute a special application and should be treated byexception

452 Where the public utility intake of a site is via transformers these

transformers and their voltage regulation equipment shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance on transformer construction and specification is given in BP

Group RP 12-9

Where necessary for voltage regulation purposes the incoming transformers shall

be equipped with on load and automatic tap change equipment

453 Where there is on-site generation the generators and their governor

and voltage regulation equipment shall comply with BP Group GS 112-

6 or BP Group GS 160-1

Detailed guidance on generator application is not featured as a separate part of the

BP Group RP 12 series of documents

454 Automatic voltage regulation equipment of power systems which have

both on-site generation and public utility intakes via transformers shall

be designed so that there is no detrimental inter-action

There are a number of options which can be considered for voltage control In

general the excitation of the power generators can be arranged for zero VAr

importexport for the whole site and at the same time the intake transformer

controller can be arranged to maintain voltage at a pre set level

455 The excitation systems of synchronous motors shall be arranged to

ensure no detrimental interactive effects with transformer automatic tap

change equipment

In the case of synchronous motors where it is probable that the synchronous motor would be small in relation to the supply intake capacity it is probable that the

excitation can be arranged to maintain a constant power factor to the machine and

the transformer tap change control would be arranged to maintain voltage within

pre set levels

456 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation where

the site has no public utility connection shall be designed such that

generator loading may be automatically shared between the operating

sets and that the nominal supply frequency is maintained within the

approved tolerance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 15

Where governor droop control is employed there should be an operator in

attendance who could take action from time to time to ensure that the system

frequency remained within reasonable limits Such limits should be plusmn 1 and the

output system frequency time should be within 30 seconds of standard time

Statement of these limits for design purposes does not indicate a need to supply an

appropriate standard clock arrangement although power plants supplying

townships or camp areas are encouraged to have this facility The limit for frequency time may be relaxed for small power plants and those where frequency

time is considered unimportant (eg Where there are no time signals reliant upon

mains frequency)

For unmanned power plants or for those where constant operator intervention

would be undesirable the system frequency may be controlled by an isochronous

controller designed to provide overall frequency and generator loadings within

prescribed limits

457 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation at a

site with a public utility connection shall be designed for parallel

operation with the public utility and shall incorporate the protection

arrangements which shall ensure that under public utility collapse ( or

unacceptable major disturbance) the site will retain a defined loading

condition The arrangement shall also incorporate the means for

independent operation

Where a facility is interconnected with a Public Utility the control of the power

system frequency must be under the control of the Public Utility Therefore only

defined load governor settings or droop load sharing control systems are possible

However such interconnection is always subject to disconnection under automatic

protection system operation which will leave the power generators supplying the

site load Under these conditions whatever the original generator control arrangements the generators must revert to independent load sharing control

46 Synchronising

461 Synchronising andor check synchronising equipment shall be provided

wherever more than one source of power may be operated in parallel

with another A synchronising philosophy shall be prepared

See also sections 463 and 464 Because there can be many alternative ways of

achieving a reasonable synchronising arrangement it is expected that there would

be prepared a synchronisingcheck synchronising philosophy (or design document) for every installation which will define the particular arrangements

462 Manual synchronising arrangements shall always be provided for the

incoming power generator circuit breakers This shall comprise

voltmeters and a synchroscope to show the voltage and frequency

differences between the two systems that need to be paralleled A

check synchronising relay should be utilised to prevent operator

maloperation but in order to allow closing a power source on to a dead

system as is required under black start conditions the check

synchronising relay shall have a means of manual or automatic override

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 16

Wherever possible and economically feasible the manual synchronising system

supplied shall also include automatic synchronising applied to the generator

controls

Manual synchronising facilities should also be applied to any primary switchgear

bus section circuit breaker and to circuit breakers incoming to the primary switchboard which can make a parallel connection with other sources

463 Synchronising or check synchronising facilities shall be fitted to busbar

section and bus coupler circuit breakers where it is possible to run the

two systems feeding either section of a busbar completely segregated

from the other The number of circuit breakers provided with

synchronising or check synchronising facilities should be kept to a

minimum A similar logic shall be applied to public utility intake

circuits Alternatively circuit breaker interlocking schemes shall be

installed to preclude the possibility of paralleling two sources of power

where synchronising facilities are excluded

Notwithstanding the provisions of 464 it is not expected that there would be a

need to include synchronising or check synchronising facilities on system voltage

levels more than two levels removed from the power generation busbar where the

power system is operated with bus sections normally closed However this is a

general rule and should the system be commonly operated with open bus sections

for significant periods and there is little central system control or information

dissemination the arrangement should be reviewed

464 Synchronising facilities shall be provided at the primary power supply

voltage and should be avoided at other voltages by use of appropriatecircuit breaker interlocking

The form of interlocking should avoid the need for break-before-make action unless

absolutely necessary This may need to be associated with upstream bus section

circuit breakers and incoming circuit breakers to the upstream switchboard See

463 (commentary) for provisions should distances be too great for the economic

use of interlocking

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems

Detailed guidance on this subject is given in BP Group RP 12-5 dc

power supplies for control systems shall comply with BP Group GS112-11 and ac power supplies shall comply with BP Group GS 112-10

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 17

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

51 General

511 The distribution network shall be designed to carry continuously at least

110 of the Maximum Demand associated with peak design production at the maximum ambient conditions

The requirement for 110 capacity is considered to be applicable to all

components within the distribution system including transformer capacity It does

not include capacity of equipment considered to constitute a load to the power

system eg Induction Machines which should be rated as close as possible to

actual process demands

Refer also to the commentary to Section 311

Switchboards should be supplied with a de gree of s pares and room for expansion

Further details may be found in BP Group RP 12-6 and 7

512 Where required the reliability associated with any part of the system

shall be assessed and presented in qualitative and quantitative terms

In general the design of the power system distribution should be based upon

qualitative requirements which include assessments for meeting power supply

continuity in the event of maintenance and in the event of failure Since electrical

distribution systems are inherently reliable the design requirements are commonly

based upon the need to disconnect distribution electrical equipment to carry out

routine maintenance and at the same time keep power supplies available for

operating plant However under some circumstances the need to assess the

electrical reliability may arise (perhaps as part of an overall assessment of plant failure but possibly as part of a comparison of alternative supplies for new plant)

Under these circumstances the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and the Mean

Time To Repair (MTTR) concerning power system failure at any particular

switchboard would be required In addition it is recommended that the quantitative

statement indicate the probability of failure occurring over a particular timeframe

(eg Provide a value and definition of the probability of zero failures over a 12

month period)

See also sections 412 (commentary) 422 and 43

513 The distribution system shall be designed using one of the basic

arrangements further outlined in 52 through 56 and incorporating thecontrol features of 57 The system designed shall be described in a

design philosophy document

It is considered that the design features contained in sections 52 through 56 would

be suitable for all of the industrial power systems likely to be required by BP

However should an alternative philosophy be available it should be compared with

a standard double radial system in terms of operation reliability maintainability

and cost

The depictions in the drawings which illustrate the texts of 52 and 55 are fairly

conventional in that Contactors are employed only for motor feeders Under some

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 18

circumstances Contactors can prove an economic choice for transformer or

Switchboard feeders The depictions are for an extensive installation typical of

Refinery or other large system Offshore systems may be considered as similar but

without the higher voltage level and interconnections to Public Utility

52 Single Radial

521 These should be used to provide power to non essential electrical loads

those where alternative sources of energy are available such as standby

generating plant or those process loads for which a lower availability

can be accepted

Where minimum facilities engineering is required and the process plant can be (or

will regularly be) switched off then single radial systems may be contemplated to

satisfy process demands It is considered that maintenance of electrical systems

could be scheduled for normal process plant shutdown times and the reliability of

electrical distribution systems is generally much better than required by the process

system

522 Each component of the single radial circuit shall be capable of supplying

110 of the required electrical load Transformers or other plant

which includes forced cooling equipment shall not rely entirely on the

forced cooling arrangements to obtain the necessary rating

Refer to the commentary to Section 311 for more detail on load estimation

Where the loading is of a cyclical nature and the forced cooling would not be

expected to operate for more than 2 hours in any 12 hour period then capacities

based upon forced cooling can be considered However where this is the case acooling system failure alarm shall be provided

53 Double Radial

531 Essential and Process Sensitive loads should be supplied by two or

more identically rated radial systems

Figure 1(a) details a double radial system of feed

532 In double radial systems each circuit shall be capable of carrying a

110 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall include bussection switchgear They shall be arranged to ensure that unscheduled

outage of any component of the circuit would not result in loss of

power supply after the faulty equipment has been disconnected from the

system

See section 311 for detail on load estimation

Exceptions to the requirement for all supplies to be maintained may be made in the

following cases-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 19

(a) For bus section circuit breaker faults These may sometimes cause damage

which may require complete switchboard shutdown However the

occurrence of such faults is sufficiently rare as to be neglected

(b) Where there may be some non-essential loads supplied from a double

radial system These may receive a single radial supply from a double

radial system and therefore would not receive a supply in the event of some forms of double radial system outage

533 Double radially fed systems should generally be operated in parallel

with all bus-section switches closed

It is considered that the advantage of continuity of supply in the event of relatively

light fault conditions which is offered by closed bus section systems outweighs the

disadvantages of increased fault disturbance for heavy fault conditions It is also

more inherently safe since the switchgear fault conditions are based upon the worst

possible supply condition However see also section 534

534 Where switchgear fault levels are found to be above the values outlined

in 23 attention shall be given to operating with bus-section breakers

open as opposed to purchasing higher fault level switchgear Where an

open bus-section breaker philosophy is being given attention the need

to restore rapidly the supplies to drives shall determine whether

automatic closure of bus section circuit breaker(s) is to be employed

Switchgear fault levels could be readily reduced by increasing the impedance of

incoming transformers (Where new transformers will be purchased) However

increasing the impedance of transformers increases the voltage regulation between

light and full load There is therefore a trade-off between fault duty and normal voltage regulation

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

54 Triple Radial

541 Critical and essential loads may be alternatively supplied by triple

identically rated radial systems These systems are preferred to double

radial systems wherever there is an overall total cost advantage

A triple radial system comprises three feeders and three feeder transformers to

provide supply to a distribution switchboard

542 Each circuit of triple fed radial systems shall be capable of providing at

least 55 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall be split into at

least three sections with two bus-section switches

This will allow for the loss of any one of the three circuits leaving the two healthy

circuits still capable of providing 110 of the Maximum Demand

543 Triple radial systems shall be provided where the power flow is

relatively large They shall generally be operated with only two circuits

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 14

See 811 for motor starting requirements This can give rise to a voltage

depression at motor terminals of 20 which therefore requires that the power

system should be able to successfully accept this condition for the starting period

Typical starting periods can range from 1 to 10 seconds depending upon machine

and system ratings and machine inertia Starting times beyond 10 seconds are

possible where particularly high inertia loads need to be accelerated (eg fans)

however these would constitute a special application and should be treated byexception

452 Where the public utility intake of a site is via transformers these

transformers and their voltage regulation equipment shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance on transformer construction and specification is given in BP

Group RP 12-9

Where necessary for voltage regulation purposes the incoming transformers shall

be equipped with on load and automatic tap change equipment

453 Where there is on-site generation the generators and their governor

and voltage regulation equipment shall comply with BP Group GS 112-

6 or BP Group GS 160-1

Detailed guidance on generator application is not featured as a separate part of the

BP Group RP 12 series of documents

454 Automatic voltage regulation equipment of power systems which have

both on-site generation and public utility intakes via transformers shall

be designed so that there is no detrimental inter-action

There are a number of options which can be considered for voltage control In

general the excitation of the power generators can be arranged for zero VAr

importexport for the whole site and at the same time the intake transformer

controller can be arranged to maintain voltage at a pre set level

455 The excitation systems of synchronous motors shall be arranged to

ensure no detrimental interactive effects with transformer automatic tap

change equipment

In the case of synchronous motors where it is probable that the synchronous motor would be small in relation to the supply intake capacity it is probable that the

excitation can be arranged to maintain a constant power factor to the machine and

the transformer tap change control would be arranged to maintain voltage within

pre set levels

456 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation where

the site has no public utility connection shall be designed such that

generator loading may be automatically shared between the operating

sets and that the nominal supply frequency is maintained within the

approved tolerance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 15

Where governor droop control is employed there should be an operator in

attendance who could take action from time to time to ensure that the system

frequency remained within reasonable limits Such limits should be plusmn 1 and the

output system frequency time should be within 30 seconds of standard time

Statement of these limits for design purposes does not indicate a need to supply an

appropriate standard clock arrangement although power plants supplying

townships or camp areas are encouraged to have this facility The limit for frequency time may be relaxed for small power plants and those where frequency

time is considered unimportant (eg Where there are no time signals reliant upon

mains frequency)

For unmanned power plants or for those where constant operator intervention

would be undesirable the system frequency may be controlled by an isochronous

controller designed to provide overall frequency and generator loadings within

prescribed limits

457 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation at a

site with a public utility connection shall be designed for parallel

operation with the public utility and shall incorporate the protection

arrangements which shall ensure that under public utility collapse ( or

unacceptable major disturbance) the site will retain a defined loading

condition The arrangement shall also incorporate the means for

independent operation

Where a facility is interconnected with a Public Utility the control of the power

system frequency must be under the control of the Public Utility Therefore only

defined load governor settings or droop load sharing control systems are possible

However such interconnection is always subject to disconnection under automatic

protection system operation which will leave the power generators supplying the

site load Under these conditions whatever the original generator control arrangements the generators must revert to independent load sharing control

46 Synchronising

461 Synchronising andor check synchronising equipment shall be provided

wherever more than one source of power may be operated in parallel

with another A synchronising philosophy shall be prepared

See also sections 463 and 464 Because there can be many alternative ways of

achieving a reasonable synchronising arrangement it is expected that there would

be prepared a synchronisingcheck synchronising philosophy (or design document) for every installation which will define the particular arrangements

462 Manual synchronising arrangements shall always be provided for the

incoming power generator circuit breakers This shall comprise

voltmeters and a synchroscope to show the voltage and frequency

differences between the two systems that need to be paralleled A

check synchronising relay should be utilised to prevent operator

maloperation but in order to allow closing a power source on to a dead

system as is required under black start conditions the check

synchronising relay shall have a means of manual or automatic override

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 16

Wherever possible and economically feasible the manual synchronising system

supplied shall also include automatic synchronising applied to the generator

controls

Manual synchronising facilities should also be applied to any primary switchgear

bus section circuit breaker and to circuit breakers incoming to the primary switchboard which can make a parallel connection with other sources

463 Synchronising or check synchronising facilities shall be fitted to busbar

section and bus coupler circuit breakers where it is possible to run the

two systems feeding either section of a busbar completely segregated

from the other The number of circuit breakers provided with

synchronising or check synchronising facilities should be kept to a

minimum A similar logic shall be applied to public utility intake

circuits Alternatively circuit breaker interlocking schemes shall be

installed to preclude the possibility of paralleling two sources of power

where synchronising facilities are excluded

Notwithstanding the provisions of 464 it is not expected that there would be a

need to include synchronising or check synchronising facilities on system voltage

levels more than two levels removed from the power generation busbar where the

power system is operated with bus sections normally closed However this is a

general rule and should the system be commonly operated with open bus sections

for significant periods and there is little central system control or information

dissemination the arrangement should be reviewed

464 Synchronising facilities shall be provided at the primary power supply

voltage and should be avoided at other voltages by use of appropriatecircuit breaker interlocking

The form of interlocking should avoid the need for break-before-make action unless

absolutely necessary This may need to be associated with upstream bus section

circuit breakers and incoming circuit breakers to the upstream switchboard See

463 (commentary) for provisions should distances be too great for the economic

use of interlocking

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems

Detailed guidance on this subject is given in BP Group RP 12-5 dc

power supplies for control systems shall comply with BP Group GS112-11 and ac power supplies shall comply with BP Group GS 112-10

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 17

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

51 General

511 The distribution network shall be designed to carry continuously at least

110 of the Maximum Demand associated with peak design production at the maximum ambient conditions

The requirement for 110 capacity is considered to be applicable to all

components within the distribution system including transformer capacity It does

not include capacity of equipment considered to constitute a load to the power

system eg Induction Machines which should be rated as close as possible to

actual process demands

Refer also to the commentary to Section 311

Switchboards should be supplied with a de gree of s pares and room for expansion

Further details may be found in BP Group RP 12-6 and 7

512 Where required the reliability associated with any part of the system

shall be assessed and presented in qualitative and quantitative terms

In general the design of the power system distribution should be based upon

qualitative requirements which include assessments for meeting power supply

continuity in the event of maintenance and in the event of failure Since electrical

distribution systems are inherently reliable the design requirements are commonly

based upon the need to disconnect distribution electrical equipment to carry out

routine maintenance and at the same time keep power supplies available for

operating plant However under some circumstances the need to assess the

electrical reliability may arise (perhaps as part of an overall assessment of plant failure but possibly as part of a comparison of alternative supplies for new plant)

Under these circumstances the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and the Mean

Time To Repair (MTTR) concerning power system failure at any particular

switchboard would be required In addition it is recommended that the quantitative

statement indicate the probability of failure occurring over a particular timeframe

(eg Provide a value and definition of the probability of zero failures over a 12

month period)

See also sections 412 (commentary) 422 and 43

513 The distribution system shall be designed using one of the basic

arrangements further outlined in 52 through 56 and incorporating thecontrol features of 57 The system designed shall be described in a

design philosophy document

It is considered that the design features contained in sections 52 through 56 would

be suitable for all of the industrial power systems likely to be required by BP

However should an alternative philosophy be available it should be compared with

a standard double radial system in terms of operation reliability maintainability

and cost

The depictions in the drawings which illustrate the texts of 52 and 55 are fairly

conventional in that Contactors are employed only for motor feeders Under some

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 18

circumstances Contactors can prove an economic choice for transformer or

Switchboard feeders The depictions are for an extensive installation typical of

Refinery or other large system Offshore systems may be considered as similar but

without the higher voltage level and interconnections to Public Utility

52 Single Radial

521 These should be used to provide power to non essential electrical loads

those where alternative sources of energy are available such as standby

generating plant or those process loads for which a lower availability

can be accepted

Where minimum facilities engineering is required and the process plant can be (or

will regularly be) switched off then single radial systems may be contemplated to

satisfy process demands It is considered that maintenance of electrical systems

could be scheduled for normal process plant shutdown times and the reliability of

electrical distribution systems is generally much better than required by the process

system

522 Each component of the single radial circuit shall be capable of supplying

110 of the required electrical load Transformers or other plant

which includes forced cooling equipment shall not rely entirely on the

forced cooling arrangements to obtain the necessary rating

Refer to the commentary to Section 311 for more detail on load estimation

Where the loading is of a cyclical nature and the forced cooling would not be

expected to operate for more than 2 hours in any 12 hour period then capacities

based upon forced cooling can be considered However where this is the case acooling system failure alarm shall be provided

53 Double Radial

531 Essential and Process Sensitive loads should be supplied by two or

more identically rated radial systems

Figure 1(a) details a double radial system of feed

532 In double radial systems each circuit shall be capable of carrying a

110 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall include bussection switchgear They shall be arranged to ensure that unscheduled

outage of any component of the circuit would not result in loss of

power supply after the faulty equipment has been disconnected from the

system

See section 311 for detail on load estimation

Exceptions to the requirement for all supplies to be maintained may be made in the

following cases-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 19

(a) For bus section circuit breaker faults These may sometimes cause damage

which may require complete switchboard shutdown However the

occurrence of such faults is sufficiently rare as to be neglected

(b) Where there may be some non-essential loads supplied from a double

radial system These may receive a single radial supply from a double

radial system and therefore would not receive a supply in the event of some forms of double radial system outage

533 Double radially fed systems should generally be operated in parallel

with all bus-section switches closed

It is considered that the advantage of continuity of supply in the event of relatively

light fault conditions which is offered by closed bus section systems outweighs the

disadvantages of increased fault disturbance for heavy fault conditions It is also

more inherently safe since the switchgear fault conditions are based upon the worst

possible supply condition However see also section 534

534 Where switchgear fault levels are found to be above the values outlined

in 23 attention shall be given to operating with bus-section breakers

open as opposed to purchasing higher fault level switchgear Where an

open bus-section breaker philosophy is being given attention the need

to restore rapidly the supplies to drives shall determine whether

automatic closure of bus section circuit breaker(s) is to be employed

Switchgear fault levels could be readily reduced by increasing the impedance of

incoming transformers (Where new transformers will be purchased) However

increasing the impedance of transformers increases the voltage regulation between

light and full load There is therefore a trade-off between fault duty and normal voltage regulation

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

54 Triple Radial

541 Critical and essential loads may be alternatively supplied by triple

identically rated radial systems These systems are preferred to double

radial systems wherever there is an overall total cost advantage

A triple radial system comprises three feeders and three feeder transformers to

provide supply to a distribution switchboard

542 Each circuit of triple fed radial systems shall be capable of providing at

least 55 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall be split into at

least three sections with two bus-section switches

This will allow for the loss of any one of the three circuits leaving the two healthy

circuits still capable of providing 110 of the Maximum Demand

543 Triple radial systems shall be provided where the power flow is

relatively large They shall generally be operated with only two circuits

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 15

Where governor droop control is employed there should be an operator in

attendance who could take action from time to time to ensure that the system

frequency remained within reasonable limits Such limits should be plusmn 1 and the

output system frequency time should be within 30 seconds of standard time

Statement of these limits for design purposes does not indicate a need to supply an

appropriate standard clock arrangement although power plants supplying

townships or camp areas are encouraged to have this facility The limit for frequency time may be relaxed for small power plants and those where frequency

time is considered unimportant (eg Where there are no time signals reliant upon

mains frequency)

For unmanned power plants or for those where constant operator intervention

would be undesirable the system frequency may be controlled by an isochronous

controller designed to provide overall frequency and generator loadings within

prescribed limits

457 The controls associated with the governors of on-site generation at a

site with a public utility connection shall be designed for parallel

operation with the public utility and shall incorporate the protection

arrangements which shall ensure that under public utility collapse ( or

unacceptable major disturbance) the site will retain a defined loading

condition The arrangement shall also incorporate the means for

independent operation

Where a facility is interconnected with a Public Utility the control of the power

system frequency must be under the control of the Public Utility Therefore only

defined load governor settings or droop load sharing control systems are possible

However such interconnection is always subject to disconnection under automatic

protection system operation which will leave the power generators supplying the

site load Under these conditions whatever the original generator control arrangements the generators must revert to independent load sharing control

46 Synchronising

461 Synchronising andor check synchronising equipment shall be provided

wherever more than one source of power may be operated in parallel

with another A synchronising philosophy shall be prepared

See also sections 463 and 464 Because there can be many alternative ways of

achieving a reasonable synchronising arrangement it is expected that there would

be prepared a synchronisingcheck synchronising philosophy (or design document) for every installation which will define the particular arrangements

462 Manual synchronising arrangements shall always be provided for the

incoming power generator circuit breakers This shall comprise

voltmeters and a synchroscope to show the voltage and frequency

differences between the two systems that need to be paralleled A

check synchronising relay should be utilised to prevent operator

maloperation but in order to allow closing a power source on to a dead

system as is required under black start conditions the check

synchronising relay shall have a means of manual or automatic override

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 16

Wherever possible and economically feasible the manual synchronising system

supplied shall also include automatic synchronising applied to the generator

controls

Manual synchronising facilities should also be applied to any primary switchgear

bus section circuit breaker and to circuit breakers incoming to the primary switchboard which can make a parallel connection with other sources

463 Synchronising or check synchronising facilities shall be fitted to busbar

section and bus coupler circuit breakers where it is possible to run the

two systems feeding either section of a busbar completely segregated

from the other The number of circuit breakers provided with

synchronising or check synchronising facilities should be kept to a

minimum A similar logic shall be applied to public utility intake

circuits Alternatively circuit breaker interlocking schemes shall be

installed to preclude the possibility of paralleling two sources of power

where synchronising facilities are excluded

Notwithstanding the provisions of 464 it is not expected that there would be a

need to include synchronising or check synchronising facilities on system voltage

levels more than two levels removed from the power generation busbar where the

power system is operated with bus sections normally closed However this is a

general rule and should the system be commonly operated with open bus sections

for significant periods and there is little central system control or information

dissemination the arrangement should be reviewed

464 Synchronising facilities shall be provided at the primary power supply

voltage and should be avoided at other voltages by use of appropriatecircuit breaker interlocking

The form of interlocking should avoid the need for break-before-make action unless

absolutely necessary This may need to be associated with upstream bus section

circuit breakers and incoming circuit breakers to the upstream switchboard See

463 (commentary) for provisions should distances be too great for the economic

use of interlocking

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems

Detailed guidance on this subject is given in BP Group RP 12-5 dc

power supplies for control systems shall comply with BP Group GS112-11 and ac power supplies shall comply with BP Group GS 112-10

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 17

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

51 General

511 The distribution network shall be designed to carry continuously at least

110 of the Maximum Demand associated with peak design production at the maximum ambient conditions

The requirement for 110 capacity is considered to be applicable to all

components within the distribution system including transformer capacity It does

not include capacity of equipment considered to constitute a load to the power

system eg Induction Machines which should be rated as close as possible to

actual process demands

Refer also to the commentary to Section 311

Switchboards should be supplied with a de gree of s pares and room for expansion

Further details may be found in BP Group RP 12-6 and 7

512 Where required the reliability associated with any part of the system

shall be assessed and presented in qualitative and quantitative terms

In general the design of the power system distribution should be based upon

qualitative requirements which include assessments for meeting power supply

continuity in the event of maintenance and in the event of failure Since electrical

distribution systems are inherently reliable the design requirements are commonly

based upon the need to disconnect distribution electrical equipment to carry out

routine maintenance and at the same time keep power supplies available for

operating plant However under some circumstances the need to assess the

electrical reliability may arise (perhaps as part of an overall assessment of plant failure but possibly as part of a comparison of alternative supplies for new plant)

Under these circumstances the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and the Mean

Time To Repair (MTTR) concerning power system failure at any particular

switchboard would be required In addition it is recommended that the quantitative

statement indicate the probability of failure occurring over a particular timeframe

(eg Provide a value and definition of the probability of zero failures over a 12

month period)

See also sections 412 (commentary) 422 and 43

513 The distribution system shall be designed using one of the basic

arrangements further outlined in 52 through 56 and incorporating thecontrol features of 57 The system designed shall be described in a

design philosophy document

It is considered that the design features contained in sections 52 through 56 would

be suitable for all of the industrial power systems likely to be required by BP

However should an alternative philosophy be available it should be compared with

a standard double radial system in terms of operation reliability maintainability

and cost

The depictions in the drawings which illustrate the texts of 52 and 55 are fairly

conventional in that Contactors are employed only for motor feeders Under some

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 18

circumstances Contactors can prove an economic choice for transformer or

Switchboard feeders The depictions are for an extensive installation typical of

Refinery or other large system Offshore systems may be considered as similar but

without the higher voltage level and interconnections to Public Utility

52 Single Radial

521 These should be used to provide power to non essential electrical loads

those where alternative sources of energy are available such as standby

generating plant or those process loads for which a lower availability

can be accepted

Where minimum facilities engineering is required and the process plant can be (or

will regularly be) switched off then single radial systems may be contemplated to

satisfy process demands It is considered that maintenance of electrical systems

could be scheduled for normal process plant shutdown times and the reliability of

electrical distribution systems is generally much better than required by the process

system

522 Each component of the single radial circuit shall be capable of supplying

110 of the required electrical load Transformers or other plant

which includes forced cooling equipment shall not rely entirely on the

forced cooling arrangements to obtain the necessary rating

Refer to the commentary to Section 311 for more detail on load estimation

Where the loading is of a cyclical nature and the forced cooling would not be

expected to operate for more than 2 hours in any 12 hour period then capacities

based upon forced cooling can be considered However where this is the case acooling system failure alarm shall be provided

53 Double Radial

531 Essential and Process Sensitive loads should be supplied by two or

more identically rated radial systems

Figure 1(a) details a double radial system of feed

532 In double radial systems each circuit shall be capable of carrying a

110 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall include bussection switchgear They shall be arranged to ensure that unscheduled

outage of any component of the circuit would not result in loss of

power supply after the faulty equipment has been disconnected from the

system

See section 311 for detail on load estimation

Exceptions to the requirement for all supplies to be maintained may be made in the

following cases-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 19

(a) For bus section circuit breaker faults These may sometimes cause damage

which may require complete switchboard shutdown However the

occurrence of such faults is sufficiently rare as to be neglected

(b) Where there may be some non-essential loads supplied from a double

radial system These may receive a single radial supply from a double

radial system and therefore would not receive a supply in the event of some forms of double radial system outage

533 Double radially fed systems should generally be operated in parallel

with all bus-section switches closed

It is considered that the advantage of continuity of supply in the event of relatively

light fault conditions which is offered by closed bus section systems outweighs the

disadvantages of increased fault disturbance for heavy fault conditions It is also

more inherently safe since the switchgear fault conditions are based upon the worst

possible supply condition However see also section 534

534 Where switchgear fault levels are found to be above the values outlined

in 23 attention shall be given to operating with bus-section breakers

open as opposed to purchasing higher fault level switchgear Where an

open bus-section breaker philosophy is being given attention the need

to restore rapidly the supplies to drives shall determine whether

automatic closure of bus section circuit breaker(s) is to be employed

Switchgear fault levels could be readily reduced by increasing the impedance of

incoming transformers (Where new transformers will be purchased) However

increasing the impedance of transformers increases the voltage regulation between

light and full load There is therefore a trade-off between fault duty and normal voltage regulation

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

54 Triple Radial

541 Critical and essential loads may be alternatively supplied by triple

identically rated radial systems These systems are preferred to double

radial systems wherever there is an overall total cost advantage

A triple radial system comprises three feeders and three feeder transformers to

provide supply to a distribution switchboard

542 Each circuit of triple fed radial systems shall be capable of providing at

least 55 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall be split into at

least three sections with two bus-section switches

This will allow for the loss of any one of the three circuits leaving the two healthy

circuits still capable of providing 110 of the Maximum Demand

543 Triple radial systems shall be provided where the power flow is

relatively large They shall generally be operated with only two circuits

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 16

Wherever possible and economically feasible the manual synchronising system

supplied shall also include automatic synchronising applied to the generator

controls

Manual synchronising facilities should also be applied to any primary switchgear

bus section circuit breaker and to circuit breakers incoming to the primary switchboard which can make a parallel connection with other sources

463 Synchronising or check synchronising facilities shall be fitted to busbar

section and bus coupler circuit breakers where it is possible to run the

two systems feeding either section of a busbar completely segregated

from the other The number of circuit breakers provided with

synchronising or check synchronising facilities should be kept to a

minimum A similar logic shall be applied to public utility intake

circuits Alternatively circuit breaker interlocking schemes shall be

installed to preclude the possibility of paralleling two sources of power

where synchronising facilities are excluded

Notwithstanding the provisions of 464 it is not expected that there would be a

need to include synchronising or check synchronising facilities on system voltage

levels more than two levels removed from the power generation busbar where the

power system is operated with bus sections normally closed However this is a

general rule and should the system be commonly operated with open bus sections

for significant periods and there is little central system control or information

dissemination the arrangement should be reviewed

464 Synchronising facilities shall be provided at the primary power supply

voltage and should be avoided at other voltages by use of appropriatecircuit breaker interlocking

The form of interlocking should avoid the need for break-before-make action unless

absolutely necessary This may need to be associated with upstream bus section

circuit breakers and incoming circuit breakers to the upstream switchboard See

463 (commentary) for provisions should distances be too great for the economic

use of interlocking

47 Power Supplies for Control Systems

Detailed guidance on this subject is given in BP Group RP 12-5 dc

power supplies for control systems shall comply with BP Group GS112-11 and ac power supplies shall comply with BP Group GS 112-10

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 17

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

51 General

511 The distribution network shall be designed to carry continuously at least

110 of the Maximum Demand associated with peak design production at the maximum ambient conditions

The requirement for 110 capacity is considered to be applicable to all

components within the distribution system including transformer capacity It does

not include capacity of equipment considered to constitute a load to the power

system eg Induction Machines which should be rated as close as possible to

actual process demands

Refer also to the commentary to Section 311

Switchboards should be supplied with a de gree of s pares and room for expansion

Further details may be found in BP Group RP 12-6 and 7

512 Where required the reliability associated with any part of the system

shall be assessed and presented in qualitative and quantitative terms

In general the design of the power system distribution should be based upon

qualitative requirements which include assessments for meeting power supply

continuity in the event of maintenance and in the event of failure Since electrical

distribution systems are inherently reliable the design requirements are commonly

based upon the need to disconnect distribution electrical equipment to carry out

routine maintenance and at the same time keep power supplies available for

operating plant However under some circumstances the need to assess the

electrical reliability may arise (perhaps as part of an overall assessment of plant failure but possibly as part of a comparison of alternative supplies for new plant)

Under these circumstances the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and the Mean

Time To Repair (MTTR) concerning power system failure at any particular

switchboard would be required In addition it is recommended that the quantitative

statement indicate the probability of failure occurring over a particular timeframe

(eg Provide a value and definition of the probability of zero failures over a 12

month period)

See also sections 412 (commentary) 422 and 43

513 The distribution system shall be designed using one of the basic

arrangements further outlined in 52 through 56 and incorporating thecontrol features of 57 The system designed shall be described in a

design philosophy document

It is considered that the design features contained in sections 52 through 56 would

be suitable for all of the industrial power systems likely to be required by BP

However should an alternative philosophy be available it should be compared with

a standard double radial system in terms of operation reliability maintainability

and cost

The depictions in the drawings which illustrate the texts of 52 and 55 are fairly

conventional in that Contactors are employed only for motor feeders Under some

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 18

circumstances Contactors can prove an economic choice for transformer or

Switchboard feeders The depictions are for an extensive installation typical of

Refinery or other large system Offshore systems may be considered as similar but

without the higher voltage level and interconnections to Public Utility

52 Single Radial

521 These should be used to provide power to non essential electrical loads

those where alternative sources of energy are available such as standby

generating plant or those process loads for which a lower availability

can be accepted

Where minimum facilities engineering is required and the process plant can be (or

will regularly be) switched off then single radial systems may be contemplated to

satisfy process demands It is considered that maintenance of electrical systems

could be scheduled for normal process plant shutdown times and the reliability of

electrical distribution systems is generally much better than required by the process

system

522 Each component of the single radial circuit shall be capable of supplying

110 of the required electrical load Transformers or other plant

which includes forced cooling equipment shall not rely entirely on the

forced cooling arrangements to obtain the necessary rating

Refer to the commentary to Section 311 for more detail on load estimation

Where the loading is of a cyclical nature and the forced cooling would not be

expected to operate for more than 2 hours in any 12 hour period then capacities

based upon forced cooling can be considered However where this is the case acooling system failure alarm shall be provided

53 Double Radial

531 Essential and Process Sensitive loads should be supplied by two or

more identically rated radial systems

Figure 1(a) details a double radial system of feed

532 In double radial systems each circuit shall be capable of carrying a

110 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall include bussection switchgear They shall be arranged to ensure that unscheduled

outage of any component of the circuit would not result in loss of

power supply after the faulty equipment has been disconnected from the

system

See section 311 for detail on load estimation

Exceptions to the requirement for all supplies to be maintained may be made in the

following cases-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 19

(a) For bus section circuit breaker faults These may sometimes cause damage

which may require complete switchboard shutdown However the

occurrence of such faults is sufficiently rare as to be neglected

(b) Where there may be some non-essential loads supplied from a double

radial system These may receive a single radial supply from a double

radial system and therefore would not receive a supply in the event of some forms of double radial system outage

533 Double radially fed systems should generally be operated in parallel

with all bus-section switches closed

It is considered that the advantage of continuity of supply in the event of relatively

light fault conditions which is offered by closed bus section systems outweighs the

disadvantages of increased fault disturbance for heavy fault conditions It is also

more inherently safe since the switchgear fault conditions are based upon the worst

possible supply condition However see also section 534

534 Where switchgear fault levels are found to be above the values outlined

in 23 attention shall be given to operating with bus-section breakers

open as opposed to purchasing higher fault level switchgear Where an

open bus-section breaker philosophy is being given attention the need

to restore rapidly the supplies to drives shall determine whether

automatic closure of bus section circuit breaker(s) is to be employed

Switchgear fault levels could be readily reduced by increasing the impedance of

incoming transformers (Where new transformers will be purchased) However

increasing the impedance of transformers increases the voltage regulation between

light and full load There is therefore a trade-off between fault duty and normal voltage regulation

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

54 Triple Radial

541 Critical and essential loads may be alternatively supplied by triple

identically rated radial systems These systems are preferred to double

radial systems wherever there is an overall total cost advantage

A triple radial system comprises three feeders and three feeder transformers to

provide supply to a distribution switchboard

542 Each circuit of triple fed radial systems shall be capable of providing at

least 55 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall be split into at

least three sections with two bus-section switches

This will allow for the loss of any one of the three circuits leaving the two healthy

circuits still capable of providing 110 of the Maximum Demand

543 Triple radial systems shall be provided where the power flow is

relatively large They shall generally be operated with only two circuits

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 17

5 POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS

51 General

511 The distribution network shall be designed to carry continuously at least

110 of the Maximum Demand associated with peak design production at the maximum ambient conditions

The requirement for 110 capacity is considered to be applicable to all

components within the distribution system including transformer capacity It does

not include capacity of equipment considered to constitute a load to the power

system eg Induction Machines which should be rated as close as possible to

actual process demands

Refer also to the commentary to Section 311

Switchboards should be supplied with a de gree of s pares and room for expansion

Further details may be found in BP Group RP 12-6 and 7

512 Where required the reliability associated with any part of the system

shall be assessed and presented in qualitative and quantitative terms

In general the design of the power system distribution should be based upon

qualitative requirements which include assessments for meeting power supply

continuity in the event of maintenance and in the event of failure Since electrical

distribution systems are inherently reliable the design requirements are commonly

based upon the need to disconnect distribution electrical equipment to carry out

routine maintenance and at the same time keep power supplies available for

operating plant However under some circumstances the need to assess the

electrical reliability may arise (perhaps as part of an overall assessment of plant failure but possibly as part of a comparison of alternative supplies for new plant)

Under these circumstances the Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and the Mean

Time To Repair (MTTR) concerning power system failure at any particular

switchboard would be required In addition it is recommended that the quantitative

statement indicate the probability of failure occurring over a particular timeframe

(eg Provide a value and definition of the probability of zero failures over a 12

month period)

See also sections 412 (commentary) 422 and 43

513 The distribution system shall be designed using one of the basic

arrangements further outlined in 52 through 56 and incorporating thecontrol features of 57 The system designed shall be described in a

design philosophy document

It is considered that the design features contained in sections 52 through 56 would

be suitable for all of the industrial power systems likely to be required by BP

However should an alternative philosophy be available it should be compared with

a standard double radial system in terms of operation reliability maintainability

and cost

The depictions in the drawings which illustrate the texts of 52 and 55 are fairly

conventional in that Contactors are employed only for motor feeders Under some

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 18

circumstances Contactors can prove an economic choice for transformer or

Switchboard feeders The depictions are for an extensive installation typical of

Refinery or other large system Offshore systems may be considered as similar but

without the higher voltage level and interconnections to Public Utility

52 Single Radial

521 These should be used to provide power to non essential electrical loads

those where alternative sources of energy are available such as standby

generating plant or those process loads for which a lower availability

can be accepted

Where minimum facilities engineering is required and the process plant can be (or

will regularly be) switched off then single radial systems may be contemplated to

satisfy process demands It is considered that maintenance of electrical systems

could be scheduled for normal process plant shutdown times and the reliability of

electrical distribution systems is generally much better than required by the process

system

522 Each component of the single radial circuit shall be capable of supplying

110 of the required electrical load Transformers or other plant

which includes forced cooling equipment shall not rely entirely on the

forced cooling arrangements to obtain the necessary rating

Refer to the commentary to Section 311 for more detail on load estimation

Where the loading is of a cyclical nature and the forced cooling would not be

expected to operate for more than 2 hours in any 12 hour period then capacities

based upon forced cooling can be considered However where this is the case acooling system failure alarm shall be provided

53 Double Radial

531 Essential and Process Sensitive loads should be supplied by two or

more identically rated radial systems

Figure 1(a) details a double radial system of feed

532 In double radial systems each circuit shall be capable of carrying a

110 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall include bussection switchgear They shall be arranged to ensure that unscheduled

outage of any component of the circuit would not result in loss of

power supply after the faulty equipment has been disconnected from the

system

See section 311 for detail on load estimation

Exceptions to the requirement for all supplies to be maintained may be made in the

following cases-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 19

(a) For bus section circuit breaker faults These may sometimes cause damage

which may require complete switchboard shutdown However the

occurrence of such faults is sufficiently rare as to be neglected

(b) Where there may be some non-essential loads supplied from a double

radial system These may receive a single radial supply from a double

radial system and therefore would not receive a supply in the event of some forms of double radial system outage

533 Double radially fed systems should generally be operated in parallel

with all bus-section switches closed

It is considered that the advantage of continuity of supply in the event of relatively

light fault conditions which is offered by closed bus section systems outweighs the

disadvantages of increased fault disturbance for heavy fault conditions It is also

more inherently safe since the switchgear fault conditions are based upon the worst

possible supply condition However see also section 534

534 Where switchgear fault levels are found to be above the values outlined

in 23 attention shall be given to operating with bus-section breakers

open as opposed to purchasing higher fault level switchgear Where an

open bus-section breaker philosophy is being given attention the need

to restore rapidly the supplies to drives shall determine whether

automatic closure of bus section circuit breaker(s) is to be employed

Switchgear fault levels could be readily reduced by increasing the impedance of

incoming transformers (Where new transformers will be purchased) However

increasing the impedance of transformers increases the voltage regulation between

light and full load There is therefore a trade-off between fault duty and normal voltage regulation

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

54 Triple Radial

541 Critical and essential loads may be alternatively supplied by triple

identically rated radial systems These systems are preferred to double

radial systems wherever there is an overall total cost advantage

A triple radial system comprises three feeders and three feeder transformers to

provide supply to a distribution switchboard

542 Each circuit of triple fed radial systems shall be capable of providing at

least 55 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall be split into at

least three sections with two bus-section switches

This will allow for the loss of any one of the three circuits leaving the two healthy

circuits still capable of providing 110 of the Maximum Demand

543 Triple radial systems shall be provided where the power flow is

relatively large They shall generally be operated with only two circuits

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 18

circumstances Contactors can prove an economic choice for transformer or

Switchboard feeders The depictions are for an extensive installation typical of

Refinery or other large system Offshore systems may be considered as similar but

without the higher voltage level and interconnections to Public Utility

52 Single Radial

521 These should be used to provide power to non essential electrical loads

those where alternative sources of energy are available such as standby

generating plant or those process loads for which a lower availability

can be accepted

Where minimum facilities engineering is required and the process plant can be (or

will regularly be) switched off then single radial systems may be contemplated to

satisfy process demands It is considered that maintenance of electrical systems

could be scheduled for normal process plant shutdown times and the reliability of

electrical distribution systems is generally much better than required by the process

system

522 Each component of the single radial circuit shall be capable of supplying

110 of the required electrical load Transformers or other plant

which includes forced cooling equipment shall not rely entirely on the

forced cooling arrangements to obtain the necessary rating

Refer to the commentary to Section 311 for more detail on load estimation

Where the loading is of a cyclical nature and the forced cooling would not be

expected to operate for more than 2 hours in any 12 hour period then capacities

based upon forced cooling can be considered However where this is the case acooling system failure alarm shall be provided

53 Double Radial

531 Essential and Process Sensitive loads should be supplied by two or

more identically rated radial systems

Figure 1(a) details a double radial system of feed

532 In double radial systems each circuit shall be capable of carrying a

110 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall include bussection switchgear They shall be arranged to ensure that unscheduled

outage of any component of the circuit would not result in loss of

power supply after the faulty equipment has been disconnected from the

system

See section 311 for detail on load estimation

Exceptions to the requirement for all supplies to be maintained may be made in the

following cases-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 19

(a) For bus section circuit breaker faults These may sometimes cause damage

which may require complete switchboard shutdown However the

occurrence of such faults is sufficiently rare as to be neglected

(b) Where there may be some non-essential loads supplied from a double

radial system These may receive a single radial supply from a double

radial system and therefore would not receive a supply in the event of some forms of double radial system outage

533 Double radially fed systems should generally be operated in parallel

with all bus-section switches closed

It is considered that the advantage of continuity of supply in the event of relatively

light fault conditions which is offered by closed bus section systems outweighs the

disadvantages of increased fault disturbance for heavy fault conditions It is also

more inherently safe since the switchgear fault conditions are based upon the worst

possible supply condition However see also section 534

534 Where switchgear fault levels are found to be above the values outlined

in 23 attention shall be given to operating with bus-section breakers

open as opposed to purchasing higher fault level switchgear Where an

open bus-section breaker philosophy is being given attention the need

to restore rapidly the supplies to drives shall determine whether

automatic closure of bus section circuit breaker(s) is to be employed

Switchgear fault levels could be readily reduced by increasing the impedance of

incoming transformers (Where new transformers will be purchased) However

increasing the impedance of transformers increases the voltage regulation between

light and full load There is therefore a trade-off between fault duty and normal voltage regulation

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

54 Triple Radial

541 Critical and essential loads may be alternatively supplied by triple

identically rated radial systems These systems are preferred to double

radial systems wherever there is an overall total cost advantage

A triple radial system comprises three feeders and three feeder transformers to

provide supply to a distribution switchboard

542 Each circuit of triple fed radial systems shall be capable of providing at

least 55 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall be split into at

least three sections with two bus-section switches

This will allow for the loss of any one of the three circuits leaving the two healthy

circuits still capable of providing 110 of the Maximum Demand

543 Triple radial systems shall be provided where the power flow is

relatively large They shall generally be operated with only two circuits

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 19

(a) For bus section circuit breaker faults These may sometimes cause damage

which may require complete switchboard shutdown However the

occurrence of such faults is sufficiently rare as to be neglected

(b) Where there may be some non-essential loads supplied from a double

radial system These may receive a single radial supply from a double

radial system and therefore would not receive a supply in the event of some forms of double radial system outage

533 Double radially fed systems should generally be operated in parallel

with all bus-section switches closed

It is considered that the advantage of continuity of supply in the event of relatively

light fault conditions which is offered by closed bus section systems outweighs the

disadvantages of increased fault disturbance for heavy fault conditions It is also

more inherently safe since the switchgear fault conditions are based upon the worst

possible supply condition However see also section 534

534 Where switchgear fault levels are found to be above the values outlined

in 23 attention shall be given to operating with bus-section breakers

open as opposed to purchasing higher fault level switchgear Where an

open bus-section breaker philosophy is being given attention the need

to restore rapidly the supplies to drives shall determine whether

automatic closure of bus section circuit breaker(s) is to be employed

Switchgear fault levels could be readily reduced by increasing the impedance of

incoming transformers (Where new transformers will be purchased) However

increasing the impedance of transformers increases the voltage regulation between

light and full load There is therefore a trade-off between fault duty and normal voltage regulation

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

54 Triple Radial

541 Critical and essential loads may be alternatively supplied by triple

identically rated radial systems These systems are preferred to double

radial systems wherever there is an overall total cost advantage

A triple radial system comprises three feeders and three feeder transformers to

provide supply to a distribution switchboard

542 Each circuit of triple fed radial systems shall be capable of providing at

least 55 of the Maximum Demand and all busbars shall be split into at

least three sections with two bus-section switches

This will allow for the loss of any one of the three circuits leaving the two healthy

circuits still capable of providing 110 of the Maximum Demand

543 Triple radial systems shall be provided where the power flow is

relatively large They shall generally be operated with only two circuits

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 20

in parallel to reduce switchgear fault levels The incoming circuit

breaker on the third identically rated feeder shall be left open and

automatically reclosed in order to restore rapidly full supplies to the

load

See 57 for automatic transfer schemes

Switchgear fault duty shall be based upon 2 of the 3 transformer incomers

connected An electrical interlock scheme shall be arranged to ensure that fault

duties shall not be exceeded

55 Ring Fed Systems

551 Power may be distributed from a primary or central substation to a

number of subsidiary load centres by using two primary cable feeds

connected in a ring emerging from the source busbar and controlled by

circuit breakers Ring type distribution systems should be used only if the lower reliability of supply to the load supplied can be accepted

Figures 1(b) and (c) details ring systems of feed

These systems have lower reliability than double radial systems but can offer a cost

optimal choice where distances between substations is large The cost benefits

should be weighed against the lower reliability for those cases where ring systems

are contemplated

It is expected that there would be a design philosophy document which would

provide the reasoning leading to acceptance of the ring system of feeding This

reasoning could be qualitative in nature or could contain a costbenefit analysis should the question of reduced reliability be of concern

552 Ring fed systems should normally duplicate only the primary cables to

the load substation They may however duplicate the load substation

transformers and the low voltage busbar by providing a low-voltage or

secondary bus section breaker

Duplication of downstream equipment would be dependent upon the need to

maintain electrical equipment and retain electrical feeds to the downstream

substation

553 Where the ring feed is operated closed intermediate primary circuit

breakers including unit feeder protection shall be provided at all vital

or essential load centres on the ring thereby ensuring fault clearance of

only the unhealthy section of the ring The whole of the ring circuit

shall be fully rated to be capable of supplying 110 of the Maximum

Demand at all substations

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 21

Essential or critical loads may be supplied by ring systems if they are operated

closed Their choice shall be based on the comparative reliability and cost as

compared to the duplicate radial systems

Refer to Section 311 for detail on load estimation

554 Ring fed systems which are operated open need not include circuit

breakers on the ring

Fault clearance would be achieved at the source substation and in that event power

would be lost to all loads fed between the source and the open point on the ring

In order that a faulty section of the primary ring may be disconnectedand repaired without power loss during the whole of the repair periodthe ring shall include isolating means at every load substation Thesering isolators may be of the off-circuit or on-load type dependent onavailability cost and the need for rapid reconnection of load

The need for fault location shall be considered in order to assist rapid

re-connection of healthy components and avoid possible re-application of the fault

Open operated ring fed systems shall be permitted only to supply non-sensitive loads

The choice of an open ring system shall consider the comparative reliability and

cost of a single radially fed systems with a non automatic standby power supply

backup

The rating of each section of open operated rings shall be capable of

providing 110 of the Maximum Demand of the ring taken as a whole

It is not proposed that economy should be made by arranging that the ring feeders

be tapered

It is recognised that manual initiated switching will be necessary before loads can

be applied to each of the normally operating legs of the ring Therefore under

some circumstances it may be possible to ensure that only a known amount of load

is transferred to a ring feeder Where economically desirable and under such

known and flexible loading conditions the requirement for the first sections of the

ring to carry the Maximum Demand of the whole ring may be relaxed

56 Interconnected or Mesh Systems

The distribution of electrical power by solidly interconnected systemsshould be undertaken only upon specific design justification whichconfirms reliability operation and safety

Mesh connected schemes considered for HV systems are permissible providing

protection arrangements are suitable for the process plant needs and providing that

the fault duties of switchgear are not compromised

Solidly interconnected mesh systems for LV are rarely found in industrial settings

and can be difficult to predict in terms of protection system operation and level of

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 22

disturbance during a fault condition For this reason and because they would

present a point of non-standardisation if used in hazardous areas they are to be

avoided

57 Power System Control

571 The operational control of the power system shall be described in a

prepared control philosophy document The operator actions and his

access to power system information shall be defined and the level of

Central Control Room operator control shall be defined

It is expected that for power systems having multiple machines the Central Control

Room operator would have control of the generation functions-

(a) StopStart

(b) Synchronising

(c) Generator Loading (ie Speed Control)

(d) Generator Excitation (Possibly AVR Setting only)

Additionally it is expected that the Central Control Room Operator would have

control of-

(a) Primary Substation Circuit Breakers

(b) Emergency Generator StopStartSynchronisation (where significant)

(c) Some downstream circuit breakers

See 572 for method of information and control It is recommended that the

Central Control Room Operator have available information and control of the

entire power system by the means described However it is recognised that in

general there would need to be some limitations placed upon the ability of the

power system operator to individually control process loads

572 The power system shall utilise protection relays which incorporate the

means for indication and control via a Hiway connection The form and

performance of the dual function protection relay system shall detail-

(a) Speed of response for the control functions

(b) Degree of programmable automation of power system

operation

(c) Range of protection functions offered in the relay types

proposed

(d) System architecture

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 2960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 23

(e) Central Operator Information and Control Screens

(f) Proposed alarm and information conditions

(g) Interface arrangements with process control systems

The dual function protection and informationcontrol relay should be arranged with

a clear and effective method for ensuring that protection settings cannot be

changed by the action of control system software Sole reliance of a password

embedded in the high level software system is not considered sufficient for this

purpose and a relay located function is generally expected

It is expected that in the longer term the availability of the information offered and

the availability of the control offered by such dual function relays will provide

benefit to BP operations Therefore relaxing the requirement for new installations

to be equipped with these relays should be specific and based upon the assertions-

(a) That the site will never need to gather data and have such control

and

(b) That the alternative system indeed yields a significant cost saving

It is recognised that under some circumstances only the dual function relays may be

employed with a later intent to effect operator control via Hiway connections

573 Within switchboards automatic transfer schemes shall be provided

where there is a need to obtain a reliability level consistent with two or

more sources of supply (and the scheme is not arranged as a parallel

operating arrangement) Their use shall be economically justified whencompared against other ways of providing duplication of power

sources and shall be limited to installations where there is a need to

reduce switchgear short circuit levels either for reasons of cost or non-

availability of switchgear with sufficiently high rating All schemes shall

include only load transfers that never parallel the preferred and

emergency sources Load transfer schemes may use circuit breakers or

on load transfer switchescontactors Where automatic transfer

schemes are provided the power system design shall be arranged to

successfully transfer the load without causing a general system failure

Other methods of ensuring duplication of supply include-

(a) Feeding alternative loads from different switchboards

(b) Providing a parallel operating arrangement of the incomers

Where manual transfer is to be arranged (perhaps in order to undertake

maintenance on the presently employed incomer) and it is undesirable to suffer a

break-before-make operation the manual intervention may be considered as a

make-before-break arrangement which automatically disconnects the transferring

(from) circuit upon successful energisation of the transferring (to) circuit

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 24

574 Load transfer schemes may be applied to either static loads or induction

motor loads or a combination of the two They shall not be used where

synchronous motor loads are supplied The load transfer shall be

arranged so that the residual voltage of induction motors has decayed

to less than 25 of the rated source voltage before the transfer isinitiated The rate of residual voltage decay shall be calculated and the

motors ability to withstand the out-of-phase reclosure shall be checked

The need to ensure that the induction motor flux has decayed arises form the need

to ensure that both switchgear and machine system are not over stressed upon

direct-on-line re energisation These factors should be addressed when considering

the speed of operation of a transfer scheme in general 1 second should be adequate

for all 415 V machines and 18 seconds should be selected for HV machines up to

1000 kW

575 Induction motors which are controlled by circuit breakers or contactorsof the mechanically latched type shall include a time delay under voltage

relay This relaying shall be set to trip the controller under those power

system under voltage conditions from which recovery would be

otherwise not possible Transfer schemes associated with switchgear

supplying these types of induction motor controllers shall be designed

either to be capable of re accelerating the motors if the transfer takes

place within the motor under voltage tripping time or time delaying the

transfer to be in excess of the motor under voltage tripping time

The selection of under voltage trip time should be confirmed by power system

studies which would be aimed at ensuring reasonable power system recovery following a fault An infinite setting would indicate that the machine would be able

to accelerate to operating level whenever the voltage recovers from total collapse

and considering that there could be a number of such latched machines on the

circuit In general a setting of say 2 seconds where the voltage has fallen below

75 may be appropriate

576 Motors which are controlled by unlatched ac contactors will inherently

disconnect from the supply on loss of voltage Where it is required to

restore power to these types of motor drives the auto transfer schemes

shall be supplemented by contactor control schemes which restart

motors individually or in groups after a requisite time delay

It is expected that the re-acceleration scheme would be achieved by relays

individually associated with each motor starter

577 Load transfer schemes for the start up run up and loading of a standby

generator on to a busbar normally fed from a preferred ac source shall

be initiated by time delayed under voltage relaying which shall trip the

ac source and auto-start up the standby generator

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 25

The auto start of the emergency (or standby) generator could be initiated before

disconnection of the normal supply in order to provide the main power system

greater chance of recovery (ie taking advantage of the finite time it takes a

standby generator to start)

It is expected that start initiation would be based upon main power system collapse

below 75 for say 2 seconds and that trip of the main supply and energisation of the emergency supply would be initiated upon 85 voltage at system frequency for

the incoming set (NB energisation would need to be time delayed from the trip

signal to allow flux decay of the machines which may have been hitherto in

operation)

578 Power system re-acceleration and restart studies to determine the most

technically acceptable and cost effective solution shall be carried out for

each load transfer scheme considered

The studies should provide confirmation of under voltage relay settings and define

the fault conditions which give rise to the conclusions BP approval is considered necessary to ensure that process and other wider system issues have been

considered (eg System fault conditions which may be remote from the system under

immediate calculation)

58 Electrical Distribution Substations

The requirements for substations which are detailed as part of Section 58 are

generally based upon Shore installations Substation designs for Offshore

installations should firstly consider project specific parameters which will include

module construction philosophy economic layout factors and safety considerations

Other than the project specific factors Offshore installations can be considered as

needing to satisfy subsequent clauses of Sections 581 and 582

581 All substations shall be located as close as possible to the electrical

centre of the load being supplied They should normally be connected

to their incoming supplies by cables The primary and secondary

voltage switchgear and auxiliaries shall be installed in permanent rooms

or buildings which if located in areas classified as potentially hazardous

(Zone 1 or Zone 2) shall be ventilated in such a manner (type of

protection p) to permit the use of standard industrial equipment

For rooms located in areas classified as Zone 2 standard industrial equipment

may be used providing there is no opening from the building into the classified area or if there is such an opening the opening has been assessed to determine that

a flammable atmosphere will not enter the room

Smaller non essential process switchgear may be located outdoors or equipped with

a shelter and if situated in an area cla ssified as hazardous the equipment shall be

selected in accordance with BP Group RP 12-2

582 Transformers shall be located as close as possible to the secondary

switchgear

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 26

This requirement is designed to keep the more expensive and high capacity

electrical connections as short as possible

583 Substation building design shall ensure that no possibility exists for

ingress of surface water or for any hydrocarbon which may migrate

along the sheath of cables which enter the Substation

Building design requirements are contained in BP Group RP 4-4 The requirements

consider that there would always be a possibility for hydrocarbon contamination to

enter buildings via rainwater a rising water table or by finding a way through the

sheath of buried cables and travelling beneath the cable sheath and into the switch

room By raising the elevation of the lowest point of a substation well beyond the

exterior grade level the surface and sub-surface water ingress is eliminated The

provision of a cable basement is a more effective remedy because there would then

be no possibility for hydrocarbon vapour (which may have been given off from

contaminated water present in an entry duct albeit not reaching floor level) from

entering the substation

6 POWER SYSTEM FAULT CONSIDERATIONS

61 Fault Calculations

611 The fault currents that flow as a result of short circuits should be

calculated at each system voltage for both three phase and phase to

earth fault conditions These calculated currents shall be used to select

suitably rated switchgear and to allow the selection and setting of

protective devices to ensure that successful discriminatory fault

clearance is achieved

It is expected that in order to be assured of reasonable accuracy the study should

be based upon a suitable computer calculation package The contribution of

induction motors should be included in the study preferably by direct dynamic

modelling and the studies should include break and make points for the fault level

(See also section 613) It is important to ensure that at design stage tolerances for

equipment should be considered and also that a design margin is allowed to

account for later additions The allowance is best arranged by undertaking the

studies showing later additional loads on stream and represented by induction

motors

612 The voltage disturbance sustained during the faults and after faultclearance should also be ascertained to ensure that transient

disturbances do not result in loss of supplies due to low voltages or

over stressing of plant insulation due to high voltages

In assessing the transient performance of the system accurate modelling of any

AVR action is required It would also be necessary to model the governor system of

any rotating power generators

613 The calculation of fault currents shall include the fault current

contributions from generators and from synchronous and induction

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 27

motors Both the ac symmetrical and dc asymmetrical components

of fault currents should be calculated at all system voltages Public

utility fault infeeds should be obtained from the public utility concerned

and they shall exclude any decrement associated with fault duration

though maximum and minimum values consistent with annual load

cycles and anticipating utilities systems switching conditions should beobtained

The fault levels of utility company networks is subject to variation due to the

amount of generation plant which they may have connected and also could be

subject to variation due to the manner in which the public utility operates the

system (eg Line outages will affect fault levels as will open busbar systems

614 Three phase balanced fault current calculations should be carried out to

obtain prospective circuit breaker duties and should include-

(i) Asymmetric make capacity Expressed in peak amperes andcalculated half a cycle after fault inception Both ac and dc

current decrements shall be included for the half cycle

(ii) Asymmetric break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time at which the breaker contacts are expected

to part and allowing a maximum of 10 ms for instantaneous type

protection operation Both ac and dc decrements shall be

included for the selected time

(iii) Symmetrical break capability Expressed in rms amperes

calculated at a time as defined in item (ii) above This assumes

nil dc current component and shall allow for ac decrement for

the selected time

615 On systems where the earth fault currents are limited by neutral earthing

equipment the currents may be assumed to include no decrement and

shall be considered constant whatever the level of bonding between the

conductor and the faulted phase

616 Both the ac and dc components of motor fault current contributions

should be calculated and included in calculation of prospective faultcurrents

At the instant of fault inception the ac peak symmetrical component and the dc

component shall be taken to be identical Both values shall be taken as the peak

direct-on-line starting current this being dictated by the motor locked rotor

reactance Both these currents shall be taken to decay exponentially with time

using ac and dc short circuit time constants respectively The ac time constant

should be determined by using the ratio of the locked rotor reactance and the

standstill rotor resistance The dc time constant should be determined by using

the locked rotor reactance and the stator resistance

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 28

Where faults are not directly on the motor terminals these time constants would

be modified (preferably by the integrated computer programme) to take account of

external impedances to the point of fault

617 The calculation of individual fault current contributions should be

carried out for individual motors of significant ratings on the power system All other motors on the system may be treated as a number of

typical equivalent motors of total rating equal to the connected rotating

loads at different locations The ratings of these equivalent motors

shall be selected to be consistent with the actual drives at a given

location

Generally motors with ratings 1000 kW or greater should be represented as

individual machines However where there are multiples of these on a single

busbar they too may be represented by lumped parameters

618 Any computer based model used for calculation shall be of a reputabletype with software support and validation checks available

It is equally important that where system stability models are examined the specific

model for the parameters used has validity (eg Where machine AVRs and

Governors are used on particular machines factory and site test arrangements

should be modelled and the predicted and actual behaviour of the machine or

system can then be compared with the model) In this manner some form of

assurance can be obtained for the system studied

Where it is necessary for BP to retain the results for future use or in support of later

power system studies to be carried out in support of operations the software used

should be IPSA or should be IPSA compatible See also section 922

62 Equipment Fault Current Ratings

621 The power distribution system should be designed to provide the

required security and quality of supply with prospective fault levels

within the capability of commonly available switchgear (See 23) All

equipment shall be capable of withstanding the maximum short circuit

requirements when operating in accordance with 511

Security of supply generally is a subjective judgement See also 512 (commentary)

However a quantitative assessment of security can be considered See 422

Quality of supply is reflected by tolerances of measured quantities (see 451) and

by the severity of expected disturbances (see 81 and 82)

622 All switchgear and distribution equipment on the power system shall be

capable of carrying the prospective symmetrical fault currents for a

specified short time duration of 1 or 3 seconds without deleterious

effect The choice between 1 and 3 second durations shall be dictated

by availability economics and fault current protection clearing times

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 29

The backup fault current protection clearing times shall always be less

than the equipment short time current rating

Generally 3 second short time ratings for switchgear are preferred to avoid the

necessity for rapid protection

Where switchgear of 06 second short circuit withstand time is offered the

protection arrangements should be reviewed to ensure that the switchgear will be

fully protected

623 The closure of switchgear on to a short circuit fault or other possible

out of sequence condition shall not result in shock load damage to

healthy parts of the system as a result of peak asymmetrical make

currents flowing

624 The selection of circuit breakers shall be dependent on the make and

break duty which the breaker is required to cater for Switchingdevices that may be closed on to a fault shall have the necessary fault

making capability

625 Where plant is protected by fault current limiting HRC type fuses the

fuse characteristic may be taken into account in assessing the short

circuit duty of the plant

It is expected that where fuse cut off action is accounted there would be presented

appropriate calculations and fuse data to demonstrate the validity of the fault duty

63 Methods of Limiting Fault Currents

631 Where the power system design indicates prospective short circuit

requirements exceeding the proposed circuit breaker ratings the

following alternatives should be considered-

(i) Increase the system reactances provided this causes no other

technical or commercial problem

(ii) Change the operating mode by operating with certain breakers

open and provide auto transfer facilities to reinstate the supply

security and quality levels

(iii) Purchase switchgear and equipment to provide for the higher

short circuit levels if these are available

(iv) Provide fault current limiting devices other than fuses

(v) Carry out any combination of the alternatives listed in items (i)

to (iv) above

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 30

See also 23

632 The selection of the most appropriate of the alternatives (i) to (v) given

in 631 shall be based on least cost

Saturable reactors (used as resonant links) offer elegant methods for short circuit limitation for HV systems and do not suffer from attendant regulation problems

however their expense generally precludes their use The use of Is limiters should

be avoided for new installations but sometimes find useful application where

existing systems will be expanded or interconnected with new systems

633 Where fault limiting (series) reactors are used to increase the reactance

between the source and potential fault location these shall comply with

BP Group GS 112-5

Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-9

634 Where fault limiting reactors are deemed necessary they should be

installed between busbar sections thereby limiting voltage profile

problems under normal operating conditions

It is recognised that interconnection of reactors in bus sections may not be a cost

optimum arrangement Therefore alternative arrangements would be acceptable

provided that the alternative of connection between the bus section switch has been

considered

635 The impedance of series reactors shall be chosen to limit the fault

current passed through the reactor to a level which ensures that total

calculated fault levels on either side of the reactor are no greater than

90 of the selected plant short circuit ratings The reactors themselves

may be single or three phase dependent on space and cost

considerations They shall have a thermal ability to carry the rated short

circuit symmetrical current for at least 2 seconds

The time rating of the reactor would be dependent upon the protection

arrangements

636 The voltage drop through series reactors under the motor start restart

or re acceleration conditions shall be checked to ascertain that nounacceptable transient under voltage occurs

637 Where series reactors are installed between two power systems the

transient stability of the generator sets should feature in power systems

studies

See also 102

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 31

64 Effects of Faults on Distribution Systems

The effects of three phase fault applications and clearances should beinvestigated for the following conditions-

(i) Possible loss of synchronism between parallel running

synchronous machines This would only be likely for dissimilar

machines or for identical machines connected to the fault which

are not electrically symmetrical

See also 924

(ii) The possibility of motor contactors dropping out (due to low

voltage) and the consequential need to re-start the motors

either manually or automatically

Three phase faults on the system (considering zero fault impedance) will depress thevoltage at the point of fault and downstream of the fault to approximately zero All

locations between the source of fault current and the fault will experience reduced

voltages This condition will apply until the faulty section has been cleared at

which stage voltages will be rapidly restored

Such studies would form part of the conventional study series described in 921

(iii) Possible extinction of certain discharge lamps and the time for

re-ignition

The provision of emergency lighting systems may avoid the need to feature this as

discharge lighting may be limited to those areas where the outage time may not beimportant (eg Street lighting)

(iv) Loss of electronic and control equipment supplies resulting in

maloperation

The provision of dc or no break supplies (possibly using UPS equipment) for vital

loads may avoid the need to feature this

(v) The extent of overvoltage on the system components resulting

from fault clearance

This could cause unacceptable transient recovery voltages occurring for short

periods which may have a destructive effect on electrical insulation However it is

recognised that many analysis programmes are based upon linear theory and may

not account for saturation effects which may preclude overvoltages occurring but

could result in an electrical protection relay trip

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 32

7 POWER SYSTEM EARTHING

71 General

Guidance on the earthing of equipment and systems is detailed in BPGroup RP 12-16 The following clauses relate only to neutral earthingof power systems

There is a statutory requirement to conform with the Electricity Supply Regulations

1988 and with the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989

711 The earthing of each part of a power system operating at a specific

voltage shall be considered individually Where such systems are

required to be earthed solidly or via an impedance the neutrals should

be connected to a common plant earthing system This system shall

have a resistance to earth that ensures operation of protective devices in

the various circuits in accordance with BP Group RP 12-16 and shallnot be in excess of 4 Ohms If connected to a Public Utility supply HV

system earth the combined earth resistance of the Public Utility earth

and this earthing system shall be less than 1 Ohm

The selection of 4 Ohms as power system resistance to earth is relatively arbitrary

and therefore this value may vary depending upon the basic design and safety

requirements (See 714) However the possibility of earthing system resistance

variation due to varying soil conditions through time needs to be considered also

The requirement for 1 Ohm resistance of a combined Public Utility HV system earth

and the interconnected earth for solidly earthed neutrals arises from the need to

minimise neutral potentials under Public Utility HV earth fault conditions The

requirement for an interconnected value of less than 1 Ohm is specified in the Electrically at Work Regulations 1988

A 1 Ohm earthing resistance is not considered mandatory where HV systems and LV

systems are both owned and operated by BP and are earth bonded together with

negligible probability of HV faults giving rise to LV system neutral potential rise

with respect to true earth (Where true earth represents the potential of the earths

core This may be transferred to structures if these are not bonded to the site

earthing system)

712 The neutral connections for earthing equipment shall be provided at

generators transformers or both which have their neutral brought out

and which are the source of power to the distribution system Wheresuch power sources are delta connected and do not have neutrals

brought out neutral earthing may be carried out at other star connected

power transformers on the system or by the provision of earthing

transformers

It is intended that power systems will be earthed However under some

circumstances BP would consider operating unearthed power systems See 72

713 Power systems operating at a common voltage which may be normally

or abnormally run unparalleled shall have a neutral earthing connection

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 3960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 33

facility provided for each system The neutral earthing system shall be

designed to ensure that there is no possibility of inadvertently operating

a system with an isolated neutral

Under some circumstances an alarm for the condition of power system in operation

without neutral earthing should be satisfactory Typical of such circumstances isthe condition whereby a single earthed neutral is desirable (perhaps in order to

limit circulating currents between power generators) and there would be a complex

and difficult automatic system for earthing switching in the event of power system

disconnection

714 All plant earthing system designs shall be subject to approval by BP

The potential between immediate metalwork and a true earth (which

may be transferred to the immediate locale typically by telephone

services) shall be calculated for all representative single phase to earth

conditions The calculations shall be presented as support to the

earthing system design

The earthing arrangements of a site are a fundamental feature of safety and it is

therefore necessary that BP where acting as an operator is assured that no

dangerous potentials can be obtained It is important that touch potentials be less

than 430 V under any single phase-earth fault where there is overcurrent protection

arranged to de-energise the live conductor

It is common for Control Systems to demand clean or reference earth points

which are associated with earthing electrodes not connected to the general site

earthing system This practice can give rise to dangerous situations under HV

system faults and should be avoided

72 Un-Earthed (Isolated) Neutral

721 An un-earthed or isolated neutral system shall be used only subject to

approval by BP

Such systems may be used where the highest integrity against faults is required

(eg Unearthed systems are often used for Oil Well Drilling power supplies and for

dc shutdown system power supplies)

Where unearthed systems are installed it should be recognised that the power

system conductors (phase conductors) could constitute a danger of electrical shock

or fire as a result of contact with them and earth The danger is a result of capacitance coupling of the power system conductors and earth

Where it is approved that the power system should be unearthed an earth fault

detection system should be installed and there should be operator action to clear

any earth faults that occur as a matter of priority

73 Solidly Earthed Neutrals (For systems below 1000 V)

731 All low voltage systems should have their neutrals solidly connected to

the plant earthing system Impedance earthing of systems with a voltage

below 1000 V shall only be used subject to approval by BP

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 34

Where single phase supplies are taken from LV systems the neutral shall be solidly

earthed at the supply point only (TN-S system to IEE Regs Section 542) Where the

LV supply is taken from a Public Utility the neutral will be solidly earthed but the

supply system may be defined as TN-C-S In this latter case the installation within

the BP premises shall conform with a TN-S arrangement with no further neutral

earths being required within the installation Where PME (Protective Multiple Earth) power supplies are taken from a Public Utility it is considered that there

should be no need for isolation transformers to achieve the TN-S arrangement

within the BP premises however the design shall conform with government

legislation and this may require that under certain circumstances isolation

transformers are required (Refer to HS(G) 41)

Impedance earthed LV systems may be considered where the system will be 3 wire

without neutral connections and there is benefit in limiting damage during earth

fault conditions (eg Where a special voltage 660 V may be used in preference to

say 33 k V and in effect replaces the HV system in its application)

74 Impedance Earthed Neutrals (For Systems rated 1000 V andabove)

741 Neutral earthing equipment to limit earth fault currents should be

provided in the neutral connection to the plant earth system on all high-

voltage power systems

Such provision limits the overall transient system disturbance caused by earth faults

and also limits the amount of damage caused by this most common type of fault

742 Where the power system at the specific voltage contains no direct

connected generators under any mode of operation the provision of theearthing resistor and its earth connection should consider the following

possibilities-

(i) At the source star connected transformers

(ii) At other star connected power transformers

(iii) At earthing transformers

The neutral earthing equipment should comprise a resistor with aminimum 10 second fault rating selected to reduce the fault current tothe full load rating of the power source transformer The use of reactors to earth neutral systems shall only be used subject to approval

by BP

Systems employing reactor earths are uncommon in UK practice but have been used

in other countries or under special circumstances One special circumstance is

where a Petersen Coil is used to avoid a circuit trip due to a transient earth fault

eg lightning induced flashover in overhead lines Such special circumstances are

unlikely in industrial installations

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 35

Where reactance earthing is considered its use should be tested against the

costbenefit compared with resistance earthing Special attention should be taken

of the possible tuning effects between the earthing reactor and the power system

743 Where direct connected generators are or may be operated in parallel

with source transformers the neutral earthing arrangements shall provide for either system operating independently The neutral earthing

equipment shall wherever practical be identically rated for all power

sources Where resistors are provided these should comprise 10

second fault rated solid resistors The resistors shall reduce the fault

current to a convenient level one half to full load rating of the lowest

rated power source provided this fault current is sufficient to operate

the distribution system earthing protection and provide suitable

discrimination Where the normal ratings of the source transformer and

parallel running generators are significantly different the resistor rating

selection shall be dictated by the requirement to ensure that the most

insensitive earth fault protection on any incoming or outgoing circuitoperates positively with the smallest possible source of earth fault

current connected to the system

Where there is a 4 wire supply system solid earthing will be provided in order to

keep neutral voltages as close to earth as possible In this case the neutral earthing

arrangement should be simplified by arranging for the neutral to be earthed at the

switchboard See also 753

Refer also to 713 for the requirements for systems having more than one power

source

75 Generator Earthing

751 The neutrals of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear in 3 wire systems (ie HV systems or special LV systems)

may be solidly or resistance earthed However solid earthing should be

limited to generators where the earth fault capacity of the generator is

approximately equal to the current level required to operate the

distribution system protection

Where solid earthing of the neutral is applied to a system where the (relatively) low

capacity generator is in parallel with a larger power source which has resistance

earthing the generator should have a neutral circuit breaker which should be

automatically controlled However where the influence of the fault on other

equipment is not unduly compromised by too high an earth fault current the

generator neutral could be allowed to remain solidly connected

752 Resistor earthing of generators directly connected to the distribution

switchgear should be used wherever possible The resistor should be of

the 10 second (minimum) fault rated solid type and its resistance

should be selected to reduce the fault current to a level between the half

and full load current rating of the machine provided this is sufficient to

operate the distribution system protection system selectively

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 36

Grid type resistors offer a virtually maintenance free installation and should be

employed wherever possible However this type of earthing resistor will prove

uneconomic for 33 kV systems where liquid neutral earthing resistors will offer an

optimum choice

753 Where generators directly connected to the distribution switchgear are

operated in parallel and earthed either solidly or through resistors the

provision of neutral switchgear for each generator shall be considered

to avoid third harmonic current flows and their heating effect Where

such neutral switchgear is provided it shall be connected and operated

in a manner to ensure that only one generator neutral switch is always

closed at a time Neutral switchgear may comprise contactors on

resistor earthed schemes instead of circuit breakers The provision of

neutral switchgear schemes may be avoided if identical pitch generators

are paralleled or if the provision of neutral earthing resistors

sufficiently reduces the prospective third harmonic currents toacceptable levels A 1 or less derating as a result of third harmonic

currents shall be considered acceptable

A possibility would be for the neutral of each generator to be permanently earthed

via a resistor where the resistance thus installed would limit the circulating currents

to acceptable levels However this type of earthing would mean that earth fault

current levels on the power system would vary depending upon how many power

generators were operating Such an installation would be acceptable where it

showed economic advantages

754 Where generators are connected to the distribution switchgear systemvia unit transformers the generator neutral shall be connected to earth

via the primary winding of a single phase distribution transformer The

secondary winding of this transformer shall be shunted by a resistor

with a resistance value which is calculated to be approximately the same

as the zero sequence capacitance for the generator winding system

Manufacturers standard arrangements for high impedance earthing systems for

these types of generators will be acceptable It is expected that the arrangements

will be aimed at raising 5 to 10 A under earth fault conditions Selection of a

resistance equal to the system-to-earth capacitance under earth fault conditions will

ensure that the system capacitance will discharge energy reasonably and

overvoltages will be eliminated even for arcing earth faults

755 The rated primary voltage of generator earthing transformers shall be

taken as the generator phase voltage although voltages of at least 15

times generator line to neutral voltages will be acceptable to obtain

standard transformers Transformer ratings shall be the product of the

primary current and rated primary voltage using a 30 second (6 times

overload factor) duty cycle

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 37

Conservative sizing of the transformer is preferred as its reactance has little effect

on the earthing system The secondary resistor should have a continuous duty as its

size and cost will not normally be significant

76 Earthing Resistors

All earthing resistors shall be provided with insulation suitable for the phase to phase voltage of the systems to which they are connectedThey shall be designed to carry their rated fault current for the timesspecified in the preceding clauses without any destructive effect to their component parts

It is expected that resistors will be located in an outdoor environment where

transformer earthing is involved but could be indoors for generators There is no

mandatory requirement for locating these devices indoors other than normal

economic factors

8 POWER SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS

81 Motor Starting

811 Direct-on-line (DOL) starting of motors shall be arranged wherever

possible The maximum voltage drop at the motor terminals during

starting shall be limited to 20 calculated for the minimum generation

and system configuration which would be deemed as representing the

minimum duty condition Where connection is made to a public utility

system voltage dips at the public utility point of common coupling shall

be kept to a value which has been agreed between BP and the public

utility

There is a general requirement implied that the power system will be capable of

withstanding this 20 voltage depression See 451 for this requirement

Public utility systems in the UK require that voltage depressions observed at the

point of common coupling (which is a concept related to how the interference will

affect others on the electrical power system and needs to be established as to exact

location with the public utility) shall be no more than 3 for infrequently started

machines (ie no more frequent than once in 2 to 6 hours the time here should be

established with the public authority) and no more than 1 for frequently started

machines

812 The acceptability of the above voltage dips during motor starting shall

be contingent on the motor satisfactorily accelerating and the voltage

dips not causing unacceptable disturbances to the power system The

DOL starting of the largest and electrically most remote motors (or

groups of motors on an automatic re-acceleration scheme) at all

voltages shall be investigated to ensure that no problem exists Where

unacceptable voltage dips during motor starting may be found the

following solutions shall be considered-

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 38

(i) Time vary the starting time to be assured of less co-incident

starting between machines

(ii) Obtain motor(s) with a lower starting current

(iii) Increase the short circuit level within the presently envisagedswitchgear rating limits by decreasing system source impedance

to the motor busbars

(iv) Consider assisted start methods to reduce voltage dips if this

solution is limited to a few specific motor drives

(v) Any combination of items (i) to (iv) above

(vi) Increase the system short circuit level to a level beyond that

presently envisaged if such higher short circuit level switchgear is available

The selection of the most appropriate method will normally be made on the

basis of lowest cost and under some circumstances may require provision

of a mechanical driver other than electricity for the largest machine

envisaged

Reduced voltage starting of a few specific motors should be considered

only if it is found to be economical and the additional complication

associated with assisted start equipment is operationally acceptable

813 Where motor load shedding and restart schemes are adopted themethod of initiation shall be developed on the basis of cost effectiveness

for the project under consideration

Where the load is predominantly induction motors voltage reductions would not

cause load shedding whereas lower system frequency would tend to be an effective

load shedding method For this reason it is likely that system load shedding would

best be initiated by a frequency based arrangement Anticipation of a power

generation deficiency can be employed if total generation capacity is known

together with total system load Under these conditions immediate load shedding

may be initiated Such immediate loadgeneration matching schemes can vary from

a simple generator auxiliary contact used to initiate fixed loadshedding to a

complex microprocessor based system which monitors multiple generators and multiple loads and constantly updates the amount of loadshedding for any specific

incident

The effect that electrical load shedding will have on the process system needs to be

presented for Project approval There may need to be some massaging of the

scheme to ensure that particular loads critical to process well-being is not shed

82 Overvoltages

821 Overvoltages due to static charging shall be avoided by effectively

earthing the electrical system and all metallic structures that may or

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 39

may not contain electrical conductors detailed guidance being given in

BP Group RP 12-16 Physical contact between higher and lower

voltage systems shall be guarded against by using metal enclosures and

barriers wherever practical between the two systems Overvoltages of

this type between transformer windings shall be limited by effectively

earthing the neutrals of the secondary voltage system Autotransformers if used shall have the neutral solidly earthed

It should be noted that an auto transformer will effectively connect the neutral

earthing systems of both the primary and secondary systems

822 Overvoltages due to resonant effects shall be investigated on all

unearthed neutral systems those which may be earthed by reactors or

systems with high impedance earthing These effects shall also be

considered when power system equipment is or could be operated

without a neutral earth connection for short periods of time

Resonant inductive-capacitive overvoltages can occur when normally unearthed

systems experience earth faults The prospect of resonant or ferroresonance effects

should be avoided by solid earthing the neutrals of systems below 1000 V and

resistance earthing the neutrals of systems rated 1000 V and above See 742

(commentary)

Intermittent earth faults on unearthed systems may cause overvoltages of the order

of five or six times system voltages Neutral earthing or resistor earthing

arranging for earth fault currents greater than line to earth charging currents may

be used to eliminate these prospective overvoltages (See also 754)

823 Switchgear and power system equipment shall be selected to ensure

that transient recovery voltages produced by switchgear arc extinctions

do not exceed the insulation capability of the system

Current zero arc extinctions commonly result in transient overvoltages when

switchgear is opened under fault conditions and the healthy side of the system

endeavours to return to the normal system voltage but overshoots The introduction

of resistance during fault current flow either by special means or by using

switchgear with naturally high arc resistances should be considered to reduce the

value of transient recovery voltage that is generated

824 Where the use of vacuum switches is considered they should bedesigned to limit overvoltages to acceptable withstand levels for a

particular voltage rating

The production of high overvoltages due to the forcing of a current zero can occur

with fuses and vacuum switches Current limiting fuses shall only be used within

their voltage class Such fuses of a particular voltage rating shall not be used on

electrical systems of lower operating voltages

Limiting the voltage overvoltage on vacuum break devices may require the

provision of surge limiting equipment on the vacuum switch

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 40

825 The highest overvoltage to which power systems are subjected are

those caused by lightning To avoid problems caused by lightning

strikes on outdoor electrical equipment all such equipment shall be

earthed Detailed guidance is given in BP Group RP 12-16 Lightning

overvoltages can reach the equipment by travelling down overhead lines

Sites which are fed by a public utility via overhead lines shall be protected against travelling surges and the methods for protection will

be subject to agreement between BP and the public utility

It would be the normal intention to ensure that the public utility provided surge

diversion andor arcing horns on the equipment connection at the overhead line

(eg on a pole box for cables or on the primary winding of a transformer Where

there will be appreciable overhead lines within the installation operated by BP

suitable surge diversion equipment shall be specified for all of the equipment

interfaces

826 Overvoltage surge protection shall be provided for power generatorswhere these are interconnected with an overhead line system by short

lengths of cable The switchgear connecting power generators to the

power system shall be assessed for switching overvoltage generation

and if necessary surge diverters shall be provided for the generator

stator winding

UK practice has generally not found it necessary to provide power generators with

surge diverters to account for switching surges However it is prudent that the

matter be checked in order to be assured of there being no problem

83 Harmonics

831 The power systems voltage waveform shall be arranged to be within the

tolerance plusmn 5 THF as defined in IEC 34-1

This level of distortion is compatible with hazardous area certification assumptions

and must therefore be adhered to where the voltage will be used to supply elect rical

equipment in hazardous areas Specific reference to the distortion is made in IEC

34-1 which details irregularities of waveform Although primarily concerning

synchronous generators it is clear that the distortion could be imposed on to any

equipment supplied from the generators output Hence it is reasonable that the

supply would have at least this level of distortion and still remain suitable for

supplying equipment which will be used in hazardous areas The most sensitiveequipment from a hazardous area viewpoint will be that which employs magnetic

effects This includes machines relays and any equipment with transformers

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated the system equipment receiving supply

should be rated for the specific harmonic content of the voltage waveform

Greater than 5 THF voltage waveform distortion may be allowed for that supply

feeding hazardous area equipment provided that the equipment has been suitably

certified or where waveform irregularities are not significantly different from this

tolerance assessed and confirmed by the manufacturer as satisfactory for the

certification for the duty (One extreme example of a case of such need is where a

Variable Speed Drive will be used for a machine in hazardous area duty In this

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 41

case the machine should be certified for such use given the specific harmonics

yielded by the VSD)

Where more than 5 THF is anticipated and the manufacturer of the electrical

equipment cannot confirm its suitability for this service then in principle the

following should be considered-

- Re-specify the equipment for Ex(p)

- Revise the electrical system to eliminate the harmonic problem by-

- Power system supply configuration modifications to the circuits

providing supply to the non-linear equipment causing the

problem

- Provision of filter equipment at a convenient point on the Power

System which will protect the supply to the hazardous area

equipment

However in some cases it may be that the voltage waveform interference is a

transient effect (eg as may be the case of drilling activities offshore) Where the

transient nature of the problem may be confidently defined this can ease the

equipment manufacturers concers over possible temperature effects

832 Notwithstanding any arrangements needed to meet 831 any harmonic

distortion of the voltage waveform shall be of a type which will cause

no maloperation of power system protection control or other

equipment

Often multiple zero crossings of the voltage waveform can lead to maloperation of equipment receiving the supply This is particularly true for that equipment which

uses mains supply for information transfer or for timing operations

833 Where interconnection is made with a public authority that authorities

regulations in respect of harmonic loading shall be adhered to

Harmonics result in power losses and overheating of rotating machinery

interference on communication and control circuits overloading of capacitor

banks and maloperation of electronic equipment In the UK Engineering

Recommendation G53 dated September 1976 issued by The Electricity Council

specifies acceptable limits of harmonics in the UK public supply system and this

shall be taken as a guide for all BP systems in the absence of other particular detailed requirements

834 Wherever significant amounts of rectification or inversion equipment is

purchased the possible use of phase shifted transformers or harmonic

filters shall be taken into account The presence of harmonics in

common earthing systems shall be assessed and limited if they are

considered to cause prospective hazards

See 931 for further information concerning the need for harmonic studies

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 42

835 Transformer inrush harmonic current caused by energisation shall be considered in

the design of the electrical protection system

See BP Group RP 12-4 f or further information concerning the protection

arrangements associated with transformer inrush

84 Power Factor

841 Power factor improving equipment shall be considered for all

installations where energy is imported from a public utility which

applies a tariff associated with low power factor energy provision The

equipment may be capacitors or synchronous motors depending on

economics and suitability over the range of known operating condition

It is expected that an economic assessment would be made to determine the merit of

installing power factor improvement equipment The economic case should be

illustrated both in terms of payback and for an Internal Rate of Return based upon

a 10 year project life The economic case for installing such equipment will normally be considered as proved if the capital expenditure for the equipment is

recovered from reduced energy payments within 2 years of commencement of

operation

842 Where the public utility system is normally operated in parallel with

onsite generation the generating equipment should be designed and

operated to supply the as much of the reactive load of the site as is

feasible The economic case for power factor correction equipment

shall be made based upon the differing scenarios which may be

considered from there being site generation available and there being no

site generation available Availability of the power generation systemshall be included in the assessment

Using the on site power generation to supply site reactive demand will avoid the

need for power factor improving equipment to be installed for the normal parallel

operating mode and will limit its consideration to that required for standby

(unparalleled) operation alone See also 454 (commentary)

843 Any installation of capacitance provided either to reduce system losses

provide system voltage control or increase the loading density of the

installation shall be subject to approval

The economic case for such a proposal for installing capacitors should follow the

same criteria as outlined in 841 The location for the capacitors needs to be

carefully considered where voltage support and reduction of losses are the

motivators and a comparison of alternative methods of achieving the same

objectives would be expected as part of the justification for the installation

Where existing plant power factors are known to be below 08 lagging plant

extensions may compare the cost of providing power factor improvement equipment

against that of increasing the distribution system capacity On new installations

there could be an economic investigation into the provision of power factor

improving equipment as a means of reducing power distribution system capacity

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 4960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 43

Such analysis should be undertaken wherever it is imperative that costs be saved

and where loading estimates are considered to be firm Where the case for

installing capacitors is proven synchronous motors or capacitors (whichever has

been found to offer the appropriate advantage) shall be located as near as possible

to the loads

See also the requirements of 845 and 846

844 Where synchronous motors are supplied for power factor improvement

they shall include constant power factor control equipment

It is recognised that synchronous machines may be changed from operating in a

reactive power control mode to operating in a constant power factor mode This

would be the case should the motor be a small part of the overall installation

demand or where operation in reactive control mode could make the motor operate

for long periods near an excitation condition which may give rise to stability

problems

845 In order to avoid risks of overvoltages or high transient torque

induction motors shall not be switched as a unit with any power factor

improving capacitors unless the capacitive current at full voltage is less

than the no load magnetising current of the associated induction motor

Any capacitor installed on the motor side of the switchgear can act asan excitation source when the motor is coasting Two problems may beapparent-

(a) The machine terminal voltage may exceed insulation capability

(b) The terminal voltage can remain high for a long period and thus

compromise reclosure

Thus if capacitance on the motor side of the switchgear is excessive either the

motor insulation should be able to withstand high overvoltages (not above 150 as

the induction motor iron circuit can be expected to show some signs of saturation)

or the capacitor needs to be separately switched

846 Where power factor correction capacitors are installed induction motor

voltage under supply system circuit breaker trip shall be considered and

if necessary overvoltage protection shall be applied to the inductionmotor control circuit

An induction motor could be connected to a system having large capacitance and

suffer an upstream circuit breaker trip effectively leaving the motor coasting with

high system capacitance Under this situation an overvoltage trip should be

arranged for the induction motor circuit breaker

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5060

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 44

9 POWER SYSTEM STUDIES

91 General

911 The power system design aspects of new installations and extensions to

existing plants should be studied using computer programs to aidanalysis where necessary The performance of the system shall be

defined together with any arrangements necessary for ensuring the

defined performance

See also sections 575 (commentary) 578 61 and 637

It is considered necessary that a document be prepared which details the basic

design performance of the Power System The document may also contain or

reference the protection relay arrangements and settings

Switchgear ratings and voltage limits are readily assessed for acceptability

However power system dynamic performance is often project specific and acceptance is often accompanied by the economic assessment of would it be worth

the cost of any improvement

912 The analysis shall be used-

(i) To define equipment parameters before purchasing

(ii) To select control arrangements and protective relay settings

(iii) To ascertain the system reaction to normal and abnormal

operating conditions

Where system instabilities are predicted measures which may be contemplated

include-

(a) reduce the severity of the disturbance possibly by decreasing

the fault severity

(b) load shedding (With or without load re-acceleration)

(c) detection of the condition and sectionalising the power system

into Islanding units

913 System behaviour and performance shall be examined under steady

state transient stability following fault disturbance and voltage recovery

following fault disturbance Induction motor stability shall feature in

the studies and the starting performance of the most critical drives (and

groups of drives) shall be examined to ensure that the system can

perform satisfactorily under the defined conditions

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5160

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 45

It is clearly necessary to define the steady state conditions prior to a particular

fault condition and also to define the fault (or onerous) condition which the system

is required to experience and recover from These conditions could include-

(a) Minimum power generation one line (or transformer) out of service for

maintenance and starting of the largest induction machine (presumed

direct-on-line)

(b) Maximum load minimum spinning spare and a 3 phase symmetrical fault

condition which removes the largest capacity generator from the power

system

(c) Simple loss of the largest capacity generator from the power system at

times of minimum spinning spare (NB This may be a less severe condition

than if the generator were faulted but could illustrate the level of load

shedding which may occur)

(d) Maximum loading and power transfer between two systems followed by a 3

phase short circuit which removes one of a number of links between power generation sources (and thus may cause transient instability)

92 Conventional Studies

921 These should include-

(i) Loadflow analysis To check voltage profiles and circuit

loading conditions under steady state conditions

(ii) Short circuit studies To analyse fault currents that might flow

under a variety of symmetrical asymmetrical and unbalancedfault conditions These shall be used for switchgear

specification and control and protective relay application and

setting purposes The requirements of these studies are

specified in 61

(iii) Stability studies To analyse the transient and dynamic

performance of power systems after large load changes and fault

disturbances These should be used to check-

(a) The ability of the system to stay in synchronism

(b) Induction motor stability after start

(c) Re acceleration and restart schemes

(d) The need and effectiveness of under frequency load shedding

schemes

They should also be used to consider the technical merit of-

(e) Auto-changeover schemes

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5260

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 46

(f) Parallel or open operation or radial feeders

(g) Operation of fault limiting devices

(h) Insertion of switched reactors or capacitors etc

See sections 451 (for steady state voltage conditions) 811 (for transient voltage

conditions) Motor Starting Dynamic Performance (including load shedding

arrangements and protection arrangements) and Short Circuit requirements will be

subject to the specific design features of the project

922 The studies detailed by 921 should be carried out with clear terms of

reference early as possible within a project The software programs and

computer capability should also be defined Models for generators

automatic voltage regulators governors motors transformers cables

and loads should be sufficiently detailed and proven to give confidence

in the results of the studies

The terms of reference for studies which are to be presented by a design contractor

should be developed as soon as possible These should contain definitions for the

required system performance where this is not sufficiently detailed by sections

451 573 577 and 64

In certain circumstances preliminary study work may be carried out by BP to

ensure that design contractors terms of reference are reasonable and to instigate a

permanent data file which would be suitable for operational use and can be

modified as changes occur This would be the basis of detailed design and should

be modified as necessary to include the detailed design equipment parameters the

computer data file would then be available throughout the life of the installationThis process would be considerably eased if the power system analysis software

were the same for preliminary studies through to final studies and the data files

were directly transferable between the systems used by Contractors and that used by

BP Therefore it is preferable that power system studies are undertaken using the

IPSA power systems analysis suite Should an alternative power system analysis

programme suite be employed the data should be transferable either manually or

via a computer based conversion programme into an IPSA compatible form

See also section 619 for software validation

923 Generator operating charts should be prepared and presented to assist

in assuring that they are always likely to be operated within their prescribed stability limits

The operating charts should be presented for voltages between 095 pu to 105 pu

in steps of 05 pu The charts should also contain those key machine parameters

from which the charts are constructed eg X d X q etc

924 Transient stability studies shall be carried out on systems which

include-

(i) Dissimilar on-site generators

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5360

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 47

(ii) On-site generators operating in parallel with a public utility

(iii) Synchronous motors

(iv) Where power generation busbars are interconnected byappreciable impedance

These studies shall be used to determine whether synchronous machinesare liable to lose synchronism after the most severe single disturbance

Generally the most severe fault condition would be a three phase fault applied at

the generator busbars for a fault duration determined by the protecting switchgear

which when cleared results in the disconnection of the largest single fault

contributor from the system However a number of fault locations followed by

plant disconnections should be tried

925 Where transient stability studies are undertaken (in order to assess the

ability of generators to remain in synchronism following a fault

disturbance) the steady state operating condition before the fault is

applied should be one in which the spinning reserve of generation is

kept at a minimum due to assumed maintenance of the largest onsite

generator

The primary object should be to identify the maximum acceptable fault clearing

time but secondary objectives such as the best location of system open bus section

points and the relationship between impedance earthing to stability should also be

ascertained from these studies The studies would be used as support for a

particular system design and also to ensure that the protection arrangements would

not compromise the expected system performance In pursuit of this latter factor

the studies may be undertaken with actual protection arrangements if these are

known In doing this it should be noted that if protection settings were to change

the system response to fault conditions may need to be re-studied

See also 913 (commentary)

926 Dynamic and induction motor stability studies shall be carried out to

investigate the voltage and frequency performance of the system after a

major disturbance for the period from fault inception to the time when

steady state equilibrium is reached These studies shall require detailedAutomatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) and governor modelling as these

items assist the return to steady state and will react positively in the

time scales likely to be considered

These studies are expected to illustrate successful system recovery A decreasing

oscillatory voltage or frequency result where the average is within acceptable

bounds would indicate a satisfactory performance

927 System stability studies shall be carried out to consider the effect of the

loss of the largest power supply component under a fault condition

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5460

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 48

which causes no other electrical disturbance Where the transient

frequency excursion is predicted to exceed 6 under frequency load

shedding schemes shall be considered The stability studies shall be

used to define the minimum number and magnitude of the various

stages of load shedding that will be necessary to keep the frequency loss

within acceptable limits

Earth faults or mechanical system trip conditions do not normally result in motor

loads being tripped by ac contactors dropping off under low voltage and may

therefore result in the greatest post fault generation deficiency

928 Induction motor performance studies shall be carried out to

demonstrate the ability to start re accelerate or restart motor loads

without their stalling or tripping under overload Re acceleration

studies shall determine whether motors re accelerate after disturbances

(eg Fault conditions or under voltage conditions) have cleared Where

motor restart schemes are required induction motor performancestudies shall be used to define the maximum number and magnitude of

the various stages of restart that will be possible after clearance of

faults

93 Special Studies

931 Harmonic studies may be necessary to analyse the magnitude and

location of harmonic distortions within the power system These

studies shall be required whenever conversion equipment represents a

significant proportion of the total rating of a system at any one voltage

level or where there is concern about harmonic levels being excessive

See 83 The studies would normally be expected to be based upon frequency

domain methods which involve conversion equipment manufacturers providing a

Fourier series for the harmonics in the load current assuming a sine wave voltage

input Using this data the amount of voltage waveform disturbance at any point in

the network can be estimated However if the voltage waveform contains

harmonics then the conversion equipment would actually yield a differing set of

load current harmonics Therefore the frequency domain analysis is at best an

approximation and needs to be compared with actual plant performance to be

assured that the system predictions can be accurate An alternative technique may

be to undertake the harmonic study by employing a time domain approach where

system parameters are used directly into the analysis In this manner the need for

iteration of data input is avoided However there remain inaccuracies caused by

approximations used for system component impedances to each harmonic

frequency Therefore the check with actual system performance should still be

carried out

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5560

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 49

PUBLIC UTILTY

A

A A

AA

UP TO 36KVPRIMARY

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO

75KV

PROCESSSUBSTATION

UP TO1KV

A

A A

A

A

A

A

AA

AREASUBSTATION

A

C

A

C

C

D

M

C D

M

C

C

CC

M

M

A

A

GM

M

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE MOTORSTARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (A)

DOUBLE RADIAL FEED DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5660

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 50

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

PROCESS SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

A

A A

C

C

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

CLOSED RINGMAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESSSUBSTATION UP TO 12KV

TRIPLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

UP TO 72KV

C

G

PROCESSSUBSTATION

AAA A

C C C C

C

C

CC

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DOUBLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIALMAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

D

M

D

M

C

C

C

C

CC

C

C

CC

M

M

M

M

M

M

D

M

C

C

M

M

C

D

M

D

M

CC

C

M

M

M

M

TRIPLE RADIALFEED (TYPICAL)

SINGLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

DOUBLE RADIAL

FEED (TYPICAL)

C

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTEOR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCALCONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPEMOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAK CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTECONTROL

SWITCHFUSE -MANUALLY OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAKISOLATING SWITCH -

MANUALLY OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (B)

CLOSED RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5760

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 51

FROM THE PRIMARY SUBSTATION

A

A A

AAA A

C CC

C CC

C CD D D

M MM

UP TO 12KVAREA

SUBSTATION

OPEN RING

MAIN SYSTEM

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATIONUP TO 12KV

SINGLE RADIAL

MAIN DISTR

(TYPICAL)

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 12KV

C

C C C

M MMG G G

PROCESS

SUBSTATION

UP TO 1KV

MMM

DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT BREAKER - REMOTE

OR LOCAL CONTROL

CIRCUIT BREAKER - LOCAL

CONTROL

VACUUM CONTACTOR TYPE

MOTOR STARTER - REMOTE

CONTROL

AIRBREAKCONTACTOR TYPE MOTOR

STARTER - REMOTE CONTROL

SWITCHFUSE - MANUALLY

OPERATED

FAULT MAKE LOAD BREAK

ISOLATING SWITCH - MANUALLY

OPERATED

GENERATOR

MOTOR

A

C

D

M

G

M

FIGURE 1 (C)

OPEN RING MAIN DISTRIBUTION

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5860

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 52

APPENDIX A

DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Definitions

Standardised definitions may be found in the BP Group RPSEs Introductory Volume

Abbreviations

AVR Automatic Voltage Regulator

DOL Direct On Line

HV High Voltage

HRC High Rupturing Capacity

IEC International Electrotechnical Committee

IEE Institution of Electrical Engineers

IPSA Interactive Power System Analysis

LV Low Voltage

MTBF Mean Time Between Failures

MTTR Mean Time to Repairs

PME Protective Multiple Earth

THF Telephone Harmonic Factor

VSD Variable Speed Drive

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 5960

RP 12-3ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS AND INSTALLATIONS

POWER SYSTEM DESIGN

PAGE 53

APPENDIX B

LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS

A reference invokes the latest published issue or amendment unless stated otherwise

Referenced standards may be replaced by equivalent standards that are internationally or

otherwise recognised provided that it can be shown to the satisfaction of the purchasers

professional engineer that they meet or exceed the requirements of the referenced standards

International

IEC 34 Rotating Electrical Machines

IEC 38 Standard Voltage (6th Edition)

IEC 56 HVAC Circuit Breakers

IEC 947 LV Switchgear and Control Gear

Industrial

IEE Wiring Regulations (16th Edition)

Electricity Council Recommendation G53 (1976)

Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note 41

BP Group Documents

BP Group RP 4-4 Buildings

(replaces BP CP 19)

BP Group RP 12-2 Equipment in Flammable Atmospheres and Combustible Dusts

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 2)

BP Group RP 12-4 Power System Protection and Control

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 4)

BP Group RP 12-5 Power Supplies for Control Systems

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 5)

BP Group RP 12-6 HV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 6)

BP Group RP 12-7 LV Switchgear

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 7)

BP Group RP 12-9 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 9)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)

7292019 RP12-3

httpslidepdfcomreaderfullrp12-3 6060

BP Group RP 12-11 Motors

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 11)

BP Group RP 12-16 Earthing and Bonding

(replaces BP CP 17 Part 16)

BP Group GS 112-5 Transformers and Reactors

(replaces BP Std 223)

BP Group GS 112-6 Electrical Requirements for AC Generators

(replaces BP Std 224 Part 1)

BP Group GS 112-8 LV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 227)

BP Group GS 112-9 HV Switchgear and Controlgear

(replaces BP Std 225)

BP Group GS 160-1 Emergency Generator Package

UK Law

Electricity supply Regulations (1988)

Electricity at work Regulations (1989)